Home

R&S RTM User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz Thailand

1. n 9n u Command Reference BUS CAN DATA SOURce Source Sets the source of the data line All channel waveforms can be used Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 RST CH1 BUS CAN TYPE lt SignalType gt Selects the CAN High or CAN Low line CAN uses both lines for differential signal trans mission If you measure with a differential probe connect the probe to both CAN H and CAN L lines and set the type CANH If you use a single ended probe connect the probe to either CAN L or CAN H and select the data type accordingly Parameters lt SignalType gt CANH CANL RST CANH BUS CAN SAMPlepoint lt SamplePoint gt Sets the position of the sample point within the bit in percent of the nominal bit time See also Sample point on page 181 Parameters lt SamplePoint gt Range 10 to 90 Increment 1 RST 50 Default unit 96 BUS CAN BITRate lt BitRate gt Sets the number of transmitted bits per second Parameters lt BitRate gt Range 100 to 5 04E06 depends on instrument type ADC clock rate Increment depends on the bit rate value RST 50E03 Default unit Bit s CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 388 R8S RTM Remo
2. Uumet Reference for Waveform Setup See chapter 2 3 3 5 Label Menu on page 34 2 3 3 3 Probe Menu Passive Probe In the probe menu for passive probes the probe attenuation for the selected channel is set If the probe is known to the instrument the attenuation factor is set automatically For unknown probes you can select a default factor or enter a user defined value Access CH N More Probe EI User Unit x100 Back d x1 x10 x100 x1000 attenuation factor The keys select a default attenuation factor of the connected probe The vertical scaling and measured values are multiplied by this factor so that the displayed values are equal to the undivided measured signal values To set an arbitrary attenuation factor press the User softkey User user defined attenuation factor You can enter an arbitrary attenuation factor in the range between x0 001 and x1000 The vertical scaling and measured values are multiplied by this factor so that the dis played values are equal to the undivided measured signal values Remote command PROBe m SETup ATTenuation MANual on page 287 Unit Selects the unit that the probe can measure e V for voltage measurements e A for current measurements Remote command PROBe m SETup ATTenuation UNIT on page 287 2 3 3 4 Probe Menu Active Probe In the probe menu for active probes you can also adj
3. Total 0 0 Lj Width d 7 To move the mask vertically on the screen press Y Position and turn the Naviga tion rotary knob to change the y position The current position is indicated as an offset from the center in divisions a positive value indicates the waveform was moved upwards a negative value indicates the waveform was moved down 8 To change the scaling of the mask in y direction press Stretch Y and turn the Navigation rotary knob Turn the knob clockwise to increase the factor or counterclockwise to decrease the factor A value over 100 stretches the amplitudes a value less than 100 com presses the amplitudes 9 Save the new mask a Press Save User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 122 R amp S9RTM Masks Working with Masks b Define the storage settings as described for waveforms in chapter 12 2 1 1 Configuring Storage Locations on page 207 c Press Save 9 2 2 Loading Masks You can load mask data from MSK or CSV files from any storage device To copy a mask use FILE gt Import Export Masks For import export procedure see chapter 12 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 207 Press MASKS to display the Mask Test menu Press Load Mask The Load menu and a file explorer is displayed Press Storage and select the storage device internal directory or USB flash drive connected to front or rear panel Select t
4. nano 339 CAL CulateMATHcm PET STAR 338 CALECulate MATE sms FF STOP inte ped eerte rer ra EC ee 338 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT TIME POSItION 0 eee cece rene narco tease nana r nono nnn canon cra nana nr 339 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT TIME RANGe 338 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT WINDow TYPE 333 CAL Culate MATH lt MS POSITION cuidat di 331 CAtC late MATH SMA SCALE c 330 CALCulate MATH lt MSSTA ME 330 CAL CulateMATHcmztEvbbessionlt DEFinel nc nnnnn cnn nnnnn nn naaa ncnnanns 331 CHANnel lt m gt ARIThmetics 217 CHANnelFm gt BAND Wii coord 280 CHANG SA COU PLM PT Edi e A di 279 CHANnel mz DATAENVelope HE ADer nennen nennen nnne n nnne i nn rnns sent sinn nnns sena 284 CHANnel mz DATAENVelope SiNCrement eene neret rennen nennen 270 CHANnel mz DATAENVelope XObioin conan nncnnnn nn enne enne nan narran nn nennt sinn nnns r nnn 269 CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YINCrement 270 CHANnel mz DATAENVelope vObioin nennen enne nennen nenne nnne nennen inn rnnn inna 270 CHANnel m DATA ENVelope YRESolution essere nennen eren nnne nnne 271 CHANnelsm DATA ENVelope 2 eee rr teer ad dede da dann 284 CHANnel lt m gt DATA HEADER c 284 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 438 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands CHAN nelsm gt DATA Sol Em 285 CHANnel m DATA XIN
5. c H E ma Automatic Measurements Pos Overshoot Positive overshoot of a square wave calculated from measurement values Top Level Peak and Amplitude The measured value is displayed as Ovr in the result table X max X Hi Rpos 400 Ampl Xmax Peak XhHigh Top Level Xampi Amplitude Neg Overshoot Negative overshoot of a square wave calculated from measurement values Min Low and Amplitude The measured value is displayed as Ovr in the result table Xmin Peak Xtow Base Level Xamp Amplitude Pulse Width negative pulse U Measures the width of a negative pulse A negative pulse consists of a falling edge followed by a rising edge The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as t LI in the result table Duty Cycle Measures the positive duty cycle The duty cycle is the ratio between the duration of a positve pulse high active and the period of a rectangular waveform The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The result is the measured value as a percentage of the signal period and is displayed as Dty in the result table Duty Cycle Measures the positive duty cycle The duty cycle is the ratio between the duration of a negative pulse low active and the period of a rectangular waveform The measurement requir
6. E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 252 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 1 6 2 Basics This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading EVENt The EVENt part indicates whether an event has occurred since the last reading it is the memory of the condition part It only indicates events passed on by the transition filters It is permanently updated by the instrument This part can only be read by the user Reading the register clears it This part is often equated with the entire register ENABle The ENAB1e part determines whether the associated EVENt bit contributes to the sum bit see below Each bit of the EVENt part is ANDed with the associated ENAB1e bit symbol amp The results of all logical operations of this part are passed on to the sum bit via an OR function symbol ENAB1e bit 0 the associated EVENt bit does not contribute to the sum bit ENAB Le bit 1 if the associated EVENt bit is 1 the sum bit is set to 1 as well This part can be written into and read by the user as required Its contents are not affected by reading Sum bit The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENAB1e part for each register The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher order register The instrument automatically generates the sum b
7. rom qpesr Command Reference Parameters lt BurstldleTime gt Range 16e 9 to 838 832e 6 Increment 16e 9 RST 100e 6 Default unit s BUS SSPI BORDer lt BitOrder gt Defines if the data of the messages starts with MSB most significant bit or LSB least significant bit Parameters lt BitOrder gt MSBFirst LSBFirst RST MSBFirst BUS SSPI SSIZe lt SymbolSize gt Sets the word length the number of bits in a message Parameters lt SymbolSize gt Range 4 to 32 Increment 1 RST 8 Default unit Bit 14 2 13 5 PC IAG COMUN EL 371 A uoa rp em eoe mm bte e bm iim 372 FC Decode Resulls neret tre onec xe nra Preuve eec AS eaaa 375 PC Configuration BUSY OBODRSOUDRSS cime eto dida iia 371 BUSIZCTDATPASOBDBGS ics pteetenz a e rere caca ic 372 OHANnelem THResheld FINDlevel 21 tilda 372 BUS I2C CLOCk SOURce Source Sets the input channel to which the clock line is connected Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 371 R8S RTM Remote Control SSES Command Reference BUS I2C DATA SOURce Source Sets the input channel to which the data line is connected Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 CHANnel lt m gt TH
8. 83 Trigger period A and B trigger 83 V Marker ioe LO Viel EE 75 Measurement types sssssss esee 83 Memory usage neret teet ete Eee eet dene reae eed 216 Menu Off SOIMKEY sc 225 Menus Acquisition icon actina 23 Auto Measure ottiene derrite 91 Cursor Display Setup instrument sse 223 Lo m 65 Messages instrument responses es 239 Micro DUON 1 rre toten nni aaia 18 Micro Button Ip c T 32 MIN des NMINEMONICS escocia 241 Per r 243 MODE RD N NAN MC Hm 245 New Mask Conc MI 125 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 R amp S9RTM Bgm 69 NINE croacia dci 245 No of Averages Ll c cicle 113 NTRAMSIION P MS 252 Numeric values Special ge 245 KT e 25 O SII CC 28 Operand 1 SOM P 103 Operand 2 ChicA T M 104 Operation complete epe E M 265 Operator A A 99 Option identification zem E eee 265 erp M 228 Output BUTTER scanner t ei ta E eek a 254 Overlapping preventing merecnysiiinnaee a e 250 Overlapping Commande sese 249 P PapentorMat spin 205 Parallel bus configuration Parameters DIOCK data NEEN 247
9. H O Cr u Command Reference Parameters lt SearchCondition gt FRAMe ERRor IDENtifier IDData IDERror FRAMe Search for a frame type Set the frame type with SEARch PROTocol LIN FRAMe ERRor Search for errors of one or more error types Set the error types with SEARch PROTocol LIN CHKSerror SEARch PROTocol LIN IPERror and SEARch PROTocol LIN SYERror IDENtifier Search for identifier Specifiy the identifier with SEARch PROTocol LIN ICONdition and SEARch PROTocol LIN IDENtifier IDData Search for identifier and data Set the identifier see IDENtifier and the data with SEARch PROTocol LIN DLENgth SEARch PROTocol LIN DCONdition and SEARch PROTocol LIN DATA IDERror Search for errors that occur with a specified identifier Set the identifier see IDENtifier and the errors to be found see ERRor RST FRAM SEARch PROTocol LIN FRAMe Frame Selects the frame type to be searched for The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to FRAMe Parameters lt Frame gt SOF WAKeup SOF start of frame WAKeup Wakeup frame RST SOF SEARch PROTocol LIN IPERror lt ldParityError gt Searches for parity errors The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt ldParityError gt
10. 294 TRIGA EDGE FILT EE 295 TRIGSger A EDGE TER 295 TRIGger A EDGE SLOPe lt Slope gt Sets the slope for the edge trigger A trigger Parameters lt Slope gt POSitive NEGative ElTHer POSitive Rising edge a positive voltage change NEGative Falling edge a negative voltage change EITHer Rising as well as the falling edge RST POSitive TRIGger A EDGE COUPling Coupling Sets the coupling for the trigger source Parameters Coupling DC AC HF DC Direct Current coupling The trigger signal remains unchanged AC Alternating Current coupling A 5 Hz high pass filter removes the DC offset voltage from the trigger signal HF High frequency coupling A 15 kHz high pass filter removes lower frequencies from the trigger signal Use this mode only with very high frequency signals RST DC __L_L_ A e 555 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 294 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m sensl Command Reference TRIGger A EDGE FILTer LPASs State Turns an additional 5 kHz low pass filter in the trigger path on or off This filter removes higher frequencies and is available with AC and DC coupling Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger A EDGE FILTer NREJect State Turns an additional 100 MHz low pass filter in the trigger path on or off This filter removes higher frequencies and is available
11. M 292 iier A HOLDoff TIME 294 TRIGAL STereSiS ii a a ct TRIGger A I2C ACCess endet EE 373 TRIG QEr Atl2C AMO DC ics da aaa a 373 TRIGAL MODE sour ia 372 TRIGJErA JZC AR EE 374 TRIGger A I2C PLENO evi ete he rds et e d Hc eM t eed det 374 WRIGGERAIZC POF ESC TM 375 TRIGger A LEVelens VALue 2 2 2 3 2er er Een ert dv een pex dr AR EEEE AAE ee 292 Elie dee m 404 TRIGger A LIN DATA bloer A HIN DCEONdI GON roine ereinen ee ara 405 TRIGger ACEINSBEENGI eei An ini d erepti a 405 TRI Gger A GINS GONGIION wis ninia E 404 TRIGOer ACLIN IBDENifiGr oot ttti e ate 404 TRIGgErA IN dais steed 404 ERE A e 555555555531 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 445 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands Plage GC NS d2lo n Seege eege Eegen 404 TRIG ee El Da 403 TRIGgernA MODE E 292 TRIGger A PATTem CONDItION E nete ee A a ae Een Dr e n Ra 298 TRIGger A PATTem FUNCUO mE 298 TRIGger A PATTern SOUR CS n icri trt irren cata EC Rees Rai ar 298 TRIGger A SOURce TRIGJer well aaa 364 Use ee ET E 384 TRIGJSC A SPEMODE er eer i n 364 Re ele EE GN RR 365 TRIGger A SPIPLEN O Mica id a da aaa 365 TRIGger A SPEPOPFEFSet rnnt riter da 365 T
12. T 154 Find evel iran 154 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 152 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 Source Toggles the lines of the SPI bus Each line has to be configured Select a line and adjust the settings Chip Select SPI only Select the input channel and the Active state Time Out SSPI only Set the Time Out instead if chip select Clock Select the input channel and the Slope MOSI MISO Select the input channel and the Active state for each data line Chip Select Clock MOSI MISO Select the input channels of the corresponding line Make sure to select the Source before you assign the channel MISO is optional and can be set to None Remote command US SPI CS SOURce on page 362 SPI CLOCk SOURce on page 362 SPI DATA SOURce on page 362 SPI MOSI SOURce on page 362 SPI MISO SOURce on page 363 SSPI CLOCk SOURce on page 369 SSPI DATA SOURce on page 370 SSPI MOSI SOURce on page 370 SSPI MISO SOURce on page 370 Y D Dm DD D D w Q E Y t YY Ur Ta o CO Active Selects whether transmitted data or the chip select signal is high active high 1 or low active low 1 For CS the default is low active For data the default is high active Remote command US SPI DATA POLarity on page 363 SPI MOSI POLarity on page 363 SPI MISO POLarity on page 363 SPI CS POLarity on page 362 SSPI DATA POLarity
13. dated 360 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 436 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands BEIUERSIBHSDIIL A BUS SPEGLOCK POLariY 1 oc ort id hi ei aie Aiki tre eene iet reet ted iia iaa B S SPECEOCK SOURCO t ai ertet onec tdt te ete Aas AAEE i odes ter iens teens pue OAE A ESE be mee BUS SPECSPOLaM E BUS SPICS SOURCE vets A BUS SPEDATA POLAN Y ici E BUS SPI DATA SOURce BUS Haeret 366 BUS SPEFRAMEsn DATA MISQ int tetti tree tere backen rx entente tab ener EEN 367 BUS SPEFRAMEsn DATA MOSI tette ttti tertie EENS EE 367 BUSISPERRAMESn STARP iae tente Eed 366 B S SPEFRAMESn STATUS eii cce dad 366 BUS SPEEFRAMESsnp STOP cbr n erhebt e ees EP v M e taedet osse e Ln 366 BUS SPEFRAMEsri WGOwUft rtt er ashe EE EEN 367 BUS GPIERAME nz WORD lt 0 gt MIO 369 BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt MOSI BUS SPEFRAMEsn WORD 05 9 EAR cedit rettet ette rd ra est Pec nte dere id dad 368 BUS SPEFRAMEsn WORDQO STOP 2 rnit riri ridad 368 BUS SREMISO POLarite EET 363 BUS SPEMISO SOURC8 Im 363 BUS SPEMOS el 363 BUS SPEMOSESOU RC duit iterat aa aria rl iii aaa 362 SE NEE SEN HIE BUS SSPI BORDer SR ee ee ET EE 369 BUS SSPICLOCK SOURCES cocinas marnan 369 SR Re RE 370 BUS SSPILDATA SOURCE
14. esee 170 The UART RS232 Interface 170 UART RS 232 Configuration essen 171 ART RS 232 RR ee rere att Rena inercia aa aa aE 174 UART RS 232 Decode Results 178 CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 eeeseeeeseeeeseeseeen nnne nnne nnn nnne ntn rana recaen 180 CAN Keelt e EC ooi sene rer E Eheu ere enu Hp te ec o baec Ea das e eb Ree eran 180 CAN Trigger Settings 2 eco eee o EE eco be eara c e aeo iia 181 CAN Label Lists EET 186 CAN Decode Results 5 ee Ret eere eg SEENEN GEESS 187 Search on Decoded CAN Data 189 LIN Option RES RTM K3 eeeeseeseseeeeeeeeeenen enne nennen nennt crac rn 192 EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 6 R amp S9RTM Contents 11 7 1 11 7 2 11 7 3 11 7 4 11 7 5 11 7 6 12 12 1 12 1 1 12 1 2 12 2 12 2 1 12 2 2 12 2 3 12 2 4 12 2 5 12 2 6 13 13 1 13 1 1 13 1 2 13 2 14 14 1 14 1 1 14 1 2 14 1 3 14 1 4 14 1 5 14 1 6 14 1 7 14 2 The LIN Protocols sdccc cccccseeeccensecedeacetedeesesuabeedtdeeedaustonensesexeined NENNEN ENEE EA 192 LIN Configuration Gettmgs nr cnn rn r rra 193 NES nnne 195 AE O ee Gaas 198 LIN D code Res lts er eerte aplica canada lin dial adas 199 Search on Decoded LIN Data 200 Data and File Management eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneneenernnnn 204 A E 204 Printing a Screenshot reddes erede dens ib ed 204 Printer Settngs iii ii hae poen id ii 2
15. 67 Using Timestamp Markerg mee nn nar rra nr 67 ART nennen ener 69 Reference Waveforms e ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee REENEN 71 Using References iii 71 Displaying a Reference Wavetomm ccoo nn narran nennen 71 Saving and Loading HReterences mener nenne 72 Reference for REF Key tenete ais 73 MG ASUNGINGINGS Bee 75 Cursor Measuremients ieiunii tte AnaS AARAA RRRRRRIR MER ARR RR RD ZER 75 Cursor Measurements Types and Results 75 Performing Cursor Measuremente eene ener nenne 78 Cursor MON MH ead eta 79 QUICK MO ASUTOMEOMES iiciin enaena aara aias iaar Sege 82 Automatic Measurements cesses nennen nnne nnne nennt nnne nnn nn nnne nnns 83 Measurement Types and Results 83 Configuring and Performing Automatic Measurements eeeeeeeeeesesseeeeserrrrrrsssssreeees 90 Auto Measure Menu MEAS key eene nnns 91 EN GIN AICS m 94 Configuring and Using Math Wave forim ccccccesssecceseeseeeeeeeeseneeeeeeseesnenseeeeeeaes 94 Displaying Mathematical Wavetomms emen 94 Editing Equations and Equation Gets rnn 95 Saving and Loading Equation Ges 96 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 4 R amp S9RTM Contents 7 2 8 1 8 2 8 2 1 8 22 8 2 3 8 3 9 1 9 1 1 9 1 2 9 1 3 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 2 3 9 3 10 10 1 10 1 1 10 2 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3
16. P s Qn Command Reference CHANnel lt m gt DATA HEADer Returns information on the channel waveform For envelope waveforms use the CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope HEADer command Table 14 12 Header data Position Meaning Example 1 XStart in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 2 XStop in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 3 Record length of the waveform in Samples 200000 4 Number of values per sample interval usually 1 1 Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt DataHeader gt Comma separated value list Example 9 477E 008 9 477E 008 200000 1 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope Returns the data of the envelope The envelope consists of two waveforms The wave forms data can be used in MATLAB for example Use this command only for envelope waveforms For other channel waveforms use CHANnel m DATA To set the export format use FORMat DATA on page 268 To set the range of samples to be returned use CHANne1 lt m gt DATA Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values Data List of values according to the format settings the voltages of the envelope points The list contains two values for each sample interval Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope HEADer Returns information on the envelope wavefo
17. n Command Reference BUS SSPI MOSI SOURce Source BUS SSPI DATA SOURce Source Selects the input channel of the MOSI line or of the data line if only one data line is used Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 BUS SSPI MISO SOURce lt MisoSource gt Selects the input channel of the optional MISO line Parameters lt MisoSource gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 NONE RST NONE BUS SSPI MOSI POLarity lt Polarity gt BUS SSPI DATA POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects whether transmitted data is high active high 1 or low active low 1 on the MOSI line or on the data line if only one data line is used Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive high active NEGative low active RST POSitive BUS SSPI MISO POLarity lt MisoPolarity gt Selects whether transmitted data is high active high 1 or low active low 1 on the MISO line Parameters lt MisoPolarity gt ACTLow ACTHigh RST ACTH BUS SSPI BlTime lt BurstidleTime gt Within the idle time the data and clock lines are low A new frame begins when the idle time has expired and the clock line has been inactive during that time If the time interval between the data words is shorter than the idle time the words are part of the same frame ee User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 370 R8S RTM Remote Control m
18. sess 206 COM diia tdo fotis 209 Constant ES Control BEEP eene Diane erect 228 Copy Channel o certet 125 Coupling 5 Coupling CUESOL erii terere ttr 81 Create directory coooooooccccccccccnccccccccnononnnccnnnnnanananrncnnn 211 Cursor Data RTI Data SDA eite oit a Date 8 Time S Dry RE Decimal Point Guo Decimation Mode DDecode EE PII mE Defaults Se sol Defa lt Setl 2 5 darti ad 216 DESKEW cane MEE Destination Sp Device Information oooooccccccccoooooooooccnccnnonononnnnnnnnnnno 226 DeviceJNamie nier toT eer eie te Device Settings za Wise m aaa Display coca Display Mode EP m Dots OMY cari detec Edit Constant Edit Equations Eq Set Label Equal arderet tete ete ile innt Equation Label Error Beep cidad EE eec File name Grid intensity Grid Style diii hrec acd Crete iere eii Hour Hysteresis A B IEEE488 oho dee o bh Pre tee teres Import Export sed INTENSTIES oia Interface oret trei Inverse Brightn In Vert ii eri ede Index Label List WM Language n Language update sess 227 LED Intensidad 230 Lines Load Eoad masks 2e hti reete Main Time Base Masks Testi nana oct Operand srta ini Operand 2 Operator sonare Paper fortmal uice prr Parameter Printer Pr
19. 247 T Temperature Colors eene 55 Termination oooocooooccncncccnnononononnnn esses 11 30 Test EE 124 Test results DC E 118 Threshold Protocols ee 144 pni TED PEORES Time base ge Time TE TE Time Reference esss esses Time scale TIMESTAMPS e E Eee Track Scaling cursor vs ous uir Trigger auto normal occcccconoconoccncnccononon eene 38 edge trigger Slope inercia retten 39 Leide m MADE 38 level em et 38 SEUD ates Source VARTE EET Trigger event displaying esasa Cm 51 le APA 267 Trigger frequency A and B trigger 83 Trigger mode le cM 292 Tigger OffSel eet O ren tenentes 15 23 454 R amp S9RTM Index Trigger Offset Tu EE Trigger period A and B trigger Wim U UART REED Configuration protocol settings MIO scs cotto eir aa Trigger settings ies WARTIRS eege ege ees geed Undersambplitig teria anios lince Unit SONKEY EE 98 105 UNIS gegen eege eng deed 245 Bee 245 Update SOM asiatico pidio 74 Updates A Eoo tese t dec 226 Dre ER 227 Menace e P E 227 USB remote control interface eessseesss 232 V Value SOMM Vas M 104 Vertical position 11 Vertical settings Vertical
20. o T D 7 w ee Command Reference Return values lt FrameData gt Comma separated list of decimal values of the data bytes Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDPValue Returns the parity value Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ldentifierParityValue gt Decimal value Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDSTate Returns the identifier state of the selected frame Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt IdentifierState gt OK PRERror UVAL INSufficient PRERror parity error UVAL unexpected value INSufficient the frame is not completely contained in the acquisi tion The decoded part of the frame is valid Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDValue Returns the identifier value address Suffix lt n gt bi Selects the frame 1 n Return values dentifierValue Decimal value Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified frame EM User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 407 R8S RTM Remote Control EES Command Reference Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame Suf
21. 292 TRIGJEeTA ce Nl i 293 TRIGGEREXTENUCOUPING EE 293 TRIGGERA TYPE E LE 293 E PR 293 TRIGger AHO Don MME coin a eee 294 TRIGger A MODE lt TriggerMode gt Sets the trigger mode The trigger mode determines the behaviour of the instrument if no trigger occurs Parameters lt TriggerMode gt AUTO NORMal AUTO The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval ifthe trigger conditions are not fulfilled If a real trigger occurs it takes prece dence NORMal The instrument acquires a waveform only if a trigger occurs RST AUTO TRIGger A LEVel lt n gt VALue Level Sets the trigger treshold voltage for all A trigger types that require a trigger level Suffix n Selects the trigger input 1 4 select the corresponding channel 5 is the external trigger input The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters Level Range Depends on vertical scale Default unit V TRIGger A FINDlevel Sets the trigger level of the A trigger event to 50 of the signal amplitude Usage Event EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 292 R8S RTM Remote Control Command Reference TRIGger A SOURce lt Source gt Sets the trigger source for the selected A trigger type Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 EXTernanalog LINE SBUS CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 One of the input channels is the trigger source Available channels depend on the
22. Reference for Search Menu a ya N n 0 Edge Upper Level Lower Level Comparison Rise Fall time Variation Ki Back YN Edge Sets the slope to be found e Rising to search for rise time e Falling to search for fall time e Both to search for rise and fall time Remote command SEARch TRIGger RISetime SLOPe on page 350 Upper level Sets the upper voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the rise fall time measurement starts or stops depending on the selected slope Remote command SEARch TRIGger LEVel RISetime UPPer on page 350 Lower level Sets the lower voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the rise time mea surement starts or stops depending on the selected slope Remote command SEARch TRIGger LEVel RISetime LOWer on page 350 Comparison Sets how the measured rise or fall time is compared with the given limit s Greater than Finds rise fall times longer than the given Rise Fall time Lower than Finds rise fall times shorter than the given Rise Fall time Equal Finds rise fall times equal to the reference Rise Fall time if Varia tion At 0 If Variation O the setting finds rise fall times within the range time At See also Variation Not equal Finds rise fall times unequal to the reference value if Variation At 0 If Variation O the setting finds rise fall times outside the range time At Remote command SEAR
23. Some data is displayed for information only and cannot be edited This includes the MAC physical address of the connector and the Link status information 6 Ifthe LAN does not support DHCP or the instrument is directly connected with a computer disable DHCP Press the DHCP softkey so that it is not highlighted off 7 Define the IP address of the instrument by entering each of the four blocks individu ally a Define the first block number using the Navigation knob b Press Next to move to the next block and define the number c When the IP address is complete press Down to continue with the next setting 8 Define the Subnetmask and Gateway in the same way as the IP address 9 Select the IP Port the port number for raw socket communication 10 Select the HTTP Port used by the instrument 11 Select the Transfer mode This mode can either be determined automatically Auto setting or you can select a combination of a transfer rate and half or full duplex manually User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 235 R amp S9RTM Instrument Home Screen Data SCPI Device Control Remote Control Basics 12 Press Save to save the LAN parameters on the instrument The Link status information at the bottom of the dialog box indicates whether a LAN connection was established successfully Checking LAN and SCPI connection 1 2 Check the LAN connection using ping ping xxx yyy zzz xxx If the
24. 0 TEMP WARN This bit is set if a temperature warning on channel 1 2 3 or 4 occured 1 TEMP ERRor This bit is set if a temperature error on channel 1 2 3 or 4 occured STATus QUEStionable LIMit register This register contains information about the observance of the limits of measurements This bit is set if the limits of the main or additional measurement of the assigned mea surement are violated User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 259 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 1 6 4 Basics Table 14 9 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable LIMit register Bit No Meaning 0 MEAS1 1 MEAS2 2 MEAS3 3 MEAS4 STATus QUEStionable MASK register This register contains information about the violation of masks This bit is set if the assigned mask is violated Table 14 10 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable MASK register Bit No Meaning 0 MASK1 Application of the Status Reporting System The purpose of the status reporting system is to monitor the status of one or several devices in a measuring system To do this and react appropriately the controller must receive and evaluate the information of all devices The following standard methods are used e Service request SRQ initiated by the instrument e Serial poll of all devices in the bus system initiated by the controller in order to find out who sent a SRQ and why e Parallel poll of all devices e Query of a specific inst
25. See also Setup amp Label on page 215 Show Diplays the label list for the selected protocol type Before the label list must be loaded from a PTT file Sort Displays the label list in alphanumerical order or sorted by ID or address Remove Deletes the label list from the instrument 11 1 4 Frame Table Decode Results Access PROTOCOL gt Frame Table The frame table shows the detailed decoded data for each frame of the acquisition The table content is protocol specific and the display of the table can be enabled for each individual bus type Decode results shown in the frame table can be saved in a CSV file To navigate in the frame table 1 Stop the acquisition 2 Turn the NAVIGATION knob to select a frame E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 148 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis AAA a SS SSS A A Basics of Protocol Analysis 3 Press the NAVIGATION knob to display the selected frame in the center of the wave form display If a search on decoded data was performed the search results are marked in the frame table Frame Table Displays or hides the table of decode results Track frame Defines the automatic synchronization of the selected frame in the frame table and the waveform display The function is only available if the acquisition has been stopped Off Frame table and waveform display are not synchronized Frame Index The waveform display is connected to the frame that is selected in
26. Sets the logical combination of the channel states T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 355 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm m srl Command Reference Parameters Function AND OR NAND NOR AND The required states of all channels must appear in the input signal at the same time OR At least one of the channels must have the required state NAND Not and operator at least one of the channels does not have the required state NOR Not or operator none of the channels has the required state RST AND SEARch TRIGger PATTern LEVel n ThresholdLevel Sets the threshold value for each specified source channel You can set different levels for the channels Suffix n 1 4 Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt ThresholdLevel gt Range Depends on vertical scale SEARch TRIGger PATTern LEVel lt n gt DELTa lt LevelDelta gt Sets a hysteresis range to the level of the specified source channel in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Suffix lt n gt 1 4 Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters l
27. 08 250 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 1 6 Basics 4 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with a service request 1 Set bit no 4 in the SRE SRE 16 to enable MAV service request 2 Sendthe overlapped command with OPC 3 Wait for a service request The service request indicates that the overlapped command has finished Event Status Register ESE 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Sendthe overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 3 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence OPC ESR A return value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished OPC with short timeout 1 Send the overlapped command without OPC OPC or WAI 2 Poll the operation complete state periodically by means of a timer using the sequence short timeout OPC 3 Areturn value LSB of 1 indicates that the overlapped command has finished In case of a timeout the operation is ongoing 4 Resettimeout to former value 5 Clear the error queue with SyStem ERRor to remove the 410 Query interrupted entries Using several threads in the controller application As an alternative provided the programming environment of the controller application supports threads separate threads can be used for the application GUI and for controlling the instrument s via SCP
28. 2 55E 2E 4 127 5 0 8 bit and 16 bit data At the end of the above example the 8 bit waveform is read as 16 bit data for example OxFF is read OxFFOO or Ox1A is read 0x1A00 The yOrigin value is the same in both cases but the yincrement differs 8 bit data 16 bit data Result 2e 128 7 8125E 32768 0 0256 V ylncrement byteValue 2e 125 7 8125E 32000 0 025 V In the reverse case ifa 16 bit waveform is read with 8 bit data format data precision may be reduced Data values ar truncated and only the more significiant bits remain For example the 16 bit data Oxabcd is read Oxab in 8 bit format and cd is lost Search Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width Search for positive pulses with pulse width 12 10 ys 2 us to 22 us Command description in chapter 14 2 12 Search on page 343 SEAR STAT ON Turn on search SEAR COND WIDTH Select search condition SEAR SOUR CH2 Configure search source SEAR TRIG WIDT POL POS Configure search parameters Polarity SEAR TRIG WIDT RANG WITH Configure search parameters Condition within SEAR TRIG WIDT WIDT 12e 6 Configure search parameters Pulse width SEAR TRIG WIDT DELT 10e 6 Configure search parameters delta User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 432 R amp S RTM Remote Control m SS Programming Examples SEAR RESD SHOW ON Show result table SEAR RCO Get number of search events found lt 1 400
29. 9 Ca 219 Waveform Selects the waveform to be stored Turn the Navigation knob to select one of the avail able waveforms channel reference and math waveforms Format Defines the format of the waveform storage file BIN CSV TXT or TRF For details see chapter 12 2 4 1 Waveform File Formats on page 216 Data Selects the amount of data points to be saved in the waveform file Display Data All waveform samples that are displayed on the screen will be saved Exception The Waveform Rate ist set to maximum sample rate and the acquisition is stopped In this case the memory can contain more data samples than the display shows decimation To save the wave form with maximum resolution the instrument stores the samples that are saved in the memory Acq Memory All data samples that are stored in the memory will be saved This setting takes effect only for stopped acquisitions and it is not avail able for math waveforms For running acquisitions always display data is stored Remote command CHANnel lt m gt DATA POINts on page 285 Screenshots You can create a screenshot of the current display of your waveforms and measurement results and save it to a file To optimize the output you can configure different color modes and file formats Alternatively you can print screenshots to a printer See also chapter 12 1 Printing on page 204 If you want to save many screenshots together with
30. M AE 370 BUSSE IMC ENEE geed dc 370 BUS SSPEMISO SOUR CS nr tete ttt epar entire detenta iones na td iria ed iaa 370 BUS SSPEMOSI POLANY ita 370 BUS SSPILMOSI SOURCE n 370 BUS SSPI SSIZe BUS STAM BUS TYPE erer ador dod cemere ld a di e RTE 383 BUS VARTBITIME iii a a oca 383 BUS VART DATA POLAMI commit di A a 382 BUS UART DATASOURCE 381 BUS UART PARI EE 382 URBE ape m a 382 BUS UART RXCEGO Unt ciere cete nt edenda ed d tee oed tele dee ECH 385 BUS UART RX FRAMesrn WQGQNnE ca tian Entertain netten te ence pe aat trema Ea ER E EEr SERERE Ran 386 BUSUART RX ERAMe nzWORlDcoz GT ARD 386 BUS UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STA TOP ooocnccicncccconnnoncnnccnnnancnonancnon cnn nn nono een ennemi enne 386 BUSUART RX ERAMe nz WORlDcoz TOP 387 BUSUART RX ERAMe nzWORD coz MAL ue 387 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 437 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands BUSUARTRA SQURCS r 381 BUS ART SBIT 5 erret rependere d er AO Aia 383 BUSUARIESSI ZO ET 382 IER ROCHER TX Kee 385 BUS UART TA ERAMe cnz WC ODunt cnn nara n nr ren rre nc anna rre 386 BUS UART TS ERAMe cnz MWORDecoz STAR 386 BUS UART TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt SO0 gt STA TOP occcioccccocacconcconcnnno conan nc non cn no nc cnn
31. Save instrument settings to a file on internal storage device duplicate this file and save itto a USB stick attached to the front panel Finally there are three setup files on the internal storage INT SETTINGS and one file on the USB flash device E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 433 Programming Examples Command description in chapter 14 2 14 2 Saving and Loading Data MMEMory Com mands on page 416 CHAN1 STAT ON Turn channel 1 on CHAN2 STAT ON Turn channel 2 on TIM ZOOM STAT ON Show zoom diagram MMEM CDIR INT SETTINGS Set storage device and directory MMEM STOR STAT 1 ZOOM A SET Save settings to internal storage MMEM CAT SET Check 332112 8633856 ZOOM A SET 2759 MMEM COPY ZOOM A SET ZOOM B SET Copy file MMEM CAT SET Check 332112 8633856 Z00M A SET 2759 ZOOM B SET 2759 MMEM COPY INT SETTINGS ZOOM B SET USB FRONT ZOOM B SET Save copied file to USB stick MMEM CDIR USB FRONT Check MMEM CAT SET 4890624 641765376 Z00M B SET 2759 MMEM COPY USB FRONT ZOOM B SET USB FRONT ZOOM USB SET Duplicate file on USB stick MMEM CAT SET Check 4890624 641765376 Z00M B SET 2759 ZOOM USB SET 2759 MMEM DEL ZOOM B SET Delete original file MMEM CAT SET Check 4886528 641765376 Z00M USB SET 2759 MMEM COPY USB FRONT ZOOM USB SET INT SETTINGS Copy new file to the instrument MMEM CDIR INT
32. received 4 Query with filter MMEM DCAT USB FRONT DA received DATA 0 DATA NEW 0 MMEM DCAT LENG USB FRONT DA received 2 Query only MMEMory DCATalog LENGth lt PathName gt Returns the number of directories in specified directory The result corresponds to the number of strings returned by the MMEMory DCATalog command Query parameters lt PathName gt Return values lt FileEntryCount gt Example Usage String parameter Specifies the directory Number of directories see MMEMory DCATalog Query only MMEMory CATalog lt PathName gt lt Format gt Returns the a list of files contained in the specified directory The result corresponds to the number of files returned by the MMEMory CATalog LENgth command Query parameters lt PathName gt lt Format gt String parameter Specifies the directory A filter can be used to list for example only files of a given file type ALL WTIMe ALL Extended result including file date time and attributes WTIMe Result including file date time User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 419 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Return values lt UsedMemory gt lt FreeMemory gt lt FileEntry gt Example Example Example Usage Command Reference Total amount of storage currently used in the directory in bytes Total amount of storage available in the directory in bytes String p
33. 11 2 1 Analyzing Parallel Buses As all protocols the parallel bus needs configuration to decode and display the signal To configure parallel buses 1 Press the PROTOCOL key on the front panel 2 Press the Bus Type softkey and select Parallel 3 Press Configuration 4 Select the Bus Width 5 Set the threshold for each channel See To set the logic threshold on page 144 6 Press Back and configure the data display See To configure decoding and data display on page 145 11 2 2 Reference for Parallel Bus You can configure up to four parallel bit lines depending on the number of input channels Bus width Sets the number of lines to be analyzed The maximum number is the number of input channels Remote command BUS PARallel WIDTh on page 361 11 3 SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 11 3 1 The SPI Protocol A 4 channel instrument is required for full support of the SPI protocol The Serial Peripheral Interface SPI is used for communication with slow peripheral devi ces in particular for transmission of data streams User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 150 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 3 2 11 3 2 1 SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 Main characteristics of SPI are e Master slave communication e No device addressing The slave is accessed by a chip select or slave select line e No acknowledgement mechanism to confirm receipt of data e Duplex capability Most SPI buses have four
34. 1305 0595 02 08 ROHDE amp SCHWARZ User Manual This manual describes the following R amp S9RTM models e R amp S RTM1052 1305 0008K52 e R amp S9RTM1054 1305 0008K54 In addition to the base unit the following options are described e R amp S RTM K1 1305 0295 02 e R amp S9RTM K2 1305 0308 02 e R amp S9RTM K3 1317 3065 02 The firmware of the instrument makes use of several valuable open source software packages For information see the Open Source Acknowledgement on the user documentation CD ROM included in delivery Rohde amp Schwarz would like to thank the open source community for their valuable contribution to embedded computing O 2012 Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Muehldorfstr 15 81671 Munich Germany Phone 49 89 41 29 0 Fax 49 89 41 29 12 164 E mail info rohde schwarz com Internet http www rohde schwarz com Subject to change Data without tolerance limits is not binding R amp S is a registered trademark of Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG Trade names are trademarks of the owners The following abbreviations are used throughout this manual R amp S9RTM is abbreviated as R amp S RTM Basic Safety Instructions Always read through and comply with the following safety instructions All plants and locations of the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies make every effort to keep the safety standards of our products up to date and to offer our customers the highest
35. Automatic measurements sss 321 oE E RE 231 Cursor measurements oooooocoocococcccconononocanononcnnnnnnns 312 GPIB address ve Se Sue Programming examples sss 430 protocols EN quick measurements esses 320 Refererice Level ios rire estet e 325 starting geg gs Statistical measurements uuuueueuessssss 326 Remove directory Ml CE 418 Lol C M 211 Remove file ENOL ET 421 li CE i 210 Reset values zio ue 266 RESOLUTION iiie creer ic isc dratada isde 12 15 Resource string LAN oo ii ia is 237 Results mask testing etr rentrer 118 o TETTE IET ILI T 143 Rise Fall Time Scar cisci ette eet aii Rise time i Di E C RMS Cycle RMS Value RollMode er RS232 DASS OR 170 RUN CONT Coca 38 RUN NX SINGLE 1 erre cric dee dedicaci n 38 Runt SCAN NEE 137 S iru 24 Sample modes hc t L 14 Sample rate m el Save A O 209 Remote 421 SOIMKEY c lia 210 Save Recall A a eatis A 73 Saving data toa file cita ries Device settings Sis T equation EE filename Lis EE EE vo c reri eere eri RITE references Se SCHESMSIMOUS ee WAVETONMS EE Scale horizontal uta adria 23 ne TT 29 SCPI parameters zeit e tet du 244 syntax version 2 SCPI com
36. Note You should update the instrument firmware in regular intervals to take advantage of new functions and solve possible problems The online help is not included in the firmware update package Update the online help separately to get the latest information Execute Firmware Update The instrument firmware is updated Interface Update Some interfaces are provided with their own instrument independant firmware This interface firmware can also be updated The currently installed firmware version is dis played as well as all available update versions if a USB flash drive containing an update is identified The instrument is only updated when you press Execute Note You should update the interface firmware in regular intervals to take advantage of new functions and solve possible problems Execute Interface Update The interface firmware is updated Language Update Displays the installed and available languages For each language softkey labels display texts and if available the online help are provided To install or update a language or online help the language file RTM10xx HMG is required on a USB flash drive The lan guage file contains all available languages and online helps Up to four languages can be installed on the instrument See the Getting Started Manual for further information Language Language Update Selects the language to be added removed or updated Supported lang
37. Parameters lt EventCnt gt Number of B events Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 RST 1 TRIGger B HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level of the B trigger event If the signal jitters inside this range and crosses the trigger level thereby no trigger event occurs Parameters lt Hysteresis gt AUTO SMALI MEDium LARGE RST AUTO User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 300 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Command Reference 14 2 6 Display 14 2 6 1 Basic Display Settings This chapter describes commands that configure the screen display General Display Settings ia NODE entente exce tute e eee re ee Pee rere eee REN Ren E ree en eee A EE ete 301 DISPlay PAGS E 301 DISPlay MODE Mode Sets the diagram mode Parameters Mode YT XY YT Default time diagram with a time axis in x direction and the signal amplitudes displayed in y direction XY XY diagram combines the voltage levels of two waveforms in one diagram RST YT DISPlay PALette lt Palette gt Sets the color and brightness of the displayed waveform samples depending on their cumulative occurance Parameters lt Palette gt NORMal INVerse FCOLor IFColor NORMal Values that occur frequently are brighter than rare values INVerse Rare values are brighter than frequent values inverse to the NOR Mal brightness FColor Rare values are displayed in blue while m
38. STARt on page 386 RT RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP on page 387 RT TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP on page 387 RT RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt VALue on page 387 e D U D D U Y U U W D D C MN to Mm Ff Go Mm OO WM 9 OD C A P p gp p RT TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt VALue on page 387 11 6 CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 11 6 1 CAN Configuration Access PROTOCOL gt Bus type CAN gt Configuration Configuration Data Type Sample point Bit rate Predefined can H cant Defined Bit Rate 50kBit s Nh N Data Sets the source of the data line All channel waveforms can be used Remote command BUS CAN DATA SOURce on page 388 Type Selects the CAN High or CAN Low line CAN uses both lines for differential signal trans mission If you measure with a differential probe connect the probe to both CAN H and CAN L lines and select the data Type CAN H T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 180 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 If you use a single ended probe connect the probe to either CAN_L or CAN H and select the data type accordingly Remote command BUS CAN TYPE on page 388 Sample point Sets the position of the sample point within the bit in percent of the nominal bit time The sample point divides the nominal bit period into two distinct time segments which are used for resynchronization of the c
39. Source Z Z Setup Defines the source to be used to determine the intensity of the waveform The source can be selected from any of the analog channels Pressing the softkey repeatedly scrolls through the list of available source channels Remote command DISPlay XY ZSOurce on page 303 Z Intensity Z Setup Toggles between intensity modes Modulation Modulated intensity Intensity is modulated continuously according to the selected Source Z RERUM RU A E E e 1 e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL X User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 61 R amp S9RTM Display 4 3 O Zoom On Off Intensity is determined by a Threshold value If the Z signal value is below the selected threshold the corresponding x y point is displayed with lowest intensity If the Z signal value is above the threshold the x y point is displayed with the defined intensity level Remote command DISPlay XY ZMODe on page 302 Threshold Z Setup Defines the threshold for intensity with a two state modulation if Z Intensity is set to ON OFF Remote command DISPlay XY ZTHReshold on page 303 Zoom You can zoom into waveforms to analyze the results in more detail The zoomed area and its position can be configured numerically or using the rotary knobs Using Markers You can use markers to quickly zoom into a place of interest in the display see To zoom into a marker position on page 68 4 3 1 Zoom
40. a O User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 394 R8S RTM Remote Control AAA AAA A SSS J e Command Reference BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt CSSTate Returns the state of the checksum Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ChecksumState gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt CSValue Returns the checksum value Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n Return values ChecksumValue Decimal value Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt DLCState Returns the state of the data length code Suffix lt n gt SZ Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt DLCstate gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt DLCValue Returns the number of data bytes in the specified frame Suffix lt n gt ad Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt DLCvalue gt non negative integer Usage Query only T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 395 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m X r w OOOU rq M Command Reference BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDSTate Returns the state of the identifier Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt IdentifierState gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDTYpe Returns the length of the identifier 11 bitfor CAN base frames
41. cerei ttr edet eos pei rs ede cdi Ada 398 JN PROTocol CAN ETvbe nenat 400 SEARCch PRO Tocol CAN1CON OM errar a 400 SEARCh PROTOCOEGAN IDENIIfiGr iecore ie delia 400 SEARcHh PROTOCOECANSEEYBG eiie fd ettet rtu a Y laa 400 SEARch PROTocol LIN CHKSerror esses eene ener entres enn res sen nrts nan ra nennn ra nennen inneren 412 SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDiition eesssssesssssssesessesenenee nennen nnne nennen nnnm rst hnt nne t entr EEEE EnEn nnne 410 SEARcCh PROTOGCOEEIN IDATA iiis reinen o EI ere aid 413 Te UR ee ee BI KREE 413 SEARCh PROTOGCOELIN DEENGIh ii eee rr art eere eae eer eter PY dra a eer add 412 SEARch PROTocol LIN FRAMe 411 SEARCh PROTOCOEEIN IGONGIUOD EE 412 SEARCh PROTOCOLEEIN IDENI ifl r eroe erro E eese ria eee era ie ecce isa 412 SEARcCh PROTOGCOELIN IPEREO eeu do eee e erede vedere ed ex dee ete oe ed cereus eed deed 411 SEARCH O NE nennen etn a aaa ia nE sentent nsn nne sensns rena 412 SEARCH Ee PEERS 359 SEARch RESDiagram SHOW 357 SEARCH RESUIHA Aaa At Gone ene 358 SEARCI RESUS ee cota E 358 SEARCH SOURCE T 346 lel Gp rte 344 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CEDGe A 354 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel DELTa esses rennen neren enne nc nr 35
42. Activating ico eot a 225 RE el tir rada 225 for remote control 231 A ete testo 226 232 IEEE488 226 LAN a 226 parameters n tereti ica 226 Ern ees 225 USB 232 Interrupt 260 Invert signal amplitude sssssseseeeee 30 IP address Configuration EEN 162 Protocol Settings iii ee terere 162 Triggering p oi Trigger settings x erre rte 164 K Keys ACQUISHIOM m 23 CHN CLEAR 70 BIOL 53 ize 69 Setup 239 Setup instrument ccomconcnosionccireninasannaresenonionacnns 223 SIGNAL OFF L Labels usina iniciadas 146 LAN AAA ass 233 interface 226 232 lor c 237 parameter setup remote control interface ss 232 resource string ass 237 VXI protocol sse ET 232 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 449 R amp S9RTM Index Protocol settings oooocccnnnnccninnnncocooncccnnanancnnnanancnnnns 193 Search settings T EN Trigger settings ooonnccncnnnccccnnnnocioncccnnnnrnconnnnnccnnnnos Oca ia asin 240 Load UE 74 Loading Device Settings oci ade 214 equation sets oerna iter een tre ree ER 96 lI e M 72 Load Mask Ll cl M a mieates 126 Load Settings roll Ae HH 74 Low pass filt t uu 25 Main Time Base A O Malfunctions IC
43. CAN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters lt DataLength gt Range 0 to 8 Increment 1 RST 1 Default unit Byte User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 390 R8S RTM Remote Control SS crf CCcC C C TC v9 Command Reference TRIGger A CAN DCONdition lt DataCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for data If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters lt DataCondition gt EQUAal NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQ TRIGger A CAN DATA Data Defines the data pattern The number of bytes in the data pattern is defined with TRIGger A CANS DLC The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters Data String containing binary pattern with max 64 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Make sure to enter complete bytes TRIGger A CAN ACKerror lt AcknowledgeError gt Triggers on acknowledgement errors An acknowledgement error occurs when the trans mitter does not receive an acknowledgment a dominant bit during the Ack Slot The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt AcknowledgeError gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGge
44. Define the time base extract for which the FFT is to be calculated and displayed The extract is defined by its width and position see figure 8 1 a Press YT Window to define the width of the time base extract I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 108 R amp S9RTM FFT Configuring and Using FFT Calculations b Press Position to define the position of the time base extract The position is defined as an offset of the center of the extract range to the Os reference point The time base extract is indicated by a white frame in the Y t window The width W and position P are indicated in the information bar beneath the Y t window Auto CH1 0 V f DC 3MSa Refresh Run Span 2 GHz Center 1GHz Envelope CHt t dBV Fig 8 1 Width and position of the time base extract for FFT calculation Press Y Scale to define the scaling of the FFT amplitudes Define the frequency range to be displayed in the FFT window The range is defined as Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 For details see Span on page 115 and Center on page 115 a Press Span to define the width of the frequency range b Press Center to define the center frequency of the range To configure the FFT diagram graphically 1 Define the time base extract for which the FFT is to be calculated and displayed The extract is defined by its width and position see figure 8 1 a Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select the FFT time base ex
45. IL NR E cM er Alea cnste vgs cause eee eni oaaae e dines de E a Ea re Ea aeaa iene EE 339 14 2 12 Seali pP 343 14 2 13 Protocol Analyse 359 14 2 14 Data and File Management 413 14 2 15 General Instrument Gen 423 14 2 16 Status Heportimg nan n nn eee sere ee r nn rennen emere ener nnne nennen 426 14 3 Programming Examples eese eene nennen nenne nen nnn nnne nnn nnne nnn 430 14 3 1 Date le E 430 EA MEE 432 14 3 3 Data and File Management 433 List of COMMANA mee 435 j Wee 447 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 8 R amp SS9RTM Preface Documentation Overview 1 Preface 1 1 Documentation Overview The user documentation delivered with the R amp S RTM consists of the following parts e Online Help system on the instrument e Getting Started printed manual in English e Documentation CD ROM with Getting Started User Manual Service Manual Data sheet and product brochure Links to useful sites on the R amp S internet Online Help The Online Help is embedded in the instrument s firmware It offers quick context sen sitive description of the softkeys and front panel controls Getting Started The English edition of this manual is delivered with the instrument in printed form The manual is also available in other languages in PDF format on the Documentation CD ROM It provides the information needed
46. ON OFF RST OFF E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 411 R8S RTM Remote Control AAA SS Command Reference SEARch PROTocol LIN CHKSerror lt ChecksumError gt Searches for checksum errors The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt ChecksumError gt ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol LIN SYERror lt SyncError gt Searches for synchronization errors The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt SyncError gt ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol LIN ICONdition lt IdCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for the identifier If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to IDENtifier IDData Or IDERror Parameters lt ldCondition gt EQUAal NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQU SEARch PROTocolI LIN IDENtifier Identifier Defines the identifier pattern The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to IDENtifier IDData Or IDERror Parameters Identifier String containing binary pattern Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Enter the 6 bit identifier without parity bi
47. Opens the Storage menu and a file explorer to selectthe destination of the import export operation See Storage Directory Menu on page 210 Import Export Copies the selected source file to the specified file in the selected destination directory Note If a file with the same file name already exists in the destination directory it will be overwritten without notification Remote command MMEMory COPY on page 420 12 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key The PRINT key is a shortcut key that initiates the associated action With this key it is easy to save for example a series of waveform data or screenshots You can assign one of the following actions to the PRINT key e Save device settings e Save a waveform e Save a screenshot e Save a screenshot and the device settings e Print a screenshot Saving data You also can save data without changing the behavior of the PRINT key by pressing Save for the selected data type in the FILE menu User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 212 R amp S9RTM Data and File Management 12 2 2 1 12 2 2 2 Saving and Loading Configuring the PRINT Key Behavior The PRINT key can either be used to print screenshots to a connected printer or to save data to a specified storage location just by pressing a single key 1 Press FILE gt Print Key 2 Press the softkey of the action that you want to assign to the PRINT key 3 Configure the settings for the selected action S
48. Operation Expression string Comment Addition ADD CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 is also possible Subtraction SUB CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 is also possible Multiplication MUL CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 is also possible Division DIV CH1 CH2 CH1 CH2 is also possible Maximum amplitude MAX CH1 CH2 Minimum amplitude MIN CH1 CH2 Square SQR CH1 Square Root SQRT CH1 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 331 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Command Reference Operation Expression string Comment Absolute value ABS CH1 Positive wave POS CH1 Negative wave NEG CH1 Reciprocal REC CH1 Inverse INV CH1 Common logarithm basis 10 LOG CH1 Natural logarithm basis e LN CH1 Derivative DERI CH1 Integral INT CH1 IIR low pass IIRL CH1 1E6 CH1 Source waveform IIR high pass IIRH CH1 1E6 Ee n r frequency FFT FFTMAG CH1 FFT function of the source waveform See also chapter 14 2 10 FFT on page 333 CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA Returns the data of the math waveform points for transmission from the instrument to the controlling computer The waveforms data can be used in MATHLAB for example To set the export format use FORMat DATA on page 268 Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the math waveform Return values lt Data gt Usage List of values according to the format settings voltages or mag nitudes of a spectrum Quer
49. Rohde amp Schwarz device type gt lt serial number gt lt firmware ver Sion Example Rohde amp Schwarz RTO 1316 1000k14 200153 1 30 0 25 Usage Query only OPC OPeration Complete Sets bit 0 in the event status register when all preceding commands have been executed This bit can be used to initiate a service request The query form writes a 1 into the output buffer as soon as all preceding commands have been executed This is used for command synchronization OPT OPTion identification query Queries the options included in the instrument For a list of all available options and their description refer to the CD ROM ee User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 265 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm J A Pr amp t Command Reference Return values Options The query returns a list of options The options are returned at fixed positions in a comma separated string A zero is returned for options that are not installed Usage Query only PSC Action Power on Status Clear Determines whether the contents of the ENAB1e registers are preserved or reset when the instrument is switched on Thus a service request can be triggered when the instru ment is switched on if the status registers ESE and SRE are suitably configured The query reads out the contents of the power on statu
50. Time Ratio Y Count Peak Values RMS Mean y Burst Width Timo H Source HOMIE MEM C 80 Mas I 80 So Ae 80 dre dll P 81 pero 81 SG To WINS eter Ea Ee Ene da cd air 81 Set TO ee EE 81 21 502 E MM REM ES 81 Next Ee EE EN NAVIGATION EIU 82 Cursor Activates or deactivates the selected cursor measurement Remote command CURSor lt m gt STATe on page 313 Meas Type Selects the cursor measurement type Depending on the type different results are dis played in the result table For alist of all cursor measurement types and their description see chapter 6 1 1 Cursor Measurements Types and Results on page 75 Two or three cursors are provided which can be set to the required position using the Navigation rotary knob See also To change the position of the cursors on page 79 The setting is not available for cursor measurments on FFT analysis Remote command CURSor lt m gt FUNCtion on page 313 Source Defines the source of the cursor measurement as one of the active channel math or reference waveforms or a decoded bus signal AAA AA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 80 R8S RTM Measurements pm c J wc Cursor Measurements The set
51. User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 444 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands E elLiuBlpM N 425 SYS Tem TIME PR 424 BREET 273 TIMObDase DIVISIONS 7 omita ue a e a 273 TlMebase POSION seinen ene anaien ena aada stent NEEE aaea ieina TIMebase em EAS TIMebase RATime TIMebase REFS6ren6e onere terne dee cerei ta deese eere e pae cde rca cs ptos B dea PIM baSCTROLLIENA cc M iscos TIMobase SCALE P r o TIMebase ZOOMECPONSILOH i 51r t er eite eot A eer c ee A BREET alle TIMebase ZOOMISTA KT MMebase ZOOM HE TRIGger A CAN ACHKOLFOE oie eric cedet oca TRIGger A CAN BITSterror Nee ee el TE TRIGIERA CAN DATA EE TRIGger A CAN DGONGIIOR 2er dete eerte dde TRI Baer ACAN DUC wks EE Indien wen denied A piso diia Bel ele HIbig WIE TRIGg r A CAN CON foo D TIRIGger A CAN IDEN M TRIGger A CAN ITYPe Eet MR d Re ee Een GE TRIGO A EDGE FILTernLPASSis 225s iets eel Aer A A A nel dedere ce begin 295 TRIGger A EDGE F IETerNREJeCU uci iii a da 295 TRIGOer ACEDGE SLOBS 5 oriente edt eiii ite dolia 294 Ue Wisdhi e
52. We will take care that you will get the right information Europe Africa Middle East Phone 49 89 4129 12345 customersupport rohde schwarz com North America Phone 1 888 TEST RSA 1 888 837 8772 customer support rsa rohde schwarz com Latin America Phone 1 410 910 7988 customersupport la rohde schwarz com Asia Pacific Phone 6565 13 04 88 customersupport asia rohde schwarz com China Phone 86 800 810 8228 86 400 650 5896 customersupport china rohde schwarz com ROHDE amp SCHWARZ 1171 0200 22 06 00 R amp S9RTM Contents Contents WT 9 1 1 Documentation OvervVieW oconmonnnncinnmnccnreccnnnnnrnrcrnnnnn cnn rencia cnn recrean 9 1 2 Conventions Used in the DocumentatiON onommmoccccnnnnnnnccnnnnnsnncncnnnnnasnnnnnnnnarnnnnnnnos 10 1 2 1 Typographical Conmventions een eene enemies 10 2 Acquisition and Waveform SetUp ccccccccccccccccnncncncncccncnnnncccnnnonononons 11 21 DE En 11 2 1 1 Vertical Systemic dte Reden Ee 11 2 1 2 Sampling and Acouisttton eene nennen nnns 12 2 1 9 Horizontal SYM rentre Orr Ronan rou ege e 15 ARMEN II Em 16 2 2 Setting up the Waveform ssseseesseeeeeeeeee eene enne nnne nennen nnne nnns 20 2 2 1 Setting Up the Signal Input with Autoset e 20 2 2 2 Adjusting the Signal Input Manually eem 20 2 2 9 Setting the ACQUISIION acc ani n li oce onda ec diel ii 21 2 24 Starting and Stopping Acoulsiton anneren n
53. boolean 246 interfaces 2 226 OP lastra ciar wa 244 special numeric values we 245 SUNG eser ness sens 246 text 246 units 245 Passive probe cursu Rem 32 overview Settings Pattern SCAG I tet oes e CC 140 Pause softkey Peak Search Peak detection Period Persist Time SOMM CY M 55 Persistence z DA remote Ss 304 COCA 55 Persistence time zum da 305 Phase measurement ccoooccccnnoncccncnonccnnoncononnccnnnnnnccncanncnnnane 93 Position horizontalidad E Horizontal Softkey Di e User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 Index Prefix SOMKOY coca td 104 PREV cuisine 69 Print Cj neti 221 Printer COMMUNICATION EE 206 SOMOS iine ned eet hia d 228 Printing screenshols 2n nin ctr da 221 Print Key Cc M 213 PRINT key Fa Gorifig ring sssri i citroen ENEE SE ternas 213 ProbeMelter ssi chistes diosas 18 32 Probes austin imac dias teu o deed dido differential PASSIVE viaria diia Programming examples sssssssse 430 Protocol Misa aa 232 Protocols CAN 180 CAN configuration settings ssseuusss 180 CAN search settings eeseseeeee 189 CAN trigger settings Se Display configuration oooooococccccnnnccccnnccccnccnncnccnnnnnnns PRO
54. consider also the following commands e FORMat DATA on page 268 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA XINCrement on page 270 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA XORigin on page 269 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA YINCrement on page 270 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA YORigin on page 270 e REFCurve lt m gt DATA YRESolution on page 271 REFCUNS M STAT di dee poeta ee 308 REFOUNe cme SOURCE cmd iaa anio AA 309 HREFCunwe ms SOUbRceCATaog entnehmen esee senes nnne rere rrt tenen nnns 309 REFGurvesm e EE 309 REFCUNS Si AW zT 309 REFGuNe lt me LOAD EE 310 REFC rmvesm gt LOAD STATO s c ii ii lacada aii 310 Ee Tee EE 310 Eier ENEE elle EI ee ll BEEN 310 REFCume lt m gt VERTICALES CALC cnica dai dada 311 REFCUWes lt me VER Tica POS MON caida 311 REFCUN cd ead 8 spo 311 REFOume lt m gt DATA HEADET ect coiere enm entm ennt ea dL e ex dau ia E a iaa 311 REFCurve lt m gt STATe Displays or hides the selected reference waveform Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 308 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control MCRRGMMCIO AA AAA A Command Reference REFCurve lt m gt SOURce Source Defines the source of the reference waveform Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference wa
55. corte protector aislamiento etc Para la conexi n con dispositivos inform ticos como un PC o un ordenador industrial debe comprobarse que stos cumplan los est ndares IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 o IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 v lidos en cada caso A menos que est permitido expresamente no retire nunca la tapa ni componentes de la carcasa mientras el producto est en servicio Esto pone a descubierto los cables y componentes el ctricos y puede causar lesiones fuego o da os en el producto Si un producto se instala en un lugar fijo se deber primero conectar el conductor de protecci n fijo con el conductor de protecci n del producto antes de hacer cualquier otra conexi n La instalaci n y la conexi n deber n ser efectuadas por un electricista especializado En el caso de dispositivos fijos que no est n provistos de fusibles interruptor autom tico ni otros mecanismos de seguridad similares el circuito de alimentaci n debe estar protegido de modo que todas las personas que puedan acceder al producto as como el producto mismo est n a salvo de posibles da os Todo producto debe estar protegido contra sobretensi n debida p ej a una ca da del rayo mediante los correspondientes sistemas de protecci n Si no el personal que lo utilice quedar expuesto al peligro de choque el ctrico No debe introducirse en los orificios de la caja del aparato ning n objeto que no est destinado a ello Esto puede producir cortocircuitos e
56. ctrica Si se integran productos sin interruptor en bastidores o instalaciones se deber colocar el interruptor en el nivel de la instalaci n No utilice nunca el producto si est da ado el cable de conexi n a red Compruebe regularmente el correcto estado de los cables de conexi n a red Aseg rese mediante las medidas de protecci n y de instalaci n adecuadas de que el cable de conexi n a red no pueda ser da ado o de que nadie pueda ser da ado por l p ej al tropezar o por un choque el ctrico 1171 0000 42 07 Page 10 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Solamente est permitido el funcionamiento en redes de alimentaci n TN TT aseguradas con fusibles de 16 A como m ximo utilizaci n de fusibles de mayor amperaje solo previa consulta con el grupo de empresas Rohde 8 Schwarz Nunca conecte el enchufe en tomas de corriente sucias o llenas de polvo Introduzca el enchufe por completo y fuertemente en la toma de corriente La no observaci n de estas medidas puede provocar chispas fuego y o lesiones No sobrecargue las tomas de corriente los cables alargadores o las regletas de enchufe ya que esto podr a causar fuego o choques el ctricos En las mediciones en circuitos de corriente con una tensi n Uer gt 30 V se deber n tomar las medidas apropiadas para impedir cualquier peligro p ej medios de medici n adecuados seguros limitaci n de tensi n
57. e pulses with defined pulse width e rise time or fall time e and more __L____ EE A e A A 2 25 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 131 R amp S9RTM Search Reference for Search Menu SS Ol Pl Search type Source Gate Events Edge 4 4 Search Enables and disables the search mode Remote command Search type SEARch STATe on page 344 Selects the event you want to search for Edge Width Peak Rise Fall time Runt Data2Clock Pattern Similar to the edge trigger an edge search result is found when the waveform passes the given level in the specified direction For settings see chapter 10 3 2 Edge Setup on page 133 Similar to the width trigger a width search finds pulses with an exact pulse width or pulses shorter or longer than a given time or pulses inside or outside the allowable time range For settings see chapter 10 3 3 Width Setup on page 134 The peak search finds pulses exceeding a given amplitude For settings see chapter 10 3 4 Peak Setup on page 135 The rise or fall time search finds slopes with an exact rise or fall time or rise fall times shorter or longer than a given limit or rise fall times inside or outside the allowable time range For settings see chapter 10 3 5 Rise Fall Time Setup on page 135 The runt search finds pulses lower than normal in amplitude The ampli tude crosses the first threshold twice without crossi
58. essent nnns 430 STATusOUEGtonable COVerload EVEN 429 STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATusOUEG onable L IM CGONDion cono enne eene nnne nnns 428 STATusOUEGtonabie LIMICENAble nennen ener nnne neret enn nennt nnns 429 STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition seessssssssssssssseseseeee nennen enne nnne nennen nnne nnns inna 429 STATus QUEStionable LIMiIt PTRAanSitioN cnn nan ener nnne nnns nennen enn 430 STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVEN 429 STATus QUEStionable MASK CONDition 428 STATus QUEStionable MASK ENABle sss i en enne eterne ennt nennen nnne nnne ernst 429 SGTATusOUEGtonableMAGkNTRansitton coronan cnc nonn cnn nnnnn nc naar cnn nennt enn 429 STATusOUEGtonableMAGk PD Ransttion cnn nennen enne rnnt renes innere enn 430 STATus QUEStionable MASKE EVENI J 52 terror rut e rar iaa 429 STATus QUEStionable NTRansition iind retener tree ceteri eH EPIO Fe e Here Ee trad 429 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 430 STATUS QUEStionable EVENT 1 1 2 dr desen cadente deiade tdo dee ete deeds A 429 supo EDI TIME 272 SYST PRESO c 425 GvGTem COMMunicate PDlNier ENUMerate FIR 416 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NENT 416 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect 415 EK HR DATE A UD A YER EU a 424 SYS Tem ERRON ALL id 425 SYSTem ERROR NEXT 9 iaceat t eene ee merde tese be a er e e t ere D e t e E 425 Ssmi PEE 424
59. has the same effect as RST Usage Event E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 425 R8S RTM Remote Control ns Command Reference 14 2 16 Status Reporting 14 2 16 1 STATus OPERation Register The commands of the STATus OPERation subsystem control the status reporting structures of the STATus OPERation register See also e chapter 14 1 6 1 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 252 e STATus OPERation Register on page 257 The following commands are available STATus OPERation CONDItOF E 426 STATUSOPERSUOn ENA Be est cai ee ca done est detach ecoute A ea Pre eae nete eaae cp 426 STATUSSOPERationi RE Ee BEE 426 STATUS e EN ag E rire A Ad 426 STATUS OPERON EVEN riean A id 427 STATus OPERation CONDition Returns the of the CONDition part of the operational status register Return values lt Condition gt Condition bits in decimal representation ALIGnment bit 0 SELFtest bit 1 AUToset bit 2 WTRigger bit 3 Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Usage Query only STATus OPERation ENABle Enable Parameters Enable Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 STATus OPERation NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt Parameters lt NegativeTransition gt Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 STATus OPERation PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt Parameters lt PositiveTransition gt Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 426 Command Reference STATus OPERati
60. loscopes RST CH1 Intensities DISPlay INTensity WAV STO ici idad cidad 304 DISPlayINTensityiBACKIONL coo di 304 ei IER ele e 304 DISPlay PERSistence STATE ici a 304 DISPlay PERSiStence NEE 305 DISPlay PERSistencellN Finite caai e teeta xx ea eee 305 DISPlay PERSistence TIME AUTO ecrire khen teen p Rh m tuae RR a auk eL agi n Een 305 DISPLAY PERSISIENCO CUE EE 305 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 303 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm CR X O OR p Command Reference DISPlay INTensity WAVeform Intensity Defines the strength of the waveform line in the diagram Parameters Intensity Value in percent Range 0 to 100 Increment 1 RST not available RST does not change the intensity Default unit 96 DISPlay INTensity BACKlight Intensity Defines the intensity of the background lighting of the display Parameters Intensity Value in percent Range 10 to 100 Increment 1 RST not available RST does not change the intensity Default unit 96 DISPlay INTensity GRID Intensity Defines the intensity of the grid on the screen Parameters Intensity Value in percent Range 0 to 100 Increment 1 RST not available RST does not change the intensity Default unit 96 DISPlay PERSistence STATe State Defines whether the waveform persists on the screen or whether the scr
61. on page 48 7 Setthe Normal trigger mode Press the AUTO NORMAL key on the front panel until Norm is shown in the information bar LEE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 36 R amp S9RTM Triggers 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 3 Reference for Triggers Positioning the Trigger By positioning the trigger you define which part of the waveform is displayed mainly the pretrigger part or the posttrigger part or the part around the trigger point Therefore you set the time reference also known as reference point and the trigger position in relation to the time reference 1 To set the time reference point a Press the SETUP key on the left of the display b Select Time Reference c Turn the navigation knob to move the reference point 2 To set the trigger position turn the POSITION rotary knob in the HORIZONTAL func tional block Setting Up a Trigger Sequence An A B trigger sequence consists of two edge triggers connected by a time delay or event count 1 Press the SETUP key in the TRIGGER functional block Press the Trigger Type softkey and select Edge trigger Select Setup configure the A trigger and select Back Boo N Press the B Trigger softkey to enable the B trigger The LEVEL knob and SLOPE key on the front panel are automatically assigned to the B trigger You can change the assignment with the Trigger Level softkey in the Trigger menu 5 Press the B Setup softkey 6 Configure the
62. 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Basic Safety Instructions The product may be operated only from TN TT supply networks fuse protected with max 16 A higher fuse only after consulting with the Rohde 8 Schwarz group of companies Do not insert the plug into sockets that are dusty or dirty Insert the plug firmly and all the way into the socket provided for this purpose Otherwise sparks that result in fire and or injuries may occur Do not overload any sockets extension cords or connector strips doing so can cause fire or electric shocks For measurements in circuits with voltages V ms gt 30 V suitable measures e g appropriate measuring equipment fuse protection current limiting electrical separation insulation should be taken to avoid any hazards Ensure that the connections with information technology equipment e g PCs or other industrial computers comply with the IEC60950 1 EN60950 1 or IEC61010 1 EN 61010 1 standards that apply in each case Unless expressly permitted never remove the cover or any part of the housing while the product is in operation Doing so will expose circuits and components and can lead to injuries fire or damage to the product If a product is to be permanently installed the connection between the protective conductor terminal on site and the product s protective conductor must be made first before any other connection is made The product may be installed and connecte
63. 165 give nem macia ii Ra 165 icc ijr EE 165 GT EE 166 o A IA 166 GET EE 166 EORR A aded rea nto ud sire euis 166 e VT 166 EA e 2222 2 2 21 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 164 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 A sient A A 166 LTE 166 M MN NUT PT m 167 uo c catenins 167 oo NENNEN TEE 167 A datant alc ab tee 167 Start Sets the trigger to the start of the message The start condition is a falling slope on SDA while SCL is high Remote command TRIGger A I2C PATTern on page 374 STARt Stop Sets the trigger to the end of the message The stop condition is a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high Remote command TRIGger A I2C PATTern on page 374 STOP Restart Sets the trigger to a repeated start when the start condition occurs without previous stop condition This can happen when a master sends multiple messages without releasing the bus Remote command TRIGger A I2C PATTern on page 374 RESTart Acknowledge Missing acknowledge the instrument triggers if the slave does not send the acknowledge bit Acknowledging takes place after every byte If the transfer failed at the moment of the acknowledge bit the SDA line is on high level during the high period of the clock pulse Remote command TRIGger A I2C PATTern on page 374 MACKnowledge Read Write Sets the trigger to a read or write access of the master to an address or and to a bit pattern in the message The tri
64. 2 Reference for Triggers Channel N Source Selects one of the input channels as trigger source AC Line Source Selects the mains supply of the oscilloscope as trigger input for the edge trigger The instrument extracts the trigger signal from the power supply Extern Source Sets the External Trigger Input on the rear panel as trigger source Select the signal type that is connected AC or DC Remote command TRIGger EXTern COUPling on page 293 Hold Off Defines the holdoff as a time period The next trigger occurs only after the holdoff time has passed The trigger holdoff defines when the next trigger after the current will be recognized Thus it affects the next trigger to occur after the current one Holdoff helps to obtain stable triggering when the oscilloscope is triggering on undesired events Remote command TRIGger A HOLDoff TIME on page 294 B Trigger Activates or deactivates the second event in a trigger sequence The instrument triggers if both trigger event conditions A and B are fulfilled If the B trigger is activated the LEVEL rotary knob and the SLOPE key are automatically assigned to the B event You can toggle the assignment of these controls with the Trigger Level setting in the Trigger menu Remote command TRIGger B ENABle on page 299 B Setup Opens the menu for B trigger configuration The B trigger is a second edge trigger event that can be combined with a preceeding edge
65. 341 MASK e ln sceneries 341 Dese endi EP t m 341 MEASurement m ALL STA Te riri teen etre cre e rata eee rece pd 320 MEAGurementcmz AOEE 320 MEAGurementcmz AON AE 320 MEASurerment sm ARESult 51 stre pi eret ii 320 MEASurement m CATegoOry iiiecec e rre restet ane eeu oaa dnde E add bns inerti ner ENEE Fe FERRE Fa Fu 325 MEASurement m DELay SLOBe orte ente oer Ye ieee ep ebd p vage pend doe eee ga eee 324 MEASurement lt m gt MAIN MEASu rement m RESUIEAVGST rrr a aa 328 MEASurement m RESult NPEak ricco rette ehe dee iy SIR de da eae dog oa ua Ente d e dE Edge 328 MEASu rement m RESUItPPE ak dto eed ace ette lada bil di 328 MEAGurement mz RE Gut GT Dev 328 ME AGurement mz REGSOCWEMCount nc entnnen etn rnnn entren rne tent nsn tenr nsn ne nnns nnn 329 MEASurement lt m gt RESult ACTual MEASurementsm gt SOURYQCO eter cere crede a MEAGurement mz GTATlsticebtGet nono ncn nono n cn nnnn rra cane n nn nennen nenn rra nennt nien rntn nnn MEASurement lt m gt STATistics VALue ALLP oocooncccininccccnnocnccononccconencnnnnnncnnnnnnnncnnnn cnn anar n nn naar nana nnn nn nn nter nnne nn 329 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics VALUC lt N gt coccccccincccccononcccnnnnnncnnnnnncnnnnnnnnn nene n rn nennen ene n narran nn nr naar rnnnnananinnanes 329 MEAGurementmz GTATlsticewWEIG
66. 4 Selects the math waveform Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF CALCulate MATH m SCALe Scale Sets the vertical scale for the specified math waveform In FFT mode the command sets the vertical scale of the FFT window The scale unit for FFT is set with CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude SCALe Suffix m 1 4 Selects the math waveform IN FFT mode the numeric suffix is irrelevant User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 330 R8S RTM Remote Control Command Reference Parameters lt Scale gt Scale value Range 1 0E 24 to 5 0E 25 Increment 1 2 5 progression for example 1mV div 2mV div 5mV div 10 20 50 RST 1 CALCulate MATH m POSition Position Sets the vertical position of the specified math waveform in the window Suffix m 1 4 Selects the math waveform Parameters Position Position value given in divisions Range 1 880E 02 to 2 120E 02 Increment 0 01 in reset state RST 2 CALCulate MATH lt m gt EXPRession DEFine lt RemComplExpr gt Defines the equation to be calculated for the selected math waveform as a regular expression For details on available operators see Operator on page 99 Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the math waveform Parameters lt RemComplExpr gt String parameter consisting of the mathematical operation and the source s written in parenthesis Example CALC MATH 2 EXPR DEF CH1 CH2
67. 4 To select a search result turn the NAVIGATION knob eee User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 130 R amp SS9RTM Search mm OOI Reference for Search Menu The selected result is highlighted in the table and indicated in the diagram with a magnifier symbol 5 To see the selected event even if it is outside the display press Track event The waveform is moved on the display and the selected result is shown at the time reference point To use markers on search results 1 Ifthe search results table is not visible press View event table 2 To set markers to all results press Mark events If more then 20 results are found the first 20 results are marked 3 To set a marker to a selected result a Select the result in the Search Event Table by turning the NAVIGATION knob b Press the SET key 4 To select a marker e Press the NEXT key to move to next marker to the right e Press the PREV key to move to previous marker to the left 5 To delete a single marker select it an press the CLEAR key 6 To delete all markers press Clear all event markers To finish a search 1 To close the results table press View event table 2 To stop the search press Search 10 3 Reference for Search Menu 10 3 1 Main Search Menu The SEARCH MENU key opens the same named menu where you can search various events for example e edges e peaks
68. 4500 m above sea level A tolerance of 10 shall apply to the nominal voltage and 5 to the nominal frequency overvoltage category 2 pollution severity 2 2 Do not place the product on surfaces vehicles cabinets or tables that for reasons of weight or stability are unsuitable for this purpose Always follow the manufacturer s installation instructions when installing the product and fastening it to objects or structures e g walls and shelves An installation that is not carried out as described in the product documentation could result in personal injury or even death 3 Do not place the product on heat generating devices such as radiators or fan heaters The ambient temperature must not exceed the maximum temperature specified in the product documentation or in the data sheet Product overheating can cause electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or even death Electrical safety If the information on electrical safety is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death may occur 1 Prior to switching on the product always ensure that the nominal voltage setting on the product matches the nominal voltage of the AC supply network If a different voltage is to be set the power fuse of the product may have to be changed accordingly 2 In the case of products of safety class with movable power cord and connector operation is permitted only on sockets w
69. AU 302 DISPlay XY Y2S0UICG rei rni a epe eite petente dete t dye f De de De De de edes 302 MELENA A NN 302 DISPlay egracel c 303 RUE GES a G i Nell DEE 303 POR Mat BORDE caca 269 FORMADA ausentarse tds lll td 268 ue o A 415 HCOPy DESTination eccentric trt ctc ttd tcx tag bc cLabid 414 e ecrit itc rater dcc dte ctc dc 415 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation caca 415 Seca eo Uus Mas M ELI LEM E M M LE tes E 415 ETO ALVE EO ettet ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt osos 414 MASK ACTion PRINEEVENECOUN Lc ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt ttes 343 MASK ACTion PRINCEVENEMODE MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENECOUN Licor 343 MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENEMODE cocoa 342 MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENECOUN Lc caia 343 MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENEMODE canica 342 MASK ACTion STOP EVENECOUN tn aaa 343 MASICAC or STORPEVENEMDEDE aeta e o ludi d de ub dd 342 MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENECOUNCL ttt ttt ttt ttt ttt 343 MASK 5RESStCOU N fer MER 342 MASK SAV Bes sisi li erede edet endi dades cc nescitis ecd 340 MASKS OU RCC cic 340 IESSE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 440 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands MASK STATE ERR 340 MASKEEST reni ir AAA EE Rees 340 MASK iem O 342 MASK end nj T M M N 341 MASK YPIOSIDO EE
70. Ae 1er enero ette deat naan bide ae ee eh eg 289 PhRObBe cmz SGETupDNAMEN EE 289 PhRObBe mz GE Tup OFF Gwitch conca rra rear nn nena nn a nenn rra sse n nns nennn na sen rn sse n rennen 289 PROBesm SETUp TYPE ariran ER cod nea dg a nine en oie 289 PROBesm SETup UOFEFsel isse dd 290 REFGurvesrmi DATA HEADSAT oer ede ers eoe here e te erecto esee a c Re n Oed 311 REFCurve lt m gt DATA XINCrement E REF C rvesm gt DATA Colis ED 269 REFCurvesm DATA YINGremont irte ida aan oe gabe paaa 270 REFGurvesm DATA YORIGIR a siio erre meter re eere ere eret Dreher medina ER e eorr ere eee Dern 270 REFGCupwe mzs DATA VREGoluton sse ncnnnnnn cane n nc nene rca ran rnn teen rent nsn nnnt nsn n nnns sena 271 REFG rvesm DATA i 311 REFCurve lt m gt HORizontal POSition REFGurve sm HORIzontal SCALOe eiii eet uaa dee tet aede ez eddie die Yeh pa e Die epe and REFCurvesm gt LOAD Te leie RE REN REFCURVESM gt eegechgegeetegdegei R REFCurvesm SOURCO mii ad REFCurve lt m gt SOURce CATalog E REE CURVESM gt STAT c REFCurvesm gt UPDate erae irte ea teenie ll eases and anal Dede eines REFCurvesm gt VERTiCal POSIION cnica REFGurve lt m gt VER Tical SCALE 2 e eto pectet geht ve e dade t gt eb e de vet e d d ESCASA AO A REFLevel RELative MIDDle em REFLevel RElativo MODE tis
71. Aux Cursor Trigger Event to display a trigger cursor A rhombus marks the point where the trigger event happened Press DISPLAY Aux Cursor Channel Cursors to display a channel cursor A dashed line is displayed that marks the ground level of the displayed channel If a DC offset is defined a second auxiliary line is displayed The distance between those two lines is the DC offset Press DISPLAY Aux Cursor Defaults to restore the default setting both cursors displayed Configuring the Waveform Display The waveform display depends on the following criteria Intensities adjust the optimal contrast of the display See To configure intensity on page 52 Persistence defines how long a data point is displayed in the diagram See To con figure persistence on page 52 RETE RU RA E E AA lt lt lt LLL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLTLLL User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 51 R amp S9RTM Display General Display Settings Brightness and signal colors depend on the cumulative frequency of the value See To configure brightness on page 52 Waveform as line or points see To set the waveform style on page 53 To configure intensity For optimal contrast you can change the intensity of the waveform of the grid and of the backlight 1 2 Press DISPLAY gt Intensities To set the intensity of the waveform a Press Waveform b Enter a percentage between 0 not visible
72. B trigger Select B Source and Slope and turn the LEVEL rotary knob to adjust the B trigger level 7 Define the connection between the A and B triggers by doing one of the following e Press Time and adjust the delay time with the navigation knob e Press Events and enter the number of B trigger events that have to be fulfilled until the instrument triggers Reference for Triggers The trigger settings are located in the TRIGGER functional block on the front panel and in the Trigger softkey menu __L_LL__ ES E A lt lt tathbeAALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULL AeLUZUSX User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 37 R amp S RTM Triggers Reference for Triggers 3 3 1 TRIGGER Controls The keys and the rotary knob in the TRIGGER functional block adjust the trigger and start or stop acquisition TRIGGER TRG d LEVEL JE 50 Ei RUN CONT Starts and stops the continuous acquisition A green light indicates a running acquisition A red light shows that acquisition is stopped The status is also shown at the right end of the information bar Run or Complete Remote command RUN on page 271 RUNContinous on page 272 STOP on page 272 RUN Nx SINGLE Starts a defined number of acquisitions Press the key again to stop running acquisitions To set the number of acquisitions press the ACQUISITION key and enter Nx Single Remote command SINGle on page 272 RUNSingle on page 272 FORCE If the acquisition is r
73. CHANnel lt m gt POSition on page 280 CALCulate MATH m POSition on page 331 BUS POSition on page 360 OFFSET POSITION OFFSET The offset voltage is subtracted to correct an offset affected signal The vertical center of the selected channel is shifted by the offset value and the signal is re positioned within the diagram area Use the offset to measure small AC voltages that are overlaid by higher DC voltages Unlike AC coupling the DC part of the signal is not lost with offset setting The device under test is not affected The offset always has to be set manually it is not included in the autoset process Turn clockwise to move the waveform down At zero crossing the knob shortly snaps in and the setting is kept constant to simplify the zero setting If an active probe is connected the offset limit is defined by the probe Refer to the doc umentation of the probe for allowed values Remote command CHANnel lt m gt OFFSet on page 280 PROBe m SETup UOFFset on page 290 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 28 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup DREES Reference for Waveform Setup SCALE Y Scale Sets the vertical scale in Volts per division to change the amplitude of the selected chan nel math or reference waveform or of the decoded bus signal The current value is shown in the waveform label above the grid The knob lights up in the color of the selected waveform Turn SCALE clockwise to stretch th
74. CQ e de de DW CAN FRAMe lt n gt DATA on page 394 U US CAN FRAMe lt n gt STATus on page 393 CAN FRAMe lt n gt STARt on page 393 CAN FRAMe lt n gt STOP on page 393 CAN FRAMe lt n gt TYPE on page 392 CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDTYpe on page 396 CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDSTate on page 396 CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDValue on page 396 CAN FRAMe lt n gt ACKState on page 394 CAN FRAMe n ACKValue on page 394 CAN FRAMe lt n gt CSSTate on page 395 CAN FRAMe lt n gt CSValue on page 395 CAN FRAMe lt n gt DLCState on page 395 CAN FRAMe lt n gt DLCValue on page 395 CAN FRAMe lt n gt BSEPosition on page 396 CAN FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt on page 397 CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STATe on page 397 e UJ dE gj S Ri UM DES de Ug 8 wg Je ER JS US gt oU a CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue on page 397 11 6 5 Search on Decoded CAN Data Using the search functionality you can find various events in the decoded data the same events which you also can trigger on Before you can start the search you have to con figure the bus correctly and acquire decoded data To search on decoded data use the search type Protocol The source is automatically set to the configured protocol See also chapter 10 Search on page 128 11 6 5 1 CAN Search Setup Protocol eres O OOOO Exp Identifier Back ld amp Error Se
75. DHCP If the network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using DHCP all address information can be assigned automatically Next Parameter Interface For settings that require several entries in one row Next selects the next entry To select the next setting in the dialog press Down to select the previous setting press Up Up Parameter Interface Selects the previous setting in the dialog Down Parameter Interface Selects the next setting in the dialog Default Parameter Interface Restores the default interface settings Save Parameter Interface Saves the changes to the instrument and closes the dialog Device Information Displays insformation on the instrument such as its serial number the installed software version and hardware information This information is required in case of a support request Update Provides functions to update the help files or firmware of the instrument or interfaces User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 226 R amp S RTM General Instrument Setup lt A4A4A A J ugMuQ Y Reference for Setup Firmware Update Allows you to update the instrument firmware The currently installed firmware version is displayed as well as all available update versions if a USB flash drive containing an update is identified The instrument is only updated when you press Execute
76. Display When you activate zoom display two windows are displayed the original waveform dia gram at the top Y t window and the zoom window at the bottom The zoom area defines the part of the original waveform to be zoomed It is indicated by white lines in the original Y t window LEE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 62 R amp S RTM Display Zoom TB 100ns T 44ns Auto CH1 626 75 mV AC 5 GSals Realtime Complete Z 20ns Tz 40ns 5 GSals The usual channel parameters are displayed in the information bar above the original Y t window see the general display information described in the Getting Started man ual In addition the zoom area parameters are indicated in the information bar above the zoom window The following information is given there Z Zoom Time Base i e scaling for the time base in the zoom window in seconds per division deter mines the width of the zoom area that is displayed in the zoom window 10 divisions scaling per division Tz Zoom Time i e the offset of the trigger point to the reference point Os in the zoom window deter mines the position of the zoom area Sample rate for zoom window Pressing the horizontal SCALE rotary knob moves the focus between the Y t window Time Control the zoom area Zoom Control and the zoom window The currently selected screen area is highlighted and displayed in the information bar of the zoom window Depending on the se
77. If Average is selected enter the Number of Averages that is the number of wave forms used for average calculation 6 Select the Waveform Rate 2 2 4 Starting and Stopping Acquisition You can control the acquisition in two ways e Running continuous acquisition until you stop it User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 21 R amp S9RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup 2 3 2 3 1 Reference for Waveform Setup e Running one acquisition or a given number of acquisitions Prerequisites e Probes are connected e Vertical and horizontal settings are adjusted e Triggering is set e Channels to be acquired are turned on To start and stop continuous acquisition 1 Check if the trigger mode is set to Normal The trigger mode is shown in the top information bar If not press the MODE key on the front panel to toggle the setting 2 Press the RUN CONT key to start acquisition The acquisition starts if a trigger occurs 3 To stop press the RUN CONT key again The acquisition stops immediately To acquire a limited number of acquisitions 1 Press the ACQUISITION key in the HORIZONTAL area of the front panel 2 Select Nx Single and enter the number of acquisitions 3 Press the RUN Nx SINGLE key on the front panel You can stop the acquisition before it is finished by pressing the key again Reference for Waveform Setup HORIZONTAL Controls Time base settings adjust the display in horizontal direction Use t
78. MODE cio m 384 TRIGJe rA UART PAN Tola ia e di dia iii 385 TRICIA VART PLENG EE 385 TRIGJS T UART POFFS 0b niione dE 385 TRIGger A SOURce UART lt UartSource gt Selects one of the Rx and Tx lines as trigger source Parameters lt UartSource gt RX TX RST RX TRIGger A UART MODE lt Mode gt Specifies the trigger mode for UART RS 232 interfaces Parameters lt Mode gt BSTart SBIT NTHSymbol SYMBol PATTern PRERror FERRor BREak BSTart Burst start Sets the trigger to the begin of a data frame The frame start is the first start bit after the idle time SBIT Start bit The start bit is the first low bit after a stop bit NTHSymbol Sets the trigger to the n th symbol of a burst SYMBol Triggers if a pattern occurs in a symbol at any position in a burst PATTern Triggers on a serial pattern at a defined position in the burst To define the pattern use TRIGger A UART PLENgth and TRIGger A UART PATTGEn To define the position use TRIGger A UART POFFset on page 385 PRERror Parity Error Triggers if a bit error occured in transmission FERRor Triggers on frame error BREak Triggers if a start bit is not followed by a stop bit within a defined time During the break the stop bits are at low state RST SBIT AAA A lt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 384 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control MGR s Command Reference TRIGger A
79. Parameters for setting and query lt FileName gt String parameter containing the file name User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 421 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Example Example Command Reference MMEM DATA abc txt 4216This is the file 2 the length infomation has two digits 16 the binary data has 16 bytes MMEM DATA abc txt received This is the file chapter 14 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 433 MMEMory STORe STATe lt StateNumber gt lt FileName gt Saves the current device settings to the specified file in the current directory Setting parameters lt StateNumber gt lt FileName gt Example Example Usage Range 1 to 1 Increment 0 RST 1 String parameter File name with or without file extension MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA MMEM STOR STAT 1 MORNING SET chapter 14 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 433 Setting only MMEMory LOAD STATe lt StateNumber gt lt FileName gt Loads the device settings from the specified file in the current directory Setting parameters lt StateNumber gt lt FileName gt Example Example Usage Range 1 to 1 Increment 0 RST 1 String parameter File name with or without file extension MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA MMEM LOAD STAT 1 MORNING chapter 14 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 433 Setting only User Manua
80. PatternLength gt Range 1 to 32 Increment 1 RST 4 Example TRIG A SPI PATT 0011XXXX0110 TRIG A SPI PLEN 12 TRIG A SPI PLEN 4 TRIG A SPI PATT 0011 TRIGger A SPI POFFset lt PatternBitOffset gt Sets the number of bits before the first bit of the pattern Parameters lt PatternBitOffset gt Number of ignored bits Range O to 4095 Increment 1 RST 0 SPI Decode Results BUSSPRFCQUIE D 366 BUS PEERANMESA STATUS te oaa Rete ena nas dw Oc nane a ave C nRGRYR ANUS xac sa ENDO Rang 366 BUSISPEIFRAMESBSISTARLU oi ara E Rar Re XR dne tri re Ra RE e Ra een ra arua 366 BUS SPEFRAMESImRSESTOBST cosida dia dla dio dada dadas va eda uud 366 BUS SPUFRAMESASDATA MUSSO EE 367 BUS SPEFRAMESA DATAMOSI ii ias 367 BUS SPUPRAMESS WCOOUNT coca e Ve dud eua 367 BUS KE Ee e REN RTE 368 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 365 R8S RTM Remote Control m C Qt Command Reference BUS SPEFRAMESmIWORDSOS KE nu teeietic re enata eterna en eue inia niece anh depre 368 BUS SPLFRAME MS leet KEE 368 BUS SPLFRAME lt SNAWORDS0 gt MISO osa A da AEE EE Y 369 BUS SPI FCOunt Returns the number of decoded frames Return values lt FrameCount gt Total number of decoded frames Usage Query only BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt STATus Returns the overall state of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt
81. R amp S RTM Measurements KEE A pe Automatic Measurements EASurement lt m gt RESult PPEak on page 328 EASurement m RESult WFMCount on page 329 EASurement m STATistics VALue ALL on page 329 EASurement lt m gt STATistics VALue lt n gt on page 329 6 3 2 Configuring and Performing Automatic Measurements To configure and activate automatic measurements 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press Meas Place to select one of the four measurement positions 3 Press Source to select the waveform for which the measurement is to be performed The source can be any active signal or math waveform 4 Press Meas Type to select the type of measurement to perform The type deter mines which results are displayed in the result table See also Meas Type on page 92 5 Forrise time fall time delay and phase measurements press Reference Level and set the reference levels as percentages of the high signal level See also Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels on page 93 6 Press Measure 1 4 until On is highlighted to activate the measurement The selected measurement is activated and the results are displayed in the result table To activate configured automatic measurements 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press Meas Place to select one of the four measurement positions 3 Press Measure 1 4 until On is highlighted To deactivate automatic measurements 1 Press the MEAS key 2 Press
82. R amp S RTM K1 Press Configuration Press Source and select Clk Press Clock and select the input channel of the clock Select the Slope Press Source and select MOSI N OQ a BR Oo Press MOSI and select the input channel With Active select the active state of the data high or low e If required repeat steps 6 and 7 for the optiona MISO line 9 For SPI press Source and select CS Enter the input channel with Chip Select and set the Active state 10 For SSPI press Source and select Time Enter the Idle Time 11 Set the First Bit and the Symbol Size CS CH1 Clock CH2 TERTERA MOSI CH3 mB X MISO CH1 AMB K 12 Press Find level or set the threshold manually for each channel See To set the logic threshold on page 144 Now you can disply the decoded signal and the frame table with results The display of the decoded data is described in To configure decoding and data dis play on page 145 11 3 2 2 SPI SSPI Configuration Settings Access PROTOCOL gt Bus type SPI or SSPI Configuration Configuration Source Chip Select Active First Bit Bit Symbol size Find Level e m n f Back Chip Select CH1 Low J mse ONEI OACI 8Bit ETSE Cran Chip Select Clock MOSI MISO erroe rhe tents SEENEN 153 fence 153 eo MO 153 MRM NE e E 154 xg RTT TET 154 SUMAN SIS n
83. R amp S RTM instruments Parameters lt Source gt NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 RST NONE DISPlay XY ZMODe lt Mode gt Activates or deactivates the intensity control of the waveform via an additional signal source and sets the intensity mode a User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 302 R8S RTM Remote Control m 2 sp l Command Reference Parameters Mode ANALog DIGital OFF ANALog Modulated intensity Intensity is modulated continuously accord ing to the selected Source Z DIGital Intensity is determined by a threshold value defined with DISPlay XY ZTHReshold If the Z signal value is below the selected threshold the corresponding x y point is not displayed If the Z signal value is above the threshold the x y point is displayed with the defined intensity level OFF Intensity control is deactivated RST OFF DISPlay XY ZTHReshold lt Zthreshold gt Defines the threshold for intensity with a two state modulation if DISPlay XY Z2MODe is set to DIGital Parameters lt Zthreshold gt Threshold for visibility on the screen Range 10 to 10 Increment depends on the scaling of the channel that is assigned to Z RST 0 Default unit V DISPlay XY ZSOurce Source Defines the source to be used to determine the intensity of the xy waveform Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil
84. RANGe the lt Time1 gt defines the center of a range which is defined by the limits lt Delta gt set with TRIGger A WIDTh DELTa For the ranges SHORter and LONGer the width defines the maximum and minimum pulse width respectively Parameters lt Time1 gt Center value maximum value or minimum value depending on the defined range type Range 20E 9 to 6 87194685440 Increment Depends on the lt Time1 gt value RST 20E 9 Video TV Trigger Tislger NR DEET 296 TRIGGOrRATTVPOL EE 297 TRIGOENA TV FELO ico ita 297 WRRIG GS TEE 297 TRIGger A TV STANdard lt Standard gt Selects the color television standard T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 296 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m Msml Command Reference Parameters Standard PAL NTSC SECam PALM 1576 P720 P1080 11080 PALM PAL M 1576 SDTV 576i PAL and SECAM P720 P1080 HDTV 720 1080p progressive scanning 11080 HDTV 1080i interlaced scanning RST PAL TRIGger A TV POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects the polarity of the signal Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity The edges of the sync pulses are used for triggering See also Signal on page 45 Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive If the video modulation is positive the sync pulses are negative NEGative If the modulation is negative sync pulses are positive RST NEGative
85. RST OFF SEARch PROTocol CAN BITSterror lt BitStuffingError gt Searches for bit stuffing errors See also Stuff bit on page 183 The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt BitStuffingError gt ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol CAN CRCerror lt CRCerror gt Searches for errors in the Cyclic Redundancy Check The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt CRCerror gt ON OFF RST OFF User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 399 R8S RTM Remote Control m J smemrl Command Reference SEARch PROTocol CAN FORMerror lt FormError gt Searches for form errors A form error occurs when a fixed form bit field contains one or more illegal bits The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt FormError gt ON OFF RST OFF SEARch PROTocol CAN FTYPe Specifies the frame type to be searched for if SEARch PROToco1 CAN CONDition is set to IDENtifier Parameters lt FrameType gt DATA REMote ANY SEARch PROTocol CAN ITYPe Selects the length of the identifier 11 bit for CAN base frames or 29 bits for CAN exten ded frames The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDENtifier IDData o
86. SEARCH MENU gt Events Events are the search results which are marked in the waveform diagram and listed in the event table See also chapter 10 1 1 Search Results on page 128 leed Mark events Track event so Clear all event marks N View event table Shows or hides the table of search results Remote command SEARch RESDiagram SHOW on page 357 Mark events Sets markers to the first search results Up to 20 markers can be set at once Clear all event marks Removes all markers from search results Track event If enables the selected result is moved to the reference point Thus you can always see the selected event in the diagram EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 143 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis Basics of Protocol Analysis 11 Protocol Analysis With the R amp S RTM and some additional options you can analyze the following parallel and serial protocols e Parallel e SPI Serial Peripheral Interface with 3 lines and SSPI Serial Peripheral Interface with 2 lines requires option R amp S RTM K1 e PC Inter Integrated circuit bus requires option R amp S RTM K1 e UART RS232 EIA 232 serial interface requires option R amp S RTM K2 e CAN Controller Area Network requires option R amp S RTM K3 LIN Local Interconnect Network requires option R amp S RTM K3 11 1 Basics of Protocol Analysis The analysis of parallel and serial data consists of three main steps e Protocol
87. SEARCH TRIGIE WIDTO TEVE occ a da oda 348 SEARcl TRIGSgerMIDTBhIEEVeL DELTa 5 iod or Ree eaa do e eri Rene etnia 348 SGEARch TRilGoer WID ThRANGe eene eene nnn nana rnn rn nn n nn nen 348 SEARCH TRIGGER WIDTRIWID e DEE 349 SEARCH TRIGG WIDTAE DELTA ierra rore roter a da 349 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh POLarity lt Polarity gt Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 347 R8S RTM Remote Control m nmue r Command Reference Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative RST POS Example chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh LEVel Level Sets the voltage level on which the pulse width is measured Parameters Level RST 500 mV Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh LEVel DELTa lt DeltaLevel gt Sets a hysteresis range above and below the search level to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level Parameters lt DeltaLevel gt Range Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set tings no upper limit RST 200 mV Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh RANGe Range Sets how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s To set the width use SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh To set the range At use SEARch T
88. Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock STIMe lt SetupTime gt Sets the minimum time before the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady above or below the data level The setup time can be negative In this case the setup interval starts after the clock edge and the hold time must be positive and longer than the absolute value of the setup time Parameters lt SetupTime gt Range depends on time base and sample interval Firmware Software FW 03 800 Pattern Search Configuration SEARch TRIGSerPATTem3iSOURCO ii da 355 SEARG TRIGE PAT Tem PUN CON accio Lerner e ERES ht taraen edet 355 SEARch TRiGger PATTem LEVel lt n gt aieas aiana enne nennen nennen 356 SEARch TRIGger PAT Ter EVelen DEL Ta ut tado reo eee ad 356 SGEARch TRilGoerPATTermWIDThRANGe ee eee eene enne nennt nter nhe nnns 356 SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh WIDTh eeeeeeeeeeereneeeeennrn nennen 357 SEARscI TRIGger PATTemWIDTRDEL Ta tue dena nt eeu dee dee 357 SEARch TRIGger PATTern SOURce Pattern Specifies the search pattern the state for each channel Parameters Pattern String parameter String containing 0 1 X x for each channel The order of channels is fixed CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Example SEAR TRIG PATT SOUR 1X10 CH1 CH3 are high CH4 is low These states are logically com bined with SEARch TRIGger PATTern FUNCtion CH2 does not matter don t care SEARch TRIGger PATTern FUNCtion Function
89. TRIGger A I2C AMODe and TRIGger A I2C ADDRess address and or TRIGger A I2C POFFset and TRIGger A I2C PLENgth and TRIGger A I2C PATTern pattern RST STARt TRIGger A I2C ACCess Access Toggles the trigger condition between Read and Write access of the master Parameters lt Access gt READ WRITe RST READ TRIGger A I2C AMODe lt AdrMode gt Sets the lenght of the slave address Parameters lt AdrMode gt NORMal EXTended NORMal 7 bit address EXTended 10 bit address RST NORMal TRIGger A I2C ADDRess lt AddressString gt Sets the address of the slave device The address can have 7 bits or 10 bits T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 373 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Parameters lt AddressString gt Example Example Command Reference String with max 7 or 10 characters depending on the address length Characters 0 1 and X are allowed but X cannot be assigned to a specified bit If at least one X occurs in the address the complete address is set to X TRIG A 12C AMOD NORM TRIG A I2C ADDR 1011 TRIG A I2C ADDR Return value 7bit address 0001011 TRIG A I2C AMOD EXT TRIG A I2C ADDR 10X1 TRIG A I2C ADDR Return value 10bit address XXXXXXXXXX TRIGger A I2C PATTern lt DataPattern gt Defines the bit pattern as trigger condition Make sure that the correct pattern length has been defined before with TRIGger A 12C PLENgth Parameters lt DataPat
90. TRIGger A TV FIELd Field Sets the trigger on the beginning of the video signal fields or on the beginning of video signal lines Parameters Field EVEN ODD ALL LINE ALINe EVEN ODD Triggers only on the field start of even or odd fields Only available for interlaced scanning ALL All fields triggers on the frame start progressive scanning or any field start interlaced scanning LINE Triggers on the beginning of a specified line in any field The line number is set with TRIGger A TV LINE ALINe Triggers on the beginning of all video signal lines RST ALL TRIGger A TV LINE Line Sets an exact line number if TRIGger A TV is set to LINE ERA AA e 2 A 20 2 22555 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 297 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control Command Reference Parameters Line Range 1 to 525 NTSC PAL M 625 PAL SECAM SDTV 1 576 750 HDTV P720 1125 HDTV 11080 HDTV P1080 Increment 1 RST 1 14 2 5 5 Pattern Trigger TRIGger A PATTern SOURce lt SourceString gt Select the state for each digital channel Parameters lt SourceString gt string containing 0 1 or X for each channel 1 high the signal voltage is higher than the trigger level 0 low the signal voltage is lower than the trigger level X Don t care the channel does not affect the trigger Example TRIG A PATT SOUR 1X10 CH1 CH3 and NOT CH4 are logically combined with TRIGger A PATTern FUNCtion CH2 does no
91. WAI Com Action Programming the controller mand OPC Sets the Operation Complete bit in the ESR e Setting bit 0 in the ESE after all previous commands have been execu e Setting bit 5 in the SRE ted e Waiting for service request SRQ OPC Stops command processing until 1 is returned Sending OPC directly after the command This is only the case after the Operation Com whose processing should be terminated before plete bit has been set in the ESR This bit indi other commands can be executed cates that the previous setting has been com pleted WAI Stops further command processing until all Sending WAI directly after the command commands sent before WAI have been exe whose processing should be terminated before cuted other commands are executed Command synchronization using WAI or OPC appended to an overlapped command is a good choice if the overlapped command takes only little time to process The two synchronization techniques simply block overlapped execution of the command For time consuming overlapped commands it is usually desirable to allow the controller or the instrument to do other useful work while waiting for command execution Use one of the following methods OPC with a service request 1 Set the OPC mask bit bit no 0 in the ESE ESE 1 2 Set bit no 5 in the SRE SRE 32 to enable ESB service request 3 Send the overlapped command with OPC User Manual 1305 0595 02
92. WM Selects the frame Return values lt Status gt OK INCFirst INCLast INSufficient INCFirst First frame is incomplete INCLast Last frame is incomplete Usage Query only BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt i Selects the frame T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 366 R8S RTM Remote Control EES Command Reference Return values lt StopTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt DATA MISO Returns the data words of the specified frame of the MISO line Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame Return values lt DataMiso gt List of decimal values of data bytes Example BUS SPI FRAM3 DATA MISO gt 94 177 171 60 242 219 100 0 Usage Query only BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt DATA MOSI Returns the data words of the specified frame of the MOSI line Suffix n q Selects the frame Return values lt DataMosi gt List of decimal values of data bytes Example BUS SPI FRAM3 DATA MOSI 94 177 171 60 242 219 100 0 Usage Qu
93. With this color range rare values are displayed in blue while more frequent values are red and very frequent values are displayed in yellow or white with various colors inbetween EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 52 R amp S RTM Display AAA a SS a es General Display Settings It is also possible to invert the brightness display so that rare values are brighter than frequent values 1 To convert the brightness level to a color range press DISPLAY gt Temperature Colors 2 To invert the brightness level of the signals press DISPLAY gt Inverse Brightn To set the waveform style By default the individual data points are connected by a line Alternatively only the indi vidual data points can be displayed You can change the strength of the line using the INTENSITY knob on the left side of the screen Press DISPLAY gt Dots Only to display the data points only 4 1 2 Display Menu The DISPLAY key provides functions for configuring the display Display E Display Mode Dots Only Inverse Brightn Temper Colors iti el Lo XYZ Setup E Intensities E f A A D I More 112 Display Auxiliary Cursors 4 BR O 54 A B 54 gu 54 E ta 54 el EE 54 EE 54 LE id 55 L Persist Tine iii dc e ia 55 A NER T 55 cus ari a cid 55 is e 55 Temper COIS ni a ne tatu eee rae E ee He aee rex ido 55 PUR CIO iia ETT 56 o alts sla dr
94. activate intensity control by the Z source Press the second Source Z softkey repeatedly until the required channel for inten sity control is selected LEE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 59 R amp S RTM Display XY Diagram 4 Press Z Intensity until Modulation is highlighted to select intensity control via modulation To configure the intensity of an XY waveform using a threshold value Prerequisite The Display Mode is set to XY and the XY diagram is configured 1 Press DISPLAY gt XYZ Setup gt Z Setup 2 Press the left Source Z softkey until ON is highlighted to activate intensity control by the Z source 3 Press the second Source Z softkey repeatedly until the required channel for inten sity control is selected 4 Press Z Intensity until ON OFF is highlighted to select intensity control via a threshold value 5 Press Threshold and enter the required value to define the threshold value 4 2 2 XYZ Setup Menu The setup of XY diagrams is a submenu of the Display menu Access DISPLAY XYZ Setup XYZ Setup Source X Source Y1 Source Y2 Z Setup Source X Defines the source to be displayed in x direction in an XY diagram replacing the usual time base The source can be selected from any of the analog channels The function is available in R amp S RTM1054 Remote command DISPlay XY XSOurce on page 302 Source Y1 Defines the first source to be displayed in y directi
95. address If the address is not relevant for your trigger condition set it to OxX any address Press Data Setup to specify data bytes of the message and or to a serial pat tern T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 163 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 d Set the Byte Offset the number of bytes to be ignored before the first byte of interes t e Set the Number of Bytes contained in the pattern f Enter the pattern either as binary input or as hexadecimal input e For binary input press Bit and enter the bit number to be set The bits are counted inside the selected bytes the selected bit is highlighted in the pattern bit line Then enter the State of this bit 0 1 or X don t care Repeat these settings until all bit states are defined e For hexadecimal input press Byte and select the byte to be set The selected byte is highlighted in the lower pattern line Then press Value and turn the navigation knob to change the bits Repeat these settings until all bytes are defined If the data is not relevant for your trigger condition set all data bytes to OxXX 12C Setup Trigger On Read SCL CH SDA CH1 d Slave Address OxOb 7Bit Byte Offset 2Byte Data 00110011 xolo1111 10101111 0x33 OxXX Oxaf 11 4 3 2 PC Trigger Settings I2C Trigger ijj m UEM 165 lj 165 LEE E MPH
96. address gt inst0 INSTR where e instOisthe LAN device name VISA supports several devices running on the instru ment On R amp S RTM only one device is configured so the LAN device name can be omitted e INSTRindicates that the VXI 11 protocol is used Example If the instrument has the IP address 192 1 2 3 the valid resource string is TCPIP 192 1 2 3 INSTR With host name instead of IP address TCPIP host name gt inst0 INSTR Example If the computer name is RSRT7 the valid resource string is TCPIP RSRT1 INSTR User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 237 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 1 3 14 1 4 14 1 4 1 Basics Raw socket mode TCPIP lt IP_address gt lt IP port gt SOCKET The default port number for SCPI socket communication is 5025 Example If the instrument has the IP address 192 7 2 3 the valid resource string is TCPIP 192 1 2 3 5025 SOCKET With host name instead of IP address TCPIP host name IP port SOCKET Example If the host name is RSRT7 the valid resource string is TCPIP RSRT1 5025 SOCKET The end character must be set to linefeed Switching to Remote Control When you switch on the instrument it is always in manual operation state local state and can be operated via the front panel When you send a command from the control computer it is received and executed by the R amp S RTM The display remains on manual opera
97. ae diene leet aem gal 357 SEARECHRESUA EE 358 e Ge gc e 358 oup ME elas 359 SEARch RESDiagram SHOW lt ResultShow gt Shows or hides the table of search results Parameters lt ResultShow gt ON OFF RST OFF Example chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 Firmware Software FW 03 400 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 357 R8S RTM Remote Control EENEG Command Reference SEARch RESult ALL Returns all result values of the search Return values lt AllResults gt List of results items seperated by comma For each result six values are returned 1 Result number as indicated in the search results table 2 X position time of the search result 3 Y position of the search result currently not relevant 4 Type of the search result Edge Peak 5 Slope or polarity of the search result 6 For peak searches the value contains the peak voltage For width searches it contains the pulse width For edge searches the value is not relevant Example SEARCh RESult ALL Returns all four results of a peak search 1 4 7750e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 2 4 4630e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 3 4 1660e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 4 3 8690e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 Example chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 Usage Q
98. and 100 very strong The default value is 50 You can also use the INTENSITY knob on the left side of the screen to adjust the waveform intensity directly To set the intensity of the grid a Press Grid b Enter a percentage between 0 and 100 The default value is 34 To set the intensity of the backlight a Press Backlight b Enter a percentage between 10 and 100 The default value is 50 To configure persistence 1 4 To display only the current signal at any time press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Per sistence until Off is highlighted To have the instrument define the optimal persistence automatically press DISPLAY gt ntensities gt Persistence until Automatic is highlighted To configure the persistence manually a Press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Persistence until Manual is highlighted b Press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Persist Time to define the persistence time c Enter a value between 50 ms and 9 6 s or Infinite Each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen for the defined dura tion If Infinite is selected each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen infinitely until this setting is changed or the persistence is cleared To update the waveform press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Clear Persist To configure brightness For better distinction of rare and frequent values you can apply a color range to the value frequency
99. and listed in the event table as usual Instead of the event table you can display the frame table where the search results are also marked The event flags are not saved in the csv file of the frame table R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 TB 2ms T 79 88ms Auto CH1 4 44 V DC 500kSa s Real Time Complete OG A PAN CT K 3 OF55 ES OF Chks dE 94 560 ms 3 er_Requ 8 2300 O1FF FFFF FFFF DB OK Frames 7 11 15 Protocol Event Symbolic ID Identifier ld amp Error Ignition_Info Setup Fig 11 17 Search for data frames with 11 bit identifier search results are marked in frame table and on the decoded data User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 203 R amp S RTM Data and File Management Printing 12 Data and File Management This chapter describes how to print screenshots and how to manage measurement set tings and data 9 APM e id dt 204 e Saving and Loading ecc ida een 206 12 1 Printing You can create a sceenshot of the current display of your waveforms and measurement results and print it on a printer To optimize the output you can configure different color modes The printer has to be connected to a Type A USB port Alternatively you can save screenshots to files see also chapter 12 2 5 Screenshots on page 219 If you want to print many screenshots you can assign the printout function to the PRINT key This key is a shortcut key that initiates the assigned action at
100. available 3 Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir 4 Press Create dir to create a new subdirectory under the selected directory Enter a name for the subdirectory as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 207 5 Press Remove dir to remove a directory that you no longer need 6 Press Accept to confirm the selected storage directory To define a new file or directory name When you create a new directory or press File name to define the name of the storage file a text editor is displayed in which you can enter the new name 1 Use the Navigate knob to select a character 2 Press Character Set if available to display additional characters 3 Press Backspace to delete the character to the left of the cursor 4 Press the Cursor gt and Cursor softkeys to scroll through the characters of the name a Press Default name to restore the default name 6 Press Accept to save the defined name Importing and Exporting Data To copy data from one storage device to another the Import Export functions are used The procedures is the same for all data types LL User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 207 R amp S9RTM Data and File Management Saving and Loading The name ofthe target file can be changed so you can copy and rename in one operation For ref
101. be set to a value 3 to 5 times the fastest frequency component of the signal A higher sample rate increases signal fidelity increases the chance to capture glitches and other signal anomalies and improves the zoom in capa bilities Acquisition Settings The resulting sample rate can be the same as the constant ADC sample rate or higher or lower By default the real time sample mode is used With fast time base settings the sample rate becomes higher than the ADC sample rate The missising waveform samples are added to the ADC samples with sin x x interpolation automatically When measuring high frequency repetitive signals whose frequency components are even higher than the ADC sample rate equivalent time sampling is used to capture the waveform This sample mode captures ADC samples over a number of subsequent repetitions at different points in time and creates one waveform with higher sample rate from this data At lower time base settings the required sample rate is lower than the ADC sample rate To reduce the sample rate decimation methods are used sample and peak detect As digital waveform data is stored in the memory and the memory can save many wave form records further waveform arithmetic processing is possible average and enve lope waveforms are resulting waveforms created from a composite of sample points taken from multiple acquisitions Another function called smoothing calculates a mean LEE User Manual 13
102. buffer contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB and thus is represented in the overview All status registers have the same internal structure SRE ESE o The service request enable register SRE can be used as ENAB1e part of the STB if the STB is structured according to SCPI By analogy the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR 14 1 6 3 Contents of the Status Registers In the following sections the contents of the status registers are described in more detail Status Byte STB and Service Request Enable Register SRE The STatus Byte STB is already defined in IEEE 488 2 It provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collecting the pieces of information of the lower registers A special feature is that bit 6 acts as the sum bit of the remaining bits of the status byte The STB can thus be compared with the CONDi tion part of an SCPI register and assumes the highest level within the SCPI hierarchy The STB is read using the command STB or a serial poll The STatus Byte STB is linked to the Service Request Enable SRE register Each bit of the STB is assigned a bit in the SRE Bit 6 of the SRE is ignored If a bit is set in the SRE and the associated bit in the STB changes from 0 to 1 a service request SRQ is generated The SRE can be set using the command SR
103. by noise oscillation around the trigger level Hysteresis is available for the edge trigger A event and B event and for the width trigger To see the hysteresis on the display activate Trigger Hyst in the Display Auxillary Cursors menu The hysteresis value depends on the vertical scale Remote command TRIGger A HYSTeresis on page 293 TRIGger B HYSTeresis on page 300 Width The width trigger compares the pulse width duration with a given time limit It detects pulses with an exact pulse width pulses shorter or longer than a given time as well as pulses inside or outside the allowable time range The instrument triggers if the pulse does not cross the specified voltage treshold twice The pulse width is measured at the trigger level i re RM 44 TS TT MRAZ nad 44 PES A d t H cia 44 Comparison Sets how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s ti lt t ti gt t Triggers on pulse width shorter or longer than the reference Time t E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 43 R amp S RTM Triggers m S S9S9SE ay Reference for Triggers tit Triggers on pulse width equal to the reference Time t if Variation At 0 If Variation O this setting triggers on pulses within the range t At ist Triggers on pulses unequal to the reference Time t if Variat
104. channel The text can be edited with Edit Label Edit Label Opens on screen keyboard to enter a waveform name If you previously have selected a text from the library it is already written in the entry line and you can modify it The maximum name length is 8 characters and only ASCII characters provided on the on screen keyboard can be used Remote command CHANnel lt m gt LABel on page 282 EA A lt lt 551 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 34 R amp S RTM Triggers Basics of Triggering 3 Triggers 3 1 Basics of Triggering Triggering means to capture the interesting part of the relevant waveforms Choosing the right trigger type and configuring all trigger settings correctly allows you to detect various incidents in analog digital and logic signals Trigger A trigger occurs if the complete set of trigger conditions is satisfied simultaneously It establishes the time zero point in the waveform record The instrument acquires contin uously and keeps the sample points to fill the pretrigger part of the waveform record When the trigger occurs the instrument continues acquisition until the posttrigger part of the waveform record is filled Then it stops acquiring and displays the waveform When a trigger is recognized the the instrument will not accept another trigger until the acqui sition is complete Trigger conditions A simple set of trigger conditions includes e Source of the trigger signal e Trigger ty
105. cies ee nctecingssce ebe a deeg REFLeovel RElative UPPER cunda dd eed coe ede EAR e ue UE SEARch CONDition SEARGh GATE ABSOl te START iier reddite ee lere re pedis ydg et eoe ve nd eed ng Eee d Te RS SEARcCh GATE ABSolute STOP sse nn nen nn n nen n rn ren nnr sed r nnns enr nnr se nrnnr sen rnns sinn nns e nnn neni e Re MO TEE SEARch MEASure LEVel PEAK MAGNIHUO 8 occccooooccccoooocccononnccnonnnncnnnnnononnnnn rca nene nnnnannnrncrnnnnnrnannnnnnrnanenenianns 349 SEARch MEAS re PEAK POLaiity 1o step exs iic etie pe aer eroe e ors rera EE Eo sages Eee EE E ERE Es aide rp drei de SEARch PROTocol CAN ACKerror SEARch PROTOCOECAN BITSIGITOE reciente Hee La es e tg Pee A EE ab Pe Ee SEE RE SEARch PROTOCOEGCAN CONDitflOn 2 2 iiec atinada dotan oe aetate a daba cA Desin EENS SEARcCh PROTOCOECAN CRGSFITOE tio teaser d te c E cda e eu EE Pe cse pede chu ed esas Eo Ye tee d e ez DINO RN nennt ehtnnti et renri stress in nrns sen nrts set nns siat nns sen EESE EEEn sena __L_L__S EE AA e 2 22 AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 442 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands SEARch PROTocol CAN DCONditiON oooococoocccccnocccconoacononancccnnnnccnnnnnoncnnnnn nc nan n nn nana n cnn naar rca serrer rnnt ente ennt enn 401 SEARGh PROTOGCOECAN DLEENGIL i iiir ei irri inrer etre tri dado ias 401 SGEARch PRO Tocol GAN FORMET ON oisit asnasa binae aaa aaa a aaa daea Sda NEE AKESE 400 SEARcGh PROTOGCOECAN FRAMS
106. circuit operation e The connection should not introduce or suppress signal components hum noise filter and thus degrade or distort the transferred signal In reality the probe can never be an ideal one it always affects the signal transmission and the signal source and thus the measured signal It depends on the frequency to be measured and on the signal source to determine the acceptable loading and to determine which kind of probe delivers good results The solution depends on the quantity to be measured with respect to e Signal type voltage current power pressure optical etc e Signal amplitude The oscilloscope itself can only display voltages in a limited range Most probes can adjust the dynamic range to amplitudes from a few mV to 10 V Smaller or much larger signals require specialized equipment e Signal frequency High frequencies require advanced equipment in order to get cor rect results e Source characteristic The source impedance is the decisive factor when choosing the suitable connection 2 1 4 1 Voltage Probes The following table provides an overview on common voltage probes and their usage AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 16 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup REESEN Basics Table 2 1 Voltage probes overview Probe type Attenuation Typical bandwidth Oscilloscope Usage range input Passive high impe Ei 10 MHz 1MO Low speed low level dance signals Passi
107. crac nro 386 BUS UART TS ERAMe cnz MWORDeos TOP 387 BUS UART TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt 0O gt MAL ue 387 BUSUARTI A SOURCE c 382 CAL CulateMATH cmz AblThmetice AAA 334 CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA HEADE occcccccccococoncnnnnnonnn ccoo conan na nno nc cnn cnn nennen n rancia 332 CALCulate MATH m DATA XINCrement essen nnne rra 270 CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA XORigin 269 CALCulate MATH m DATA YINCrement essent nnne 270 CALCulate MATH m DATA YORIigin esses cn cnn cnn anciana 270 CAL CulateMATHcms DATA YREGoluton corn nnnc nr corri 271 CAL Cculate MATH lt mM DA p Riccardo init RIA Oi eiii 332 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT AVERage COUNt o cooocococonoccocnnoccnnnconcnononnnonn nn nennen rene rennen nnne enne 335 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution ADJusted 336 CAL CulateMATHcms PET BANDwidtRE Solution AUTO 336 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution RATioO sees 336 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution VALue eene 337 CAL CulateMATHcmz FETGFhReouencn nein ten sene tnn sent n cn est nnt senten nana nn nana rca nanncna canes 337 CALCulate MATE ms FF T F LESspari nere rh terne hen nta take d nae eror cpu ici 337 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT MAGNitude SCALe 335 CALCulate MATE m FP ER DEE 337 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFTISRATE
108. data Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern Remote command TRIGger A CAN DLC on page 390 11 6 3 CAN Label List Label lists are protocol specific A PTT file for CAN contains three values for each iden tifier e Type identifier type 11 bit or 29 bit long e ID Addr hexadecimal identifier value e Symbolic label symbolic name of the identifier specifiing its function in the bus network Example CAN PTT file GFILE VERSION 1 00 PROTOCOL NAME can Labels for CAN protocol Column order Identifier type Identifier value Label 0x064 Diag Response OxX1E5 EngineData Ox0A2 Ignition Info OxlBC TP Console 0x333 ABSdata 0x313 Door Left 0x314 Door Right 29 0x01A54321 Throttle 29 0x13A00FA2 LightState 29 0x0630ABCD Engine Status T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 186 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 6 4 CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 29 0x03B1C002 Airbag Status 29 0x01234ABC NM Gateway Label list CAN Imported on 2012 03 12 16 18 Fig 11 11 Label list for CAN For general information see chapter 11 1 3 Label List on page 146 CAN Decode Results You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Reference for Protocol Decoding on page 145 Addit
109. data frame table to the specified CSV file comma separated list Setting parameters lt FilePath gt String containing the storage device path and file name Example BUS LIST SAVE USB FRONT MYTABLE CSV Saves the frame table data to the MYTABLE CSV file on a USB flash device connected to the front panel Usage Setting only Parallel Bus BUS P AP ale VD Whe ET 361 BUS PARallel WIDTh lt BusWidth gt Sets the number of lines to be analyzed Parameters lt BusWidth gt Maximum number is the number of input channels Range 1 to 4 Increment 1 RST 4 Default unit Bit SPI SPI CONIU O coincida labo 361 caso oido iia 364 SPI Decode RESUIS acta andanada 365 SPI Configuration wheels 362 PUSS PICS POLI E X 362 GARE er Beie 362 BUS SFISCEOCKPOLAAW ota e ee tts 362 BUS SPLEMOS Re TE 362 BUS SPILDATA SOUROS EE 362 BUS SPEMISOSOUROS aida ia 363 PUSS e EE E 363 Bie S Pl DATA POLE di ta adn latina 363 BUS SPUMISG POLAM ME 363 BUS SPIBOBDE ege 363 BUS SPS SIZ Cia a a iia 363 CHANnel mmz THesboldElNDlevel 364 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 361 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m NEAMCI A A Hn Command Reference BUS SPI CS SOURce Source Selects the input channel of the chip select line Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4
110. data anymore To copy a stored reference use FILE gt Import Export References See also chapter 12 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 207 Furthermore you can save waveforms directly to a USB flash drive with FILE Wave forms without creating a reference waveform before See chapter 12 2 4 Wave forms on page 216 5 1 Using References You can store any of the active waveforms as reference waveform channel math and other reference waveforms or load a previously saved reference For each selected reference waveform you can adjust the vertical position and scale as usual and unlike for other waveform types you can also adjust the horizontal position and scale individually The current scale values are shown in the waveform label of the reference waveform 5 1 1 Displaying a Reference Waveform A reference waveform is displayed as soon as data is written to its storage either from an active waveform or loaded from a reference file You can hide it and display it again by using the Visible key 1 Press the REF key to display the Reference menu 2 Press Reference and select the reference storage position EA A lt lt lt A LLLLLLLLLULS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 71 R amp SS9RTM Reference Waveforms EENEG Using References Ifa reference was already loaded to the selected reference position before the stored reference waveform is displayed 3 Select the data that wi
111. define the mode for FFT calculation and display The waveform arithmetic defines whether the values are updated regularly or whether values from previous spectra are included in the calculation and display For details see Wfm Arithmetic on page 112 If Average mode is selected press No of Averages to define how many spectra are considered for the calculation Press Window to define which type of function is laid over the input values If the input values are to be used unaltered use the Rectangle window To reduce noise use a bell shaped window For details see Window on page 113 Press Y Scaling to select logarithmic or linear scaling of the y axis in the FFT win dow see Y Scaling on page 114 Define the settings for the FFT window as described in To configure the FFT diagram numerically on page 108 Define the settings of the signal vs time window as described in To configure the Y t window numerically on page 110 These settings are identical to the general trigger and scaling settings defined for the channel see also chapter 2 2 2 Adjusting the Signal Input Manually on page 20 8 2 2 Configuring the Diagrams To configure the FFT diagram numerically Alternatively to configuring the FFT window numerically via the softkeys you can use the rotary knobs to change the settings graphically see To configure the FFT diagram graphically on page 109 1 2 Press FFT Setup in the FFT menu
112. display Remote command DISPlay PALette on page 301 NORMal FColor Aux Cursors Provides functions to display auxiliary cursors Highlighted functions are active Trigger Event Aux Cursors Show or hides the point of the trigger A small rhombus markes the intersection of the trigger level and the trigger offset T The offset is related to the reference point and is displayed in the header of the display If you change the trigger level orthe trigger position a line appears temporarily to highlight the changed value If the B trigger is activated the trigger is the result of an A event followed by an B event The trigger point has the color of the B trigger source Channel Cursors Aux Cursors Activates or deactivates the channel cursor of the active channel A channel cursor is a line that marks the ground level of a channel This line is displayed temporarily if the y scaling is modified and fades out automatically If a DC offset is defined a second auxiliary line is displayed The distance between those two lines is the DC offset Trigger Hyst Aux Cursors Shows or hides the hysteresis range around the trigger level when the trigger level or the hysteresis are changed Hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level See also Hysteresis A B on page 43 Defaults Aux Cursors Restores the default cursor settings i e both auxiliary curso
113. e Transfer direction read or write e Bytes with missing acknowledge bit e Specific slave address e Specific data pattern in the message PC Configuration Configuring PC The configuration of the DC is simple only assign the two lines to input channels 1 Press the PROTOCOL key on the front panel Press the Bus Type softkey and select I2C Press Configuration 2 3 4 Press Clock SCL and select the channel connected to the clock line 5 Press Data SDA and select the channel connected to the data line 6 Press Find level or set the threshold manually for each channel See To set the logic threshold on page 144 Now you can disply the decoded signal and the frame table with results The display of the decoded data is described in To configure decoding and data dis play on page 145 PC Configuration Settings Pio Roco RETE VTL 162 Dita SDA TET 162 AS AP O 163 Clock SCL Sets the input channel to which the clock line is connected Remote command BUS 12C CLOCk SOURce on page 371 Data SDA Sets the input channel to which the data line is connected Remote command BUS 12C DATA SOURce on page 372 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 162 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 4 3 11 4 3 1 PC Option R amp S RTM K1 Find Level The instrument analyzes all channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each cha
114. er a E 404 TRICIA EIN ICON lut 404 RTE Elei 404 KN NEE 405 TRIGE A tere TEEN 405 TRIGISFA TIN DEENS A aiii na eret eot ect nee end 405 TRIGger A LIN TYPE lt TriggerType gt Specifies the trigger mode for LIN Parameters lt TriggerType gt SYNC WKFRame ID IDDT ERRCondition SYNC Start of frame triggers on the stop bit of the sync field WKFRame Triggers after a wakeup frame ID Sets the trigger to a specific identifier or an identifier range Set the identifier with TRIGger A LIN ICONdition and TRIGger A LIN IDENtifier IDDT Set the identifier see ID and the data with TRIGger A LIN DLENgth TRIGger A LIN DCONdition and TRIGger A LIN DATA ERRCondition Identifies various errors in the frame You can select one or more error types as trigger condition Select the error types with TRIGger A LIN CHKSerror TRIGger A LIN IPERror and TRIGger A LIN SYERror RST SYNC I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 403 R8S RTM Remote Control m Utm i Command Reference TRIGger A LIN CHKSerror lt ChecksumError gt Triggers on a checksum error The checksum verifies the correct data transmission It is the last byte of the frame response The checksum includes not only the data but also the protected identifier PID The command is relevant if TRIGgGer A LIN TYPE is set
115. exposici n a radiaciones Tenga en cuenta que en caso de incendio pueden desprenderse del producto sustancias t xicas gases l quidos etc que pueden generar da os a la salud Por eso en caso de incendio deben usarse medidas adecuadas como p ej m scaras antig s e indumentaria de protecci n Los productos con l ser est n provistos de indicaciones de advertencia normalizadas en funci n de la clase de l ser del que se trate Los rayos l ser pueden provocar da os de tipo biol gico a causa de las propiedades de su radiaci n y debido a su concentraci n extrema de potencia electromagn tica En caso de que un producto Rohde amp Schwarz contenga un producto l ser p ej un lector de CD DVD no debe usarse ninguna otra configuraci n o funci n aparte de las descritas en la documentaci n del producto a fin de evitar lesiones p ej debidas a irradiaci n l ser Clases de compatibilidad electromagn tica conforme a EN 55011 CISPR 11 y en analog a con EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Aparato de clase A Aparato adecuado para su uso en todos los entornos excepto en los residenciales y en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales Nota Los aparatos de clase A est n destinados al uso en entornos industriales Estos aparatos pueden causar perturbaciones radioel ctricas en entornos residenciales debido a posibles perturbaciones
116. from the memory and all settings are available Suffix lt m gt The command affects all channels and the suffix is irrelevant T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 285 R amp S RTM Remote Control 14 2 4 6 Command Reference Setting parameters lt Points gt DEFault MAXimum DMAXimum Sets the range for data queries DEFault Waveform samples that are visible as waveform points on the screen MAXimum All waveform samples that are stored in the memory Only avail able if acquisition is stopped DMAXimum Display maximum Waveform samples stored in the current wave form record but only for the displayed time range At maximum waveform rate the instrument stores more samples than visible on the screen and DMAX returns more values than DEF Only available if acquisition is stopped RST DEFault Return values Points Number of data points in the selected range Default unit Samples Example CHAN DATA POIN DEF CHAN DATA POIN CHAN2 DATA POIN Returned values 10416 10416 CHAN DATA POIN DMAX CHAN DATA POIN CHAN2 DATA POIN Returned values 124992 124992 CHAN DATA POIN MAX CHAN DATA POIN CHAN2 DATA POIN Returned values 4194302 4194302 Example See chapter 14 3 1 1 Reading Waveform Data from Memory on page 430 Probes PROBe lt mi SE TURAT Tengan AUTOR conocida 287 PROBe m SETup ATTenualtion B NIT iicet eterna ii 287 Db ObBe m GETu
117. gt DATA ENVelope on page 284 C e CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA on page 332 R e REFCurve m DATA on page 311 Parameters lt DataFormat gt ASCii REAL UINTeger ASCii List of values for example 1 23 1 22 1 24 Accuracy is 0 which means that the instrument selects the num ber of digits to be returned The query returns ASC 0 REAL Binary format Accuracy is 32 The query returns REAL 32 The data is stored as binary data Definite Length Block Data according to IEEE 488 2 Each waveform value is formatted in 32 Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Format The schema of the result string is as follows 41024 lt valuel gt lt value2 gt lt value n with 4 number of digits 4 in the example of the following number 1024 number of following data bytes 7 1024 in the example value 4 byte floating point values UINTeger Unsigned integer format binary values with length 8 bit 1 byte per sample 16 bit 2 bytes per sample or 32 bit 4 bytes per sample UINT 8 or UINT 16 Or UINT 32 The data range for UINT 8 is 0 to 255 the data range for UINT 16 is 0 to 65 535 and for UINT 16 is 2 7 For data conversion you need the results of following commands DATA XORigin DATA XINCrement DATA Yorigin DATA YINCrement DATA YRESolution They are described below in this chapter The way of data conversion is described in chapter 14 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsi
118. high e The operating voltage range has to be observed e The probe impedance depends on the signal frequency RT ZS single ended active probes and RT ZD differential active probes provide special features for easier use and precise measurements These special featuers are not avail able on RT ZSxxE probes e The micro button on the probe head remotely controls important functions on the instrument like running and stopping the acquisition autoset auto zero and setting the offset to mean value e The R amp S ProbeMeter measures DC voltages between the probe tip and the ground connection with very high precision The result is displayed on the instrument s screen So you can check DC voltages with different levels without having to adjust the measurement range of the oscilloscope The R amp S ProbeMeter also measures the zero error of the probe to optimize measurement results at small signal levels When you connect an R amp S RT ZSxx active probe to a channel input of the R amp S RTM the oscilloscope recognizes the probe reads the identification and calibration data from the probe box and shows the result in the Setup and Probe Attributes tabs This data together with the deskew time for a given channel is stored and processed by the R amp S RTM If you connect the probe the next time to the same channel the information is fetched and used Differential active probes Differential active probes are designed to measure signals that
119. iii nr neri incipe a 92 measurement remote sss 323 Softkey gi SOURCE trigger WEE 39 Span remote aroma alado tos 337 rl cl cias tt is 115 SPD tasa 240 SRE tees Arica s R o terrae stis 240 Special characters SCPI SPI SSPI E a Configuratio uii ioci eere tp accipere qute 151 Configuration settings ssssesessss 152 ung T 154 SPI SSPI protocols Trigger settings ire ette 156 SPI protocol ASICS SRE aaa SRE service request enable register SRQ service request sess SSPI protocol A M 150 Statistical measurements Remote control 5 eene ege 326 Status eU RENE 261 Status byte Ile 264 266 Status registers ese tereti trece 254 jeje prie ee 252 ENABle EVEN ep M User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 Iprge M 252 NTRANSIION e 252 parts e ai le EE 252 STATus OPERation eese 257 Status reporting system common Commande esee 264 Status TOpOFts o erred eer eiie eet esie nera application et CH UE Storage CONTIGUA e 207 le EE 207 directory cestas 207 file name 207 Front USB att Zu ada Rear USB E is 2 EI EE Storing NEVA En 218 Stretch Y Cro E 125 Suffixes ge Symbolic ID ron neris 146 Syntax elements e M
120. instrument type EXTernanalog External Trigger Input on the rear panel LINE AC line for the edge trigger SBUS Serial bus TRIGger EXTern COUPling lt ExternCoupling gt Sets the coupling for the external trigger input The command is relevant if TRIGger B SOURce is set to EXTernanalog Parameters lt ExternCoupling gt AC DC RST AC TRIGger A TYPE Type Sets the trigger type for the A trigger Parameters Type EDGE WIDTh TV BUS LOGic EDGE edge trigger WIDTh width trigger TV video trigger BUS only available if at least one option R amp S RTM K1 or R amp S RTM K2 is installed LOGic pattern trigger logic trigger See chapter 11 Protocol Analysis on page 144 TRIGger A HYSTeresis lt Hysteresis gt Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level of the A trigger event If the signal jitters inside this range and crosses the trigger level thereby no trigger event occurs Hysteresis is available for edge and width trigger Parameters lt Hysteresis gt AUTO SMALI MEDium LARGE RST AUTO User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 293 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 5 2 Command Reference TRIGger A HOLDoff TIME lt HoldOffTime gt Defines the holdoff time The next trigger occurs only after the holdoff time has passed Parameters lt HoldOffTime gt Default unit s Edge Trigger TRIGgGerAEDGE SLOPE rii Kaa ria AEA ee TEE 294 TRIGO A EDGE COUP WAG oniro
121. irida ae adei an duindu Ennii 135 Rise Fall Time Getup nn nn nennen nennen nnns 135 Kl ul ie E 137 Data2Clock Search eene eene enne nre nennen nene nenne 138 acuit lio E 140 GALS E X iaiia 142 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 5 R amp S9RTM Contents 10 3 10 11 11 1 11 1 1 11 1 2 11 1 3 11 1 4 11 2 11 2 1 11 22 11 3 11 3 1 11 3 2 11 3 3 11 3 4 11 4 11 4 1 11 4 2 11 4 3 11 4 4 11 4 5 11 5 11 5 1 11 5 2 11 5 3 11 5 4 11 6 11 6 1 11 6 2 11 6 3 11 6 4 11 6 5 11 7 SA 143 REM dsd 144 Basics of Protocol Analysis irent ececceuceedeceucenntceessencacd edeeeeebnae 144 Configuring Common Protocol Gettngs 144 Reference for Protocol Decodimg cnn nn inkin eene 145 Label APP A 146 Frame Table Decode HResuhts kinina EEKANNA NEENA aa 148 Parallel BUS ege a A ANEA EE 150 Analyzing Parallel Buses Gelee ee ege AEEA AARETE 150 Reference for Parallel BUS reete de ped tesa terne aspe RATAA 150 SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 eese 150 Bleue 150 lee ue IC le MEET 151 Ri iculnneee 154 SPI SSBI Decode Result 158 FC Option R amp S CAE EE 160 Tere lte e ctm 160 FC COMMOURALON orice c 162 SEN We Le Te 163 A TEES 167 FS Decode Results RETE 168 UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2
122. is not completely contained in the acquisition Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values lt EndTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 376 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mAMAMCI RA n a Ue Command Reference BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt ACCess Returns the transfer direction read or write access from master to slave Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values lt Access gt INComplete READ WRITE ElTHer UNDF INComplete The frame is not completely contained in the acquisition UNDF Access is not defined Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt AMODe Returns the address length Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values lt AddressMode gt BIT7 BIT10 Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt ACOMplete Retu
123. kee 377 BUST2C FRAMe sn RL 378 BUSJT2CIF RAMIS ASTON ee ersparen rne a raped aru Fee urn ER aae raa d aaa 378 BUS 2C FRAMo lt n AACS T o eo Ecce o nde er PER Dee ee i Pes Ie RR EE ERR ERAS 378 SU Kiel E ERT NEE 379 BUS I2C FRAMES BOC OUT E 379 BUSI2C FRAMESA gt BY TT 379 BUSI2C FRAMesSnPIBYTESOSISTARIU aii dead ia and 380 BUS I2C FRAMe n BYTE o AGKStart nidi iicet eres udnR e cdo nao pase Ru Ta RR AR A dd rnv de 380 BUGI2CERAMe nz BvTEaosACCessi 380 BUS2C FRAMe n BYTE o COMPlete 1 atii esee ener rope tease ano E ESEeNEESENER 381 BUS I2C FCOunt Returns the number of received frames Return values lt FrameCount gt Total number of decoded frames Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt DATA Returns the data words of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values lt DataWordsInFrame gt Comma separated list of decimal values of the data bytes User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 375 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm R P Command Reference Example BUS I2C FRAM2 DATA returns four data bytes 69 158 174 161 Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt STATus Returns the overall state of the frame Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values State INComplete OK UNEXpstop INSufficient ADDifferent INComplete The frame
124. len E Markers sarena aeneae aa en e eaen Ehe dei eiin eedan E clear one marker GO LOMO oo On ne rane natnra AA cence teerarmesstneptennesnaes cH Masks e e EEN 126 copy e Ile 121 125 creating CSV flle rem eere 119 definition export Impoft accidente near use een EE Import Export Korto He WEE 123 126 menu results save and load coooooooooccccnncccocccononancnnnnnnncconinananannonnnnos 118 SAVING nAi 121 testing test results sec ec oreet penetrat ation 118 Masks Test Off SOMMCY 127 MATH MVS q PER EM ES 97 Mathematics COMPOUNING Aiaia norise titanic 94 equation Sets teer den see or nere ES gege 96 FFT MENU PE 97 Math waveforms aire 94 IT EE 75 Mean Cycle Mean ValuG rni Irene di 83 Meas Place SOMO cierre encor acacia nan 91 Meas Type automatic measurement remote 321 cursor measurement SOMO init dr t ee re eb dee Measure TOMO m 321 Clone 92 Measurement lene M 92 activating remote ssesssssesesne 321 Measurements AMP EE 83 Base level vicio e 83 B rst Widlhi estan iaa ii 75 Duty cycle zer ETOQUENCY UD m Mean i Mean Cycle uscar ida Mean Value cidcid RMS Cycle 83 EIERE 83 A O 75 Top level we 83 Trigger frequency A and B trigger
125. line may consist of one or several commands It is terminated by one of the following e a lt New Line gt e a lt New Line with EOI e an EOI together with the last data byte Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon If the next command belongs to a different command system the semicolon is followed by a colon Example MMEM COPY Testi MeasurementXY HCOP ITEM ALL This command line contains two commands The first command belongs to the MMEM system the second command belongs to the HCOP system EU User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 247 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m X X POocr Y Basics If the successive commands belong to the same system having one or several levels in common the command line can be abbreviated To this end the second command after the semicolon starts with the level that lies below the common levels The colon following the semicolon must be omitted in this case Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM This command line is represented in its full length and contains two commands separated from each other by the semicolon Both commands are part of the HCOP command sys tem i e they have one level in common When abbreviating the command line the second command begins with the level below HCOP The colon after the semicolon is omitted The a
126. masks ni MSK rerit eere dt Dii TXT masks ES TXT Wavefortms NEE 217 UE Ve EE 216 File name Ur ne WE 207 Llc cri tia 209 Filter on channel signal oooocooncccccnnncccccnacccnonancconcnnnncnnnnno 25 Find level Channel threshold sesinin a 31 lie ec 38 Format SOME aras 219 220 VE Ve EE 216 Formats E A 119 T e REESE 83 G Gain Vertical Em 11 Gate isle O H 133 Search GET eon ce e dde 240 GPIB address seen O 233 characteristics ooooooocccocncccooooon conconoonnnoncnncconananonnns 232 interface aE A EE E AE E interface messages E sad remote control interface oooooonoccnccciconiocononononanananos 232 Grid displaying ao desinant niea eee an EEE xs ae caters 51 Sissi ani tte 54 C P Tm 57 ci M 240 H Help Eie M 227 Horizontal position esssssssseseenn 15 Host En 237 Hysteresis of trigger level ge 43 44 49 l Identification EMOTE ura dd llo 265 IEEE488 A etr ce us 226 le RR 240 Import Export EQUATION Sets cecidere ties eg re ania pets 221 Masks m Referentes uide cere ht ede d D Der ea e 221 Ee EE 420 SOfIKG iia iaa 211 212 Importing device settings ooocoonniccccnnnnnnccccnnnnoncccccnnnnnananaconn 207 ze E To o EST RD 207 reference E e le Information on instrument sseeee 226 Intensity sD SEUS viii tdt 54 Interface messages TE 239 Interfaces
127. n o Selects the byte number 1 n Return values lt ByteStatus gt OK INS UART The byte is not completely contained in the acquisition UART At least one UART error occured LIN uses UART words without parity bit Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue Returns the decimal value of the specified byte T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 409 Command Reference Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n o Selects the byte number 1 n Return values lt ByteValue gt Decimal value Usage Query only LIN Search SEARCNPROTOCO LIN CONDINO M 1 e artc artt onn baden AAA AEEA AEEA EE ANA 410 SEARchPIOTOGSPEINIPRAM 1 3 a dees daa 411 SEARch PROTOCOELINAIBEREOE coincidan aaa E cen n eni Ein 411 SEARGIPROTOGOELINSOFIKSGIFDBE tidie docte feni aod e teta fedet he e o accedet er a aiani 412 SEARcCh PROTOGO MN ESMERO x erased dre e Feet Ee eee eo e p e e Eee ee eee 412 SEARch PROTOCOL LIN IGCONIEOD n tutae tnn ta dE NENNEN nn enn redeas 412 SEARCGEPROTOCGOEINTBENHGE rere ti oret date rene daas e reto aeta eet 412 SEARcI PROTOCOL be Be ET 412 SEARchPROTOSGUEINIDOONGITOR asia a a a aii 413 SEAREGH PROTOCORLIN DA TAs EN 413 SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition lt SearchCondition gt Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for Depending on the selected event further settings are required R amp S9RTM Remote Control m U
128. negative pulses CYCMean Mean value of the left most signal period of the waveform of the selected channel CYCRms RMS Root Mean Square value of the voltage of the left most signal period of the waveform of the selected channel STDDev Measures the standard deviation of the waveform CYCStddev Measures the standard deviation of one cycle usually of the first left most signal period TFRequency TPERiode Measure the frequency of the trigger signal and the length of the its periods hardware counter DELay Time difference between two edges of the same or different wave forms The waveforms are selected with MEASurement lt m gt SOURce and the edges with MEASurement lt m gt DELay SLOPe PHASe Phase difference between two waveforms time difference period 360 The waveforms are selected with MEASurement lt m gt SOURce BWIDth Burst width the duration of one burst measured from the first edge to the last edge that cross the middle reference level POVershoot NOVershoot Positive and negative overshoot of a square wave TBFRequency TBPeriod Measures the frequency of the B trigger signal and the length of the B trigger signal periods RST NONE measurement is off MEASurement lt m gt SOURce lt SignalSource gt lt ReferenceSource gt Selects one of the active signal reference or math channels as the source s of the selected measurement T User Manual 1305 0595
129. nennen 21 2 3 Reference for Waveform Setup esesseeeseeseeseessees eene nenne nnnm nter nennen nns 22 2 3 1 HORIZONTAL Controls cnn cnn rra 22 2 9 2 ACQUISITION E EE 23 KE e ge EE 27 y THOR ro A E E E 35 3 1 Basics of Triggering sessin a 35 3 2 Setting UK CNR e EE 36 3 2 1 Configuring the Trigger Event 36 3 2 2 Positioning the Trigger tenen t n ze nde e FE Ree KEE 37 3 2 3 Setting Up a Trigger Geouence naar eene 37 3 3 Reference for Triggers ecce eere innatas 37 3 3 1 TRIGGER Controls icons ent ede e E Rea neu Hed E Rada 38 9 3 2 Trigger Settings cerae etn ae RR FRE HERE ERR una 39 4 Display e 50 4 1 General Display Settings esee enne nnne nennen 50 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 3 R amp S9RTM Contents 4 1 1 4 1 2 4 2 4 2 1 4 2 2 4 3 4 3 1 4 3 2 4 3 3 4 4 4 4 1 4 4 2 5 1 5 1 1 5 12 5 2 6 1 6 1 1 6 12 6 1 3 6 2 6 3 6 3 1 6 32 6 3 3 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 3 Configuring the Display 51 Display MENU A EAEE EA ia 53 AY Dia GV AM m 57 Configuring Zy Diaorams conc cnc cnn naar ne ne nennen nennen nnns 58 XYZ Setup Merl rice rrt r P e Re e ERR E CHR a xe FCU a E Fa Ce VERRE Re YE 60 ZOOM e 62 Pasa AE a AA deste N E P T T E A 62 Zooming for RE UE 64 Pisonis 65 Lac
130. nn nn nan nn nn rannncna ninas 317 CUbRGor cmz TRACkingtSTATel canon nn cnn nn nn nnn nn anno nn nn nn nn nn nnnn nan nnn nc nnnnnnnnnnnns 315 CURSor lt m gt X1 Position CURSor lt m gt X2Position CURSor lt m gt X3Position WE EE E de elle lu OT 316 CUbRG or zmz D I talNyVerse nn nn cnn nn nn nn nn n rn rn ent ss eret sen nent senten sinn nnns nena 317 GURSor lt m gt XDELtal VALUE o ii e EEE SEENEN 318 Ee ue e Me RTE TE EE 319 CURSor lt m gt Y 1Position CURSor lt m gt Y 2Position CURSor lt m gt Y3Position CURSorsm Y COupling EE 316 CURSor ms YDELta SEOB6 eet teh la 318 CURSor lt sm gt dE TIET 318 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 439 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands CURSorsm gt drop 319 CURSor lt m gt d Re 319 CURsor m gt XRATIO UN Datos dd ai a DISPlay GRID STYEO cicer etd pepe eh cd ies eene t ll d e va trt o ad DISPlay INTensity elle EE BIET VAL RESET ACID li cada DISPlay INTensity WAVeform DISPIay CIT ii add did B JE e Bee E EE ieii saaa e E AE a E e E OEE AEEA RUE GE Bee El EE DISPIaY MODE scott ra ii a ida DISPlay GE DISPlay PERSistence CLE ali E DISPlay PERSisterice INFifilte eic rte eere Hox hk eap ek der eee eret rna n Ee eg was RIESEN KE DISPlay PERSistence TIME DISPlay PERSistence TIME AUTO co cocinan adds 305 DISPlay STYLE isa tartera 305 SII de E Cle E A A A A A ad ada eta 302 DISPLAY XY
131. on page 370 SSPI MOSI POLarity on page 370 SSPI MISO POLarity on page 370 WO uu uU uu w tw G ce Ux Y Ep Em Ln Slope Selects if data is stored with the rising or falling slope of the clock The slope marks the begin of a new bit Remote command BUS SPI CLOCk POLarity on page 362 BUS SSPI CLOCk POLarity on page 369 I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 153 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 3 3 11 3 3 1 O SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 Time Out Sets the minimum idle time between two data packets If the time interval between the data packets is shorter the packets are part of the same frame Within the time out the data and clock lines are low A new frame begins when the time out has expired Time out is only relevant for SSPI that has no chip select Remote command BUS SSPI BITime on page 370 First Bit Defines if the data of the messages starts with MSB most significant bit or LSB least significant bit Remote command BUS SPI BORDer on page 363 BUS SSPI BORDer on page 371 Symbol Size Sets the word length the number of bits in a message Remote command BUS SPI SSIZeOn page 363 BUS SSPI SSIZe n page 371 Find Level The instrument analyzes all channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manua
132. page 343 MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENt COUNt on page 343 Z Masks Test Off Turns off the mask test and exits the Mask menu Remote command MASK STATe on page 340 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 127 R8S RTM Search Search Conditions and Results 10 Search 10 1 Search Conditions and Results The search functions of R amp S RTM allow to find all edges pulse widths peaks or other events in an acquisition that match the search conditions For each search type specific settings are available Searches can be performed on any channel math or reference waveform Searches can be performed online that is repeatedly for each new data acquisition in a running acquisition series or only once after the acquisition has been stopped In an online search only the displayed data is searched while the search on a stopped acqui sition analyzes the contents of the memory The searched time base range can be restricted by defining a gate 10 1 1 Search Results Search results are marked in the diagram and listed in a results table with their specific measurement values In the table five results are shown To navigate the search results turn the NAVIGATION knob See also To analyze search results on page 130 Search result markers For further analysis for example for cursor measurements you can set up to 20 markers to selected search results Search result markers are
133. possible degree of safety Our products and the auxiliary equipment they require are designed built and tested in accordance with the safety standards that apply in each case Compliance with these standards is continuously monitored by our quality assurance system The product described here has been designed built and tested in accordance with the EC Certificate of Conformity and has left the manufacturer s plant in a condition fully complying with safety standards To maintain this condition and to ensure safe operation you must observe all instructions and warnings provided in this manual If you have any questions regarding these safety instructions the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies will be happy to answer them Furthermore it is your responsibility to use the product in an appropriate manner This product is designed for use solely in industrial and laboratory environments or if expressly permitted also in the field and must not be used in any way that may cause personal injury or property damage You are responsible if the product is used for any purpose other than its designated purpose or in disregard of the manufacturer s instructions The manufacturer shall assume no responsibility for such use of the product The product is used for its designated purpose if it is used in accordance with its product documentation and within its performance limits see data sheet documentation the following safety instructions Using the produ
134. producto dentro de un veh culo en movimiento si esto pudiera distraer al conductor Asegure el producto dentro del veh culo debidamente para evitar en caso de un accidente lesiones u otra clase de da os Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente 1 Los dispositivos marcados contienen una bater a o un acumulador que no se debe desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que debe ser recogido por separado La eliminaci n se debe efectuar exclusivamente a trav s de un punto de recogida apropiado o del servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Los dispositivos el ctricos usados no se deben desechar con los residuos dom sticos sin clasificar sino que deben ser recogidos por separado Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG ha elaborado un concepto de eliminaci n de residuos y asume plenamente los deberes de recogida y eliminaci n para los fabricantes dentro de la UE Para desechar el producto de manera respetuosa con el medio ambiente dir jase a su servicio de atenci n al cliente de Rohde amp Schwarz Si se trabaja de manera mec nica y o t rmica cualquier producto o componente m s all del funcionamiento previsto pueden liberarse sustancias peligrosas polvos con contenido de metales pesados como p ej plomo berilio o n quel Por eso el producto solo debe ser desmontado por personal especializado con formaci n adecuada Un desmontaje inadecuado puede ocasionar dafios para la salud Se deben ten
135. provides commands to access the storage media and to save and reload instrument settings and data The R amp S RTM has three storage devices indicated as drives e INT internal storage with default directories for each data type e USB FRONT USB connector on the front panel e USB REAR USB connector on the rear panel Common computer and network drives like C D server share are not available Name conventions The names of files and directories have to meet the following rules e Only the 8 3 format with ASCI characters is supported e No special characters are allowed e Use slash instead of backslash MMEMO RETTEN 417 MNMEMOREMSIS E 417 MMEM CDIRBGEDE a aaa 417 TE le 417 TEE ie 418 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 416 R amp S9RTM Remote Control m ml Command Reference MMEMON HE E L07 8 E Doro E 418 MMEMon Kee eu 419 MMEMDEFEATalO97 oia 419 TEE NEE EE E E 420 MMEMOM COPY cuicos 420 uva uec A 421 unstable 421 MMEMBEU DATA iiec A ten ada ade id 421 MMEMO STORE NN 422 MMEM LOAD STA KEE 422 MMEMory DRIVes Returns the storage devices available on the R amp S RTM Return values lt Drive gt List of strings for example INT USB_FRONT USB_REAR INT internal storage USB FRONT USB connector on the front panel USB REAR USB connector on the rear panel Usage Quer
136. pueden excluir lesiones o da os de objetos El empresario u operador es responsable de seleccionar el personal usuario apto para el manejo del producto Antes de desplazar o transportar el producto lea y tenga en cuenta el cap tulo Transporte Como con todo producto de fabricaci n industrial no puede quedar excluida en general la posibilidad de que se produzcan alergias provocadas por algunos materiales empleados los llamados al rgenos p ej el n quel Si durante el manejo de productos Rohde A Schwarz se producen reacciones al rgicas como p ej irritaciones cut neas estornudos continuos enrojecimiento de la conjuntiva o dificultades respiratorias debe avisarse inmediatamente a un m dico para investigar las causas y evitar cualquier molestia o da o a la salud Antes de la manipulaci n mec nica y o t rmica o el desmontaje del producto debe tenerse en cuenta imprescindiblemente el cap tulo Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 Ciertos productos como p ej las instalaciones de radiocomunicaci n RF pueden a causa de su funci n natural emitir una radiaci n electromagn tica aumentada Deben tomarse todas las medidas necesarias para la protecci n de las mujeres embarazadas Tambi n las personas con marcapasos pueden correr peligro a causa de la radiaci n electromagn tica El empresario operador tiene la obligaci n de evaluar y se alizar las reas de trabajo en las que exista un riesgo elevado de
137. reading It can be read using the commands STATus OPERation CONDition Or STATus OPERation EVENt See also figure 14 2 The remote commands for the STATus OPERation register are described in chap ter 14 2 16 1 STATus OPERation Register on page 426 Table 14 5 Bits in the STATus OPERation register Bit No Meaning 0 ALIGnment This bit is set as long as the instrument is performing a self alignment 1 SELFtest This bit is set while the selftest is running 2 AUToset This bit is set while the instrument is performing an auto setup 3 WTRIgger This bit is set while the instrument is waiting for the trigger 4 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable Register This register contains information about indefinite states which may occur if the unit is operated without meeting the specifications It can be read using the commands STATus QUEStionable CONDition on page 428 and STATus QUEStionable EV ENt on page 429 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 257 Basics TEMP WARN TEMP ERRor 0 0 JO OP YN O 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 STATus QUEStionable STAT QUES TEMP COVerload TEMPerature NOALigndata LIMit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 nh STAT QUES LIM STAT QUES MASK MASK1 een MEAS1 MEAS2 MEAS3 MEAS4 Fig 14 3 Overview of the STATus QUEStionable register Tabl
138. sets the selected cursor to the previous left level peak To select the cursor press the NAVIGATION knob Remote command CURSor lt m gt SPPeak on page 316 Next peak For FFT analysis only sets the selected cursor to the next right level peak To select the cursor press the NAVIGATION knob Remote command CURSor lt m gt SNPeak on page 317 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 81 R amp S9RTM Measurements 6 2 Quick Measurements NAVIGATION Select cursor Press the NAVIGATION rotary knob to select a cursor line If a menu is open it is closed Press the knob repeatedly to select the required cursor line or if Coupling is enabled a pair of coupled cursor lines Move selected cursor Turn the rotary knob to change the position of the selected cursor line Remote command URSor lt m gt X1Position on page 315 URSor lt m gt X2Position on page 315 URSor lt m gt X3Position on page 315 URSor lt m gt Y1Position on page 315 URSor m Y2Position on page 315 URSor m Y3Position on page 315 G EK CAE 3 03 Quick Measurements Quick measurement performs all currently available automatic measurements for the selected channel The measurements cannot be configured The results are displayed either directly at the waveform WF or in the right part of the result table T and are updated continuously gt Press the QUICK MEAS key to activate quick measurement TB 50ns T 0s Auto CH1 635
139. soft non linting cloth to clean the product Never use chemical cleaning agents such as alcohol acetone or diluents for cellulose lacquers Operation 1 Operating the products requires special training and intense concentration Make sure that persons who use the products are physically mentally and emotionally fit enough to do so otherwise injuries or material damage may occur It is the responsibility of the employer operator to select suitable personnel for operating the products 1171 0000 42 07 Page 4 Basic Safety Instructions 2 Before you move or transport the product read and observe the section titled Transport 3 As with all industrially manufactured goods the use of substances that induce an allergic reaction allergens such as nickel cannot be generally excluded If you develop an allergic reaction such as a skin rash frequent sneezing red eyes or respiratory difficulties when using a Rohde amp Schwarz product consult a physician immediately to determine the cause and to prevent health problems or stress 4 Before you start processing the product mechanically and or thermally or before you take it apart be sure to read and pay special attention to the section titled Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 5 Depending on the function certain products such as RF radio equipment can produce an elevated level of electromagnetic radiation Considering that unborn babies require increased protect
140. state Does not change the instrument setting 14 1 4 2 SCPI Command Structure SCPI commands consist of a so called header and in most cases one or more param eters The header and the parameters are separated by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank The headers may consist of several mnemonics key words Queries are formed by appending a question mark directly to the header The commands can be either device specific or device independent common com mands Common and device specific commands differ in their syntax Syntax for Common Commands Common device independent commands consist of a header preceded by an asterisk and possibly one or more parameters Examples RST RESET Resets the instrument ESE EVENT STATUS ENABLE Sets the bits of the event status enable registers ESR EVENT STATUS QUERY Queries the contents of the event status register IDN IDENTIFICATION QUERY Queries the instrument identification string LEE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 241 R amp S9RTM d Remote Control Basics Syntax for Device Specific Commands Not all commands used in the following examples are necessarily implemented in the instrument For demonstration purposes only assume the existence of the following commands for this section e DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean e FORMat R E ADings DATA lt type gt lt le
141. stop frequency instead of defining a center frequency and span Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt StartFreq gt Range Depends on various other settings mainly on time base span RBW ratio and center frequency Default unit Hz CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT STOP lt StopFreq gt Defines the stop frequency of the displayed frequency domain at the right display edge Center Span 2 You can set start and stop frequency instead of defining a center frequency and span Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt StopFreq gt Range Depends on various other settings mainly on time base span RBW ratio and center frequency Default unit Hz CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT TIME RANGe Defines the width of the time base extract from the Y t window for which the FFT is calculated Parameters lt WindowWidth gt Range depends on the time base Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 800 I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 338 R amp S RTM Remote Control Command Reference CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT TIME POSition Defines the position of the time base extract in the Y t window for which the FFT is calculated Parameters lt WindowPosition gt Range depends on the time base and the width of the FFT time base extract Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 800 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT SRATe Returns the sample rate of data used in an FF
142. storages See also chapter 5 1 Using References on page 71 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 73 R8S RTM Reference Waveforms Reference for REF key Source Defines the source of the reference waveform Any active channel math or reference waveform can be selected Remote command REFCurve lt m gt SOURce on page 309 REFCurve lt m gt SOURce CATalog on page 309 Update Stores the waveform defined as the Source to the selected reference waveform The reference waveform is kept until you update or load another waveform to the reference See also chapter 5 1 1 Displaying a Reference Waveform on page 71 Remote command REFCurve lt m gt UPDate on page 309 Visible Displays or hides the selected reference waveform Remote command REFCurve lt m gt STATe on page 308 Save Opens the Save menu with basic functions to save the equation set See Save Menu on page 209 Remote command REFCurve lt m gt SAVE on page 309 Load Provides functions to load reference data Reference Load Selects one of the four possible internal reference storages See also chapter 5 1 Using References on page 71 Load Load Opens the Load menu and a file explorer to select the reference waveform file for load ing See Load Menu on page 210 Remote command REFCurve lt m gt LOAD on page 310 Load Settings Loads the device settings that were used to obtain the stored referen
143. synchronization break synchronization byte correct checksum yellow identifier green parity bits blue data words UART words User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 199 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 Table 11 5 Content of the LIN frame table Column Description Start time Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point ID Identifier value hexadecimal value Label Symbolic label available if a label list was loaded and applied Length Number of data bytes Data Hexadecimal values of the data bytes Chks Checksum value State Overall state of the frame SCPI commands e BUS LIN FCOunt on page 406 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt DATA on page 406 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt STARt on page 407 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt STOP on page 408 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt VERSion on page 409 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt CSSTate on page 406 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt CSValue on page 406 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDSTate on page 407 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDValue on page 407 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt IDPValue on page 407 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt SYSTate on page 408 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt SYValue on page 408 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt on page 409 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STATe on page 409 e BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue on page 409 11 7 6 Search on Decoded LIN Data Using the search functionali
144. system 11 VISA Address String 237 Visible SOM m 98 softkey remote 330 V Marker 75 Voltage 75 VXI protocol ais 232 WwW Wait Cl DER 267 Waveform ett Waveform Arithmetic e ME rut cu p dnte coa decades Waveforms File formats 4 4 c ene nter rts 216 Saveand load nente tess 216 Ee 213 219 Saving to USB flash device 218 rji cet r 213 e iaa 28 Waveform samples sese 12 Wfm Arithmetic EET iia etc dederint eie ete edd softkey White space Width KI T ld 134 Width X rji M 126 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 Width Y tlc M 125 Window SOMKEY ics 113 Window type le aria 333 X A EU 57 acivate sa eege 54 e ein elle O E 58 Y Y t Setup Co cyiPC 116 Y Position mask SOfKEY E 125 SOMO caca 116 Y Scale EE 115 Y Scaling SOM 114 YT Window E 115 Z Zoom Main Time Base esee 66 116 hoo LE 65 Zoom Off SOMKEY gue 67 Zoom Time tji M M 66 Zoom Time Base rji M 66 455
145. test analyzes whether tested signal runs inside the mask The overall test result is shown in the results table Total 2785 2s left column number of tested acquisitions and test duration middle column number of passed acquisitions green and number of failed acquisitions red right column percentage share of passed and failed acquisitions During a mask test various actions can be executed when mask violations occur notifi cation by a sound stop of acquisition printout or saving a screenshot saving the wave form data E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 118 R amp S9RTM Masks About Masks SCPI commands for mask test results e MASK COUNt on page 342 e MASK VCOunt on page 342 e MASK RESet COUNter on page 342 File Formats for Masks Data of masks is always saved as a succession of pairs of values lower and upper limit and the pairs are written as two consecutive single values Depending on the file format only amplitude values are stored or the amplitude values are stored together with their sample index Amplitude values are not saved as voltage values but as division values The minimum value for evaluation is 5 12 DIV the maximum is 5 12 DIV The internal vertical range of the instrument exceeds the visible vertical range of 4 DIV With export you can convert the MSK file to CSV TXT or BIN formats Import is possible for MSK and CSV files MSK Format MSK is the specific binary for
146. tette nde tt pv dd sedat lends da dep det 396 BUS CAN FRAMe nz JDNalue eene nennen etre nnn eren 396 BUS CAN FRAMesns S TARE ie d Re ER e Y aaa 393 EE e ME ECH TE 393 BUS CAN FRAMesn gt STOP EE 393 BUS CAN FRAM e lt n gt s TYPE 392 EIER e MET E 388 eee User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 435 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands BUSCAN TYPE 388 SE RE 360 BUS KEE 360 BUS FORMAE outils bl desa Ava 360 BUS 120 CGLOCK SQURES MM 371 SEENEN EE 372 BUSERT aa ii 375 BUS 120 FRAMesn gt AAGCESS7 conciente adt eed d duties 378 BUS I2C FRAMGSN gt ACCESS 377 BUS I2C FRAMesn ACOMMplete enint prete et ttt tede cardenas deidad atacada di 377 BUS 2G FRAMesn gt ADBStait eege e eii ree E ene ete tC 379 BUS I2C FRAM sn ADDRGSS 1 ia atapi a tecta seid Pei etie tit 377 BUS I2C FRAMesn ADEVIG6 ante eee esed cbe tert pee ret e 378 SEHR e E Tel 377 BUS 120 FRAMESASAS Talt EE 378 BUS I2C FRAMesn BOOUnt viii ad 379 BUS I2C FRAMe n BYTESOS ACC68S i iiie dn ended dde ill dr 380 BUS I2C FRAMe n BYTE o ACKStart esses inenennenninn annees enne sitne sensns 380 BUS 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt COMPlete oooooconcccocncoccnoncnononannncnno coronan ncnn nan nn ARa ai T a eE n nn nana enne nennen 381 BUS 1
147. that contain lead mercury or cadmium are hazardous waste Observe the national regulations regarding waste disposal and recycling Transport 1 The product may be very heavy Therefore the product must be handled with care In some cases the user may require a suitable means of lifting or moving the product e g with a lift truck to avoid back or other physical injuries Handles on the products are designed exclusively to enable personnel to transport the product It is therefore not permissible to use handles to fasten the product to or on transport equipment such as cranes fork lifts wagons etc The user is responsible for securely fastening the products to or on the means of transport or lifting Observe the safety regulations of the manufacturer of the means of transport or lifting Noncompliance can result in personal injury or material damage If you use the product in a vehicle it is the sole responsibility of the driver to drive the vehicle safely and properly The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for accidents or collisions Never use the product in a moving vehicle if doing so could distract the driver of the vehicle Adequately secure the product in the vehicle to prevent injuries or other damage in the event of an accident 1171 0000 42 07 Page 6 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Waste disposal Environmental protection 1 Specially marked equipment has a battery or accumulator that must not be disposed of
148. the frame table The selected frame is shown in the center of the display If you select another frame the waveform display is adjusted automat ically Hori Position The frame selection in the frame table is connected to the waveform display The frame in the center of the display is selected in the frame table When you change the horizontal position of the waveform the selection in the frame table is adjusted automatically Frame time difference If selected the time shown in the frame table is the time difference to the previous frame The column is indicated with Time diff If the setting is disabled the absolute time in releation to the trigger point is shown in the Start time column Position Defines the position of the frame table on the screen top right bottom right or full screen With full screen setting the frame table covers nearly the complete righthand half of the screen Save Opens the Save menu to save the decoded data in a CSV file comma separated list Remote command BUS LIST SAVE on page 361 BUS LIST on page 360 EA A e 22222 2 2 22 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 149 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis Parallel Bus 11 2 Parallel Bus The R amp S RTM can display up to four lines of a parallel bus depending on the number of input channels Specific trigger settings are not available To trigger on parallel buses use the pattern trigger See chapter 3 3 2 5 Pattern on page 47
149. the analog test signal to measure the amplitude with high accuracy Most test signals are more complex than a simple sine wave and include several spectral components A digital signal for example is built up of several odd harmonics As a rule of thumb for digital signals the oscilloscope bandwidth should be 5 times higher than the clock frequency to be measured The oscilloscope is not a stand alone system You need a probe to measure the signal of interest and the probe has a limited bandwidth too The combination of oscilloscope and probe creates a system bandwidth To maintain the oscilloscope bandwidth that is to reduce the effect of the probe on the system bandwidth the probe bandwidth should exceed the bandwidth of the oscilloscope the recommended factor is 1 5 x oscilloscope bandwidth See also chapter 2 1 4 1 Voltage Probes on page 16 Sampling and Acquisition The vertical system of a digital oscilloscope conditions the test signal in a way that the following A D Converter ADC can transform the measured voltage into digital data User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 12 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup m m o s Basics 2 1 2 1 Sampling and Processing The A D converter samples the continuous signal under test at specific points in time and delivers digital values called ADC samples The rate at
150. the level to 50 of the signal amplitude If a B trigger is enabled the knob can set the level for both the A and B trigger To assign the level to the A or B trigger use Trigger Level in the Trigger menu Remote command TRIGger A LEVel n VALue on page 292 TRIGger A FINDlevel on page 292 TRIGger B FINDlevel on page 299 SETUP Opens the Trigger menu SOURCE Opens the Trigger Source menu Press the key repeatedly until the required source is selected The key lights up in the color of the selected trigger channel The selected source is shown in the information bar SLOPE If you have selected Edge trigger as trigger type with an analog trigger source the SLOPE key toggles the trigger slope The current setting is shown by an icon in the information bar If a B trigger is enabled the key can set the slope for both the A and B trigger To assign the slope to the A or B trigger use Trigger Level in the Trigger menu 3 3 2 Trigger Settings Trigger settings consist of general settings in the Trigger menu and the trigger type specific setup For B trigger setup a separate menu is provided e Trigger Menu and Trigger SOUIGe reino tr errem ratio aed eed 40 b coo EET 41 Map CD 43 Io o es 45 QUE ur E E E ANEA E E E AE A A 47 Milo EE 48 e EE cereo rn Fr lie 48 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 39 R amp
151. the signal voltage is higher than the trigger level L Low the signal voltage is lower than the trigger level X Don t care the channel does not affect the trigger If X is set for all channels the oscilloscope triggers only in automatic trigger mode Remote command TRIGger A PATTern SOURce on page 298 Combination Sets the logical combination of the trigger states of the channels And The required states of all channels must appear in the input signal at the same time Or At least one of the channels must have the required state Remote command TRIGger A PATTern FUNCtion on page 298 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 47 R amp S RTM Triggers EH Reference for Triggers Trigger On Sets the trigger point depending on the result of the logical combination of the channel states Remote command TRIGger A PATTern CONDition on page 298 3 3 2 6 Protocol The Protocol trigger menu contains the trigger settings for the serial bus or interface that is configured with PROTOCOL Protocol analysis requires additional options For protocol setup and trigger settings see chapter 11 Protocol Analysis on page 144 To trigger on parallel buses use the pattern trigger See chapter 3 3 2 5 Pattern on page 47 3 3 2 7 B Setup The B trigger is a second edge trigger event that can be combined with a preceeding edge trigger event The conditions of this second event are considered when the condi tions of the ma
152. ti MATHS M EE 337 GALGulate MATH SMmM gt FFTIS TAR EE 338 GALCulate Wi En E TS TOP dires dd ir aia tada dada dada 338 CALCulate MATHS lt m FF T NME RANGE cinco ia ias Domin nen e E ERR D Dd eques 338 CALC late MATH M gt FF TAME POSH OM ici ath ro re ha Dp sere roa va rere bid 339 CAL e E Ee E E RE 339 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT WINDow TYPE lt WindowType gt Window functions are multiplied with the input values and thus can improve the FFT display Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant R amp S9RTM Remote Control Parameters lt WindowType gt Command Reference RECTangular HAMMing HANNing BLACkmanharris RECTangular The rectangular window multiplies all points by one The result is a high frequency accuracy with thin spectral lines but also with increased noise Use this function preferably with pulse response tests where start and end values are zero HAMMing The Hamming window is bell shaped Its value is not zero at the borders of the measuring interval Thus the noise level inside the spectrum is higher than Hanning or Blackman but smaller than the rectangular window The width of the spectral lines is thinner than the other bell shaped functions Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely HANNing The Hanning window is bell shaped Unlike the Hamming window its value is zero at the borders of the measuring interval Thus the noise level within t
153. tion mark Example SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Returns the maximum numeric value as a result Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states The ON state logically true is represented by ON or a numeric value 1 The OFF state logically untrue is represented by OFF or the numeric value 0 The numeric values are provided as the response for a query Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 Text parameters Text parameters observe the syntactic rules for mnemonics i e they can be entered using a shortor long form Like any parameter they have to be separated from the header by a white space In the case of a query the short form of the text is provided Example Setting command HardCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND Character strings Strings must always be entered in quotation marks or Example HCOP ITEM LABel Test1 Or HCOP ITEM LABel Testl Block data Block data is a format which is suitable for the transmission of large amounts of data A command using a block data parameter has the following structure EET RU e AA lt lt lt gt gt gt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 246 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m M Basics Example FORMat READings DATA 45168xxxxxxxx The ASCII character introduces th
154. to ERRCondition Parameters lt ChecksumError gt ON OFF RST ON TRIGger A LIN IPERror lt ldParityError gt Triggers on a parity error Parity bits are the bits 6 and 7 of the identifier They verify the correct transmission of the identifier The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt ldParityError gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger A LIN SYERror lt SyncError gt Triggers if synchronization caused an error The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt SyncError gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger A LIN ICONdition lt IdentifierCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for the identifier If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT Parameters lt IdentifierCondition gt EQUal NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQ TRIGger A LIN IDENtifier Identifier Defines the identifier pattern The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 404 R8S RTM Remote Control BREET Command Reference Parameters Identifier String containing binary pattern Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Ente
155. to the instrument the import converts the data to TRF format The instrument reads the first and the last time value and calculates the total time of the waveform and it counts the number of values Then all amplitude values are read one by one and written with an equidistant time distribution to the TRF file If the first two time values are identical the waveform is considered to consist of pairs of values TXT Format TXT files are ASCII files that contain only amplitude values in scientific notation but no time values Amplitude values are separated by commas Pairs of values are listed as two subsequent single values without any identification There is no comma at the end of the file Example TXT file 1 000E 02 1 000E 02 1 000E 02 1 000E 02 3 000E 02 BIN Format BIN files contain binary amplitude values only but no time values Each value has a word size of 8 or 16 or 32 bit the word size is the same throughout the file User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 217 R amp S RTM Data and File Management Saving and Loading Words are given in Big Endian order beginning with the MSB Most Significant Byte and ending with the LSB Least Significant Byte Pairs of values are listed as two sub sequent single values without any identification 12 2 4 2 Saving a Waveform to USB flash drive If you want to save many waveforms you can assign the function to the PRINT key Infrequent savings can be started from the File menu Be
156. to the y values of the upper mask limit and subtracted from the y values of the lower mask limit Range O to 5 12 Increment 0 04 RST 0 Default unit div MASK XWIDth lt Xaddition gt Changes the width of the mask in horizontal direction Parameters lt Xaddition gt The value is added to the positive x values and subtracted from the negative x values of the mask limits in relation to the mask center Range 0 to 10 Increment 0 01 RST 0 Default unit div User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 341 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m O J e Command Reference MASK COUNt Returns the number of tested acquisitions Return values lt TotalCount gt Total number of tested acquisitions Usage Query only MASK VCOunt Returns the number of acquistions that hit the mask Return values lt ViolationCount gt Acquisition count Usage Query only MASK RESet COUNter Sets the counters of passed and failed acquisitions to Zero Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 800 MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt MASK ACTion STOP EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt MASK ACTion PRINt EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENt MODE lt EventMode gt Defines when and how often the action will be executed e SOUNd Generates a beep sound e STOP Stops the waveform acquisition e PRINt Prints a screenshot t
157. trigger Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Polarity gt NORMal INVerted RST NORM CHANnel lt m gt OVERload lt Overload gt Retrieves the overload status of the specified channel from the status bit When the overload problem is solved the command resets the status bit Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Overload gt ON OFF Use OFF to reset the overload status bit RST OFF Example CHANnel2 0VERload Queries the overload status of channel 2 CHANnel2 0VERload OFF Resets the overload status bit CHANnel lt m gt SKEW lt Skew gt Skew or deskew compensates delay differences between channels caused by the dif ferent length of cables probes and other sources Correct deskew values are important for accurate triggering Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 281 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control PIEGNRGMCI C m m nn Command Reference Parameters Skew Deskew value
158. trigger modes are useful The auto mode lets you see the signal with very little adjustment while the normal mode selects the interesting part of the waveform If you want to acquire a specified number of waveforms with NxSingle make sure to select the normal trigger mode Thus you get only the required number of interesting acquisitions See also chapter 3 Triggers on page 35 Horizontal System Horizontal Position As described before in chapter 2 1 2 3 Acquisition Control on page 15 the trigger defines the time zero point in the waveform record Two parameters set the position of the horizontal acquisition window in relation to the trigger point reference point time reference and trigger offset With these parameters you choose the part of the waveform you want to see around the trigger before or after the trigger E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 15 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup Basics iT Resolution First waveform sample in record Trigger point y Horizontal acquisition window Trigger offset Time reference div 2 1 4 Probes A probe connects the signal source DUT to the oscilloscope and delivers the signal to be measured It is the essential first link in the measurement chain An ideal probe fulfills the following requirements e Safe and reliable contacts e Infinite bandwidth e The probe should not load the signal source and thus impact the
159. value in the command Entries without a suffix are interpreted as having the suffix 1 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 242 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mam E J x Q J O A t r Basics Example Definition HardCOPy PAGE DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt Command HCOP PAGE DIM QUAD2 This command refers to the quadrant 2 For remote control the suffix may differ from the number of the corresponding selection used in manual operation SCPI prescribes that suffix counting starts with 1 Suffix 1 is the default state and used when no specific suffix is specified E Different numbering in remote control Optional mnemonics Some command systems permit certain mnemonics to be inserted into the header or omitted These mnemonics are marked by square brackets in the description The instru ment must recognize the long command to comply with the SCPI standard Some com mands are considerably shortened by these optional mnemonics Example Definition HardCOPy IMMediate Command HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP D Optional mnemonics with numeric suffixes Do not omit an optional mnemonic if it includes a numeric suffix that is relevant for the effect of the command Example Definition DISPlay WINDow lt 1 4 gt MAXimize Boolean Command DISP MAX ON refers to window 1 In order to refer to a window
160. with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately lt may only be disposed of at a suitable collection point or via a Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center 2 Waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of with unsorted municipal waste but must be collected separately Rohde amp Schwarz GmbH amp Co KG has developed a disposal concept and takes full responsibility for take back obligations and disposal obligations for manufacturers within the EU Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz customer service center for environmentally responsible disposal of the product 3 If products or their components are mechanically and or thermally processed in a manner that goes beyond their intended use hazardous substances heavy metal dust such as lead beryllium nickel may be released For this reason the product may only be disassembled by specially trained personnel Improper disassembly may be hazardous to your health National waste disposal regulations must be observed 4 If handling the product releases hazardous substances or fuels that must be disposed of in a special way e g coolants or engine oils that must be replenished regularly the safety instructions of the manufacturer of the hazardous substances or fuels and the applicable regional waste disposal regulations must be observed Also observe the relevant safety instructions in the product documentation The improper disposal of hazardous substances or fu
161. without the data field The identifier format is also considered see ID type on page 185 Data or remote Frame type Triggers on remote frames and on data frames The identifier format is also considered see ID type on page 185 Error type Identifies various errors in the frame You can select one or more error types as trigger condition The first key press enables the Error trigger type the second opens the Error menu Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 389 ERRCondition Stuff bit Error type The frame segments Start Of Frame Arbitration Field Control Field Data Field and CRC Sequence are coded by the bit stuffing method The transmitter automatically inserts a complementary bit into the bit stream when it detects five consecutive bits of identical value in the bit stream to be transmitted A stuff error occurs when the 6th consecutive equal bit level in the mentioned fields is detected Remote command TRIGger A CAN BITSterror on page 391 Form Error type A form error occurs when a fixed form bit field contains one or more illegal bits Remote command TRIGger A CAN FORMerror on page 392 Acknowledge Error type An acknowledgement error occurs when the transmitter does not receive an acknowl edgment a dominant bit during the Ack Slot Remote command TRIGger A CAN ACKerror on page 391 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 183 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysi
162. 0 3 273E 00 000E 00 7 831E 0 000E 01 3 273E 00 000E 01 8 232E 0 Rh HA wu wee sl En Oy Ur Qn o At export the sample indexes are written in scientific notification If you create a mask manually in a CSV file you can write the indexes simply as intergers The file should contain 1000 pairs of min max values TXT Format TXT files are ASCII files that contain only amplitude values in divisions but no time values Amplitude values are separated by commas Pairs of values are listed as two subsequent single values without any identification There is no comma at the end of the file Example TXT file 4 00 4 20 4 05 4 25 4 08 4 28 y 74 05 4 25 4 00 4 20 BIN Format BIN files contain binary amplitude values only but no time values Each value has a word size of 8 or 16 or 32 bit the word size is the same throughout the file Words are given in Big Endian order beginning with the MSB Most Significant Byte and ending with the LSB Least Significant Byte Pairs of values are listed as two sub sequent single values without any identification Working with Masks Masks define a frame with which you can compare the signal values You can load pre configured masks or define your own masks based on existing waveforms When you perform a test you can define which actions are to be taken upon violation of the mask limits Masks are displayed in the color used for reference waveforms User Manual 1305
163. 000023E 10 FORM UINT 8 FORM Set data format to unsigned integer 8 bit lt UINT 8 CHAN DATA YINC Read voltage value per bit 1 999999949E 4 CHAN DATA Read channel data 128 125 120 5000 bytes total FORM UINT 16 FORM Change data format to unsigned integer 16 bit lt UINT 16 CHAN DATA YINC Read voltage value per bit lt 7 812499803E 7 CHAN DATA Read channel data 32768 32000 30720 10000 bytes total Note the following correlations e The number of received data values matches the number of samples indicated in the header e The time of the first sample XORigin matches the start time Xstart indicated in the header e The Y increment adjusts to the data length defined in the data format 8 or 16 bit Data conversion Definition the sample numbers start with O and end with record length 1 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 431 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 3 2 14 3 2 1 Programming Examples Sample time t n xincrement xOrigin First sample f 4 998000058E 7 Xstart Last sample t4999 4999 2E 4 998E 7 5 0 E Xstop Sample value Y yOrigin yincrement byteValue The format UINT 8 has the data range 0 to 255 The voltage value for byte value 128 is Y 2 55E 2E 4 128 0 0001 The center of the display at position O div always has the byte value 127 5 The corre sponding voltage value is Y
164. 02 08 323 R8S RTM Remote Control EES Command Reference Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Parameters lt SignalSource gt NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MAS RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 TRIGger Waveform to be measured required for all measurement types CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Active signal channels 1 to 4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 Active math channels 1 to 5 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 Active reference channels 1 to 4 TRIGger Trigger source if the measurement type is a trigger measurement TFRequency TPERiode measure the A trigger source TBFRe quency TBPeriod measure the B trigger source RST CH1 lt ReferenceSource gt NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MAS RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 Second waveform reference source that is required for delay and phase mesurements MEASurement lt m gt DELay SLOPe lt SignalSlope gt lt ReferenceSlope gt Sets the edges to be used for delay measurement The associated waveforms are defined with MEASurement lt m gt SOURce Parameters lt SignalSlope gt POSitive NEGative Slope of source 1 first waveform RST POS ReferenceSlope POSitive NEGative Slope of source 2 second waveform RST POS Firmware Software 03 400 MEASurement lt m gt RESult ACTual lt MeasType gt Returns the result of the specified measurement type Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place ERA SSSR
165. 05 Saving and Loading eerte iras 206 Storage LOCATIONS Ec 206 Quick Access with PRINT key 212 na S 214 WAV e UE 216 SENSO S 219 References Masks and Equation Sets Import Export ssssessseeseeesreesrnrsrnn rnrn nrnna 221 General Instrument Setup csse 222 Firmware and Options reina no nito ueniat RE en RRPAXRRRRRKRERIXRRRARRARRRERERANRRRRARRRARRRAARRRRRRRRRAAT 222 Updating Firmwares as ree Me eee ede eii 222 Activating Be e EE 223 Reference TT ET 223 Remote Control cuina 231 BaSi S E 231 Remote Control Intertaces nennen nennen nnns 231 Setting Up a LAN CGonpechon nene emen nemen 233 Switching to Remote Control 238 Messages and Command Gtruchure eene 238 Command Sequence and Synchronization 249 Status Reporting Gvstem cece cere ee ee eee etree ee ee sere nano nnn cnn cnn nana nennen 251 General Programming Recommendations sse 262 Command Reference occidente event 263 LE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 7 R8S RTM Contents 14 2 1 Conventions used in Remote Command Description 263 14 2 2 Common Commande eee nere nennen nennen nnns 264 14 2 3 General Remote Settings and Oueres en 267 1424 Acquisition and Getup nana tes enne rennen 271 14 29 le e E 291 N T 301 14 2 7 Reference Wavetomms nan nn nan nn nn nn nr rn ener nennen nnne nenne 308 14 2 8 Measurements eee eerie eene nn nn nn naar nr rra AANEEN AEAEE anna rr rra rar enana 312 14 2 9 Mathematics 330 iS UM c 333
166. 05 0595 02 08 14 R amp S9RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup 2 1 2 3 2 1 3 1 Basics value of several adjacent sample points of the same waveform and displays it The result is a moving average that uses the full data and can be used for non periodic signals Acquisition Control You can run the R amp S RTM in two ways e Continuous the instrument acquires data until you stop it manually e NxSingle the instrument samples and processes a specified number of acquisitions The determining point of an acquisition is the trigger It defines the time zero point in the waveform record The instrument acquires continuously and keeps the sample points to fill the pre trigger part of the waveform record When the trigger occurs the instrument continues acquisition until the post trigger part of the waveform record is filled Then it stops acquiring and waits for the next trigger When a trigger is recognized the instrument will not accept another trigger until the acquisition is complete The trigger modes define how the instrument triggers e Normal The instrument acquires a waveform only if a real trigger occurs that is if all trigger conditions are fulfilled e Auto The instrument triggers repeatedly after a fixed time interval if the trigger con ditions are not fulfilled If a real trigger occurs it takes precedence If the real trigger is faster than the auto trigger both modes are virtually the same In practice both
167. 0595 02 08 120 R amp S RTM Masks Working with Masks 9 2 1 Creating New Masks You create a new mask based on a channel waveform then optimize it by changing its position and proportions and save it 1 Select and adjust the channel waveform that will be used as basis for the mask and run continuous acquisition 2 Press MASKS The selected waveform is displayed with its envelope other waveforms are switched off in masks mode 3 Press New Mask 4 Press Copy Channel to create the new mask The mask is created from the envelope and displayed in the color used for reference waveforms TB 20ns T 0s Auto CH1 1 88 V 4 DC O CH1 500mV Ad Envelope Mo MM EL Ain TT I FIT IRE Y il i ius 5 To change the width of the waveform in vertical direction press Width Y and turn the Navigation rotary knob User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 121 R amp SS9RTM Masks Working with Masks The specified factor in divisions is added to the y values of the upper mask limit and subtracted from the y values of the lower mask limit Thus the upper half ofthe mask is pulled upwards the lower half is pulled down 6 Similarly to change the width of the waveform in horizontal direction press Width X and turn the Navigation rotary knob The left half of the mask is pulled to the left the right half is pulled to the right TB 20ns T 0s Auto CH1 1 88 V A DC 5 GSals Envelope Run
168. 1 SGEAbRch TRIGger RISetime RANGE AAA 350 EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 443 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands SEARCH IRIGgar RISetime SLOPe rtr rere teet ee eebe Eeer 350 SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME sis nit ederet a bh ENNER 351 SEARCH TRIGger RUNT DELE Ta urit etn ttr to idad 353 SEARch TRIGger RUNT POLafilty 2 tree aen ipt rye aetna epe a e Ded d ete de dads 352 SEARCH TRIGgar R NT RANGS ene ritiene eo aee nece erica creian 352 SEARch TRIGger RUNT WIDTRh 2 nont criar ciencia e E nha Fa er Ya rae vae 353 SEARch TRIGger WIB ThIDEL TA tete tertiae a a eaa 349 SEARch TRIGgerWIDTEHLBEVel 2 tee iar ctt hne t te eee etie tg dp eere dat 348 SEARch TRilGoer WIDTblEVel DEL Ta 348 SEARch TRilGoer WID Tb POL art 347 SEARch TRIGger WIDTRh RANG 2 et ac 348 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh isi rc STATus OPERation CONDition STA Tius OPERation BNABI isc M STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition STATusObREbRanonl EVEN 427 STATUS E EE STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATusOUlEG onable COVerload CONDmon seinen eene nennen nennen enn 428 STATusOUEGtonableCOVerloadENAble enne nennen ener nnns nnns nnne 429 SGTATusOUEG onable COVerloadNTRansitton corona cnn nennen nnne nnne 429 STATus QUEStionable COVerload PTRansition
169. 1 ALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLU LLLSM X User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 231 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 1 1 1 14 1 1 2 14 1 1 3 Basics SCPI confirmed commands are explicitly marked in the command reference chapters Commands without SCPI label are device specific however their syntax follows SCPI rules LAN Interface The R amp S RTM is equipped with a network interface and can be connected to an Ethernet LAN local area network for remote control of the instrument The instrument accepts remote commands via the LAN interface using the VISA library VISA must be installed on the control computer The R amp S RTM supports two ways of LAN communication e VXI 11 protocol a protocol that has been specifically developed for test and mea surement instruments It is the recommended protocol for remote control via LAN e Raw socket mode a synchronous streaming oriented protocol Consequently raw Socket communication does not support asynchronous events like Service Request SRQ or Device Clear DCL See also chapter 14 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connection on page 233 VXI 11 Protocol The VXI 11 standard is based on the ONC RPC Open Network Computing Remote Procedure Call protocol which in turn relies on TCP IP as the network transport layer The TCP IP network protocol and the associated network services are preconfigured TCP IP ensures connection oriented communication where the order of the e
170. 2 1 1 3 Bandwidth on page 12 Full At full bandwidth all frequencies in the specified range are acquired and displayed Full bandwidth is used for most applications 400 MHz Frequencies above the selected limit are removed to reduce noise at 200MHz different levels These bandwidth limits are indicated by the icon Bu in 20MHz the waveform label Remote command CHANnel lt m gt BANDwidth on page 280 Offset See OFFSET on page 28 Invert Turns the inversion of the signal amplitude on or off To invert means to reflect the voltage values of all signal components against the ground level Inversion affects only the display of the signal but not the trigger For example if the oscilloscope triggers on the rising edge the trigger is not changed by inversion but the actually rising edge is displayed as falling edge User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 30 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup aS A A gait Reference for Waveform Setup Inversion is indicated by a line above the channel name in the waveform label Remote command CHANnel lt m gt POLarity on page 281 Y Scale See SCALE Y Scale on page 29 Probe Opens the Probe menu The menu is different for active and passive probes e chapter 2 3 3 3 Probe Menu Passive Probe on page 32 e chapter 2 3 3 4 Probe Menu Active Probe on page 32 Deskew Deskew compensates delay differences between channels caused by the different length of cables pro
171. 2G FRAMe lt n gt BY TESOSSTARE iiec ceteri E EEEE EE NE E aE nina aai iaa iia 380 BUS 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTESOS VALUE inicios mne etta fie de tha eios d nie dd 379 BUS I2C FRAMeSBSDATA tetra tr essent esit tuendae iae enana iaa 375 Se I pr 376 BUS I2C EE RE 376 BUS 2C FRAMe lt n gt STOP SIUE RM sing i i S BUS LIN DATASOURCO IUS Nee dE 406 SIEHE BJ DEC e 409 BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTESOSSTATO trud rte ete ceo et ete title e de dt 409 BU S EIN FRAMesn BYTEsO VALUG certet ne ttem tnt entere drid 409 BUS EIN ERAMeSHEIOSS Tate tiene er pac eer semen eed eb Debes eS 406 BUS LIN FRAMe sn gt CSValUG e cane 406 BUS EIN ERAMeSn DATA 1 rece ronde e etie di le toi 406 BUS EIN FRAMe sn DP Value certet treten te nr atrae Raani Ean ai tees reni gene 407 BUS LIN FRAMesn DS Tate tia aaa lia 407 BUS LIN FRAMesn IDV alle ios A ia 407 BUSLIN FRAM lt n gt STARI da idad road 407 BUS EIN FRAMeSsh gt S TOP 2 eegene eieiei td 408 B S EIN FRAM sR SYS T ate ete petet eer reete deine tai 408 BUS LIN EEN WE 408 BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt VERSION A coccion ia dd a ed 409 BUS LIN POLarity URB ESEEMDLU 402 BUS Bn RE 361 BUSTA A ia 360 BUS PARPallelWIBITR uuu ertet e tmr dore retenti etae i 361 BUS Ie E
172. 3 10 3 4 10 3 5 10 3 6 10 3 7 10 3 8 10 3 9 Reference for Mathematics cccccsseeeesceesesseceeseeesesseeeeeseeeseeseeeeseeeneesseeeeeeeeeeseeenenes 97 e o H 106 FET DiS EE 106 Configuring and Using FFT Calculations eene 107 setting Up the FET ANalySIS ie render plene dada eiii cai 107 Configuring the Diagrams nn E ETERRA ASENN 108 Measuring ON FF Tica E ii in 111 Reference for FFT Key comia 111 MS mec 118 About MasKSs iiie tentent RR RRRIIUERRRRRRDNKRXRRRRRIIMRR XR RR RRIMRE NS RP RRDIPeR RGR RR PNE vai 118 MEEDcmee EUM 118 Mask cup E iii 118 File Formats for Masks eder a e Erbe ee i ieee etd 119 Working with ET eene icit creen tetti nu nac ASAA ATAA AAAA 120 Creating New Masks et ede palle esta acc da orba ad e ea Ee Met ae ER doa 121 NertnaMutcrteem UMS 123 Performing a Mask Test t teet diete dieere Meses 123 Reference for MASKS Key sisiiciccisssscdeccetessacecececcessenceceeseveocceeceetessadieceterssadieceeetavsanate 124 oc Pa 128 Search Conditions and Results eese nennen 128 ee RN 128 Configuring and Performing SearcheS ooommmmmcccccnnnnnnnosccnnnnnnnnnasnrnnn rra arre 130 Reference for Search Menwu eese nnne nnne nennen 131 Main Search Men 131 Edge SOUP POP o 133 Width ee APPO ms 134 ST LO neta dnicdanne anna
173. 305 0595 02 08 222 R amp S9RTM General Instrument Setup 13 1 2 13 2 Reference for Setup 7 Update the online help as well as softkey labels and display texts of additional lan guages SETUP gt More gt Update gt Language gt Language select gt Update See the Getting Started Manual for further information To update the interface firmware 1 Insert a USB flash drive containing an update in the instrument 2 Press SETUP gt Update gt Interface The currently installed firmware version as well as all available update versions are displayed 3 Press Execute to install the available firmware updates Activating Options New R amp S RTM options must be activated using the license key supplied by Rohde amp Schwarz The license key can be read from a license file or entered manually 1 Press SETUP gt Update gt Upgrade 2 To load the key from a file a Connect the USB flash drive to the instrument b Press Read keys from license file c Select the Storage location change directory if needed and select the license file d Press Load 3 To enter the license key manually a Press Input key manually b Enter the license key with the on screen keyboard and press Accept The option is enabled and can be used immediately Reference for Setup The SETUP key provides functions for basic instrument settings and allows you to update the instrument s firmware and hel
174. 376 I2C FRAMe lt n gt STOP on page 376 I2C FRAMe lt n gt AACCess on page 378 I2C FRAMe lt n gt ACCess on page 377 I2C FRAMe lt n gt ACOMplete on page 377 I2C FRAMe lt n gt ADBStart on page 379 I2C FRAMe lt n gt ADDRess on page 377 I2C FRAMe lt n gt ADEVice on page 378 I2C FRAMe lt n gt AMODe on page 377 I2C FRAMe lt n gt ASTart on page 378 I2C FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt on page 379 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt ACCess on page 380 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt ACKStart on page 380 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt COMPlete on page 381 12C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STARt on page 380 UJ Ei dU gt Jk JS 8 Je UJ Jg JK Je ER Es Ze Er OUS Y S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S I2C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue on page 379 UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 The UART RS232 Interface The Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter UART converts a word of data into serial data and vice versa It is the base of many serial protocols like of RS 232 The UART uses only one line or two lines for transmitter and receiver Data transfer The data is transmitted in symbols also referred to as words or characters Each symbol consists of a start bit several data bits an optional parity bit and one or more stop bits Several symbols can form a frame or package The end of a frame is marked by a pause between two symbols Fi
175. 4 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CSOurce sees eee neeeneren nn tenen trennen 353 SGEAbRch TRlGoer DAT atocdhock D EVel ennemi enerset nens sen etnn sentes 354 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel DELTa sessi eene een nennen nnne r nn nnns n nn nnns canes 354 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock HT IMe esses nenne neret rerit erre nere etre n nnns 354 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock STIMe SEARCH TRIGger TE DEE SEARch TRIGger EDGE EEVel DEET edic ieaie lacada eade dead 347 SEARG lee EDGE e cere ier mestre Er pa uen ert ee etae ress dendo teste radianes 347 SGEAbRch TRilGoerl EVelHlGenme LOWer eene enne ennt nn nnne tn rnt nnns nnns nnn 350 SGEAbRch TRilGoerlEVelHlGenme Uber 350 SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT LOWer SEARCch TRIGger LEV l RUNT UPPEF ioiocinioniran dinar ien cere ee BERE ERR HERR eaa Eod Edd gap daga SGEARch TRilGoerPATTemEUNCon enne n nan rra nene rn nenne rennes enn Ennen Ennen Enae SEARch TRIGg r PAT WERNER GE SEARch TRIGger PATTern LEVel n DELTAa essent rennen nnne aria 356 SEARch TRIGger PAT Tern SOURCa 2 ina dd a sen Us el Aes de eet SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh DELTa SEARch TRIGger PAT Tern WIDTH RANGE cccecececeeeeeeeseeeeseereeeeeaeeeeecaesnecaesenecaeseesaeseeeaeeteeeenteneeeateaes 356 SGEAbRch TRlGoerPATTem VWID THIWIDTDl nnne enne nnne rennen nnne 357 SEARch TRIGger RlSetime DEI T 2 iren uicta eee a Ye deve DEVE Ada 35
176. 407 BUS LIN FRAMesnP IDS Tae ennont ianiai a i aai Eaa aE aa aaia ia aaia 407 BUS LIN FRAMES IDE a ccce t anaana aaa aap dadinda dahada ii cani Eada radai iaia 407 BUS EINFRRAMES i gt STARE EE 407 I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 405 R8S RTM Remote Control rms XK Command Reference BUS BIR EN te 408 BUS LIN FRAMeSRPSYSTaUe ee tre dad 408 BUS CLIN FRAMo MIS VV OIE detener rt uenire E E MEE 408 BUS LIN FRAMe snP VERSIO otia ce need ena eoa R eege 409 BUS LIN FRAMeSRPESBOUQOUnLU E 409 EUR lt n gt CN e HR KEE 409 BUS LIN FRAMe n BYTE o VALue 1 eiiis cesa scene cusa nadaa dianas iaa 409 BUS LIN FCOunt Returns the number of received frames of the active LIN bus Return values FrameCount Total number of decoded frames Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt CSSTate Returns the checksum state of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt i Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ChecksumState gt OK ERR UNDF ERR error UNDF undefined Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt CSValue Returns the checksum value Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values ChecksumValue Decimal value Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt DATA Returns the data bytes of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 406 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m
177. 429 STATusOUEGuonableNTRansiton 429 STATusOUEGuonable COVerloadNTbRansition siiin naniii 429 STATus QUESHonable IMIENITESSIHOI 1 trot A da 429 STATusOUEGuonable MAGkKNTbRansiton niiina ia annaa iiaa 429 STATusOUEGuonable P Hansition 430 STATusOUEGuonable COVerload D Ransition naaa R iao da iaa Ei 430 STATUS QUEStionable LIMIPPTRANSILION eiiis een nennen nne Rn dnm nnn n nnn Rn aaia E Ea 430 STATusOUEGuonable MAGk D Hansi on 430 STATus PRESet Resets all STATUS QUESTIONALBLE registers Usage Event STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable COVerload CONDition STATus QUEStionable LIMit CONDition STATus QUEStionable MASK CONDition Returns the contents of the CONDition part of the status register to check for questionable instrument or measurement states Reading the CONDition registers does not delete the contents Return values Condition Condition bits in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Usage Query only User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 428 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm CR X O OR p Command Reference STATus QUEStionable ENABle Enable STATus QUEStionable COVerload ENABle Enable STATus QUEStionable LIMit ENABle Enable STATus QUEStionable MASK ENABle Enable Sets the enable mask that allows true conditions in the EVENt part to be r
178. 5 02 08 110 R amp S9RTM FFT Reference for FFT key 3 Turn the vertical POSITION rotary knob to define the vertical position of the time axis in the Y t window Turn the knob counter clockwise to move the time axis down or clockwise to move it up 4 Turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to define the scaling for the time base in the Y t window Turn the knob counter clockwise to increase the scaling or clockwise to decrease it and thus spread the waveform Note that when you change the scaling for the main time base the width of the FFT time base extract is also changed 5 Turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob to define the offset of the trigger point to the reference point for Os Turn the knob counter clockwise to move the trigger point to the left or clockwise to move it to the right Note that when you change the trigger offset the position of the FFT time base extract is also changed 8 2 3 Measuring on FFT You can perform cursor measurements in FFT mode Automatic measurements are not available 1 Press FFT then set up and configure the FFT diagram 2 Press CURSOR 3 In the Cursor menu set the cursor lines to the required positions Use Prev Peak and Next Peak to set the selected cursor line to the level peaks See also chapter 6 1 3 Cursor Menu on page 79 The frequency and level results are shown in the results table Prev peak Next peak 8 3 Reference for FFT key The FFT key e
179. 5 02 08 389 R8S RTM Remote Control m QCf U Command Reference TRIGger A CAN ITYPe IdentifierType Selects the length of the identifier 11 bit for CAN base frames or 29 bits for CAN exten ded frames The command is relevant if TRIGGer A CAN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT Parameters lt IdentifierType gt B11 B29 ANY ANY only available for CAN trigger type IDDT RST B11 TRIGger A CAN ICONdition lt IdentifierCondition gt Sets the comparison condition If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only O and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT Parameters lt IdentifierCondition gt EQUual NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQ TRIGger A CAN IDENtifier Identifier Defines the identifier pattern The pattern length is defined with TRIGger A CAN ITYPe on page 390 The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ID or IDDT Parameters Identifier String containing binary pattern with max 29 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed TRIGger A CAN DLC lt DataLength gt Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern The command is relevant if TRIGGer A
180. 6 4 4 Markers Markers allow you to mark certain positions on the screen e g a rising or falling edge or an unexpected signal value or a search result You can then use the markers to identify areas of interest you want to zoom into and quickly move through the data Two marker types are available e Timestamp markers can be used if no search is enabled They can be set manually at any position of the waveform These markers are indicated by blue vertical lines You can set up to 8 timestamp markers Timestamp markers are descibed in this chapter e fasearch is active you can set search markers to selected search results These markers are indicated by magenta search result flags Search result markers are described in chapter 10 1 Search Conditions and Results on page 128 4 4 1 Using Timestamp Markers Timestamp markers are displayed as colored lines on the screen If more markers are available but currently not visible on the screen e g in a zoomed display this is indicated by a small arrow at the right or left edge of the display See also To use markers on search results on page 131 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 67 R amp S RTM Display Markers TB 200ns T 496ns Auto CH1 880 5 mV 4 DC 5 GSals Realtime Complete Z 100ns Tz 496ns 5 GSals Main Time Base Zoom Time Base Trigger Offset Zoom Time Fig 4 3 Zoomed display using markers To set a marker 1 Turn the horizontal Position rotary k
181. 67 mV f AC ACERO Realtime Complete Auto Measure Meas Place Measure 1 Meas Type Source CE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 82 R amp S9RTM Measurements Automatic Measurements The following measurement results are determined for the displayed section of the wave form Label Description Display Vp Positive peak value WF Vp Negative peak value WF tr Rising time of the first rising edge WF Mean Mean value WF tf Falling time of the first falling edge WF RMS RMS T Vpp Peak to peak value T T Period length T f Frequency T When you activate quick measurements cursor measurements are automatically deac tivated as well as the reference and math menus Deactivate quick measurements before selecting these functions Channels other than the selected one are switched off in quick measurement mode gt Press the QUICK MEAS key again to deactivate the quick measurement and remove the results SCPI command e MEASurement lt m gt e MEASurement lt m gt e MEASurement lt m gt e MEASurement lt m gt 6 3 ALL STATe on page 320 AON on page 320 AOFF on page 320 ARESult on page 320 Automatic Measurements Using the MEAS key you can configure up to four amplitude and time measurements or pulse counts based on the active channel reference or math waveforms e Measurement Types and Resuhts AAA 83 e Configuring and Performing Automatic Measurements AAA 90 e A
182. AhNnel m THesbold EINDlevel 383 BUS UART RX SOURce lt RxSource gt BUS UART DATA SOURce lt RxSource gt Selects the input channel of the Rx line Parameters lt RxSource gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 381 R8S RTM Remote Control EENEG Command Reference BUS UART TX SOURce lt TxSource gt Selects the input channel of the Tx line Parameters lt TxSource gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 NONE NONE Disables the optional Tx line RST NONE BUS UART POLarity lt IdleState gt Defines the logic levels of the bus The idle state corresponds to a logic 1 and the start bit to a logic O Alternative command for BUS UART DATA POLarity Parameters lt IdleState gt IDLLow IDLHigh IDLLow idle low low 1 IDLHigh idle high high 1 RST IDLH BUS UART DATA POLarity lt Polarity gt Defines if the transmitted data on the bus is high high 1 or low low 1 active Alternative command for BUS UART POLarity Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive high active NEGative low active RST POS BUS UART SSIZe lt SymbolSize gt Sets the number of data bits in a message Parameters lt SymbolSize gt Range 5 to 9 Increment 1 RST 8 Default unit Bit BUS UART PARity lt Parity gt Defines the optional parity bit that is used for error detection U
183. CHANnel m DATA YRESolution on page 271 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope XINCrement on page 270 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope XORigin on page 269 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YINCrement on page 270 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YORigin on page 270 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YRESolution on page 271 a MA DATA M 283 ENEE ue Tag TE e EE 284 CHANnelems DATA ENVelope ci 2 xs reed led aia 284 CH ANnekcmz DATAENVelope HE Aer 284 GHANnel m DATA e CN 285 CHANnel lt m gt DATA Returns the data of the channel waveform points for transmission from the instrument to the controlling computer The waveforms data can be used in MATLAB for example To set the export format use FORMat DATA on page 268 To set the range of samples to be returned use CHANne1 lt m gt DATA For envelope waveforms use the CHANne1 lt m gt DATA ENVelope command Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt Data gt List of values according to the format settings the voltages of recorded waveform samples Example FORM ASC CHAN1 DATA 0 125000 0 123016 0 123016 0 123016 0 123016 0 123016 Example See chapter 14 3 1 Data Export on page 430 Usage Query only User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 283 R8S RTM Remote Control m
184. Crement esses sees nens nono cnn nnnn nena tentes sistere s sene tensis n rni sr nets n sen nn 270 e ET EE RAR dl Un RE 269 CHANnel mz DATA vlNCrement nn conan nena indii diodda nts seit nnts sinn tensis nnns denen nnde n nn 270 CHANnel mz DATA vObioin sssssssssssssssesessseeeenene en tnnet eher teh nnns sehn tnr se nnns sinn nnns ent rnn s enn nnn nnn rennen 270 GHANnelsm DATA YRESOlUtiOt1 5 1 n rrr eoe reo ee dr isaac 271 e ah EE RR dee M 283 CHANnelsm gt iLABO DD ES 282 CHANnelcmzLAbpelGtAaTe 282 Ee EE ei e catastro 280 CHAN nel ma a E El EE 281 CHANnelsm gt POL ayas Ed 281 e en lee e MT 280 CHANnel lt m gt RANGe GHAN Ee EE CHAN E ET EE CHANnelsm STATS iine dl id bd ead ANS A CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel GHANme lim Iv PE C egisse CURSor lt m gt FUNCtion CURSOS M gt RESU aaa iS iaa 317 CURSor m SNP6eak ica ai hr tier pene EE aE AA E a 317 CURSorsm gt SOU EE 313 CURS Or MSP Oak viii A dridi Dae ea de NEE 316 ASADO nnne net thnes etn tnttstitnnti seit EENAA Eaa daana ssi n reisen n aniei aE 316 CURSor lt m gt STATe CURS Or mM EE 316 CURSor lt m gt TRACking SCALe STA Te eiieeii eiiean diddi a ia aa a
185. Cursor lines keep their relative position to the waveform OFF Cursor lines remain on their position on the display if the scaling is changed RST OFF CURSor lt m gt RESult Returns the measurement result for count mean RMS rise and fall time peak meas urements and burst width Make sure to set CURSor m FUNCt ion correctly Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values Value Measurement result Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt XDELta INVerse Returns the inverse time difference between the two cursors 1 At Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt Deltalnverse gt Range 100e24 to 100e24 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Default unit 1 s EM User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 317 R8S RTM Remote Control AAA AAA A AA A A Command Reference Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt XDELta VALue Returns the time difference between the two cursors At Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values Delta Range 100e24 to 100e24 Increment 0 1 RST 0 Default unit s Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt YDELta SLOPe Returns the inverse value of the voltage difference the reciprocal of the vertical distance of two horizontal cursor lines 1 4V Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt DeltyYslope gt Inverse value Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt YDELta VALue Queries th
186. Default unit s CHANnel lt m gt THReshold Threshold Threshold value for digitization of analog signals If the signal value is higher than the threshold the signal state is high 1 or true for the boolean logic Otherwise the signal state is considered low 0 or false if the signal value is below the threshold Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters Threshold Default values are TTL 1 4 V ECL 1 3 V CMOS 2 5 V RST 1 4 Default unit V CHANnel lt m gt LABel Label Specifies a name for the selected channel Suffix m 1 4 Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Label gt String value String with max 8 characters only ASCII characters can be used CHANnel lt m gt LABel STATe Shows or hides the channel name Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 282 R amp S RTM Remote Control AAA A A Command Reference 14 2 4 5 Waveform Data Consider also the following commands e FORMat DATA on page 268 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA XINCrement on page 270 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA XORigin on page 269 e CHANnel m DATA YINCrement on page 270 e CHANnel lt m gt DATA YORigin on page 270 e
187. Delay Setup Configures the delay measurement that measures the time difference between two edges of the same or different waveforms Source 1 Slope Source 2 Slope az 0 Source 1 Select one of the active channel math or reference waveforms for each Source 2 measurement source Slope Select the rising or falling slope for each measurement source Remote command MEASurement lt m gt SOURce on page 323 MEASurement lt m gt DELay SLOPe on page 324 Phase Setup Configures the phase measurement that measures the pahse difference between two waveforms Source 1 Select one of the active channel math or reference waveforms for each Source 2 measurement source Remote command MEASurement lt m gt SOURce on page 323 OO lt lt lt 53 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 93 R amp SS9RTM Mathematics Configuring and Using Math Waveforms 7 Mathematics Mathematical math waveforms are calculated data Each math waveform is defined by an equation You can configure and save up to five equations MA1 MAS four of these equation can be displayed MA1 MA4 Each equation consists of one or two operands and a operator An operand can be an input channel a constant value or a math waveform with lower number than the oper and s number For example the MA3 equation can use the results of MA2 and MA1 as operands Each equation and also the set of all defined equations can get a label An equation s
188. E 01 SEAR RES ALL Get all search results 1 5 201200e 06 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 1 220160e 05 2 4 120040e 05 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 076800e 06 3 4 732480e 05 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 9 127200e 06 4 6 499960e 05 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 1 835160e 05 5 8 634920e 05 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 052000e 06 6 1 293984e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 9 176800e 06 7 1 477228e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 052000e 06 8 1 623224e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 102000e 06 9 1 684724e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 1 215160e 05 10 1 953216e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 027200e 06 11 2 044716e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 6 052000e 06 12 2 252212e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 052000e 06 13 2 435456e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 3 027200e 06 14 2 496456e 04 0 WIDTH POSITIVE 6 702000e 06 14 3 3 Data and File Management 14 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File Save two display images in png format to the PIX folder on a USB flash drive that is connected to the front panel One screenshot is colored and the other is grayscaled Finally the data of the gray screenshot is read for further user on the control computer Command description in chapter 14 2 14 1 Screenshots on page 413 RST MMEM CDIR USB_FRONT MMEM MDIR USB_FRONT PIX MMEM CDIR USB_FRONT PIX HCOP DEST MMEM HCOP LANG PNG HCOP COL SCH COL MMEM NAME COLORED HCOP IMM HCOP COL SCH GRAY MMEM NAME GRAY HCOP IMM MMEM CAT PNG MMEM DATA GRAY PNG 14 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data
189. E 319 CURSO ma YRATIOGDVALue uni did 319 R8S RTM Remote Control mAMAMCI u Usi Command Reference CURSor lt m gt AOFF Switches the cursor off Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Usage Event CURSor lt m gt STATe State Activates or deactivates the cursor measurement Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF CURSor lt m gt SOURce Source Defines the source of the cursor measurement Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters Source NONE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MAS RE1 RE2 RE3 REA XY1 CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Active channel waveform 1 to 4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MA5 Active math channels 1 to 5 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 Active reference channels 1 to 4 XY1 Active XY waveform RST CH1 CURSor lt m gt FUNCtion Type Defines the cursor measurement type Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 313 R amp S RTM Remote Control EENEG Command Reference Parameters lt Type gt HORizontal VERTical PAIRed HRATio VRATio PPCount NPCount RECount FECount MEAN RMS RTIMe FTIMe PEAK UPEakvalue LPEakvalue BWIDth RST VERT Value Description Queries for resul
190. E SOU m 93 Meas Place Selects one of the four available measurements to be configured or activated ET User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 91 R amp SS9RTM Measurements m X crOOQ Q QACAC H Automatic Measurements Measure 1 4 Activates or deactivates the selected measurement 1 4 Remote command MEASurement lt m gt ENABle on page 321 Meas Type Defines the measurement type to be performed on the selected source Depending on the type different results are displayed in the result table For a list of all automatic measurement types and their description see chapter 6 3 1 Measurement Types and Results on page 83 Remote command MEASurement lt m gt MAIN on page 321 MEASurement m RESult ACTual on page 324 Source Selects one of the active signal reference or math waveforms as the source of the selected measurement Remote command MEASurement lt m gt SOURce on page 323 Statistic Opens a submenu to enable and configure up to four statistics Statistic Meas Place Statistic No of Averages of Averages a a lt a ole m Lom Puta Meas Place Statistic Selects the measurement for which statistical evaluation is configured Statistic Statistic Activates or deactivates the statistical evaluation for the selected measurement 1 4 Remote command MEASurem
191. E and read using the command SRE Table 14 3 Meaning of the bits used in the status byte Bit No Meaning 0 1 Not used 2 Error Queue not empty The bit is set when an entry is made in the error queue If this bit is enabled by the SRE each entry of the error queue generates a service request Thus an error can be recognized and speci fied in greater detail by polling the error queue The poll provides an informative error message This procedure is to be recommended since it considerably reduces the problems involved with remote control QUEStionable status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the QUEStionable status register and the associated ENAB Le bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates a questionable instrument status which can be specified in greater detail by querying the STATus QUEStionable status register MAV bit message available The bit is set if a message is available in the output queue which can be read This bit can be used to enable data to be automatically read from the instrument to the controller User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 255 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Basics Bit No Meaning ESB bit Sum bit of the event status register It is set if one of the bits in the event status register is set and enabled in the event status enable register Setting of this bit indicates a serious error which can be specified in greater detail by po
192. I A thread waiting for a OPC thus will not block the GUI or the communication with other instruments Status Reporting System The status reporting system stores all information on the current operating state of the instrument and on errors which have occurred This information is stored in the status registers and in the error queue Both can be queried via GPIB bus or LAN interface STATus commands E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 251 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 1 6 1 Basics Structure of a SCPI Status Register Each standard SCPI register consists of 5 parts Each part has a width of 16 bits and has different functions The individual bits are independent of each other i e each hardware status is assigned a bit number which is valid for all five parts Bit 15 the most significant bit is set to zero for all parts Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integers States events or summary bits of other registers Simplified diagram i i i i i CONDition part peed dey td w Wey o ML n j je gt Le o tq o 15 14 13 12 PTRansition part 15 14 13 12 NTRansition part 3 2 1 EPA A E EE Logic OR of all bits 15 14 13 12 EVENt part 3 2 1 Summary bit of SCPI register written into a bit ofthe STB or into
193. If a selection menu is open it is closed Tip If the cursors have disappeared from the screen or must be moved extensively within the screen press Set To Screen in the Cursor menu to reset the cursors to their default positions 2 Turn the NAVIGATION knob to change the position of the selected cursor line 3 Press the knob again to select the next cursor line and turn to adjust position 4 To simplify the cursor positioning the following functions are helpful e TrackScaling to adjustthe cursor position when the vertical or horizontal scaling are changed e Coupling to keep the distance between two cursor lines constant while one of the cursors is moved e Setto Wave to set the cursor lines to typical points of the waveform based on automatic measurements in the background See also chapter 6 1 3 Cursor Menu on page 79 The results of the cursor measurement in the result table are updated To deactivate cursor measurements 1 Press the CURSOR key 2 Press the Cursor softkey The Cursor softkey is no longer highlighted no more measurements are performed the cursor lines disappear and the results are removed from the result table 6 1 3 Cursor Menu The CURSOR key opens the Cursor menu to configure manual measurements See also chapter 6 1 2 Performing Cursor Measurements on page 78 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 79 R amp SS9RTM Measurements Cursor Measurements Voltage Voltage amp
194. LLLLLALCUUULLILZEX Xg User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 176 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis e EE UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Frame Start Triggers on the begin of a frame The frame start is the first start bit after the idle time Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 384 BSTart Symbol n Sets the trigger to the specified symbol the n th word in a frame package Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 384 NTHSymbol Any Symbol Opens a submenu to trigger if a pattern occurs in a symbol at any position in a frame You can enter the pattern in binary or hex the functions are the same as for Pattern setting e Select Bit on page 177 e State on page 177 e Value on page 178 Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 384 SYMBo1 Pattern Opens a submenu to set the trigger on a serial pattern at a defined position in the frame The pattern can include several subsequent symbols Pattern Symbol Offset Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 384 PATTern TRIGger A UART PATTern on page 385 Symbol Offset Pattern Sets the number of symbols to be ignored before the serial pattern Remote command TRIGger A UART POFFset on page 385 Number of Symb Pattern Defines the length of the pattern how many symbols build it up Remote command TRIGger A UART PLENgth on page 385 Select Bit Pattern Selects the bit number inside the s
195. Meas Place to select the measurement you want to deactivate 3 Press Measure 1 4 until Off is highlighted 4 If you want to reset and deactivate all automatic measurements at once press the Clear All softkey in the Auto measure menu No more measurements are performed the results are removed from the result table To use statistics 1 Press the MEAS key EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 90 R amp S9RTM Measurements 6 3 3 Auto Measure Automatic Measurements 2 Configure at least one mesurement as described in To configure and activate auto matic measurements on page 90 Press Statistic Press Meas Place to select the measurement for which you need statistical results Press Statistic until On is highlighted oa RR Q Press Average No and enter the number of measured waveforms to be used for calculation of average and standard deviation Auto Measure Menu MEAS key The MEAS key opens the Auto Measure menu to configure automatic measurements For details see chapter 6 3 Automatic Measurements on page 83 Mean Value RMS Value Mean Cycle RMS Cycle Amplitude Top Level Base Level Pos Overshoot SA Source Reference Clear All CH1 level 4 E P 92 VEES EE 92 E A RE 92 duod o ria mm 92 L Reset Reset A 92 A IP 93 Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels sees 93 DISSE ee ee 93 Delay DOM ii A pde etta aee Praeter es 93 PUN
196. Mebase SCALe on page 273 Zoom Time Base Defines the scaling for the time base in the zoom window in seconds per division The scaling determines the width of the zoom area that is displayed in the zoom window 10 divisions scaling per division The zoom area is indicated by white lines in the original Y t window Remote command TIMebase ZOOM SCALe on page 306 Trigger Offset Defines the horizontal position of the trigger point in relation to the reference point to the zero point of the grid The value is indicated by T in the information bar above the window The reference point is set with SETUP Time Reference Note If a zoom or FFT window is displayed and Time Control is selected the trigger offset can be adjusted using the horizontal POSITION rotary knob See also e POSITION on page 23 e Time Reference on page 225 To configure the original Y t diagram on page 65 Remote command TIMebase POSition on page 274 Zoom Time Defines the offset of the trigger point to the reference point Os in the zoom window The offset determines the position of the zoom area that is displayed in the zoom window Remote command TIMebase ZOOM TIME on page 307 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 66 R amp S RTM Display m cde Markers Zoom Off Closes the zoom window and returns to the previous display Remote command TIMebase ZOOM STATe on page 30
197. NEGative EITHer RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch MEASure LEVel PEAK MAGNitude lt Magnitude gt Sets the amplitude limit Parameters lt Magnitude gt Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 400 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 349 R8S RTM Remote Control ma A A AAA A A Command Reference 14 2 12 5 Rise Fall Time Search Configuration SEARE amp BTRIGSer RISelimpg LOPE mii iia 350 GEAbRch TRilGoerl EVelRlSetmeLOMer nnne 350 SEARch TRIGger EEVel RISetime UPPer 2i urne licencias ENEE 350 SEARch TRIGger RISetime FSANGe 2 2 inini doc 350 e RE eg Eleng EE 351 GEAbRch TRilGoerHl etime DEI Ta 351 SEARch TRIGger RlISetime SLOPe lt Polarity gt Sets the slope to be found Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative EITHer POSitive to search for rise time NEGative to search for fall time EITHer to search for rise and fall time RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger LEVel RlSetime LOWer lt LowerLevel gt Sets the lower voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the rise time mea surement starts or stops depending on the selected slope Parameters lt LowerLevel gt RST 400 mV Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARc
198. Ooth FILTer OFF The data of the current acquisition is recorded according to the decimation settings ENVelope Detects the minimum and maximum values in an sample interval over a number of acquisitions AVERage Calculates the average from the data of the current acquisition and a number of acquisitions before The number of used acquisitions is set with ACQuire AVERage COUNt SMOoth Calculates a mean value of several adjacent sample points Thus smoothing is a moving average that uses the full data and can be used for non periodic signals It works like a low pass and increa ses the vertical resolution at the expense of bandwidth reduction FILTer Sets a low pass filter with 3 db attenuation at a configurable limit frequency set with ACQuire FILTer FREQuency The filter removes higher frequencies from the channel signals RST OFF TiMebase ROLL ENABle Roll Enables the roll mode Parameters Roll ON OFF RST OFF ACQuire FILTer FREQuency lt FilterFrequency gt Sets the limit frequency for CHANNe1 lt m gt ARTThmetics is set to FILTer Parameters lt FilterFrequency gt Limit frequency with 3 dB attenuation Default unit Hz User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 277 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 4 4 Command Reference ACQuire POINts ARATe Retrieves the sample rate of the ADC that is the number of points that are sampled by the ADC in one second Return values lt Acquisitio
199. RIGger WIDTh DELTa Parameters Range WITHin OUTSide SHORter LONGer WITHin Finds pulses inside the range width At OUTSide Finds pulses outside the range width x At SHORter Finds pulses shorter than the given width LONGer Finds pulses longer than the given width RST WITH Example chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 348 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 12 4 Command Reference Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh Width Sets the reference pulse width the nominal value for comparisons Parameters Width Default unit s Example chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger WIDTh DELTa lt DeltaWidth gt Sets a range At to the reference pulse width set with SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh if SEARch TRIGger WIDTh RANGe is set to WITHin or OUTSide Parameters lt DeltaWidth gt Range Lower limit depends on the resolution practically no upper limit Example chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 Firmware Software FW 03 400 Peak Search Configuration SEARCNMEAS UT PEAK er ET 349 SEARch MEASure LEVel PEAK MACGhNtude ciiir ia 349 SEARch MEASure PEAK POLarity lt Polarity gt Indicates the polarity of a the pulse to be searched for a peak Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive
200. RINT Key You assign the print function to the PRINT key After this configuration a screenshot will be printed on the connected printer whenever you press the PRINT key See also chapter 12 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key on page 212 1 Configure the PRINT key a Press FILE gt Print Key b Press amp Print Screenshots 2 Make sure that the printer is configured correctly See chapter 12 1 1 1 Configuring the Printer Output on page 204 3 Press the PRINT key Printer Settings Access SETUP key gt More switch to page 2 3 gt Printer etup pai AN a Format Command Set ame NN n nmn Paper Format Defines the paper format and the orientation portrait or landscape for printing Remote command HCOPy PAGE SIZE On page 415 HCOPy PAGE ORIentation on page 415 Color Mode Defines the color mode for output on printer Grayscale Black and white output Color Color output T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 205 R amp S RTM Data and File Management Saving and Loading Inverted Inverts the colors of the output i e a dark waveform is printed on a white background Remote command HCOPy COLor SCHeme on page 415 Command Set Sets the printer language that is supported by the printer When you connect a printer the supported command set is shown in the Device Information window 12 2 Saving and Loading With R amp S RTM you can save and recall your measureme
201. RST CH1 BUS SPI CS POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects whether the chip select signal is high active high 1 or low active low 1 Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive high active NEGative low active RST POSitive BUS SPI CLOCk SOURce Source Selects the input channel of the clock line Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 RST CH1 BUS SPI CLOCk POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects if data is stored with the rising or falling slope of the clock The slope marks the begin of a new bit Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive rising slope NEGative falling slope RST NEGative BUS SPI MOSI SOURce Source BUS SPI DATA SOURce lt Source gt Selects the input channel of the MOSI line or of the data line if only one data line is used Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 RST CH1 SEET User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 362 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mAMCI A Mas qm Command Reference BUS SPI MISO SOURce lt MisoSource gt Selects the input channel of the optional MISO line Parameters lt MisoSource gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 NONE RST NONE BUS SPI MOSI POLarity lt Polarity gt BUS SPI DATA POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects whether transmitted data is high active high 1 or low active low 1 on the MOSI line or on the data line if only one data l
202. RTical SCALe Scale Changes the vertical scale of the reference waveform Suffix m 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters Scale RST 1 Default unit V div REFCurve lt m gt VERTical POSition Position Changes the vertical position of the reference waveform Suffix m 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters Position RST 0 Default unit div REFCurve lt m gt DATA Returns the data of the reference waveform for transmission from the instrument to the controlling computer The waveforms data can be used in MATLAB for example To set the export format use FORMat DATA on page 268 Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Return values lt Data gt List of values according to the format settings Usage Query only REFCurve lt m gt DATA HEADer Returns information on the reference waveform Table 14 14 Header data Position Meaning Example 1 XStart in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 2 XStop in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 3 Record length of the waveform in Samples 200000 4 Number of values per sample interval usually 1 1 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 311 14 2 8 14 2 8 1 Command Reference Suffix m 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters Header Comma separated value
203. Raw socket mode TCPIP lt IP_address gt lt IP_port gt SO chapter 14 1 1 1 LAN Interface CKET on page 232 e chapter 14 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connec tion on page 233 USB The instrument is addressed by the A USB type B connector is located on the rear panel COM port number of the instrument Connection requires installation of an USB driver Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz ser vice center to get the driver See also e chapter 14 1 1 2 USB Interface on page 232 GPIB IEC GPIB primary address INSTR An optional GPIB bus interface according to stand IEEE Bus no secondary address ard IEC 625 1 IEEE 488 1 can be mounted on the Interface rear panel of the instrument See also chapter 14 1 1 3 GPIB Interface IEC IEEE Bus Interface on page 232 Within this interface description the term GPIB is used as a synonym for the IEC IEEE bus interface SCPI compatibility SCPI commands Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments are used for remote control The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488 2 and aims at the standardization of device specific commands error handling and the status registers The tutorial Automatic Measurement Control A tutorial on SCPI and IEEE 488 2 from John M Pieper R amp S order number 0002 3536 00 offers detailed information on con cepts and definitions of SCPI The instrument supports the SCPI version 1999 RETREAT RU RA E E AA e A
204. Reshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event PC Trigger HS ee red MODE E 372 TRIGA I2C ACCO c 373 TRICIA e E 373 TRIGger A32 C AADIDBSS uidere a aa 373 TRIGE ATZO PA RN Re 374 TRIGgernAd2E Hz ea ido 374 TRIGO AA POBRES C 375 TRIGger A I2C MODE Mode Specifies the trigger mode for PC LEE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 372 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m n Command Reference Parameters Mode STARt RESTart STOP MACKnowledge PATTern STARt Start of the message The start condition is a falling slope on SDA while SCL is high RESTart Restarted message The restart is a repeated start condition STOP End of the message The stop condition is a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high MACKnowledge Missing acknowledge If the transfer failed at the moment of the acknowledge bit the SCL and the SDA lines are both on high level PATTern Triggers on a set of trigger conditions read or write access of the master to an address or and to a bit pattern in the message For a complete configuration of the pattern mode you have to set TRIGger A 12C ACCess read write access and
205. RlGoer ATVEIELd AE Nee ATV TT TRIGger A TV POLarity TRIGger A TV STANdGartGd terrd ede ida b ee d 296 UcubigcTe D 293 HUde pueqpHep H E 384 TRIGger RU EL Ten E di a dai ENEE 385 TRIGger AC BEA E E Ce E 385 TRIGE A VART POR ESO EE 385 TIRIGger A WIDTH KG M 296 TRIGger A WIDTh POL fity inniti tni nri tete traen ia 295 TRIGger A WIDTh RANGe TRIGgerAWIDTA WIDT ostia iot t Herrero e irte est d d ave fr E pee de WIRIGS GSB DELIV c est en TRIGgSr B EDGE SLOPE coi a da deen ait Ht ida TRI Gger BiENABIO vives sciences TRIGger B EVENECOUN Eicus Anite e Ye di fer e e De dL To ree etie ge ent epe Ede Es TRIGgerB FINDISVel ec M BR lee ee TRIG Gen ELEM e o P O E TRIGger B MODE TRIGIERB SOURCE mE sl ele eg a ube ale DE 293 BECH Rude Re E 308 RECH Rule iaa E 308 BECH Rule 307 ERI Ps PREVIOUS ties ssc EE 307 TS TAMPISE 307 LL SSS SSS SSS easy User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 446 R amp S9RTM Index Index Center Symbol
206. S RTM Triggers Reference for Triggers 3 3 2 1 Trigger Menu and Trigger Source The Trigger menu is general menu for all trigger types and leads to the type specific menus Trigger E E E rmn Trigger Type Hold Off T Trigger Level E ums B Setup Nw The content of the Trigger Source menu depends on the trigger type The figure below shows the trigger source menu for edge width and video triggers Trigger Source A Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 AC Line Extern Set niu To set the trigger offset use the horizontal POSITION rotary knob see POSITION on page 23 giro inicia iia 40 c o NO 40 QUITO citar 40 2 1 MM 41 A eeleren 41 L iria 41 20 89 EET 41 scis p e 41 ee E 41 MAG GQ Si level ida aided ented 41 Trigger Type Selects the trigger type For details see e chapter 3 3 2 2 Edge on page 41 chapter 3 3 2 3 Width on page 43 chapter 3 3 2 4 Video on page 45 chapter 3 3 2 5 Pattern on page 47 chapter 3 3 2 6 Protocol on page 48 Remote command TRIGger A TYPE on page 293 Setup Opens the setup menu for the selected trigger type Source Opens the Trigger Source menu for the selected trigger type Remote command TRIGger A SOURce on page 293 ERA lt lt lt AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 40 R amp S9RTM Triggers 3 3 2
207. SA it bi tigen oti epo C configuration settings e C trigger settings s esses Label E nan LIN T as e LIN configuration settings ooooococccnnncconicccccnnnncccccc no LIN search settings AAA LIN trigger settings eg parallel bus configuration sssessesssss SPUSSP visir SPI SSPI configuration settings SPI SSPI trigger settings Symbolic ID noe eee pe tete UART RS 232 i UART configuration settings suusssss UART trigger settings sess PTRansition Pulse width Q Queries OOPPPO0 0705 POO enne enne nnne 239 248 ICI senta to EMEND 261 Question mark ooooooccncoccconccnncooonncoonnnnononcnononcnnonnnos 247 248 Quick measurement deactivating remote eseeeeeeseese 320 Quick measurements remote control oooooooocccccccconooonnncnn sss 320 Quotation mark oooccccccccccccooocnnnccononononancnonononnnnononannnns 247 451 R amp S9RTM Index Recommendations remote control programming sssesssssse 262 Record length iate ree eterni 12 15 REF idad 73 Reference displaying E 71 SOMKOY indi 73 74 Reference Level Remote Control EE 325 Reference levels iia a 93 Reference point o dte trece ier I 15 References import export rrr mre nens Import Export at orte MoTo EE TTT saving Ee Remote control
208. SETTINGS Check MMEM CAT SET 332112 8633856 Z00M A SET 2759 ZOOM B SET 2759 ZOOM USB SET 2759 RST OPC 1 MMEM CDIR INT SETTINGS MMEM LOAD STAT 1 ZOOM USB SET Load settings R8S RTM List of Commands List of Commands uc 264 ACQuire AVERage COUNE ceed ceder cioe estu id 275 AC Quire FIE sime c M M 277 ACQuire INTerpolate Leefer ACQuire NSINgle COUN E eeseesseseeeseeeeeeee nne nee nne cnn 272 ACQuire POINISIARATO cuida Hen t epe c dO cian Ete pr ere o ee e 278 pXeeIcxCGIfsen EM 278 ACQuire RE 276 PRT OS E 274 SIBERe Hg cc 388 BUS CAN DATA SOURCE 388 EEN er Mere 392 BUS CAN FRAMe nz ACkG tate nennen nennen innen nranninns 394 BUS CAN FRAMe nz ACkValuei ENEE 394 BUS CAN FRAM lt n gt Le TEE 397 BUS CAN FRAMe sn gt BSEPOSIION cisne la be 396 BUS CAN FRAMesn BYTE 0 STATO6 ris cipit dec 397 BUS CAN FRAMe n BYTE o VALue essen enne emeret nne erret 397 BUS CAN ERAMesn CSS Tate T roe iret nati cd rere iaa 395 EK ee HEET 395 BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt DATA BUS CAN FRAMe nz DC State 395 BUS CAN FRAMesn DECValie ii xa a dete etie hp mans 395 BUS CAN FRAM lt n gt IEN E EE 396 B S CAN FRAMesh IDTYp6 1 ditate
209. SS9RTM Masks About Masks 9 Masks Masks are used to determine whether the amplitude of a signal remains within specified limits e g to detect errors or test compliance of digital signals 9 1 About Masks 9 1 1 Masks A mask is specified by an upper and a lower limit line The signal must run inside these limit lines otherwise a mask violation occurs A new mask is created from an existing signal Mask limits are created by copying the waveform and the limits are moved and stretched The result is a tolerance tube around the signal that is used as mask Once a mask has been defined the copied waveform envelope is kept in the instrument until the next mask is defined or loaded The settings for stretch and move are not kept If you want to keep the complete mask definition or you need more than one mask you can save the mask to and load from any storage device internal memory or external USB flash device It is also possible to copy the saved masks to another storage device with Export Import Masks In an export import operation the name of the target file can be changed so you can copy and rename the file in one operation You can also change the target file format and convert the data during export import To copy a mask use FILE gt Import Export Masks See also e chapter 9 1 3 File Formats for Masks on page 119 e chapter 12 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 207 9 1 2 Mask Testing The mask
210. Setup Defines the scaling for the time base in the original Y t window in seconds per division The scaling is indicated by TB in the information bar above the window EA A e ieLALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLAL L User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 116 R8S RTM FFT Reference for FFT key Note If Time Control is selected the main time base can be adjusted using the hori zontal SCALE rotary knob See also SCALE on page 23 To configure the original Y t diagram on page 65 and figure 8 2 Remote command TIMebase SCALe on page 273 Trigger Offset Y t Setup Defines the horizontal position of the trigger point in relation to the reference point to the zero point of the grid The value is indicated by T in the information bar above the window The reference point is set with SETUP gt Time Reference Note If a zoom or FFT window is displayed and Time Control is selected the trigger offset can be adjusted using the horizontal POSITION rotary knob See also e POSITION on page 23 e Time Reference on page 225 e To configure the original Y t diagram on page 65 Remote command TIMebase POSition on page 274 Show Channels Y t Setup Displays all active channels in the Y t window By default only the selected channel is visible the channel used for FFT calculation FFT Off Closes the FFT display and returns to the previous display User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 117 R amp
211. T analysis Return values lt SampleRate gt Default unit Sa s Usage Query only 14 2 11 Masks MASK STATO Lp TIME 340 MASK TES EE 340 MASK FOAD EH 340 MASK EE 340 Oe EE 340 EELER 340 MASK YFP eo EE 341 MASK IVS CGS a e aid 341 MASK A E e O Sanat slncaity E EEEE 341 MASK AVM nl EE 341 MASK e EE 342 MASK V COU EE 342 MASKIBESSEDOLHNIBE in er rre satis e co cea inre Pe dae cene Raten e 342 lee Ne Re ET ek A lei re 342 MASKACTONSTOP EVEN MODE sir ad Fea iaa 342 MASK ACTion SGRSave EVENEMODE eege Edge edd 342 MASKACTIONPRINEEVENEMODE sica dias 342 MASK ACTION WEMSave EVENEMODE ccoo 342 MASK ACTION SOUNG EVENECGCONUND EE 343 MASK ACTIORNSTOP EVENECGOUNE sese entente a arm n a rn rr n hr inna 343 MASK ACTio SCRSavelEVENEGCO NL tdt tnde Ies ade SSES 343 MASIGACTIOTn PRINEEVENEGCOUNNI EE 343 MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENCUGOUNLE reae ice nennt neta nna eco ENEE d a didas 343 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 339 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m c J e AA Command Reference MASK STATe State Turns the mask test mode on or off When turning off any temporarily stored new masks are deleted Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF MASK TEST Test Starts finishes or interrupts a mask test Parameters Test RUN STOP PAUSe RST STOP MASK LOAD lt FileName gt Loads a stored mask from the specified file Set
212. TRIGger LEVel RUNT UPPer lt UpperLevel gt Sets the upper voltage threshold for runt detection A negative runt crosses the upper level twice without crossing the lower level Parameters lt UpperLevel gt RST 600 mV Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RUNT RANGe Range Sets how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s To set the width use SEARch TRIGger RUNT WIDTh To set the range At use SEARch TRIGger RUNT DELTa Parameters Range LONGer SHORter WITHin OUTSide LONGer Finds pulses longer than the given width SHORter Finds pulses shorter than the given width WITHin Finds pulses inside the range width At OUTSide Finds pulses outside the range width At RST LONG a User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 352 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 12 7 Command Reference Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RUNT WIDTh Width Sets the reference runt pulse width the nominal value for comparisons Parameters Width Range Depends on various settings mainly time base and sample rate RST 200e 6 Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RUNT DELTa lt DeltaWidth gt Sets a range At to the reference pulse width set with SEARch TRIGger RUNT WIDTh if SEARch TRIGger RUNT RANGe on page 352 is set to WI THin or OUTSide Parameters lt DeltaWidth gt Range Depends on various settings mainly ti
213. TX FCOunt Returns the number of decoded frames on the RX and TX lines respectivley Return values FrameCount Total number of decoded frames RETREAT RU RA E E A User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 385 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control GENUINE ee Command Reference Usage Query only BUS UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WCOunt BUS UART TX FRAMe lt n gt WCOunt Returns the number of symbols in the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame Return values lt WordCount gt Number of words symbols characters Usage Query only BUS UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STATe BUS UART TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STATe Returns the status of the specified symbol word Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame o Selects the word number Return values Status OK FRSTart FRENd FRMError STERror SPERror PRERror INSufficient BREak Usage Query only BUS UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STARt BUS UART TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified symbol word Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame o i Selects the word number Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depe
214. Th WIDTh on page 357 Variation Sets a range At to the reference Width if comparison is set to Equal or Not equal The instrument finds true results of the state pattern inside or outside the range width At Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh DELTa on page 357 10 3 9 Gate Menu Access SEARCH MENU gt Gate The gate restricts the time base of the source waveform to be searched Display User ea Ss 400 us 400 us Gate Defines the search area If the search is performed on a running acquisition series the instrument analyzes the displayed data The search on a stopped acquisition analyzes the contents of the memory All Running acquisition all waveform samples that are displayed on the screen Stopped acquisition all data samples that are stored in the memory Display Search is restricted to the time range of the display User Search is restricted to the time range defined by Start and Stop val ues Remote command SEARch GATE MODE on page 346 LEE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 142 R amp S9RTM Search 10 3 10 Reference for Search Menu Start Sets the start time of the search area in relation to the trigger point Remote command SEARCh GATE ABSolute START on page 346 Stop Sets the end time of the search area in relation to the trigger point Remote command SEARCh GATE ABSolute STOP on page 346 Events Menu Access
215. Time between two frames E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 171 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Idle Time 8 Bit Stop Bits 1 5 Start Bit Parity Bit Odd Source RX CH1 1 4V Active Low TX CH2 1 4 Y Active Low Bit rate 19 2kBit s Idle Time 52 08 us 11 Press Find level or set the threshold manually for each channel See To set the logic threshold on page 144 Now you can disply the decoded signal and the frame table with results The display of the decoded data is described in To configure decoding and data dis play on page 145 11 5 2 2 UART Configuration Settings Access PROTOCOL gt Bus type UART Configuration Configuration O ACC TO E ER A DEA none gt Configuration Symbol size Bit rate Defined Bit Rate Idle Time Time ENEICTYFTTUNES coe n C seket More 212 gt 8 Bit Defined Bit Rate cos kBit s 104 Lamm JI Ne a RX TX Select the input channels of the RX and TX lines Remote command BUS UART DATA SOURce on page 381 BUS UART RX SOURce on page 381 BUS UART TX SOURce on page 382 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 172 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis REESEN UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Active Defines the logic levels of the bus The idle state corresponds to a logic 1 and the start bit to a logic 0 Active high high 1 is used for example for control signals while act
216. Tus QUEStionable MASK NTRansition 24 Set bits no 3 and 4 of the STATus QUEStionable MASK NTRan sition register part 24 8 16 2 24 EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 429 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 3 14 3 1 14 3 1 1 Programming Examples STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt STATus QUEStionable COVerload PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt STATus QUEStionable MASK PTRansition lt PositiveTransition gt Sets the positive transition filter If a bit is set a O to 1 transition in the corresponding bit of the condition register causes a 1 to be written in the corresponding bit of the event register Parameters lt PositiveTransition gt Bit mask in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Example STATus QUEStionable MASK PTRansition 24 Set bits no 3 and 4 of the STATus QUEStionable MASK PTRan sition register part 24 8 16 2 24 Programming Examples Data Export Reading Waveform Data from Memory Set data format and sample range read channel header and data Command description in chapter 14 2 3 General Remote Settings and Queries on page 267 and chapter 14 2 4 5 Waveform Data on page 283 Connected to TCPIPO 192 168 1 1 instOs INSTR SYST ERR 0 No error IDN Rohde amp Schwarz RTM1052 1305 0008K52 101489 04 502 RST CHAN TYPE HRES Set hi
217. Type B USB interface No settings are available for the USB interface Note You cannot connect a printer via the Type B USB interface Use one of the Type A USB interfaces on the rear or front panel to connect a printer User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 225 R amp S RTM General Instrument Setup Reference for Setup LAN Interface Activates the LAN interface which allows you to connect the instrument to various other devices Access to the instrument is controlled via its IP address By default the instrument is set to use DHCP If the instrument cannot find a DHCP server it takes about two minutes until the LAN menu is available The interface is configured using the Parameter softkey See also chapter 14 1 2 Set ting Up a LAN Connection on page 233 c IEEE488 Interface Activates the IEEE488 interface also known as a General Purpose Interface Bus GPIB Using this interface up to 15 devices can be connected to the instrument Each device is identified by a unique number which is defined within the device The interface is configured using the Parameter softkey For details see chapter 14 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connection on page 233 Parameter Interface Provides a settings dialog to configure the active additional interface Changes are only adopted by the instrument after you press Save DHCP Parameter Interface Activates or deactivates usage of the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
218. UART PATTern lt DataPattern gt Defines the bit pattern as trigger condition Parameters lt DataPattern gt Binary pattern with max 32 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed RST 1 00000001 TRIGger A UART PLENgth lt PatternLength gt Defines how many symbols build up the serial pattern Parameters lt PatternLength gt Number of symbols Range 1 to 3 Increment 1 RST 1 TRIGger A UART POFFset lt PatternByteOffset gt Sets the number of symbols before the first symbol of the pattern Parameters lt PatternByteOffset gt Number of ignored symbols Range O to 4095 Increment 1 RST 0 UART Decode Results BUS UAR CRA FCOUN sd dai 385 BUS VARTTA Cel EE 385 BUS UART RX ERAMe nz MWCOunt 386 BUS UART DCPRAMespWOGDURE ET 386 BUS UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt 0 gt STATE naai aa EERE 386 BUS UART TX FRAME lt n gt WORD lt 0 gt S TATE isis esnn cae n aaa deed n nae A iinan SENNENG 386 BUS UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt 0 gt STARUD ccccsccecseseceeseteceeseeeteeceteegeteteeaeteteeautenees 386 BUSUARTTA FRAMES gt WORD 0 gt S TAR EE 386 BUS UART RXERAMesns WORDSOSIBTODBT vidua ide 387 BUS UART TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP Po oocococincoconcononenconeninnononinnnnonannnncnanananonrananono 387 BUS UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt 0 gt VALUE o oo ccdseieccsicandedecantsatecccecensacdaddecacvansheedeatns 387 BUS UART TS ERAMe nz WObRDcozs MAL ue 387 BUS UART RX FCOunt BUS UART
219. Unit Defines the unit of the equation results The selected unit only has an effect on the dis played unit not on the size of the values The following units are available V Volts A Amperes Q Ohms S Siemens V A Volts per Ampere W Watts active power VA Voltamps apparent power VAr Voltamps reactive power Vs Volt seconds Weber unit of magnetic flux V s Volts per second dB decibels dBm dB referred to 1 mW dBV dB referred to 1 V dByV dB referred to 1 uV s Second 1 s Hz Hertz S DIV F Farad H Henry Percent Degree T Pi Pa Pascal m Meter g Acceleration C Degrees Celsius K Kelvin F Degrees Fahrenheit N Newton J Joule C Coulomb ERA ay User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 98 R8S RTM Mathematics m H O Reference for Mathematics Wb Weber T Tesla dez dezimal bin binary hex hexadezimal oct octal DIV Division graticule px pixel Bit Bit s Byte Bd Baud Sa Samples Sa sec Samples per second cyc cycles Trc Traces Sa X I Rising edge L Falling edge Jl Positive impulse U Negative impulse Ev Events Symb symbols Sy s symbols per second Wfm waveforms Edit Equations Provides functions to configure the calculations for the mathematical channels d N f Y Y A Equation Operator Operand 1 Oper
220. User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 424 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m M Q Command Reference SYSTem SET Setup Defines or queries the device settings that can be saved and load manually with FILE gt Device Settings Parameters Setup 488 2 block data Usage SCPI confirmed SYSTem ERRor NEXT Queries the error event queue for the oldest item and removes it from the queue The response consists of an error number and a short description of the error Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Return values Error Error event_number Error event_description gt Device depend ent info If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Usage Query only SCPI confirmed SYSTem ERRor ALL Queries the error event queue for all unread items and removes them from the queue The response is a comma separated list of error number and a short description of the error in FIFO order Positive error numbers are instrument dependent Negative error numbers are reserved by the SCPI standard Return values Error List of Error event_number Error event_description gt Device dependent info If the queue is empty the response is 0 No error Usage Query only SCPI confirmed SYST PRESet Resets the instrument to the default state
221. User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 324 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 8 4 Command Reference Query parameters lt MeasType gt FREQuency PERiod PEAK UPEakvalue LPEakvalue PPCount NPCount RECount FECount HIGH LOW AMPLitude MEAN RMS RTIMe FTIMe PDCY cle NDCYcle PPWidth NPWidth CYCMean CYCRms STDDev CYCStddev TFRequency TPERiode DELay PHASe BWIDth POVershoot NOVershoot TBFRequency TBPeriod Specifies the measurement type See MEASurement lt m gt MAIN on page 321 Return values Value Measurement result If no measurement was executed no value NAN is returned Usage Query only MEASurement lt m gt CATegory Returns the measurement category Currently the instrument supports only yt meas urements Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement Return values Category AMPTime AMPtime yt measurements RST AMPT Usage Query only Reference Level REFLsvelELa vE lee 325 REFLevelsisELal vel OW a el idea 326 REFLevaelmELaUVeUDPPSE cocida decia 326 REEL evel RE L ative MlfDDle eese nemen nennen nnn nnn rase nn nun 326 REFLevel RELative MODE lt RelativeMode gt Sets the lower and upper reference levels for rise and fall time mesurements cursor and automatic mesurements as well as the middle reference level for phase and delay measurements The levels are defined as percentages of the high signal level The setting is valid for all m
222. User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 76 R8S RTM Measurements nr a yan AAA Cursor Measurements Time Sets two vertical cursor lines and measures the time from the trigger point to each cursor point the time between the two cursors and the frequency calculated from that time Results t1 t2 At 1 t Voltage amp Time Combines the Voltage cursor and Time cursor measurements Two horizontal and two vertical cursor lines are set and the voltages and time from the trigger point are measured at the cursor positions as well as the delta of the voltage and time values Results t1 t2 At V1 V2 AV Ratio X Provides three cursors and measures the ratio of the x values e g a duty cycle between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors x2 x1 x3 x1 The ratio is displayed as a floating value in percent in degrees and as a radian Results abs 96 TT Ratio Y Provides three cursors and measures the ratio of the y values e g overshooting between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors y2 y1 y3 y1 The ratio is displayed as a floating value and in percent Results abs Count Provides three cursors to count signal transitions The time base is defined by the first two cursors the third cursor defines the threshold value As a result the number of rising and falling edges as well as the number of positive and negative impulses is counted Results IL Lf T 1 Peak V
223. Width See also Width User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 134 R8S RTM Search ns M Reference for Search Menu Lower than Finds pulses shorter than the given Width Equal Finds pulses equal to the reference Width if Variation At 0 If Variation O the setting finds pulses within the range width At See also Variation Not equal Finds pulses unequal to the reference Width if Variation At 0 If Variation O the setting finds pulses outside the range width At Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh RANGe on page 348 Width Sets the reference pulse width the nominal value for comparisons Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh WIDTh on page 349 Variation Sets a range At to the reference Width if comparison is set to Equal or Not equal The instrument finds pulses inside or outside the range width x At Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh DELTa on page 349 10 3 4 Peak Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search Peak gt Setup Peak ZEE exor Polarity Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for Remote command SEARch MEASure PEAK POLarity on page 349 Magnitude Sets the amplitude limit Remote command SEARch MEASure LEVel PEAK MAGNitude on page 349 10 3 5 Rise Fall Time Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Rise Fall time gt Setup User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 135 R amp SS9RTM Search
224. Y KEE 265 y cL 266 ul H 266 gcc EET 266 pl mE 266 Uic e S 267 Hir 267 uil pe Uu ULM 267 CAL Calibration Query Initiates a calibration of the instrument and subsequently queries the calibration status Responses gt 0 indicate errors Usage Query only CLS CLear Status Sets the status byte STB the standard event register ESR and the EVENt part of the QUEStionable and the OPERat ion registers to zero The command does not alter the mask and transition parts of the registers It clears the output buffer EA A lt lt lt gt 5555 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 264 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control GENUINE ee Command Reference Usage Setting only ESE Value Event Status Enable Sets the event status enable register to the specified value The query returns the con tents of the event status enable register in decimal form Parameters Value Range 0 to 255 ESR Event Status Read Returns the contents of the event status register in decimal form and subsequently sets the register to zero Return values Contents Range O to 255 Usage Query only IDN IDeNtification returns the instrument identification Return values ID
225. a and File Management 12 2 3 12 2 3 1 Saving and Loading Screen amp Setup If selected the device settings and a screenshot of the current display are stored when you press the PRINT key Storage settings are configured with FILE Screenshots and FILE gt Device Settings See also chapter 12 2 5 2 Screenshot Storage Settings on page 220 Print Screenshots If selected a screenshot of the current display is sent to the USB printer when you press the PRINT key Printer settings are configured with SETUP gt Printer See also chapter 12 1 Printing on page 204 Device Settings In order to repeat measurements at different times or perform similar measurements with different test data it is useful to save the used instrument settings and load them again later Furthermore it can be helpful to refer to the instrument settings of a particular measurement when analyzing the results Therefore functions are provided so you can easily save the instrument settings of a measurement with or without the corresponding screenshot The instrument settings can be saved to and loaded from any storage device internal memory or external USB flash device It is also possible to copy the stored settings to another storage device with Export Import The file format is always SET and the file size is about 2 76 kB You can exchange stored device settings between R amp S RTM instruments also between 2 channel and 4 cha
226. a lavel defines the point of data transition Parameters lt DataLevel gt Range depends on vertical scale Firmware Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel DELTa lt LevelDelta gt SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel DELTa lt LevelDelta gt Set a hysteresis range to the clock and data levels in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Parameters lt LevelDelta gt Range Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set tings no upper limit Firmware Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CEDGe lt ClockEdge gt Sets the edge of the clock signal to define the time reference point for the setup and hold time Parameters lt ClockEdge gt POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock HTIMe lt HoldTime gt Sets the minimum time after the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady above or below the data level The hold time can be negative In this case the hold time ends before the clock edge and the setup time must be positive and longer than the absolute value of the hold time Parameters lt HoldTime gt Range depends on time base and sample interval T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 354 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 12 8 Command Reference Firmware
227. a single key press Infrequent printouts can be started from the File menu see also chap ter 12 1 1 3 Quick Printing with the PRINT Key on page 205 12 1 1 Printing a Screenshot Before you can print you have to e Connect and configure the printer e Configure the PRINT key if you need quick printout Then you can start the printout from the File menu or with the PRINT key 12 1 1 1 Configuring the Printer Output For the printout you configure the format and colors The individual settings are described in chapter 12 1 2 Printer Settings on page 205 1 Connect the printer to a Type A USB port on the front or rear panel of the instrument Press SETUP gt Printer to open the Printer menu Press Paper Format and select the required format using the Navigation knob 2 3 4 n the Printer menu press Color Mode 5 Select the required color format using the Navigation knob 6 Most printers support PCL Printer Command Language If your printer does not select the appropriate Command Set User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 204 R amp S9RTM Data and File Management 12 1 1 2 12 1 1 3 12 1 2 Printing Starting the Printout Infrequent printouts can be started from the File menu 1 Make sure that the printer is configured correctly See chapter 12 1 1 1 Configuring the Printer Output on page 204 2 Press the FILE key 3 Press Screenshots gt Print Quick Printing with the P
228. aded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Compare Identifier Sets the comparison condition If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only O and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 196 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis AAA AAA a LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 Bit Identifier Selects the number of the bit in the pattern for bit by bit input For each selected bit enter the State State Identifier Toggles the logic state of the selected bit O low 1 high or X don t care Byte Identifier Selects the byte for input of the data pattern For each selected byte enter the hexadec imal value or set the State for each selected Bit For the identifier pattern byte selection is not relevant as only the 6 bit identifier without parity bits is considered Value Identifier Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected byte by turning the navigation knob Identifier and data Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition The instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern The first key press enables the trigger type
229. aeneeeceesneneeecseecadnccasceeeadnasaneeess 347 e Width Search Configuration tied niles 347 e eet Ee DEE 349 e Rise Fall Time Search CGontfouraton mmn 350 e Runt Search Configuration EE 351 e Data2Clock Search Configuration iacere nin 353 e Patten 5earc Ree UE EE 355 Search cl 0 iii ii ii aliada idad 357 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 343 14 2 12 1 Command Reference General Search Configuration sde Ke TA KEEN 344 imet aa 344 SEARENSOURES ti dada 346 SEARCNGATE MODE E 346 SEARGITGATE ABSolute S KL ANEN 346 SGEARchGATEABGoluteGTOp sacana ananin naain aKa iaaa aa aaa iaaa iraia 346 SEARch STATe lt SearchState gt Enables and disables the search mode Parameters lt SearchState gt ON OFF RST OFF Example chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch CONDition lt SearchCondition gt Selects the event you want to search for R amp S9RTM Remote Control Parameters lt SearchCondition gt Example Command Reference EDGE WIDTh PEAK RUNT RTIMe DATatoclock PATTern PROTocol EDGE An edge search result is found when the waveform passes the given level in the specified direction WIDTH A width search finds pulses with an exact pulse width or pulses shorter or longer than a given time or pulses inside or outside the allowable time range PEAK The peak search finds pulses exceeding a given amp
230. age 347 Level Sets the voltage level for the search Remote command SEARch TRIGger EDGE e EVel on page 347 Hysteresis Sets a hysteresis range to the search level in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Remote command SEARch TRIGger EDGE LEVel DELTa on page 347 10 3 3 Width Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Width gt Setup a Level E gt Width Variation kl Back Positive _ oo sam C Ewa O RECH 99ms Laag Eos Polarity Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh POLarity on page 347 Level Sets the voltage level on which the pulse width is measured Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh LEVel on page 348 Hysteresis Sets a hysteresis range to the search level in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Remote command SEARch TRIGger WIDTh LEVel DELTa on page 348 Comparison Sets the condition how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s Greater than Finds pulses longer than the given
231. age 433 HCOPy IMMediate Prints an image of the display to the printer or saves an image to a file or the clipboard depending on the HCOPy DESTination setting Before starting the printout make sure that e The printer is defined by SySTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect e The path for storage is defined correctly by MMEMory CDIRectory e The file name for storage is defined by MMEMory NAME Example chapter 14 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on page 433 Usage Event User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 414 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m X O ss nqgenst Command Reference HCOPy LANGuage Format Defines the format of the printed or saved screenshot Parameters Format GDI BMP PNG GDI For output on printer BMP PNG File formats for saved screenshots RST PNG Example chapter 14 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on page 433 HCOPy PAGE SIZE Size Defines the page size to be used Parameters Size A4 A5 B5 B6 EXECutive HCOPy PAGE ORIentation Orientation Defines the page orientation Parameters Orientation LANDscape PORTrait HCOPy COLor SCHeme lt ColorScheme gt Defines the color mode for saved and printed screenshots Parameters lt ColorScheme gt COLor GRAYscale INVerted INVerted inverts the colors of the output i e a dark waveform is printed o
232. al components with frequencies higher than the cut off frequency are attenuated signifi cantly IIR high pass IIR J Op1 fg Op2 Calculates a high pass filtered waveform of Operand 1 The cut off frequency is set with constant Operand 2 Signal components with frequencies below the cut off frequency are attenuated significantly oc Remote command CALCulate MATH lt m gt EXPRession DEFine on page 331 Operand 1 Edit Equations Defines the first operand for the mathematical operation The source can be any active channel signal a constant value or a mathematical waveform with lower number than the one to be defined CH1 CH2 An active channel waveform CH3 CH4 Const A constant value User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 103 R8S RTM Mathematics AAA SS A A A a Reference for Mathematics MA1 MA2 A mathematical waveform Only math waveforms with lower number MA3 MA4 are available Operand 2 Edit Equations Defines the second operand for the mathematical operation if required The source can be any active channel signal a constant value or a mathematical waveform with lower number than the one to be defined CH1 CH2 An active channel waveform CH3 CH4 Const A constant value MA1 MA2 A mathematical waveform Only math waveforms with lower number MA3 MA4 are available Edit Constant Edit Equations Provides functions to define a constant value to be used in a mathe
233. aling unit for the y axis The display values are valid for 50O termination impendance To achieve this the existing internal terminating resistor can be used or an external terminating resistor can be connected parallel to the high impedance input To set the scale value use FFT Setup Y Scale dBm logarithmic scaling related to 1 mW dBV logarithmic scaling related to 1 Veff Veff linear scaling displays the RMS value of the voltage Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude SCALe on page 335 FFT Setup Defines the settings for the FFT window The display can be restricted to the results for a certain time base extract and to a specified frequency range User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 114 R amp S9RTM FFT Reference for FFT key Span FFT Setup The span is specified in Hertz and defines the width of the displayed frequency range which is Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 The position of the span is defined using the Center function Center amp Span 4 Note If the FFT frequency range is selected Span Center is highlighted the width of the span can be adjusted using the horizontal SCALE rotary knob Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT SPAN on page 337 CALCulate MATH m FFT FULLspan on page 337 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT STARt on page 338 CALCulate MATH m FFT STOP on page 338 Center FFT Setup Defines the position of the displayed frequency doma
234. alue Determines the mean value of the complete displayed waveform The measurement value is displayed as Mean in the result table RMS Value Measures the RMS Root Mean Square value of the voltage of the complete displayed waveform The measurement value is displayed as RMS in the result table Mean Cycle Measures the mean value of the left most signal period The measurement value is dis played as MnCy in the result table User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 84 R amp SS9RTM Measurements MCRRGMMCIO p Q Automatic Measurements RMS Cycle Measures the RMS Root Mean Square value of the voltage of the left most signal period The measurement value is displayed as RMSCy in the result table Peak Peak Measures the peak to peak value within the displayed section of the waveform The measurement value is displayed as Vpp in the result table Peak Measures the maximum value within the displayed section of the waveform The mea sured value is displayed as Vp in the result table Peak Measures the minimum value within the displayed section of the waveform The mea sured value is displayed as Vp in the result table Frequency Measures the frequency of the signal The result is based on the length of the left most signal period within the displayed section of the wavefor
235. alues Measures the positive and negative peak values between the two cursors as well as the absolute difference between the two peak values peak to peak value Vpp Vp Vp Results Vp Vp Vpp RMS Mean o Measures the root mean square RMS the mean value and the standard deviation of measurement results between the two cursors Results Mean RMS o _L_L_L______ ES AAA A e 2 2 AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 77 R amp S9RTM Measurements Cursor Measurements Duty Ratio Measures the positive and negative duty cycles The duty cycle is the ratio between the duration of a positve pulse high active or a negative pulse low active and the period of a rectangular waveform The measurement requires at least one complete period of the signal between cursor 1 and cursor 2 Pulse duration and period are measured at cursor 3 Results Dty Dty in Burst Width Measures the duration of a burst Two vertical cursors mark the beginning and the end of the burst The horizontal cursor sets the threshold value and the time between the first and the last edge of the burst is returned Result BstW Rise Time Measures the rise and fall times of the left most edge in the display between the upper and lower reference levels The reference levels are set in the Auto Measure menu MEAS gt Reference Level See also Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels Results tr tf V Marker Two verti
236. anage measurement settings and data ME Cinco c RT 413 e Saving and Loading Data MMEMory Commandes 416 14 2 14 1 Screenshots This chapter describes remote commands used to print and save screenshots HCOPYDESTINANON Em 414 MMEMOM NAME e A Aaa 414 HOOP IH S uc M 414 ACOPYLANGUAgO coi 415 HEOPEPAGESIZE mU CT 415 lee EE 415 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 413 R amp S RTM Remote Control DESSERT Command Reference i5 89 0 5274870 8 25 19 OMG la nadan 415 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect ooiccononacci nancanananddan ern rinde n RR PRO 4 e ARR iaaa 415 GvGTem CGOMMunicate Dh lNter ENUMerate PIR 416 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT eese 416 HCOPy DESTination Medium Defines whether the screenshot is saved or printed Parameters Medium MMEM SYST COMM PRIN String parameter MMEM Saves the screenshot to a file Specify the file name and location with MMEMory NAME SYST COMM PRIN Prints on the printer specified with SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect The printer must be specified before the HCOPy DESTination is sent RST MMEM Example HCOP DEST MMEM chapter 14 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on page 433 MMEMory NAME lt FileName gt Defines the file name to store an image of the display with HCOPy IMMediate Parameters lt FileName gt String parameter Example chapter 14 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on p
237. and 2 Equation Label Edit Constant Remote command CALCulate MATH lt m gt EXPRession DEFine on page 331 Equation Edit Equations Selects one of five possible mathematical channels Operator Edit Equations Defines the operation to be performed on the specified operands in the mathematical channel Addition Op1 Op2 Adds the two operands EEN ELELE AN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 99 R amp S9RTM Mathematics Subtraction Multiplication Division Maximum Reference for Mathematics Op1 Op2 Subtracts the second operand from the first operand LLNZ ELECE PV Op1 Op2 Multiplies the two operands ZNANI TLL AA Op1 Op2 Divides the first operand by the second operand For small amplitudes of the second operand the result increases quickly If the second operand crosses zero the result would be a range of c to o In this case instead of OV the calculation function uses the value that the Least Significant Bit LSB of the second operand repre sents For an 8 bit value for example 1 256 You can limit the zero crossings of the operand by using the Maxi mum operator This limitation results in a smaller result range and a finer resolution INN NU EIE Maximum Op1 Op2 Compares the amplitudes of both operands and displays the maximum amplitude The sign of the result is taken from Operand1 Use this operation in combination with the Reci
238. anual 1305 0595 02 08 368 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 13 4 Command Reference BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt MISO Returns the data value of the specified word on the optional MISO line Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n o Selects the word number 1 m Return values Data Decimal value of the data word Usage Query only SSPI BEC HNOIE C29 8 i r 369 BUS SSPLELOCKPOLSTY Em 369 BUS SSPEMOSLUSOBIES oi india 370 BUS SSPIDATA el 370 BUS SSPIMISOSO EE 370 BUS SSPIIMOSEPONLarily 2 2 oerte ete isa 370 BUS SSPEDATA POLINY c 370 BUSSSPIEMISO POL 13d deste cete ai adam ena eden rn E EE EREA 370 BUS SSP dE zn e 370 BUS SSP EBORDG EE 371 BUS SSP ES SNe Tm 371 BUS SSPI CLOCk SOURce lt Source gt Selects the input channel of the clock line Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 BUS SSPI CLOCk POLarity lt Polarity gt Selects if data is stored with the rising or falling slope of the clock The slope marks the begin of a new bit Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive rising slope NEGative falling slope RST POSitive E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 369 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mNEAMCIC A
239. arameter All files of the directory are listed with their file name format and size in bytes Query for files in the DATA directory with absolute path MMEM CAT USB FRONT DATA received 511104 8633856 MONDAY TXT 8 TUESDAY CSV 8 Query for TXT files in the DATA directory with relative path MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA MMEM CAT TXT received 511104 8633856 MONDAY TXT 8 MMEM CAT LENGTH TXT received 1 chapter 14 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 433 Query only MMEMory CATalog LENGth lt PathName gt Returns the number of files in the specified directory The result corresponds to the num ber of files returned by the MMEMory CATalog command Query parameters lt PathName gt Return values lt Count gt Example Usage String parameter Directory to be queried absolute or relative path Number of files see MMEMory CATalog Query only MMEMory COPY lt FileSource gt lt FileDestination gt Copies data to another directory on the same or different storage device The file name can be changed too Setting parameters lt FileSource gt lt FileDestination gt String parameter Name and path of the file to be copied String parameter Name and path of the new file If the file already exists it is over written without notice User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 420 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Example E
240. arameter can be used to set a value and it is the result of a query Parameters required only for setting are indicated as Setting parameters Parameters required only to refine a query are indicated as Query parameters Parameters that are only returned as the result of a query are indicated as Return values e Conformity T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 263 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 2 Command Reference Commands that are taken from the SCPI standard are indicated as SCPI con firmed All commands used by the R amp S RTM follow the SCPI syntax rules e Asynchronous commands A command which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing overlapping command is indicated as an Asynchronous com mand e Reset values RST Default parameter values that are used directly after resetting the instrument RST command are indicated as RST values if available Common Commands Common commands are described in the IEEE 488 2 IEC 625 2 standard These com mands have the same effect and are employed in the same way on different devices The headers of these commands consist of followed by three letters Many common commands are related to the Status Reporting System Available common commands uos EU 264 AP PP M 264 ji 1 OOOO 5o 5 On 265 j Em 265 lei M O 265 Doc M 265 POOP
241. arch result markers For details on setting and moving markers see chapter 4 4 1 Using Timestamp Markers on page 67 e To use markers on search results on page 131 HI Pe EE 69 PREV ETE 69 i M 9 69 e E E 70 NEXT Moves the next right marker to the reference point of the display or zoom area Note If another marker is available at the right but currently not visible on the screen a small red arrow is displayed at the right edge of the display If a search is enabled the key navigates the search result markers only Remote command TSTamp NEXT on page 307 for timestamp markers only PREV Moves the previous left marker to the reference point of the display or zoom area Note If another marker is available at the left but currently not visible on the screen a small red arrow is displayed at the left edge of the display If a search is enabled the key navigates the search result markers only Remote command TSTamp PREVious on page 307 for timestamp markers only SET Sets a new marker at the reference point of the display unless an existing marker is already set there In the display of search results the marker is set to the search result that is selected in the Event Table Remote command TSTamp SET on page 307 for timestamp markers only ETN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 69 Markers CLEAR Deletes the marker at the refe
242. are referenced against each other and voltages that are not references to ground for example twisted pair signal lines The R amp S RT ZD probes are differential probes with high input impedance they can be used to measure voltages between any two test points Compared with two channel measurement setup with single ended probes the mea surement with differential probes is symmetric due to the same amplification and cable EET RU E EE A lt lt lt LL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULULULUIZ 3 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 18 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup REESEN Basics length on both paths It is also immune to interference and noise and occupies only one input channel A differential probe has three sockets the positive signal socket the negative signal Socket and the ground socket Differential probes provide multiple input voltages e Differential mode input voltage Vin Voltage between the positive and negative signal sockets e Positive single ended input voltage V Voltage between the positive signal socket and the ground socket e Negative single ended input voltage V Voltage between the negative signal socket and the ground socket e Common mode input voltage Vom Mean voltage of positive and negative signal sockets referred to the ground socket respectively Two of these voltages are independent values the other two can be calculated Vin V Me Vp V on R amp S RT ZD prob
243. ary Note If a file with the same file name already exists in the destination directory it will be overwritten without notification If you want to change the file format for references or masks press Format and select the target format Press Import Export The source file is copied to the destination directory Imported data is not loaded to the instrument automatically You must explicitly load it after import with the Load function in the relevant menu Masks Reference Math menu or File menu for instrument settings I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 208 R amp S RTM Data and File Management Ech Saving and Loading 12 2 1 3 General Storage Settings This chapter describes the general settings to save load and export import data LEE E DEE 209 QE EI OT 210 e Storage Directory Mert inre iiec c pa AE 210 e ImportEXport MORD pere erred i ENEE EE EA 211 Save Menu The Save menu provides functions to configure how the data is saved and to start the save process Its main functions are displayed whenever some data has to be stored Depending on the data type additional specific functions may be provided These func tions are described in the relevant chapters File Name Comment Save w C serooos O aM js s S 209 SNR o 209 CORDERO ad TE A Beete 209 LU MICE 210 Storage Opens the storage directory submenu see Storage Directory Menu on page 210 File name Opens on screen k
244. ate remote control amp GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active instrument function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input amp LLO Local Lockout Disables switchover from remote control to manual control by means of the front panel keys T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 239 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control Basics Command Long term Effect on the instrument amp NREN Not Remote Enable Enables switchover from remote control to manual opera tion by means of the front panel keys amp POL Serial Poll Starts a serial poll GPIB Interface Messages Interface messages are transmitted to the instrument on the data lines with the attention line ATN being active LOW They are used for communication between the controller and the instrument and can only be sent by a computer which has the function of a GPIB bus controller GPIB interface messages can be further subdivided into e Universal commands act on all instruments connected to the GPIB bus without previous addressing e Addressed commands only act on instruments previously addressed as listeners Universal Commands Universal commands are encoded in the range 10 through 1F hex They affect all instru ments connected to the bus and do not require addressing Command Effect on the instrument DCL Device Clear Aborts the proce
245. ation of new options and all softkeys of the Setup menu The usage of the functions except of update is described in other chapters depending on the usage context e chapter Defining General Instrument Settings in the Getting Started manual con figuring date time interface and help language and sounds e chapter 14 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connection on page 233 13 1 Firmware and Options e Updating FIITTHIWaEFe ecieeceec erattu re rti netter annonces caca 222 e jAcuvaliag ORTOS o iia 223 13 1 1 Updating Firmware This chapter describes how to update the instrument s firmware and the interface firm ware You should update the instrument and interface firmware in regular intervals to take advantage of new functions and solve possible problems To update the instrument s firmware 1 Download the current firmware package from the instrument s Web page http www scope of the art com product rtm html under Downloads gt Firmware The zip package contains the firmware fwu and help languages hmg for all R amp S RTM types 2 Extract the zip package and copy the required firmware and help languages files to a USB stick 3 Insert the USB flash drive in the instrument 4 Press SETUP 5 Press More Press Update gt Firmware The currently installed firmware version as well as all available update versions are displayed 6 Press Execute to start the firmware update TE User Manual 1
246. ation of the instrument Log File Self Alignment The log file records the results of the self alignment You can set et the extend of the log file and export it No Log File No log file is written Standard Log Default logging File Extended Log Complete log results are written File Export Opens the submenu to store the log file on USB stick See also Storage Directory Menu on page 210 Probe Adjust A R amp S RTM allows you to adjust a probe without further devices Two connector pins are located on the front panel The left pin is on ground level The right pin supplies a square wave signal for the adjustment In this menu you can choose between two frequencies 1 kHz 1 MHz or allow the detection of an automatic setting by the instrument The rise time does not differ between the settings 1kHz Probe Adjust A square wave with a frequency of f 1 kHz is generated at the Probe Adjust pin Use this setting to adjust the LF band of the probe 1MHz Probe Adjust A square wave with a frequency of f 1 MHz is generated at the Probe Adjust pin Use this setting to adjust the HF band of the probe Automatic Probe Adjust A square wave is generated at the Probe Adjust pin The frequency of the square wave depends on the defined time base If the time base becomes too small to display the 1 kHz wave it is automatically switched to a 1 MHz wave Secure Erase Deletes current instrument configuration data a
247. ave device settings FILE Device Settings Save Save a waveform FILE Waveforms Save a screenshot FILE Screenshots Save a screenshot and the device settings FILE gt Screenshots and FILE gt Device Settings Save e Print screenshots SETUP gt More gt Printer After this configuration the selected action is started whenever you press the PRINT key PRINT Key Settings With FILE gt Print Key you define an action that will be executed by pressing the PRINT key LEER MM Screen amp Setup Screenshots B z nr Diren mmm E UT WH N B oce Tute irera a a EN E N 213 WAVE ONS ita 213 Save ES e JE e T 213 AS SIP EE 214 Pint Screens hile EE 214 Device Settings If selected the device settings are stored when you press the PRINT key Storage set tings are configured with FILE gt Device Settings See also chapter 12 2 3 2 Device Settings Menu on page 215 Waveforms If selected the current waveform is stored when you press the PRINT key Storage set tings are configured with FILE Waveforms See also chapter 12 2 4 3 Waveform Storage Settings on page 218 Save Screenshots If selected a screenshot of the current display is stored when you press the PRINT key Storage settings are configured with FILE Screenshots See also chapter 12 2 5 2 Screenshot Storage Settings on page 220 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 213 R amp S9RTM Dat
248. avoids unwan ted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Hysteresis is available forthe edge trigger A event and B event and for the width trigger To see the hysteresis on the display activate Trigger Hyst in the Display Auxillary Cursors menu User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 44 R amp S9RTM Triggers 3 3 2 4 Reference for Triggers The hysteresis value depends on the vertical scale Remote command TRIGger A HYSTeresis on page 293 TRIGger B HYSTeresis on page 300 Video The video or TV trigger is used to analyze analog baseband video signals You can trigger on baseband video signals from standard definition and high definition standards The trigger level is determined and set automatically by the instrument First select the standard and the signal polarity then decide to trigger on lines or fields and enter the specific settings Most video signals have an output impedance of 75 O The channel inputs of the R amp S RTM have an input impedance of 50 O or 1 MO Make sure to provide the adequate matching to ensure amplitude fidelity A simple 75 O feed through termination combined with 1 MO oscilloscope inputs is suitable for most applications SEH dE Ee E EE 45 cep e X 45 Hire 46 A U UU 46 PENG A A NER 46 cic M mM 46 Standard Selects the color television s
249. base ZOOM POSition Position Defines the position of the zoom reference point the reference point of the zoom window in relation to the reference point of original time base Parameters Position Range Depends on the zoom time base nearly 0 to 100 96 for large zoom RST 50 Default unit 96 Markers Timestamps TIP S B RR 307 KEE reg NEXT tnde co eter Re rr renda docena eee A ra epa at uere Eee en Nera EE Paten ers 307 RENE Te Me 307 TSTamMp OLEA airna NEATE EEEE o ees 308 TrM RE 308 TSTamp SET Sets a new marker timestamp at the reference point of the display unless an existing marker is already set there The reference point is set with TIMebase REFerence Usage Event TSTamp NEXT Usage Event Moves the next marker timestamp to the right to the reference point of the display or zoom area TSTamp PREVious Moves the previous marker timestamp to the left to the reference point of the display or zoom area Usage Event __u_ eo OOET B SLLL JSSLJEQIULLLLGSDERM ows o E ULU L LLLLLLLLOGEGKLUL C LCEEOC ILOL L L O CU U User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 307 R amp S RTM Remote Control 14 2 7 Command Reference TSTamp CLEar Deletes the marker timestamp at the reference point The reference point is set with TIMebase REFerence Usage Event TSTamp ACLear Deletes all markers timestamps Usage Event Reference Waveforms For data queries and conversion
250. bbreviated form of the command line reads as follows HCOP ITEM ALL IMM However a new command line always begins with the complete path Example HCOP ITEM ALL HCOP IMM Responses to Queries A query is defined for each setting command unless explicitly specified otherwise It is formed by adding a question mark to the associated setting command According to SCPI the responses to queries are partly subject to stricter rules than in standard IEEE 488 2 e The requested parameter is transmitted without a header Example HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND e Maximum values minimum values and all other quantities that are requested via a special text parameter are returned as numeric values Example SENSe FREQuency STOP MAX Response 3 5E9 e Numeric values are output without a unit Physical quantities are referred to the basic units or to the units set using the Unit command The response 3 5E9 in the pre vious example stands for 3 5 GHz e Truth values Boolean values are returned as 0 for OFF and 1 for ON Example Setting command HCOPy DEV COL ON Query HCOPy DEV COL Response 1 e Text character data is returned in a short form Example Setting command HardCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape Query HCOP PAGE ORI Response LAND E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 248 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm neuro EEE Basics 14 1 5 Command Sequence and Synchronizati
251. be set to the required position with the Navigation rotary knob or set to typical positions on a keypress 6 1 1 Cursor Measurements Types and Results Cursor measurements are based on automatic measurements The cursor measurement is limited to the cursor positions or the part of the waveform between the cursors while automatic measurements considers the complete display of the waveform Thus you can focus the measurement to the interesting part of the waveform by using cursors The results are displayed in the right part of the result table User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 75 R amp SS9RTM Measurements SSS LL A Cursor Measurements TB 50ns T 0s Auto CH1 646 6 mV A AC 5 GSals Realtime Complete For cursor measurements on channel math and reference waveforms various mea surement types are available for example Peak RMS Mean und Count Cursor mea surement is also possible on the results of an FFT analysis It measures the frequencies and levels at the cursor positions and their differences Available cursor measurements are VORIO 76 Ton 77 VOMITO E 77 RION EE 77 o MEM OE E E EC TT GOU EE 77 et LE TT RMS MEIN O DEPORTES TORTE TRENT TT DUY EL ista lll 78 EWEN 78 RISO Ku 78 BE PII DEPT TIE PA E OTT LT TTE 78 Voltage Sets two horizontal cursor lines and measures the voltages at the two cursor positions and the delta of the two values Results V1 V2 AV E
252. bes and other sources Correct deskew values are important for accurate triggering Signals which are routed over lines with different lengths have a different propagation delay If high speed signals are measured this delay may lead to a non synchronous waveform display For example a coax cable with a length of one meter has a propaga tion delay of typically 5 3 ns Remote command CHANnel lt m gt SKEW on page 281 Threshold Access CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold Threshold value for digitization of analog signals If the signal value is higher than the threshold the signal state is high 1 or true for the boolean logic Otherwise the signal state is considered low 0 or false if the signal value is below the threshold Find Level fo TTL ECL CMOS You can e Select one of the default values for TTL ECL or CMOS TTL 1 4V ECL 1 3 V CMOS 2 5 V e Set the User value individually e Let the instrument analayze the signal and find an appropriate level The threshold is applied to the selected channel Remote command CHANnel lt m gt THReshold on page 282 Label Opens the Label menu to define an additional name label for the selected waveform _L___SSSS SS A lt lt lt LLLLL L LTLULC UMS XX User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 31 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup m
253. bras de se al corresponden a la definici n habitual para aplicaciones civiles en el rea econ mica europea Pueden existir definiciones diferentes a esta definici n en otras reas econ micas o en aplicaciones militares Por eso se deber tener en cuenta que las palabras de se al aqu descritas sean utilizadas siempre solamente en combinaci n con la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y solamente en combinaci n con el producto correspondiente La utilizaci n de las palabras de sefial en combinaci n con productos o documentaciones que no les correspondan puede llevar a interpretaciones equivocadas y tener por consecuencia dafios en personas u objetos Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento El producto solamente debe ser utilizado seg n lo indicado por el fabricante respecto a los estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento sin que se obstruya la ventilaci n Si no se siguen las indicaciones del fabricante pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte En todos los trabajos deber n ser tenidas en cuenta las normas nacionales y locales de seguridad del trabajo y de prevenci n de accidentes 1171 0000 42 07 Page 9 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Si no se convino de otra manera es para los productos Rohde 8 Schwarz v lido lo que sigue como posici n de funcionamiento se define por principio la posici n con el suelo de la caja para abajo m
254. buffer place Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place lt n gt ks Buffer place The buffer size is limited by MEASurement lt m gt STATistics WEIGht Return values lt StatisticValue gt Statistical value Usage Query only T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 329 R8S RTM Remote Control m rR RA OO s Command Reference 14 2 9 Mathematics This chapter describes commands that configure or perform mathematical functions For data queries and conversion consider also the following commands e FORMat DATA on page 268 e CALCulate MATH m DATA XINCrement on page 270 e CALCulate MATH m DATA XORigin on page 269 e CALCulate MATH m DATA YINCrement on page 270 e CALCulate MATH m DATA YORigin on page 270 e CALCulate MATH m DATA YRESolution on page 271 CAE DUulateMATHSImetS FAT a A cel 330 GALGulate MATHSmESOGALS e ce eae condi tenter EENS ba andina adan Sins 330 CALCUlatEeMATH eM e EE 331 CALC late MATH lt m gt EXPR ssion DEFINE ienai id 331 GAUGulate MATHSD gt DATAS EE 332 CAL CulateMATHm DATAHEAler 332 CALCulate MATH lt m gt STATe State Defines whether the selected mathematical channel is active or not Only if a channel is active it is visible on the screen and can be selected as a source for analysis and display functions Suffix m 1
255. cal markers are provided and the values of the waveform at the marker positions are measured Additionally the differences of the two values in x and y direction are displayed Results V1 V2 At AV Performing Cursor Measurements The cursors are activated according to the latest setting as soon as you press the CURSOR key To configure cursor measurements 1 Press the CURSOR key The cursors are activated according to the latest setting 2 Press Meas Type to select the type of measurement to perform The type deter mines which results are displayed in the result table See also Meas Type on page 80 3 Press Source to select the waveform for which the measurement is to be performed The source can be any active channel reference or math waveform or a decoded bus signal 4 Move the cursors to obtain the required results EET RU E N User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 78 R amp SS9RTM Measurements m J J G EM Cursor Measurements See also To change the position of the cursors on page 79 The cursor measurement is performed and the results are displayed in the result table To change the position of the cursors The cursor measurement displays the results depending on the current position of the cursors Move the cursors to obtain the results for a specific time range or at specific signal points 1 Press the NAVIGATION rotary knob to select the first cursor
256. cal meaning can be created SENS BAND RES 1 SENS BWID RES 1 II mnemonics in square brackets are optional and may be inserted into the header or omitted Example HardCOPy IMMediate HCOP IMM is equivalent to HCOP Parameters in curly brackets are optional and can be inserted once or several times or omitted Example SENSe LIST FREQuency numeric value numeric value The following are valid commands SENS LIST FREQ L SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 SENS LIST FREQ 10 20 30 40 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters The param eters must be separated from the header by a white space ASCII code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank Allowed parameters are Numeric values Special numeric values Boolean parameters Text Character strings Block data The parameters required for each command and the allowed range of values are speci fied in the command description E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 244 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm n Xn M s n Basics Numeric values Numeric values can be entered in any form i e with sign decimal point and exponent Values exceeding the resolution of the instrument are rounded up or down The mantissa may comprise up to 255 characters the exponent must lie inside the value range 32000 to 32000 The exponent is introd
257. can be used Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 RST CH1 BUS LIN POLarity lt Polarity gt Defines the idle state of the bus The idle state is the rezessive state and corresponds to a logic 1 Parameters lt Polarity gt IDLHigh IDLLow IDLHigh Low active negative polarity IDLLow High active positive polarity RST IDLL BUS LIN STANdard Standard Selects the version of the LIN standard that is used in the DUT The setting mainly defines the checksum version used during decoding The most common version is LIN 2 x For mixed networks or if the standard is unknown set the LIN standard to AUTO Parameters Standard V1X V2X 2602 AUTO RST VIS BUS LIN BITRate lt BitRate gt Sets the number of transmitted bits per second Parameters lt BitRate gt RST 9 6E03 Default unit Bit s E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 402 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m 0 X g rl Command Reference CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event LIN Trigger TRIGIERA an d cocacola iii dada 403 TRIGA Ke SOMO ici EE 404 TRIGGSRACLINGIP ERR DEED 404
258. ce waveform The settings are only available if the file was stored to the internal storage INT REFERENCE and never written to an external storage USB stick Remote command REFCurve lt m gt LOAD STATe on page 310 ERE A lt lt A A AA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 74 R amp SS9RTM Measurements Cursor Measurements 6 Measurements The following measurement methods are available e CURSOR Cursor measurements determine specific measurement results at the current cursor positions of an active waveform the results are displayed in a result table e QUICK MEAS performs basic automatic measurements for the selected channel immediately the results are displayed directly at the waveform and in a result table e MEAS With automatic measurements up to four amplitude and time measurements or pulse counts can be configured and performed simultaneously based on an active channel reference or math waveforms The results are displayed in a result table the color of the results corresponds with the source waveform color These meas urements can be performed together with the Quick Meas measurements Use the full height of the screen for waveform display to get best vertical resolution and measurement results 6 1 Cursor Measurements Using the CURSOR key you can determine specific measurement results at the current cursor positions for an active channel math or reference waveform The cursors can
259. ch TRIGger RISetime RANGe on page 350 Rise Fall time Sets the reference rise or fall time the nominal value for comparisons Remote command SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME on page 351 SS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 136 R amp SS9RTM Search Reference for Search Menu Variation Sets a range At to the reference Rise Fall time if comparison is set to Equal or Not equal The instrument finds rise fall times inside or outside the range width At Remote command SEARch TRIGger RISetime DELTa on page 351 10 3 6 Runt Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Runt gt Setup Polarity Upper Level Lower Level Comparison Width Variation Ca ae e yA N Polarity Indicates the polarity of the pulse to be searched for Remote command SEARch TRIGger RUNT POLarity on page 352 Upper level Sets the upper voltage threshold for runt detection A negative runt crosses the upper level twice without crossing the lower level Remote command SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT UPPer on page 352 Lower level Sets the lower voltage threshold for runt detection A positive runt crosses the lower level twice without crossing the upper level Remote command SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT LOWer on page 352 Comparison Sets the condition how the measured runt width is compared with the given limit s The same conditions as with width search are used see Comparison on page 134 Remote co
260. ciones en cuanto a las bater as y acumuladores o celdas pueden producirse explosiones incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte El manejo de bater as y acumuladores con electrolitos alcalinos p ej celdas de litio debe seguir el est ndar EN 62133 1 2 No deben desmontarse abrirse ni triturarse las celdas Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a calor ni fuego Debe evitarse el almacenamiento a la luz directa del sol Las celdas y bater as deben mantenerse limpias y secas Limpiar las conexiones sucias con un pa o seco y limpio Las celdas o bater as no deben cortocircuitarse Es peligroso almacenar las celdas o bater as en estuches o cajones en cuyo interior puedan cortocircuitarse por contacto rec proco o por contacto con otros materiales conductores No deben extraerse las celdas o bater as de sus embalajes originales hasta el momento en que vayan a utilizarse Las celdas o bater as no deben someterse a impactos mec nicos fuertes indebidos En caso de falta de estanqueidad de una celda el l quido vertido no debe entrar en contacto con la piel ni los ojos Si se produce contacto lavar con agua abundante la zona afectada y avisar a un m dico En caso de cambio o recarga inadecuados las celdas o bater as que contienen electrolitos alcalinos p ej las celdas de litio pueden explotar Para garantizar la seguridad del producto las celdas o bater as solo deben ser sustituidas por el tipo Ro
261. computer can access the instrument enter the IP address of the R amp S RTM in the address line of the internet browser on your computer http xxx yyy zzz xxx The Instrument Home page appears It provides information on the instrument and the LAN connection Instrument Home Print gt Device Class Oscilloscope Interface Type USB LAN Device Type RTM1054 Serial Number IF 058100096 KmaT 1305 0008K54 HW Version 1 001 Serial Number 101634 SW Version 3 003 Firmware Version 03 031 Ethernet Port MAC Address 00 50 C2 45 11 FA DHCP Off IP Address 169 254 238 10 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 10 1 IP Port 5025 HTTP Port 80 USB Port Vendor ID DAAD hex Product ID 00A1 hex On the Screen Data page a copy of the instrument screen is shown To get the current screen content from the instrument click Update To save the screen copy right click the picture and select Save picture as On the SCPI Device Control page you can check if the transfer of remote com mands is working You can enter a single command for example IDN and trans mit it with Send Do not press the Enter key E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 236 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mAm C oO Z A ng nr Basics SCPI Device Control Instrument Home The device may be controlled with special co
262. configuration Select the protocol type and configure the input line as well as the protocol specific settings e Decoding Configure the display of the decoded data and enable decoding As a result the digitized signal data is displayed on the screen together with the decoded content of the messages You can scale the signal display and zoom into it to see it in more detail You can create and apply label lists for easier identification of the bus nodes on the display e Triggering You can trigger on various events that are typical for the configured bus type for example on start and stop of messages on specific addresses or on serial patterns 11 1 1 Configuring Common Protocol Settings Common settings for all bus types are the logic threshold and the decoding and display settings To set the logic threshold Before you start configuration and analysis check and set the logic thresholds for all used channels the voltage values for digitization of analog signals If the signal value is higher than the threshold the signal state is 1 Otherwise the signal state is considered 0 if the signal value is below the threshold If you want the instrument to set the thresholds based on the analysis of the signals press Find level in the protocol s Configuration menu 1 Press the CH N key of the required channel User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 144 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 1 2 Protocol Bus Type Basics
263. ct requires technical skills and in some cases a basic knowledge of English It is therefore essential that only skilled and specialized staff or thoroughly trained personnel with the required skills be allowed to use the product If personal safety gear is required for using Rohde amp Schwarz products this will be indicated at the appropriate place in the product documentation Keep the basic safety instructions and the product documentation in a safe place and pass them on to the subsequent users Observing the safety instructions will help prevent personal injury or damage of any kind caused by dangerous situations Therefore carefully read through and adhere to the following safety instructions before and when using the product It is also absolutely essential to observe the additional safety instructions on personal safety for example that appear in relevant parts of the product documentation In these safety instructions the word product refers to all merchandise sold and distributed by the Rohde amp Schwarz group of companies including instruments systems and all accessories For product specific information see the data sheet and the product documentation Safety labels on products The following safety labels are used on products to warn against risks and dangers Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Notice general danger location Q ON OFF supply voltage Observe product documentation P Caution when handling heavy
264. cter A hash character at any other position in the line is treated like a standard character e Command lines begin with a commercial at character An character at any other position in the line is treated like a standard character e Standard lines are the lines that not qualify as comment or command lines They build the core of the label list Command lines Command lines define the version of the PTT file and the protocol name e OFILE_ VERSION must appear exactly once in the file e PROTOCOL_NAME must appear at least once in the file Thus one file can con tain several label lists for different protocols ERREUR RA E A e 1 e 25553 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 146 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis mun E M J Basics of Protocol Analysis Start of PTT file GFILE VERSION 1 0 PROTOCOL NAME i2c Label list for I2C amp PROTOCOL NAME can Label list for CAN End of PTT file Standard lines Standard lines define the contents of the label list The rules for standard lines follow the csv convention they are e Values are separated by commas e Space characters following a delimiter are ignored e Values with a special character comma newline or double quote must be enclosed in double quotes e Text in double quotes must be escaped by double quote characters Additionally numeric values may be d
265. d as trigger source Parameters lt SpiSource gt MOSI MISO RST MOSI TRIGger A SPI MODE Mode Specifies the trigger mode for SPI SSPI protocols Parameters Mode BSTart BEND NTHBit PATTern BSTart Burst start sets the trigger event to the start of the frame The frame starts when the chip select signal CS changes to the active state BEND Burst end sets the trigger event to the end of the message NTHBit Sets the trigger event to the specified bit number To define the bit number use TRIGger A SPI POFFset PATTern Sets the trigger eventto a serial pattern To define the pattern use TRIGGEYr TAT SP1 PATTern For a complete configuration of the pattern mode you also have to set TRIGger A SPI PLENgth and TRIGger A SPI POFE Set RST BSTart I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 364 R8S RTM Remote Control Command Reference TRIGger A SPI PATTern lt DataPattern gt Defines the bit pattern as trigger condition The pattern length is adjusted to the number of bits defined in the pattern Parameters lt DataPattern gt String with max 32 characters 4 byte 8 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Example TRIG A SPI PATT 0011XXXX0110 Sets a 12bit pattern TRIGger A SPI PLENgth lt PatternLength gt Returns the number of bits in the previously defined bit pattern TRIGger A SPI PATTern The command can also be used to shorten a previously defined bit pattern Parameters lt
266. d only by a licensed electrician For permanently installed equipment without built in fuses circuit breakers or similar protective devices the supply circuit must be fuse protected in such a way that anyone who has access to the product as well as the product itself is adequately protected from injury or damage Use suitable overvoltage protection to ensure that no overvoltage such as that caused by a bolt of lightning can reach the product Otherwise the person operating the product will be exposed to the danger of an electric shock Any object that is not designed to be placed in the openings of the housing must not be used for this purpose Doing so can cause short circuits inside the product and or electric shocks fire or injuries Unless specified otherwise products are not liquid proof see also section Operating states and operating positions item 1 Therefore the equipment must be protected against penetration by liquids If the necessary precautions are not taken the user may suffer electric shock or the product itself may be damaged which can also lead to personal injury Never use the product under conditions in which condensation has formed or can form in or on the product e g if the product has been moved from a cold to a warm environment Penetration by water increases the risk of electric shock Prior to cleaning the product disconnect it completely from the power supply e g AC supply network or battery Use a
267. d section of the wave form of the selected channel PERiod Length of the left most signal period within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel PEAK Peak to peak value within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel UPEakvalue Maximum value within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel LPEakvalue Minimum value within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel PPCount Counts positive pulses NPCount Counts negative pulses RECount Counts the number of rising edges FECount Counts the number of falling edges HIGH Mean value of the high level of a square wave LOW Mean value of the low level of a square wave AMPLitude Amplitude of a square wave MEAN Mean value of the complete displayed waveform of the selected channel RMS RMS Root Mean Square value of the voltage of the complete displayed waveform of the selected channel RTIMe FTIMe User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 322 R8S RTM Remote Control ee A A QD Command Reference Rise or falling time of the left most rising edge within the displayed section of the waveform of the selected channel The reference level for this mesurement is set with REFLevel RELative MODE PDCycle NDCycle Measure the positive or negative duty cycle PPWidth NPWidth Measure the width of positive or
268. da 183 L CRO MINE 184 o A 184 L Frame YPE MMM 184 A A A EA 184 L Identifier SetUpi usieescinsereic apad tetur paio cretus P cc 184 Urso dc 185 A i RENE TURN RON A AA 185 DoD A A aston 185 A 185 Md NUM TP 185 Bor ATE 185 Identifier and dla lia 185 GT EE 185 A A 186 Start of frame Triggers on the first edge of the dominant SOF bit synchronization bit Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 389 STOFrame End of frame Triggers on the end of the frame 7 recessive bits Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 389 EOFrame Frame lt type gt Selects the frame type to be triggered on The selected frame type is indicated in the softkey name Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 389 FTYPe TRIGger A CAN FTYPe on page 389 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 182 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis REESEN CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 Error Frame type An error frame is sent by a node that has detected an error Overload Frame type An overload frame is sent by a node that needs a delay between data and or remote frames Data Frame type Frame for data transmission The identifier format is also considered see ID type on page 185 Remote Frame type Data Frame for data transmission A remote frame initiates the transmission of data by another node The frame format is the same as of data frames but
269. different from usual timestamp markers but they are set navigated and deleted by means of the marker keys too As long as a search is enabled the search result markers are active If search is off usual markers can be used See also e To use markers on search results on page 131 chapter 4 4 Markers on page 67 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 128 R amp SS9RTM Search Search Conditions and Results TB 1ms T 1 16 ms iu Auto CH1 835 2m DC Real Time Complete Search Event Table CH1 Edge Positive 4 000006 ns 520000 ys z 3 Search results 6 10 17 5 Events 17 5 Mark events Track event aa Clear all event table TTUN event marks Fig 10 1 Results of an edge search with R amp S RTM 1 Search results 2 Marked search results 3 Selected search result 4 Search conditions 5 Number of results scope of results displayed in the results table 6 Result values result number time value optional value depending on the search type voltage width SCPI commands on page 359 RES on page 358 RES on page 358 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 129 R8S RTM Search Configuring and Performing Searches 10 2 Configuring and Performing Searches To configure and start a search Prerequisite Signal acquisition reference or math waveform is configured 1 Press the SEARCH MENU key The Search menu opens and the search is enabled 2 Press Source and sel
270. dition set all data bytes to OxXX 11 4 4 C Label List Label lists are protocol specific An DC PTT file contains three values for each address e Type address type 7 bit or 10 bit long e ID Addr hexadecimal address value e Symbolic label name of the address specifiing its function in the bus network Example PC PTT file GFILE VERSION 1 00 PROTOCOL NAME i2c Labels for I2C protocol Column order Identifier type Identifier value Label 7 0x1E Voltage 7 0x38 Pressure 7 0x2A Temperature 7 0x16 Speed 7 0x76 Acceleration 7 0x07 HighSpeed Master 0x3 7 0x51 EEPROM 10 0x3A2 DeviceSetup 10 0x1A3 GatewayStatus 10 0x06E LeftSensor User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 167 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 Label list GC Imported on 2012 04 05 12 31 Fig 11 7 Label list for PC For general information see chapter 11 1 3 Label List on page 146 11 4 5 12C Decode Results You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Reference for Protocol Decoding on page 145 Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame access type ID data and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 4 Frame Table Decode R
271. dition byte byte condition L J Frame Fig 11 4 I2C write access with 7 bit address Address types 7 bit and 10 bit Slave addresses can be 7 or 10 bits long A 7 bit address requires one byte 7 bits for the address followed by the R W bit A 10 bit address for write access requires two bytes the first byte starts with the reserved sequence 11110 followed by the two MSB of the address and the write bit The second byte contains the remaining 8 LSB of the address The slave acknowledges each address byte SLAVE ADDRESS SLAVE ADDRESS pe g 1st 7 BITS Mi 2nd BYTE n DATA 11110XX reserved MSB i Fig 11 5 10 bit address write access A 10 bit address for read access requires three bytes The first two bytes are identical to the write access address The third byte repeats the address bits of the first byte and sets the read bit SLAVE ADDRESS SLAVE ADDRESS SLAVE ADDRESS 3 DATA ist 7 BITS 2nd BYTE ist 7 BITS 11110XX repeated 11110XX reserved MSB hn LSB Start reserved MSB ge Fig 11 6 10 bit address read access Trigger The R amp S RTM can trigger on various parts of IC messages The data and clock lines must be connected to the input channels triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possible You can trigger on e Start or stop condition User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 161 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 4 2 11 4 2 1 11 4 2 2 PC Option R amp S RTM K1 e Repeated start condition
272. do en su totalidad por un aislamiento doble reforzado Conexi n a masa Distintivo de la UE para bater as y acumuladores M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 1 1171 0000 42 07 Page 8 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales S mbolo Significado S mbolo Significado Aviso Cuidado en el manejo de dispositivos Distintivo de la UE para la eliminaci n por sensibles a la electrost tica ESD separado de dispositivos el ctricos y electr nicos M s informaci n en la secci n Eliminaci n protecci n del medio ambiente punto 2 Advertencia rayo l ser M s informaci n en la secci n Funcionamiento punto 7 Palabras de se al y su significado En la documentaci n del producto se utilizan las siguientes palabras de se al con el fin de advertir contra riesgos y peligros A RO Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita causa lesiones PELIG graves o incluso la muerte Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar lesiones graves o incluso la muerte lesiones leves o moderadas Indica informaci n que se considera importante pero no en relaci n con situaciones de peligro p ej avisos sobre posibles da os materiales En la documentaci n del producto se emplea de forma sin nima el t rmino CUIDADO A ATENCI N Indica una situaci n de peligro que si no se evita puede causar Las pala
273. dynamically according to the signal source Z The higher the signal level Z is the stronger the waveform is displayed To configure the intensity of an XY waveform modulated by a signal amplitude The waveform intensity is defined by a threshold value If the Z signal value is below the selected threshold the corresponding x y point is not displayed If the Z signal value is above the threshold the x y point is displayed with the defined intensity level To configure the intensity of an XY waveform using a threshold value To configure the intensity of an XY waveform at a defined level Prerequisite The Display Mode is set to XY and the XY diagram is configured 1 2 Press DISPLAY XYZ Setup Z Setup Press the left Source Z softkey until OFF is highlighted to deactivate intensity control by the Z source Press DISPLAY gt Intensities gt Trace to define the intensity level of the waveform Enter a percentage between 0 not visible and 100 very strong The default value is 5096 Regardless of which menu is currently displayed you can use the INTENSITY knob on the left side of the screen to adjust the waveform intensity directly To configure the intensity of an XY waveform modulated by a signal amplitude Prerequisite The Display Mode is set to XY and the XY diagram is configured 1 2 Press DISPLAY gt XYZ Setup gt Z Setup Press the left Source Z softkey until ON is highlighted to
274. e 14 6 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable register Bit No Meaning 0 to 2 not used 3 COVerload This bit is set if a questionable channel overload occurs see STATus QUEStionable COVerload register on page 259 4 TEMPerature This bit is set if a questionable temperature occurs see STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register on page 259 5to7 Not used R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m J m P Basics Bit No Meaning 8 NOALigndata This bit is set if no alignment data is available the instrument is uncalibrated 9 LIMit This bit is set if a limit value is violated see STATus QUEStionable LIMit register on page 259 10to 11 Not used 12 MASK This bit is set if a mask value is violated see STATus QUEStionable MASK register on page 260 13 to 14 Not used 15 This bit is always 0 STATus QUEStionable COVerload register This register contains all information about overload of the channels The bit is set if the assigned channel is overloaded Table 14 7 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable COVerload register Bit No Meaning 0 CHANnell 1 CHANnel2 2 CHANnel 3 3 CHANnel 4 STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register This register contains information about the instrument s temperature Table 14 8 Bits in the STATus QUEStionable TEMPerature register Bit No Meaning
275. e INFinite on page 305 Clear Persist Intensities Clears the displayed persistence on the screen Remote command DISPlay PERSistence CLEar on page 305 Dots Only If activated only the individual data points are displayed If deactivated the individual data points are connected by a line Define the strength of the line using the INTEN SITY knob on the left side of the screen Remote command DISPlay STYLe on page 305 Inverse Brightn Inverts the brightness level of the signals Normally values that occur frequently are brighter than rare values This setting inverts this behavior Rare values are brighter than frequent values Use this setting in combination with persistence to detect rare values within the waveform Remote command DISPlay PALette on page 301 INVerse IFColor Temper Colors fus Temperature Colors Converts the brightness level of the displayed signals into a color range i e the color changes gradually in a wide color spectrum with increasing cumula tive occurance By default rare values are displayed in blue while more frequent values are red and very frequent values are displayed in yellow or white with various colors inbetween This results in a higher contrast which provides a better perception of details in the waveforms User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 55 R amp S RTM Display i A A INR General Display Settings Note The colors change if you invert the brightness
276. e Time Source RX CH1 1 4 Y Active High TX CH2 1 4 V Active High Bit rate 9 6kBit s Idle Time 104 16 us Start Bit Trigger On Pattern 11011110 11111010 0x7B Ox5F 11 5 3 2 UART Trigger Settings The complete UART trigger is configured in the Source and Setup menus Trigger Type Setup Source Protocol UART y y N O Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled UART TAGISF SOUTO sica 176 e O A rater enne ttr e nna EEN 176 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 175 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 UART Trigger Source Access TRIGGER SETUP gt Trigger Type Protocol UART gt Source Source RX TX Select one of the lines as trigger source Remote command TRIGger A SOURce UART on page 384 UART Trigger Setup Access TRIGGER SETUP gt Trigger Type Protocol UART gt Setup Stam Bit OPEN TOU T TTE A 176 Frame DAM iia id idas 177 else EE 177 Any Symbol cio lia 177 acil ETT I IT I O 177 o aieo etd tain anaes rud apa etna 177 L Number of iii ida 177 LA n E I 177 A E E E EE 177 o MA A AE EE 178 i2 s cT eR 178 acis m m 178 FAME ETUR E 178 BAR MT PEUT 178 Start Bit Triggers on a start bit The start bit is the first logical O after a stop bit Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 384 SBIT ERA A e A A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLL
277. e data block The next number indicates how many of the following digits describe the length of the data block In the example the 4 following digits indicate the length to be 5168 bytes The data bytes follow During the transmission of these data bytes all end or other control signs are ignored until all bytes are transmitted 0 specifies a data block of indefinite length The use of the indefinite format requires a NL END message to terminate the data block This format is useful when the length of the transmission is not known or if speed or other considerations prevent segmentation of the data into blocks of definite length Overview of Syntax Elements The following table provides an overview of the syntax elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command In a command line the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level The semicolon separates two commands of a command line It does not alter the path The comma separates several parameters of a command The question mark forms a query The asterisk marks a common command E Quotation marks introduce a string and terminate it The hash symbol introduces binary octal hexadecimal and block data e Binary B10110 e Octal 07612 e Hexa HF3A7 e Block 21312 A white space ASCII Code 0 to 9 11 to 32 decimal e g blank separates the header from the parameters Structure of a command line A command
278. e delta of the values in y direction at the two cursors Suffix lt m gt 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values lt DeltaY gt Delta value in V Usage Query only CURsor lt m gt XRATio UNIT lt Unit gt Sets the unit for X Ratio measurements with CURSor lt m gt XRATio VALue Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 318 R8S RTM Remote Control ne ss SS SS A AAA A A Command Reference Parameters lt Unit gt RATio PCT GRD PI RATio floating value PCT percent GRD degree PI radian RST RAT CURSor lt m gt XRATio VALue Returns the ratio of the x values e g a duty cycle between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors x2 x1 x3 x1 Set the unit of the result with CURsor m XRATio UNIT Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Return values Ratio Numeric value corresponding to the specified unit Usage Query only CURSor lt m gt YRATio UNIT Unit Sets the unit for Y Ratio measurements with CURSor m YRATio VALue on page 319 Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters Unit RATio PCT RATio floating value PCT percent RST RAT CURSor lt m gt YRATio VALue Returns the ratio of the y values e g overshooting between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors y2 y1 y3 y1 For this measurement set the cur
279. e displayed language use DISPlay LANGuage Setting parameters Language ENGLish GERMan FRENch SPANish RUSSian SCHinese TCHinese JAPanese KORean lt SourcePath gt String parameter containing source path and file Example DISP LANG ADD GERM USB FRONT RTM1054 HMG Usage Setting only DISPlay LANGuage REMove Language Removes the specified language from the instrument E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 423 R8S RTM Remote Control m m i Command Reference Setting parameters Language ENGLish GERMan FRENch SPANish RUSSian SCHinese TCHinese JAPanese KORean Example DISP LANG REM GERM Usage Setting only SYSTem NAME Defines an instrument name Parameters Name String with max 20 characters SYSTem DATE lt Year gt lt Month gt lt Day gt Specifies the internal date for the instrument Parameters Year Increment 1 Default unit a Month Range 1 to 12 Increment 1 Day Range 1 to 31 Increment 1 Default unit d Usage SCPI confirmed SYSTem TIME lt Hour gt lt Minute gt lt Second gt Specifies the internal time for the instrument Parameters Hour Range 0 to 23 Increment 1 Default unit h lt Minute gt Range O to 59 Increment 1 Default unit min lt Second gt Range O to 59 Increment 1 Default unit s Usage SCPI confirmed
280. e en ee em e ep mm ee I Protocol Bus Type Display i Position SC SES Fig 11 2 Decoded SPI signal C1 Clock CIk C2 Data C3 Chip Select Cs blue results completely decoded words grey brackets start and end of complete frame red results Incomplete word that is not completely contained in the acquisition Change the horizontal scale or move the Time Reference to get a longer acquisition Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame source line data and state of the frame User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 158 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 See also chapter 11 1 4 Frame Table Decode Results on page 148 TB 200ys T 516 us Auto SSPI MOSI Frame Start SEET Real Time Complete Bus Frame Table SSPI 2 Wire 8 Bit CIk CH3 MOSI CH1 MISO CH2 Frame Start time Source Length Data 1 678 ms M 4 16D8 1A3D SEE 4 4040 0DE40 al 3 516 525 ys MISO 6 735D C1FA 6123 OK 4 a 7 516 S itis MO 6 4000 69c0 69C0 Frames 1 5 6 Data 0x735D C1FA 6123 TERT PIE T Fig 11 3 Decoded SSPI signal with frame table Table 11 1 Content of the SPI SSPI frame table Column Description Start time Time of the frame start in relation to the trigger point Source MISO or MOSI line Length Number of words in the frame Data Hexadecimal values of the data
281. e first left most signal period Delay Measures the time difference on the middle reference level between two slopes of the same or different waveforms The measurement value is displayed as Delay in the result table Select the sources and slopes in the Delay Setup menu Set the middle reference level in the Reference Level menu Phase Phase difference between two waveforms time difference period 360 on the middle reference level The measurement value is displayed as Phase in the result table Select the waveforms in the Phase Setup menu Set the middle reference level in the Reference Level menu Burst Width Duration of one burst measured from the first edge to the last edge that cross the middle reference level The measurement value is displayed as Bst in the result table Set the middle reference level in the Reference Level menu Count positive pulses Count JL Counts positive pulses within the displayed section of the waveform A positive pulse consists of a rising edge followed by a falling edge The mean value of the signal is determined If the signal passes the mean value an edge is counted The pulse is counted if a rising edge and a falling edge are detected The number of positive pulses is displayed as Cnt JL in the result table EA A lt lt lt EE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 87 R amp S9RTM Measurements 6 3 1 2 Automatic Measurements Count negative pulses Count LI Counts negat
282. e main Mathematics menu 6 For each equation MA1 to MA4 define whether it is to be displayed or not a Press Equation to select the equation b Press Visible to switch the display of the math waveform on or off 7 Optionally press Eq Set Label to define a name for the equation set This label is displayed in the Equation Set Editor 7 1 3 Saving and Loading Equation Sets If you want to keep math configurations for specific measurement purposes for later use you can save equations sets in the instrument or on external storage device To copy a stored equation sets to another storage device use FILE gt Equation Sets For import export procedure see chapter 12 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 207 To save the current equation set 1 Press MATH to display the Mathematics menu 2 Press Save 3 Define the storage location using the Storage softkey and the file name using the File name softkey E E AAA AA e 1 LLL LLLL LLG ULLLULOLS g User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 96 R8S RTM Mathematics BREET Reference for Mathematics See chapter 12 2 1 1 Configuring Storage Locations on page 207 4 Optionally define a comment to be added to the equation set using the Comment softkey 5 Press Save The equation set is saved as configured To load an equation set 1 Press MATH gt Load A file explorer is displayed 2 f necessary switch to the
283. e the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instru ment might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received The result could also be 1 GHz if the instrument executes commands as they are received o As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages LSS SSRIS z User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 249 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control Basics Example Overlapping command with OPC The instrument implements SINGle as an overlapped asynchronous command Assuming that SING1e takes longer to execute than OPC sending the following com mand sequence results in initiating a sweep and after some time setting the OPC bit in the ESR SINGle OPC Sending the following commands still initiates a sweep SINGle OPC CLS However since the operation is still pending when the instrument executes CLS forcing it into the Operation Complete Command Idle State OCIS OPC is effectively skipped The OPC bit is not set until the instrument executes another OPC command 14 1 5 1 Preventing Overlapping Execution To prevent an overlapping execution of commands one of the commands OPC OPC or WAI can be used All three commands cause a certain action only to be carried out after the hardware has been set By suitable programming the controller can be forced to wait for the corresponding action to occur Table 14 2 Synchronization using OPC OPC and
284. e the vertical scaling of the math waveform to improve the display using the vertical SCALE rotary knob LEE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 94 R amp S9RTM Mathematics Configuring and Using Math Waveforms If the required equation is not included edit the current equation set or load an appro priate equation set that was saved before See also To configure an equation on page 95 and To load an equation set on page 97 Editing Equations and Equation Sets To each math waveform an equation is assigned The mathematical operation is defined by the operator and is performed on the operands Operands are one or two of the active channel or math waveforms or a constant value All five math waveforms together build an equation set that can be stored and loaded Equation Set Editor Equation Set 1 B CH1 CH2LV O O MA2 SHZEY MA3 CH2 V MA4 CH2 V MAS CH1 CH2 V To configure an equation 1 Press MATH gt Edit Equations to display the Equation Set Editor with the current equation set configuration Press Equation and select the equation to be configured Press Operator to select the operator of the equation See also Operator on page 99 Press Operand1 See also Operand 1 on page 103 If the equation requires a second operand press Operand2 and define the second operand If one of the operands is defined as a constant define its value a Press Ope
285. e waveform Doing so the scale value V div decrea ses Press the knob to toggle between fine and rough adjustment To set the vertical sclae for a channel waveform numerically press the Y Scale softkey in the channel menu and then use the NAVIGATION knob Remote command CHANnel lt m gt SCALe on page 279 CALCulate MATH lt m gt SCALe on page 330 BUS DSIZe on page 360 2 3 3 2 Channel Menu The softkeys of the Channel lt n gt menu are placed on two menu pages Each channel has its own menu Coupling Termination Bandwidth Offset Invert Y Scale nnan More 112 gt CO O Deskew Label Probe Threshold More 212 gt 4 4 4 The channel label shows the basic vertical settings vertical scale in the figure below channel 1 5 mV div coupling DC termination 50 and bandwidth limited The label of the active channel is highlighted with the channel color channel 1 TB 100us T 2us Norm CH1 6 51mV DC e CH2 10mY S Bu CH3 5MY X o CH4 5MY 20 COUP EE 29 TEMNA APPO o A 30 BandWidth EE 20 OSO e 20 a EE 20 e 31 A ee 31 BI C MERERETUR 31 Ms Um 31 ADSI v 31 Coupling Selects the connection of the input signal The current coupling of each channel is shown in the waveform labels above the grid EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 29 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup Reference for Waveform Setup AC A 2 Hz high pass filter is placed into the signal path that removes t
286. eak 7 If Any Symbol is selected press the softkey again and define the symbol pattern either as binary input or as hexadecimal input e For hex entry select Value and turn the navigation knob to change the bits User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 174 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 e For binary input press Select Bit and enter the data bit number to be set Enter the State of this bit 0 1 or X don t care Repeat these settings until all bit states are defined 8 If Pattern is selected press the softkey again and define the pattern a Set the Symbol Offset the number of symbols to be ignored before the pattern starts b Set the Number of Symbols contained in the pattern c Enter the pattern either as binary input or as hexadecimal input e Forhexadecimal input press Select Symbol repeatedly to select the symbol to be set The selected symbol is highlighted in the hex pattern line Then press Value and turn the navigation knob to change the bits Repeat these settings until all symbols are defined e For binary input press Select Symbol until the required symbol is marked in the pattern hex line Then press Select Bit and enter the data bit number to be set Enter the State of this bit 0 1 or X don t care Repeat these settings until all bit states of all symbols are defined Offset 1st Symbol Symbol 2 7Symb Trigger Trigger VE Idl
287. earch Results Search results events are marked on the waveform and listed in the event table as usual Instead of the event table you can display the frame table where the search results are also marked The event flags are not saved in the csv file of the frame table User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 191 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 TB 1ms T 300 us Auto CAN Identifier 1MSais Real Time Complete Son Sons AAN AN NE 95 ys Err Frame OK 164 800 ns Data 314 Door_Right 3 2326 41 DEST Form T ns Err Frame OK Frames 26 30 54 Label Door Right Fig 11 13 Search for data frames with 11 bit identifier search results are marked in frame table and on the decoded data 11 7 LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 11 7 1 The LIN Protocol This chapter provides an overview of protocol characteristics frame format identifiers and trigger possibilities For detailed information order the LIN specification on http bbus org free of charge www lin su LIN characteristics Main characteristics of LIN are e Single wire serial communications protocol based on the UART byte word interface e Single master multiple slaves usually up to 12 nodes User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 192 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 7 2 LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 e Master controlled communication master coordinates communication with the LIN schedule and send
288. easurement places T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 325 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m A J m re Command Reference Parameters RelativeMode TEN TWENty FIVE USER TEN 10 50 and 9096 TWENty 20 50 and 80 FIVE 5 50 and 95 96 USER levels are defined with REFLevel RELative LOWer REFLevel RELative MIDDle and REFLevel RELative UPPer RST TEN Example REFL REL MODE TWENty MEAS2 MAIN RTIM Sets the reference levels for all measurement places and meas ures the rise time between these levels for measurement place 2 lower reference level 20 of high signal level upper reference level 80 of high signal level REFLevel RELative LOWer lt LowerLevel gt REFLevel RELative UPPer lt UpperLevel gt Set the lower and upper reference levels for rise and fall time mesurements cursor and automatic mesurements if REFLevel RELative MODE is set to USER The levels are defined as percentages of the high signal level They are valid for all measurement pla ces Parameters LowerLevel RST 10 Default unit 96 lt UpperLevel gt RST 90 Default unit 96 Firmware Software 03 400 REFLevel RELative MIDDle lt MiddleLevel gt Set the middle reference level used for phase and delay measurements if REFLevel RELative MODE is set to USER The level is defined as percen
289. eber comprobar siempre que la tensi n preseleccionada en el producto coincida con la de la red de alimentaci n el ctrica Si es necesario modificar el ajuste de tensi n tambi n se deber n cambiar en caso dado los fusibles correspondientes del producto Los productos de la clase de protecci n con alimentaci n m vil y enchufe individual solamente podr n enchufarse a tomas de corriente con contacto de seguridad y con conductor de protecci n conectado Queda prohibida la interrupci n intencionada del conductor de protecci n tanto en la toma de corriente como en el mismo producto La interrupci n puede tener como consecuencia el riesgo de que el producto sea fuente de choques el ctricos Si se utilizan cables alargadores o regletas de enchufe deber garantizarse la realizaci n de un examen regular de los mismos en cuanto a su estado t cnico de seguridad Si el producto no est equipado con un interruptor para desconectarlo de la red o bien si el interruptor existente no resulta apropiado para la desconexi n de la red el enchufe del cable de conexi n se deber considerar como un dispositivo de desconexi n El dispositivo de desconexi n se debe poder alcanzar f cilmente y debe estar siempre bien accesible Si p ej el enchufe de conexi n a la red es el dispositivo de desconexi n la longitud del cable de conexi n no debe superar 3 m Los interruptores selectores o electr nicos no son aptos para el corte de la red el
290. ecimal integer default or hexadecimal integer with prefix Ox Start of PTT file GFILE VERSION 1 0 PROTOCOL NAME i2c Following two lines are equal 7 0x01 Temperature 7 0x01 Temperature A comma must be enclosed in double quotes 7 0x01 Temperature Pressure and Volume A double quote must also be enclosed in double quotes 7 0x7F Highspeed Master 01 Following lines yield the same result 7 0x11 Pressure Ox7 0x11 Pressure Ox7 17 Pressure 1 17 Pressure Label lists are protocol specific Their contents are described in the corresponding pro tocol chapters e chapter 11 4 4 I C Label List on page 167 e chapter 11 6 3 CAN Label List on page 186 e chapter 11 7 4 LIN Label List on page 198 11 1 3 2 Label List Menu Access PROTOCOL gt Bus Type I2C CAN LIN gt Label List e gt 551 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 147 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis Basics of Protocol Analysis Label list Apply Shows the labels from the label list in the display of decode results instead of the ID or address Load Opens a menu to select and load a PTT file from an USB flash drive The PTT file contains one or more label lists The function is only available if an USB flash drive is connected to the instrument Alternatively you can load a label list together with the device settings if both were saved with FILE gt Device Settings gt Save gt Setup amp Label
291. ect the waveform for analysis All active channel math and reference waveforms are available for selection 3 Press Search type and select the event you want to search for edge width peaks runts specified rise fall time setup hold time pattern or protocol specific events 4 Press Setup and configure the selected search type Details chapter 10 3 2 Edge Setup on page 133 chapter 10 3 3 Width Setup on page 134 chapter 10 3 4 Peak Setup on page 135 chapter 10 3 5 Rise Fall Time Setup on page 135 chapter 10 3 6 Runt Setup on page 137 chapter 10 3 7 Data2Clock Search on page 138 chapter 10 3 8 Pattern Search on page 140 chapter 11 6 5 1 CAN Search Setup on page 189 requires option R amp S RTM K3 e chapter 11 7 6 1 LIN Search Setup on page 201 requires option R amp S RTM K3 5 Torestrict the time base range of the source waveform to be searched press Gate and define the search area 6 Start continuous acquisition with RUN CONT The online search is performed on the displayed data Search results are updated permanently and indicated at the top of the diagram Stop the acquisition to search the memory data of the latest acquisition To analyze search results 1 Stopthe running continuous acquisition or acquire one waveform with RUN Nx SIN GLE 2 Press Events 3 Press View event table in the Events menu The first five search results are listed in a table
292. ection is used if several instruments are connected in parallel GPIB Instrument Address In order to operate the instrument via remote control it must be addressed using the GPIB address The remote control address is factory set to 20 but it can be changed in the network environment settings or in the Setup menu under Interface Parameter For remote control addresses 0 through 30 are allowed The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings 14 1 2 Setting Up a LAN Connection 14 1 2 1 Connecting the Instrument to the Network The network card can be operated with a 10 Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3 or a 100 Mbps Ethernet IEEE 802 3u interface Risk of network failure Before connecting the instrument to the network or configuring the network consult your network administrator Errors may affect the entire network gt To establish a network connection connect a commercial RJ 45 cable to one of the LAN ports of the instrument and to a PC 14 1 2 2 Configuring LAN Parameters Depending on the network capacities the TCP IP address information for the instrument can be obtained in different ways e fthe network supports dynamic TCP IP configuration using the Dynamic Host Con figuration Protocol DHCP and a DHCP server is available all address information can be assigned automatically e Otherwise the address must be set manually Automatic Private IP Addressing APIPA is not supported See Conf
293. ed CURSor lt m gt TRACking STATe State If set to ON the V Marker cursor measurement is enabled Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF CURSor lt m gt X1Position lt Xposition1 gt CURSor lt m gt X2Position lt Xposition2 gt CURSor lt m gt X3Position lt Xposition3 gt The commands specify the x positions of vertical cursor lines on the time axis The third cursor is only used for Ratio X measurement Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters Position Range Depends on horizontal settings CURSor lt m gt Y1Position lt Yposition1 gt CURSor lt m gt Y 2Position lt Yposition2 gt CURSor lt m gt Y3Position lt Yposition3 gt The commands specify the positions of horizontal cursor lines on the y axis The third cursor is only used for Ratio Y measurements AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 315 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm R wr Gert Command Reference Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters Position Range Depends on various other settings CURSor lt m gt YCOupling Coupling CURSor lt m gt XCOupling Coupling If enabled the cursors of a set are coupled so that the distance between the two remains the same if one cursor is moved Suffix m 1 The numeric
294. ed on a USB stick connected to the front or rear panel not to an internal directory In this case the softkey is only available if a USB Stick is connected to the rear or front panel Internal Directly in the internal memory of the instrument Front On a USB stick connected to the front panel Rear On a USB stick connected to the rear panel Remote command MMEMory MSIS on page 417 Change Directory Switches to the selected directory See also To select the storage directory on page 207 Remote command MMEMory CDIRectory on page 417 Create Directory Creates a new subdirectory of the currently selected storage directory See also To define a new file or directory name on page 207 Remote command MMEMory MDIRectory on page 417 Remove Directory Removes the currently selected directory Remote command MMEMory RDIRectory on page 418 Import Export Menu The Import Export menu provides functions to copy data between the instrument and a USB flash device See also chapter 12 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 207 EA A e 2 q 40 02 AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 211 R amp S RTM Data and File Management Saving and Loading Import Export Source ros M 212 RE 212 OE O oi aa 212 Source Opens the Load menu and a file explorer to select the source file of the import export operation See Load Menu on page 210 Destination
295. een is refreshed continuously Parameters State ON OFF ON The waveform persists for the time defined using DISPlay PERSistence TIME OFF The waveform does not persist on the screen Only the currently measured values are displayed at any time RST OFF E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 304 R8S RTM Remote Control PEMGBEGMCOMOAEEE A AA AAA A A A Command Reference DISPlay PERSistence TIME lt Time gt Persistence time if persistence is active see DISPlay PERSistence STATe on page 304 Each new data point in the diagram area remains on the screen for the duration defined here To set infinite persistence use DISPlay PERSistence INFinite Parameters Time Range 50E 3 to Infinite Increment minimum 50E 3 s increasing increment with increas ing persistence time RST 50E 3 Default unit s DISPlay PERSistence INFinite lt InfPersistence gt Sets the persistence time to infinite if DISPlay PERSistence STATe is ON each new data point remains on the screen infinitely until this setting is changed or the persistence is cleared Parameters lt InfPersistence gt ON OFF RST OFF DISPlay PERSistence TIME AUTO lt Auto gt The optimal persistence time is determined automatically by the instrument Parameters lt Auto gt ON OFF RST OFF DISPlay PERSistence CLEar Remove
296. eference BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt ADBStart Returns the start time of the address acknowledge bit Suffix lt n gt Return values lt AckStartTime gt Usage 1 n Selects the frame Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt Returns the number of data bytes in the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Return values lt ByteCount im Frame gt Example Usage 1 n Selects the frame Number of words bytes BUS I2C FRAM2 BCO gt 4 Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue Returns the decimal value of the specified byte Suffix lt n gt lt o gt Return values lt ByteValue gt Example Usage 1 n Selects the frame Selects the byte number Decimal value Range O to 255 Increment 1 BUS 12C FRAM2 BYTE2 VAL 158 Query only User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 379 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mAAMCI RA AAA ng es Command Reference BUS I2C FRAMe n BYTE o STARt Returns the start time of the specified data byte Suffix n 1 n Selects the frame o Selects the byte number Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt
297. el Sets the threshold value for the selected source channel If the signal value is higher than the trigger level the signal state is high 1 or true for the boolean logic Otherwise the signal state is considered low 0 or false if the signal value is below the trigger level Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern LEVel lt n gt on page 356 Hysteresis Sets a hysteresis range to the level of the selected source channel in order to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern LEVel lt n gt DELTa on page 356 RETE RU RA E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 140 R amp SS9RTM Search mm s MM TP Reference for Search Menu 10 3 8 2 Pattern Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Pattern gt Setup For pattern search up to four channels can be used as source For each channel you define the state The states are combined logically and the time of true pattern results is compared with a specified time range Thus you can find state transitions inside or outside this time range Search setup Pattern CH1 Source Selects the channel for which the pattern search is defined Re
298. el color if the channel is active The effect of the keypress depends on state of the channel e Ifchannel is off Pressing the key turns the channel on and selects it The rotary knobs alongside light up in the channel color User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 27 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup REESEN Reference for Waveform Setup e Ifthe channel is on Pressing the key selects the channel waveform for vertical setup Remote command CHANnel lt m gt STATe on page 278 SIGNAL OFF Turns the selected signal off and selects the next channel math or reference waveform The key lights up in the color of the selected signal and changes the light according to the new selection Remote command CHANnel lt m gt STATe on page 278 POSITION OFFSET The rotary knob adjusts the vertical position or the DC offset It lights up in the color of the selected waveform Pressing the key toggles the parameter the current parameter and its value are shown in a temporary label marked with the channel color Note By default offset is disabled Press the Offset softkey in the Channel menu to enable the offset POSITION POSITION OFFSET Position changes the vertical location of the selected channel math or reference wave form or of the decoded bus signal Turn clockwise to move the waveform up At zero crossing the knob shortly snaps in and the setting is kept constant to simplify the zero setting Remote command
299. elected Set Device Effect 0 1 Clear Clear STB ESR yes yes Clear SRE ESE yes Clear EVENt parts of the regis yes yes ters Clear ENABle parts of all yes yes OPERation and QUEStionable registers Fill ENABle parts of all other reg isters with 1 Fill PTRansition parts with 1 yes yes Clear NTRansition parts Clear error queue yes yes yes Clear output buffer yes yes yes 1 1 1 Clear command processing and yes yes yes input buffer 1 The first command in a command line that immediately follows a PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR clears the output buffer General Programming Recommendations Initial instrument status before changing settings Manual operation is designed for maximum possible operating convenience In contrast the priority of remote control is the predictability of the instrument status Thus when a command attempts to define incompatible settings the command is ignored and the instrument status remains unchanged i e other settings are not automatically adapted E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 262 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 14 2 1 Command Reference Therefore control programs should always define an initial instrument status e g using the RST command and then implement the required settings Command sequence As a general rule send commands and queries in different program messages Other wise the result of the query
300. elected symbol for binary pattern input State Pattern Toggles the logic state of the selected bit O low 1 high or X don t care EA A e 1 11LL 1 LLLL L L LLLULLHILLM User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 177 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Select Symbol Pattern Selects the symbol for binary or hex input Value Pattern Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected symbol by turning the navigation knob Parity Error Triggers on a parity error indicating a transmission error Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 384 PERRor Frame Error Triggers on a frame error Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 384 FERRor Break Triggers if a start bit is not followed by a stop bit the data line remains at logic 0 for longer than a UART word Remote command TRIGger A UART MODE on page 384 BREak 11 5 4 UART RS 232 Decode Results You can enable the decoding results in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Reference for Protocol Decoding on page 145 Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame data and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 4 Frame Table Decode Result
301. els can cause health problems and lead to environmental damage For additional information about environmental protection visit the Rohde amp Schwarz website Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Es imprescindible leer y cumplir las siguientes instrucciones e informaciones de seguridad El principio del grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz consiste en tener nuestros productos siempre al d a con los est ndares de seguridad y de ofrecer a nuestros clientes el m ximo grado de seguridad Nuestros productos y todos los equipos adicionales son siempre fabricados y examinados seg n las normas de seguridad vigentes Nuestro sistema de garant a de calidad controla constantemente que sean cumplidas estas normas El presente producto ha sido fabricado y examinado seg n el certificado de conformidad de la UE y ha salido de nuestra planta en estado impecable seg n los est ndares t cnicos de seguridad Para poder preservar este estado y garantizar un funcionamiento libre de peligros el usuario deber atenerse a todas las indicaciones informaciones de seguridad y notas de alerta El grupo de empresas Rohde amp Schwarz est siempre a su disposici n en caso de que tengan preguntas referentes a estas informaciones de seguridad Adem s queda en la responsabilidad del usuario utilizar el producto en la forma debida Este producto est destinado exclusivamente al uso en la industria y el laboratorio o si ha sido expresamente autorizado para a
302. els that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manually in the channel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Remote command CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel on page 364 11 5 3 UART RS 232 Trigger e Triggering on UART RS 232 Interfaces eene 174 e UART Trigger Setlifigs iieccccerceener ener rennen enr enhn nune 175 11 5 3 1 Triggering on UART RS 232 Interfaces Prerequisites The UART interface is configured After configuration the trigger type Protocol UART is available See chapter 11 5 2 1 Configuring UART RS 232 Inter faces on page 171 E Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled 1 Press the SETUP key in the trigger area of the front panel Select the Trigger Type Protocol UART Press Source and select RX or TX as trigger source Press Back Press Setup oa F o bh Press the softkey of the required trigger condition Start Bit or Frame Start next start bit or first start bit after idle time Symbol lt n gt frame number in a data stream Any Symbol pattern of the data bits anywhere in the data stream Pattern serial pattern of one two or three symbols at a defined position in the data stream Parity Error e Frame Error e Br
303. ent General Remote Settings and Queries This chapter describes commands that have effect on many other commands in different applications of the instrument o E 268 FORMI BORDET P HE 269 CHANnel lt me DDATA ORI ocio ENEE 269 CH ANnekcmz DATAENVelope XOhRlgoin nennen ernst 269 CALCUlate MATH lt m gt DATA ORIGIN E 269 le ERR EE 269 CHANnel nP DATA XINGrement renes ne edu eani datan dotada ida Bde de co ena 270 CH ANnekcmz DATAENVelope XlNCrement nennen ene 270 CALC late MATHS MA DATA Me ET 270 REFCurve m sDATA XINDrembenltg9 unica Acta 270 GHAND DATA YORON KE 270 CHANE m gt DATA Eeler CHIESA AAA 270 CALCu late MAT Hsm DATAY ORIJIN cin dai 270 REFOUNE Mme DATAY ORI EE 270 CH ANnekcmz DATA vlNCrement sssssssssssisesseseeeese nennen nn entr sese anna 270 CH ANnekcmz DATAENVelope vlNCrement enne enn 270 CALC late MAT H lt gt DATA lNCrement sehen eene strane nnne 270 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 267 R8S RTM Remote Control Command Reference HREFCupve ms DATAvlNCrement 270 GHANnelsmspATA YRESolullOn 1e aa a Sie rident bos NS 271 CHANnel m DATA ENVelope YRESOlution cesses esee 271 GALGulate MATH m DATA YRESOlutlo n 2 tatto tere chai eund oa ae nanc aii 271 REFCuirvesm DATA Y RESOIUNON anaconda 271 FORMat DATA lt DataFormat gt lt Accuracy gt Defines the format for data export with e CHANnel m DATA on page 283 HANne1 lt m
304. ent m STATistics ENABle on page 327 No of Averages Statistic Sets the number of measured waveforms used for calculation of average and standard deviation The maximum number is 1000 Remote command MEASurement m STATistics WEIGht on page 327 Reset Reset All Statistic Deletes the statistical results for the current measurement or all measurements respec tivley and starts a new statistical evaluation if the acquisition is running Remote command MEASurement m STATistics RESet on page 327 LEE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 92 R amp SS9RTM Measurements m X A A Automatic Measurements Clear All Statistic Resets and deactivates all active statistic measurements Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels Set the lower and upper reference levels for rise and fall time mesurements cursor and automatic mesurements as well as the middle reference level used for phase and delay measurements The levels are defined as percentages of the high signal level The set tings are valid for all measurement places Remote command REFLevel RELative MODE on page 325 RI RELative LOWer on page 326 REFLevel RELative MIDDle on page 326 RI RELative UPPer on page 326 EFLevel EFLevel Clear All Resets and deactivates all four measurements Remote command MEASurement lt m gt AOFF on page 320
305. eported in the summary bit If a bit is set to 1 in the enable part and its associated event bit transitions to true a positive transition occurs in the summary bit and is reported to the next higher level Parameters Enable Bit mask in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Example STATus QUEStionable MASK ENABle 24 Set bits no 3 and 4 of the STATus QUEStionable MASK ENABle register part 24 8 16 2 24 STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable COVerload EVENt STATus QUEStionable LIMit EVENt STATus QUEStionable MASK EVENt Returns the contents of the EVENt part of the status register to check whether an event has occurred since the last reading Reading an EVENt register deletes its contents Return values Event Event bits in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Usage Query only STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt STATus QUEStionable COVerload NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt STATus QUEStionable LIMit NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt STATus QUEStionable MASK NTRansition lt NegativeTransition gt Sets the negative transition filter If a bit is set a 1 to O transition in the corresponding bit of the condition register causes a 1 to be written in the corresponding bit of the event register Parameters lt NegativeTransition gt Bit mask in decimal representation Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Example STA
306. equipment Standby indication Danger of electric shock Direct current DC gt 1171 0000 42 07 Page 1 Basic Safety Instructions Symbol Meaning Symbol Meaning Warning Hot surface Alternating current AC Protective conductor terminal Direct alternating current DC AC Ground Device fully protected by double reinforced insulation Ground terminal EU labeling for batteries and accumulators For additional information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 1 Be careful when handling electrostatic sensitive devices li Gl a EU labeling for separate collection of electrical and electronic devices For additonal information see section Waste disposal Environmental protection item 2 Warning Laser radiation For additional information see section Operation item 7 Signal words and their meaning The following signal words are used in the product documentation in order to warn the reader about risks and dangers serious injury serious injury moderate injury Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or Indicates a hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in minor or Indicates information considered important but not hazard related e g messages relating to
307. er Manual 1305 0595 02 08 290 R8S RTM Remote Control EENEG Command Reference Return values lt PartNumber gt string Returns the part number in a string Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt ID PRDate Queries the production date of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt ProductionDate gt string Returns the date in a string Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt ID SRNumber Queries the serial number of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt SerialNumber gt string Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt ID SWVersion Queries the version of the probe firmware Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt SoftwareVersion gt string Returns the version number in a string Usage Query only 14 2 5 Trigger e General A Trigger Setfirigs 2 eee erre a 292 e Edge NRI ML 294 elt Nato e E 295 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 291 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 5 1 Command Reference EE RR re e LE 296 e Patom Pggel TT 298 LU Elo aa 299 General A Trigger Settings TRIGA MODE EE 292 TRIGE Ad EVelens V Abg etia eot paier abi nidad 292 Bien e
308. er en cuenta las directivas nacionales referentes a la eliminaci n de residuos En caso de que durante el trato del producto se formen sustancias peligrosas o combustibles que deban tratarse como residuos especiales p ej refrigerantes o aceites de motor con intervalos de cambio definidos deben tenerse en cuenta las indicaciones de seguridad del fabricante de dichas sustancias y las normas regionales de eliminaci n de residuos Tenga en cuenta tambi n en caso necesario las indicaciones de seguridad especiales contenidas en la documentaci n del producto La eliminaci n incorrecta de sustancias peligrosas o combustibles puede causar da os a la salud o da os al medio ambiente Se puede encontrar m s informaci n sobre la protecci n del medio ambiente en la p gina web de Rohde amp Schwarz 1171 0000 42 07 Page 14 Customer Support Technical support where and when you need it For quick expert help with any Rohde amp Schwarz equipment contact one of our Customer Support Centers A team of highly qualified engineers provides telephone support and will work with you to find a solution to your query on any aspect of the operation programming or applications of Rohde amp Schwarz equipment Up to date information and upgrades To keep your instrument up to date and to be informed about new application notes related to your instrument please send an e mail to the Customer Support Center stating your instrument and your wish
309. erages Smooth Smoothing calculates a mean value of several adjacent sample points and displays it The result is a smoothed waveform Thus smoothing is a moving average that uses the full data and can be used for non periodic signals It works like a low pass and increases the vertical resolution at the expense of bandwidth reduction Filter Filter is a low pass with 3 db attenuation at a configurable limit fre quency set with Limit Freq The filter removes higher frequencies from the channel signals Remote command CHANnel lt m gt ARIThmetics on page 277 Nx Single Sets the number of waveforms acquired with RUN Nx SINGLE Remote command ACQuire NSINgle COUNt on page 272 No of Averages Defines the number of waveforms used to calculate the average waveform with Wfm Arithmetics Average Only numbers from the 2 progression are available The higher the number the better the noise is reduced Remote command ACQuire AVERage COUNt on page 275 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 25 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup a A Reference for Waveform Setup Limit Freq Sets the limit frequency for Wfm Arithmetics Filter The low pass filter has 3 dB attenuation at the given limit frequency Remote command ACQuire FILTer FREQuency on page 277 Waveform Rate Defines the mode to set the sample rate samples per second saved in the memory and the waveform acquisition rate waveforms per sec
310. erences and masks you can also change the target file format and convert the data during export import 1 2 In the FILE menu press the Import Export softkey for the required data type Define the source file for the copy operation a Press Source A file explorer is displayed b If necessary switch to the storage location that contains the source file by press ing Storage Internal Front Rear c Selectthe source file Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir d Press Load The source file is selected but not yet loaded to the R amp S RTM Define the destination directory for the copy operation The source file will be copied here a Press Destination A file explorer is displayed b If necessary switch to the storage location that contains the storage directory by pressing Storage Internal Front Rear c Select the storage directory Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir Press Create dir to create a new subdirectory under the selected directory Enter a name for the subdirectory as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 207 d Press Accept to confirm the selection Change the File Name of the destination file if necess
311. ery only BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt WCOunt Returns the number of words in the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame Return values lt WordCount gt Number of words Usage Query only E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 367 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm CR X O OR p Command Reference BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified data word Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame o Selects the word number Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified data word Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame o Selects the word number Return values lt StopTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS SPI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt MOSI Returns the data value of the specified word on the MOSI line Use this command if only one line is defined Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n o Selects the word number 1 m Return values Data Decimal value of the data word Usage Query only ee User M
312. es at least one complete period of a triggered signal The result is the measured value as a percentage of the signal period and is displayed as Dty in the result table Rise Time Measures the rise time of the left most rising edge within the displayed section of the waveform The rise time is determined as the time it takes the signal to rise from the lower reference level to the upper reference level which are set with Upper Level and Lower Level in the Reference Level menu The measurement result is displayed as tr in the result table See also Reference Level Upper Middle Lower Levels on page 93 ERA e 1 eL A LLLLLLLLLT ALALLLLLXL S User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 86 R8S RTM Measurements AAA SS A A Automatic Measurements Fall Time Measures the falling time of the left most falling edge within the displayed section of the waveform The fall time is determined as the time it takes the signal to fall from the upper reference level to the lower reference level which are set with Upper Level and Lower Level in the Reference Level menu The measurement result is displayed as tf in the result table o Std Dev Wave Measures the standard deviation of the complete waveform 1 Nevar Ox hz 3 x i X mean Neval f i 1 Xmean Mean Value X i Value of the measured waveform sample Neva Number of waveform samples o Std Dev Cycle Measures the standard deviation of one cycle usually of th
313. es detect only differential input voltages and provide it to the oscillo scope Common mode signals are suppressed by the probe This characteristic is descri bed by the Common Mode Rejection Ratio CMRR DifferentialGain CommonMode Gain CMRR In addition the R amp S ProbeMeter of R amp S RT ZD differential probes can measure differ ential and common mode DC voltages The measurement result is displayed on the oscilloscope s screen The common mode mesurement of the R amp S ProbeMeter allows to check the input voltage relative to ground and is a convenient way to detect breaches of the operating voltage window and the reason of unwanted clippings E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 19 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup Setting up the Waveform 2 2 Setting up the Waveform This chapter contains the fundamental procedures for setting up the acquisition and adjusting the channel waveforms Passive probes Passive probes require compensation for exact signal display and measurement The compensation procedure is described in the Getting Started manual 2 2 1 Setting Up the Signal Input with Autoset Autoset is the solution for the major part of routine test setup It is also a good start if you need to use more complex trigger settings Autoset finds appropriate horizontal and ver tical scales and trigger conditions to present a stable waveform 1 Connect the probe to the input connector CH N The instrumen
314. esser E ode cma eder rasa CU Sat iud 56 BE cu 5 c D C NOTER 56 E EI A LETA it 56 Ga E EE 56 Badia dias 57 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 53 R amp S RTM Display AAA i mM NN General Display Settings Display Mode Toggles the diagram mode Y t Default time diagram with a time axis in x direction and the signal ampli tudes displayed in y direction XY diagram XY diagrams combine the voltage levels of two waveforms in one dia gram They use the voltage level of a second waveform as the x axis rather then a time base This allows you to perform phase shift meas urements for example You can also define the intensity of the XY dia gram according to a further signal source Z Together with the XY diagram the Y t diagrams of the source signals are displayed in separate windows With R amp S RTM1054 it is also possible to define two source signals in y direction for comparison Remote command DISPlay MODE on page 301 XYZ Setup See chapter 4 2 2 XYZ Setup Menu on page 60 Intensities Provides functions to define the intensity of various display elements play Waveform Backlight Grid Persistence Persist Time Clear Persist NA 4 Waveform Intensities This value determines the strength of the waveform line in the diagram Enter a percent age between 0 barely visible and 100 very strong The default value is 50 You can also use the INTENSITY knob on the left side of the screen to adjus
315. esults on page 148 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 168 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis IC Option R amp S RTM K1 TB 50ys T 93 5 us Auto CH1 1 59V DC 20MSais Real Time Complete DEE CEA a A AAN Y T IN md A II II II E e LIII uw n LEM M NE 8 e P j ga TTT A TTT irit nm F Om mme H ron ot p Wei gel dd B id dn db 8 db AU S il dad pr d pe o art t Ty ID 1 Length Data 235 305 ys Writ 3A2 DeviceSetup 4 A4A2 55F1 Display Fig 11 8 Decoded and binary I2C signal and frame table with decode results gray brackets start and end of the frame violet address blue correct data words green acknowledge bit ok red missing acknowledge bit or other error Table 11 2 Content of the PC frame table Column Description Start time Time of the frame start in relation to the trigger point Type Value of the R W bit read or write access ID Hexadecimal value of the address Label Symbolic label available if a label list was loaded and applied Length Number of words in the frame Data Hexadecimal values of the data words State Overall state of the frame User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 169 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 5 11 5 1 UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 SCPI commands e BUS I2C FCOunt on page 375 12C FRAMe lt n gt DATA on page 375 I2C FRAMe lt n gt STATus on page 376 I2C FRAMe lt n gt STARt on page
316. et can be saved to and loaded from any storage device internal memory or external USB flash device The file format is always FML and the file size is 526 Byte It is also possible to copy the stored equation sets to another storage device with FILE gt Import Export Equation Sets See also chapter 12 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 207 7 1 Configuring and Using Math Waveforms Math waveforms are configured using the Equation Set Editor Each equation for a math waveform is configured and displayed individually and you can save and load the con figuration of all five math waveforms as an Equation Set 7 1 1 Displaying Mathematical Waveforms For each of the math waveforms MA1 MA4 you can define whether it is displayed or not and which equation is performed in each one MAS is always invisible 1 Press MATH to display the Mathematics menu 2 Press Equation and select the mathematical waveform that contains the equation you want to display To check which equation is configured for which channel a Press Edit Equations The Equation Set Editor is displayed where you can see the configuration for each math waveform Currently displayed waveforms are indicated by the zx symbol b Press Back to exit the editor 3 Press Visible until On is highlighted The selected equation is calculated and the results are displayed as an additional mathematical waveform on the screen If necessary chang
317. et to Within or Outside The instrument finds rise fall times inside or outside the range time x At Parameters lt DeltaTime gt Range Depends on various settings mainly time base and sample rate RST 50e 6 Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 700 Runt Search Configuration SEARC TRIGO RUNT POLS cca iiec o erento Phe ede di 352 SEARCH TRiGgenMEVelRUNTILOWeR 1 oc ccccccccseecnceecu neste snes ceacie danas deaeeeneeanaeectpinteessensey 352 SEARch TRIGger LEVeRRUNT UPPE cool ai 352 SEARG E Ee eg DE Le 352 SEARCH TRIGO RUNT MMO FIN RC 353 SEARcIETRIGger BUNTDEL Ya Ele paaa Ehe Sa ela 353 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 351 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm P n t Command Reference SEARch TRIGger RUNT POLarity lt Polarity gt Indicates the polarity of a the runt to be searched for Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger LEVel RUNT LOWer lt LowerLevel gt Sets the lower voltage threshold for runt detection A positive runt crosses the lower level twice without crossing the upper level Parameters lt LowerLevel gt RST 400 mV Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch
318. eters Coupling DC DCLimit AC ACLimit DC Direct connection with 50 O termination DCLimit Direct connection with 1 MQ termination AC Connection through DC capacitor that removes the DC offset volt age from the input signal ACLimit Connection through DC capacitor with 1 MO termination The capacitor removes the DC offset voltage from the input signal RST DCLimit CHANnel lt m gt SCALe Scale Sets the vertical scale for the indicated channel Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters Scale Scale value given in Volts per division Range 1e 3 to 10 without probe attenuation RST 5e 3 Default unit V div CHANnel lt m gt RANGe Range Sets the voltage range across the 10 vertical divisions of the diagram Use the command alternativly instead of CHANne1 lt m gt SCALe Suffix m Selects the input channel The maximum channel number is instrument dependent EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 279 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm R O n u Mvp Command Reference Parameters Range Voltage range value Range 8e 3 to 80 without probe attenuation RST 40e 3 Default unit V CHANnel lt m gt POSition Position Sets the vertical position of the indicated channel and its horizontal axis in the window Suffix m Selects the inp
319. eyboard to define a new file name to which the data is stored Note If a file with the same file name already exists in the destination directory it will be overwritten without notification Turn the NAVIGATION knob to mark a character and press the knob to select it Press Backspace to delete the character to the left of the cursor Press the Cursor and Cursor softkeys to scroll through the characters of the name Press Default name to restore the standard file name Press Accept to save the defined name Remote command MMEMory NAME on page 414 Comment Opens an on screen keyboard to insert a comment to the stored data Comments are available for all file formats that can be read by the R amp S RTM device settings reference waveforms trf format masks equation sets I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 209 R amp S RTM Data and File Management biii Iamque Saving and Loading Save Saves the data to the selected storage directory The used file name is displayed when storage is completed Remote command Device settings MMEMory STORe STATe on page 422 Other data MMEMory DATA on page 421 Load Menu The Load menu provides functions and a file explorer to select data files and to load it for usage It is displayed whenever some data has to be loaded SO ET 210 Remove EE 210 scm 210 Storage Opens the storage direct
320. fines the position of the time base extract in the Y t window for which the FFT is calculated The value is indicated by P in the information bar above the FFT window Note If the FFT time base extract is selected W P is highlighted the position can be adjusted using the horizontal POSITION rotary knob See also figure 8 1 Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT TIME POSition on page 339 Points FFT Setup Defines how many samples are used for FFT calculation The value is changed in 2 steps from 2048 211 to 65536 219 Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution RATio on page 336 Y t Setup Defines the settings for the signal vs time window E Ier RS C Y Scale Scale Y Position 1 Position Main Time Base Offset Show Channels feel 29 Y Scale Y t Setup Changes the vertical scaling of the Y t window channel scaling Note If the Y t window is selected indicated by a white border the Y Scale can be adjusted using the vertical SCALE rotary knob See SCALE Y Scale on page 29 Remote command CHANnel lt m gt SCALe on page 279 Y Position Y t Setup Defines the vertical position of the time axis in the Y t window in divisions Note If the Y t window is selected indicated by a white border the Y Position can be adjusted using the vertical POSITION rotary knob Remote command CHANnel lt m gt POSition on page 280 Main Time Base Y t
321. fix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt StopTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt SYSTate Returns the state of the sync field for the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt SyncFieldState gt OK ERR UNDF ERR error UNDF undefined Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt SYValue Returns the value of the synchronization field Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values SyncField Value Decimal value User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 408 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm R wr Gert Command Reference Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt VERSion Returns the version of the LIN standard for the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt FrameVersion gt V1X V2X UNK UNK Unknown Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt Returns the number of data bytes in the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ByteCount gt Number of words bytes Usage Query only BUS LIN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STATe Returns the state of the specified data byte Suffix n de Selects the frame 1
322. fore you can save the wave form you have to configure the storage location and file format 1 Press FILE gt Waveforms 2 Configure the storage location as described in To select the storage directory on page 207 3 Press Waveform and select the waveform to be stored All active waveforms are listed 4 Enter the file name as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 207 5 Select the Format For details see chapter 12 2 4 1 Waveform File Formats on page 216 6 Press Data and select whether to save the displayed data or the data stored in the memory For details see Data on page 219 7 Press Save To save waveforms several times by pressing simply the PRINT key assign the Wave forms to the PRINT key as described in chapter 12 2 2 1 Configuring the PRINT Key Behavior on page 213 12 2 4 3 Waveform Storage Settings With FILE gt Waveforms you open a menu to store one of the active waveforms to a USB flash drive Waveform FileName Name Format Data save For a description of the common save functions Storage File Name and Save see chapter 12 2 1 3 General Storage Settings on page 209 Specific settings for saving waveforms are described below User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 218 R amp S9RTM Data and File Management 12 2 5 12 2 5 1 Saving and Loading ENEO E 219 Gs DRE EE 219 hic
323. form See chapter 4 4 Markers on page 67 for details In addition to zoom and XY diagram modes the following functional modes are available e FFT analysis see chapter 8 2 Configuring and Using FFT Calculations on page 107 e Mask testing see chapter 9 2 Working with Masks on page 120 4 1 General Display Settings General display settings adjust the visibility of diagram elements and waveforms The individual diagram elements can be shown or hidden e Basic diagram elements grid and crosshairs e Point of the trigger event e Channel cursors to mark the ground level and the DC offset You can also adjust how the waveforms are displayed The intensity and brightness of the individual screen elements can influence the readability of the results Depending on which type of result you are interested in e g frequency of occurance time of occurance or amplitude of a specific value different settings may be necessary to highlight that aspect in the display The waveform display depends on the following criteria e Waveform style dots or line e Intensity adjusts the optimal contrast of the display Three settings can be changed to improve the contrast for the relevant display ele ments The intensity of the waveform determines the strength of the signal in the diagram The intensity of the background lighting determines the contrast of the signal The intensity of the grid has an influence on the readability of
324. g 11 9 Bit order in a UART word symbol User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 170 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis REESEN UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 e The start bit is a logic O e The stop bits and the idle state are always logic 1 The UART protocol has no clock for synchronization The receiver synchronizes by means of the start and stop bits and the bit rate that must be known to the receiver Trigger The R amp S RTM can trigger on specified parts of UART serial signals e Start bit e Frame start e A specified symbol e Parity errors and breaks e Frame errors e A serial pattern at any or a specified position 11 5 2 UART RS 232 Configuration 11 5 2 1 Configuring UART RS 232 Interfaces To configure the UART interface you assign the channels to the RX an optionally TX lines set the active state for each line and set some protocol specific parameters 1 Press the PROTOCOL key on the front panel Press the Bus Type softkey and select UART Press Configuration Press RX and select the channel connected to the receiver line Press TX and select the channel connected to the transmitter line Set the Active state Parity bit and the number of Stop Bits Press More Enter the Symbol size o o ud oo b o wm Enter the bit rate e Fora standard bit rate select the Defined Bit Rate e Fora user defined bit rate press User Bit Rate and enter the value 10 Set the Idle
325. g XY Diagrams XY diagrams combine the voltage levels of two waveforms in one diagram A further signal source can be used to determine the intensity of the XY waveform To switch the display to XY diagram and vice versa gt Press DISPLAY gt Display Mode until the XY mode is selected To configure an XY diagram Prerequisite The Display Mode is set to XY 1 Select DISPLAY gt XYZ Setup gt Source X to define the signal to be used as the x axis source Press Source X repeatedly until the required channel is highlighted User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 58 R amp S9RTM Display 2 XY Diagram Select DISPLAY gt XYZ Setup gt Source Y1 to define the signal to be used as the first y axis source Press Source Y1 repeatedly until the required channel is high lighted Optionally select DISPLAY XYZ Setup Source Y2 to define the signal to be used as a second y axis source Press Source Y2 repeatedly until the required channel is highlighted The XY diagram is displayed in the main window and additional windows are opened to display the X Y1 Y2 and Z time diagrams if the source is defined 4 2 1 2 Configuring the Intensity of an XY Waveform You can define the intensity of the XY diagram as a constant value or according to the amplitude of a further signal source Z Constant intensity To configure the intensity of an XY waveform at a defined level The waveform intensity is modulated
326. gger Parameters Slope POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POSitive TRIGger B LEVel Level Sets the trigger level for the B trigger event Parameters Level RST 0 Default unit V TRIGger B FINDlevel Sets the trigger level of the B trigger event to 50 of the signal amplitude IT User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 299 R8S RTM Remote Control m U nnel Command Reference Usage Event TRIGger B MODE Mode Defines the delay type of the B trigger Parameters Mode DELay EVENts DELay Time delay set with TRIGger B DELay EVENts Event count delay set with TRIGger B EVENt COUNt RST DELay TRIGger B DELay lt DelayTime gt Sets the time the instrument waits after an A event until it recognizes B events Before setting the dalay time TRIGger B MODE must be set to DELAy Parameters lt DelayTime gt Range 20e 9 to 6 871946854 Increment Depends on the lt DelayTime gt value The longer the lt DelayTime gt the longer is the increment value RST 20e 9 Default unit s TRIGger B EVENt COUNt lt EventCnt gt Sets a number of B trigger events that fulfill all B trigger conditions but do not cause the trigger The oscilloscope triggers on the n th event the last of the specified number of events Before setting the event number TRIGger B MODE must be set to EVENts
327. gger condition is specified in the submenus All submenu settings together create the trigger condition If you want to trigger on a specific param eter make sure to set all other settings to any If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the Symbolic ID from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier ReadlWrite Master a ID Address P es Slave Address Data Read User defined defined Ce Setup Remote command TRIGger A 12C PATTern on page 374 PATTern User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 165 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 Master Read Write Toggles the trigger condition between Read and Write access of the master The R W bit is 8th bit of the first address byte of a frame The selected condition is displayed in the 12C Settings Trigger On Remote command TRIGger A 12C ACCess on page 373 Symbolic ID Read Write If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Address Length Read Write Toggles the lenght of the slave address 7 bit or 10 bit Remote command TRIGger A I2C AMODe on page 373 Slave Address Read Write Sets the address of the slave device in hex You can set a precise address or trigger on an
328. gh resolution mode 16 bit data ACQ WRAT MSAM Set maximum waveform rate TIM SCAL 1E 7 Set time base FORM REAL Set REAL data format FORM BORD LSBF Set little endian byte order CHAN DATA POIN DMAX Set sample range to memory data in displayed time range SING OPC Start single acquisition eo all CHAN DATA HEAD Read header 4 9980E 07 5 0000E 07 5000 1 Xstart Xstop record length in samples T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 430 R amp S RTM Remote Control A Programming Examples CHAN DATA Read channel data lt 520000 gt gt gt gt gt gt Binary block data 4 byte floating point number sample 14 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Integer Format Read the channel header the waveform conversion data set the UINT binary data format and read the channel data Command description in chapter 14 2 3 General Remote Settings and Queries on page 267 RST TIM SCAL 1E 7 CHAN DATA POIN DMAX Set data range SING OPC lt 2 CHAN DATA HEAD Read header 4 9980E 07 5 0000E 07 5000 1 Xstart Xstop record length in samples CHAN DATA YRES Read vertical resolution lt 8 CHAN DATA YOR Read voltage value for binary value 0 lt 2 549999943E 2 CHAN DATA XOR Read time of the first sample lt 4 998000058E 7 CHAN DATA XINC Read time between two adjacent samples 2 000
329. gned Integer Format on page 431 32 bit data is relevant for average waveforms if averaging 512 or 1024 waveforms The resulting data is 17 bits long 512 wave forms or 18 bit 1024 waveforms RST ASC User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 268 R8S RTM Remote Control Command Reference lt Accuracy gt 0 8 16 32 Length of a data value in bit 0 for ASC only 32 for REAL 8 16 32 for UINT RST 0 Example Set the ASCII data format FORM ASC Example Query for data format FORM gt ASC 0 Example Set the unsigned integer format 16 bit data length FORM UINT 16 FORMat BORDer lt ByteOrder gt Defines the byte order for binary data export if FORMat DATA is set to REAL or UINT 16 32 Parameters lt ByteOrder gt MSBFirst LSBFirst MSBFirst Big endian most significant byte first LSBFirst Little endian least significant byte first RST MSBF Example See chapter 14 3 1 1 Reading Waveform Data from Memory on page 430 ByteOrder 8 bit 16 bit 32 bit MSBF Oxab OxAB CD OxAB CD 00 00 LSBF not relevant OxCD AB 0x00 00 CD AB CHANnel lt m gt DATA XORigin CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope XORigin CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA XORigin REFCurve lt m gt DATA XORigin Return the time of the first sample of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Xorigin gt Ti
330. gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt DCOffsetOnOff gt ON OFF RST OFF PROBe lt m gt SETup TYPE Queries the type of the probe T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 289 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm e wm Qs Command Reference Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values Type NONE ACTive PASSive NONE not detected ACTive active probe PASSive passive probe Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup UOFFset lt UserOffset gt Sets an additional probe offset Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt UserOffset gt Range Depends on the probe characteristics RST 0 Default unit V PROBe lt m gt ID BUILd Queries the build number of the probe software Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt BuildNumber gt 32 bit number Range O to 4294967295 Increment 1 Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt ID PARTnumber Queries the R amp S part number of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument eee Us
331. gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt ManualAttenuation gt Range 0 001 to 10000 RST 1 Firmware Software FW 03 700 PROBe lt m gt SETup BANDwidth Queries the bandwidth of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument EET RU e SSS SS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 287 R8S RTM Remote Control PEMGEEGMNMCIOMO AAEEI A A en Command Reference Return values Bandwidth Range 10e5 to 20e8 Increment 10 Default unit Hz Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup CAPacitance Queries the input capacity of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt InputCapacitance gt Range 0 1e 12 to 1 0e 9 Increment 1 0e 12 Default unit F Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup DCOFfset Retrieves the DC voltage that is measured by the integrated voltmeter of R amp S active probes Switch the voltmeter on before see PROBe lt m gt SETup OFFSwitch on page 289 Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt Offset gt Range 1 0e26 to 1 0e 26 Increment 1e 3 Default unit V Usage Q
332. guiadas o radiadas En este caso se le podr solicitar al operador que tome las medidas adecuadas para eliminar estas perturbaciones A Aparato de clase B Aparato adecuado para su uso en entornos residenciales as como en aquellos conectados directamente a una red de distribuci n de baja tensi n que suministra corriente a edificios residenciales 1171 0000 42 07 Page 12 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Reparaci n y mantenimiento 1 El producto solamente debe ser abierto por personal especializado con autorizaci n para ello Antes de manipular el producto o abrirlo es obligatorio desconectarlo de la tensi n de alimentaci n para evitar toda posibilidad de choque el ctrico El ajuste el cambio de partes el mantenimiento y la reparaci n deber n ser efectuadas solamente por electricistas autorizados por Rohde 8 Schwarz Si se reponen partes con importancia para los aspectos de seguridad p ej el enchufe los transformadores o los fusibles solamente podr n ser sustituidos por partes originales Despu s de cada cambio de partes relevantes para la seguridad deber realizarse un control de seguridad control a primera vista control del conductor de protecci n medici n de resistencia de aislamiento medici n de la corriente de fuga control de funcionamiento Con esto queda garantizada la seguridad del producto Bater as y acumuladores o celdas Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indica
333. h PROTocol LIN IPERror on page 411 SEARch PROTocol LIN SYERror on page 412 Symbolic ID If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Identifier Setup Opens the menu to set the identifier pattern if Event Identifier or ID amp Data or ID amp Error is selected The settings are the same as for the setup of the identifier trigger see Identifier on page 196 Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN ICONdition on page 412 SEARch PROTocol LIN IDENtifier on page 412 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 201 LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 Data Setup Opens the menu to set the data pattern to be searched if Event ID amp Data is selected After setting the No of Bytes and the Comparison condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte The settings are the same as for the setup of the data trigger see Data Setup on page 197 Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN DLENgth on page 412 SEARch PROTocol LIN DCONdition on page 413 SEARch PROTocol LIN DATA on page 413 11 7 6 2 LIN Search Results Search results events are marked on the waveform
334. h TRIGger LEVel RISetime UPPer lt UpperLevel gt Sets the upper voltage threshold When the signal crosses this level the rise fall time measurement starts or stops depending on the selected slope Parameters lt UpperLevel gt RST 600 mV Default unit V Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RlSetime RANGe Range Sets how the measured rise or fall time is compared with the given limit s To set the rise fall time use SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME To set the range At use SEARch TRIGger RISetime DELTa eee User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 350 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 12 6 Command Reference Parameters Range LONGer SHORter WITHin OUTSide LONGer Finds rise fall times longer than the given time SHORter Finds rise fall times shorter than the given time WITHin Finds rise fall times inside the range time x At OUTSide Finds rise fall times outside the range time x At RST LONG Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME Time Sets the reference rise or fall time the nominal value for comparisons Parameters Time Range Depends on various settings mainly time base and sample rate RST 200e 6 Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 700 SEARch TRIGger RlSetime DELTa lt DeltaTime gt Sets a range At to the reference rise fall time set with SEARch TRIGger RISetime TIME if SEARch TRIGger RISetime RANGe on page 350 is s
335. hde 8 Schwarz correspondiente ver lista de recambios Las bater as y celdas deben reciclarse y no deben tirarse a la basura dom stica Las bater as o acumuladores que contienen plomo mercurio o cadmio deben tratarse como residuos especiales Respete en esta relaci n las normas nacionales de eliminaci n y reciclaje Transporte 1 El producto puede tener un peso elevado Por eso es necesario desplazarlo o transportarlo con precauci n y si es necesario usando un sistema de elevaci n adecuado p ej una carretilla elevadora a fin de evitar lesiones en la espalda u otros da os personales 1171 0000 42 07 Page 13 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Las asas instaladas en los productos sirven solamente de ayuda para el transporte del producto por personas Por eso no est permitido utilizar las asas para la sujeci n en o sobre medios de transporte como p ej gr as carretillas elevadoras de horquilla carros etc Es responsabilidad suya fijar los productos de manera segura a los medios de transporte o elevaci n Para evitar da os personales o da os en el producto siga las instrucciones de seguridad del fabricante del medio de transporte o elevaci n utilizado Si se utiliza el producto dentro de un veh culo recae de manera exclusiva en el conductor la responsabilidad de conducir el veh culo de manera segura y adecuada El fabricante no asumir ninguna responsabilidad por accidentes o colisiones No utilice nunca el
336. he DC offset voltage from the input signal AC coupling is labeled with DC DC coupling passes the input signal unchanged It is labeled with GND Connects the input virtually to the ground All channel data is set toa constant ground value Ground connection is labeled with Remote command CHANnel lt m gt COUPling on page 279 Termination Adjusts the input impedance of the instrument to the impedance of the DUT By default the oscilloscope has an input impedance of 1 MO 13pF If an active probe is used the termination is read out from the probe usually it is 50 Q 50Q In measurement systems that are dimensioned for a characteristic impedance of 50 Q reflections along the signal path are minimized by setting the input resistor of the oscilloscope also to 50 Q This increases the accuracy of measurement results 50 O termination is identified for each channel by the icon Q in the waveform label 4 MQ The high input resistor minimizes the loading effect on the device under test This value is set automatically if a passive probe is connected and cannot be changed Remote command CHANnel m COUPling on page 279 Bandwidth Selects the bandwidth limit The specified full bandwidth indicates the range of frequen cies that the instrument can acquire and display accurately with less than 3dB attenua tion The probe has also a limited bandwidth and thus affects the resulting system band width See also chapter
337. he directory and then the file that contains the mask Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir Press Load The selected mask is displayed on the screen 9 2 3 Performing a Mask Test Using a mask test you can detect limit violations of the measured signal compared to a pre defined mask To perform a mask test 1 2 3 Seet up the waveform as usual Press MASKS to display the Mask Test menu Create a mask or load an existing mask See e chapter 9 2 1 Creating New Masks on page 121 e chapter 9 2 2 Loading Masks on page 123 Press Actions to define what happens when a violation occurs Select one or more of the available actions by pressing the corresponding softkey and define when the action will be executed See Actions on page 126 Press Test to start the mask test E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 123 R amp SS9RTM Masks EMG OA a Reference for MASKS key The mask test is performed i e the data from the active channel is compared to the mask If the mask limits are exceeded the specified action is taken The ove
338. he rotary knobs in the HORIZONTAL functional block for setting HORIZONTAL POSITION A User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 22 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup Reference for Waveform Setup POSITION The rotary knob changes the trigger offset This is the horizontal position of the trigger point in relation to the reference point the zero point of the grid Thus you can set the trigger point even outside the diagram and analyze the signal some time before or after the trigger The reference point is set with SETUP gt Time Reference Turn clockwise to move the trigger point to the right At zero crossing the knob shortly snaps in and the setting is kept constant to simplify the zero setting The current trigger position is shown in the top information bar denoted by T Press the knob to reset the trigger offset to 0 Note If a zoom or FFT window is displayed the knob can adjust other values depending on the selection of the SCALE rotary knob See also Time Reference on page 225 Remote command TIMebase POSition on page 274 SCALE The rotary knob adjusts the time scale of the horizontal axis for all signals also known as time base The current scale value is shown in the top information bar denoted by TB Turn clockwise to stretch the waveforms the scale value time div decreases If a Zoom or FFT window is displayed press the knob to switch between the settings then turn to adjust the selected value Remote co
339. he signal jitters inside this range and crosses the trigger level thereby no trigger event occurs Thus hysteresis avoids unwan ted trigger events caused by noise oscillation around the trigger level Hysteresis is available for the edge trigger A event and B event and for the width trigger To see the hysteresis on the display activate Trigger Hyst in the Display Auxillary Cursors menu The hysteresis value depends on the vertical scale Remote command TRIGger A HYSTeresis on page 293 TRIGger B HYSTeresis on page 300 EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 49 R amp S RTM Display General Display Settings 4 Display This chapter provides information on display configuration and display modes The default display is a waveform diagram with a time axis in x direction and the signal amplitudes displayed in y direction the Y t or time diagram You can adjust the visibility of diagram elements and waveform to your needs See chapter 4 1 General Display Settings on page 50 for details You can also display and configure XY diagrams to combine the voltage levels of two waveforms in one diagram This display mode is described in chapter 4 2 XY Dia gram on page 57 Furthermore you can zoom into waveforms to analyze the results in more detail The zoom display mode is described in chapter 4 3 Zoom on page 62 In a Y t diagram and in zoom mode you can set markers to mark positions of interest in the wave
340. he spectrum is reduced and the width of the spectral lines enlarges Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely BLACkmanharris The Blackman window is bell shaped and has the steepest fall in its wave shape of all other available functions Its value is zero at both borders of the measuring interval In the Blackman window the amplitudes can be measured very precisely However deter mining the frequency is more difficult Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely RST HANNing CALCulate MATH lt m gt ARIThmetics lt Arithmetics gt Defines the mode for FFT calculation and display Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 334 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Parameters lt Arithmetics gt Command Reference OFF ENVelope AVERage OFF The FFT is performed without any additional weighting or post processing of the acquired data The new input data is acquired and displayed and thus overwrites the previously saved and dis played data ENVelope In addition to the normal spectrum the maximal oscillations are saved separately and updated for each new spectrum The max imum values are displayed together with the newly acquired val ues and form an envelope This envelope indicates the range of all FFT trace values that occurred AVERage The average of several spectrums is calculated The number of spectru
341. he voltage value per bit of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Yincrement gt Voltage in V TEM User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 270 R8S RTM Remote Control m H Command Reference Example See chapter 14 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 431 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA YRESolution CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YRESolution CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA YRESolution REFCurve lt m gt DATA YRESolution Return the vertical bit resolution of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Yresolution gt For default waveforms the resolution is 8 bit If high resolution average or filter are set for the waveform the resolution is 16 bit Example See chapter 14 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 431 Usage Query only 14 2 4 Acquisition and Setup e Starting and Stopping ACQUISINON DEE 271 CEU Bae EE 272 UID E 274 RA ee 278 Waveform Delta iiid lili iii 283 A des aiiesieta EEN capac VOR aded EES Vai Deseo uias 286 14 2 4 1 Starting and Stopping Acquisition ci S 271 euer 272 A O 272 E EI E ti a tit 272 AGQUTE NSINGISHSOU NG ca
342. ht AAA MEASurement lt m gt STATistics ENABle ME SurementemsEENablet ouer T MMEMory CA Talog LENGI E 420 MMEMOp E Elend E 419 MMEMOry CDIRG COPY T d 417 IVI EOC ORIN a MEER 420 MMEMory DATA MMEMory DCATalog LENG N coordine dad 419 MMEMoOry DCATal00 re ad 418 MME Mory DEL Cte 421 MMEMory DRIVES cocoa 417 MMEMOrny EOADBISTATS iiti ceo rere id MMEMory MDIRectory MMEMON MOVE E A ita E E E E E ES eegend MMEMory MSI SRM MMEMON NAME m MME Mory RDIRC CORY p i MMEMOrnSTORE SSTA TO iii ita hehe baie Siemens e 422 PROBe lt m gt ID BUILd 290 PROBe sm IB PARTfUtTDOI 2 reir a citet r ve aia 290 eu a REI 291 PROB lt m gt Re Hien 291 SITAS NOS eene rennen ehnnnniennnnr indt ensis et ent sentent rsen erts s en rn nsns nnns nnn 291 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 441 R amp SS9RTM List of Commands P Ofe mz GE Tup ATTenuaton MANual nn cnn cc non n cnn nnne en nnne n rsen ens et nre 287 PROBe m gt SETup ATTenuation UNIT cocina err etie ihr Heer eire er pena ed eet egre EE 287 PhRObBe mz GE TupATTenuattont AUTO 287 PROB lt m gt Re NET lei KEE 287 Se SETU p CAPaCItANCE E 288 PROBesm gt SETUp DEOFTSO tic ana 288 PROB lt m gt SETUpIMPedane movi tt td 288 PROBesm gt SETUp IMODE fcc
343. ian tai feadeaeeh a aa ea 272 le MM En 272 RUN Starts the continuous acquisition Usage Event Asynchronous command User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 271 14 2 4 2 Command Reference RUNContinous Same as RUN Usage Event Asynchronous command SINGle Starts a defined number of acquisitions The number of acquisitions is set with ACQuire NSINgle COUNt Usage Event Asynchronous command RUNSingle Same as SINGle Usage Event Asynchronous command ACQuire NSINgle COUNt lt NSingleCount gt Sets the number of waveforms acquired with RUNSingle Parameters lt NSingleCount gt Number of waveforms Range 1 to 10 Increment 1 RST 1 STOP Stops the running acquistion Usage Event Asynchronous command Time Base KREE 273 TMebase WT 273 TIAS SACO a a 273 TIMebase RANGE AP E 273 TIMED SSE DIVISIONS T EE 273 RK E TEEN 274 TiMebase EE 274 R8S RTM Remote Control EES Command Reference TiMebase SCALe lt TimeScale gt Sets the horizontal scale for all channel and math waveforms Parameters lt TimeScale gt Range 1e 9 to 50 lower limits are possible if zoom or FFT is enabled Increment 1 2 5 progression for example 1 ms div 2 ms div 5 ms div 10 20 50 RST 100e 6 Default unit s div TiMebase RATime Queries the real acquisition time used in the hardware If FFT analysis is performed the value can differ from the adjusted acquisition time TIMebase ACOTime Retur
344. ible leer detalladamente y comprender por completo las siguientes informaciones de seguridad antes de usar el producto y respetarlas durante el uso del producto Deber n tenerse en cuenta todas las dem s informaciones de seguridad como p ej las referentes a la protecci n de personas que encontrar n en el cap tulo correspondiente de la documentaci n del producto y que tambi n son de obligado cumplimiento En las presentes informaciones de seguridad se recogen todos los objetos que distribuye el grupo de empresas Rohde 8 Schwarz bajo la denominaci n de producto entre ellos tambi n aparatos instalaciones as como toda clase de accesorios Los datos espec ficos del producto figuran en la hoja de datos y en la documentaci n del producto Se alizaci n de seguridad de los productos Las siguientes se ales de seguridad se utilizan en los productos para advertir sobre riesgos y peligros S mbolo Significado S mbolo Significado Aviso punto de peligro general Q Tensi n de alimentaci n de PUESTA EN 2L MARCHA PARADA Observar la documentaci n del producto Atenci n en el manejo de dispositivos de peso Ch Indicaci n de estado de espera standby elevado Peligro de choque el ctrico ao Corriente continua DC V Advertencia superficie caliente IN A Corriente alterna AC av Conexi n a conductor de protecci n Corriente continua Corriente alterna DC AC Conexi n a tierra lal El aparato est protegi
345. ic Measurements MEASurement m ENABle sesssesesesesesesesene nennen enhn nunen nnns nsns es sn sinit ierra 321 MEAS remenbeme EE 321 MEASurementsmi SOU RCS coccion 323 MEAGurement mz DEL av SLOPE eee ee eee ae eee aa eee anna nn n nn nr rra ran 324 EE TK el 324 MEASurementem CA TEJA iii ai add aii 325 MEASurement lt m gt ENABle State Activates or deactivates the selected measurement 1 4 Only the results of active measurements are displayed in the result table Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF MEASurement lt m gt MAIN lt MeasType gt Defines the measurement type to be performed on the selected source To query the results use MEASurement m RESult ACTual Suffix m 1 4 Selects the measurement TE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 321 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Parameters lt MeasType gt Command Reference FREQuency PERiod PEAK UPEakvalue LPEakvalue PPCount NPCount RECount FECount HIGH LOW AMPLitude MEAN RMS RTIMe FTIMe PDCYcle NDCYcle PPWidth NPWidth CYCMean CYCRms STDDev CYCStddev TFRequency TPERiode DELay PHASe BWIDth POVershoot NOVershoot TBFRequency TBPeriod For a detailed description see Meas Type on page 92 FREQuency Frequency of the signal The result is based on the length of the left most signal period within the displaye
346. icated reference file to the reference storage To load the instrument settings use REFCurve lt m gt LOAD STATe Suffix m 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Setting parameters lt FileName gt String with path and file name Usage Setting only REFCurve lt m gt LOAD STATe Loads the instrument settings in addition to the reference waveform data The waveform data must be loaded before the settings see REFCurve lt m gt LOAD on page 310 The settings are only available if the file was stored to the internal storage INT REFERENCE and never written to an external storage USB stick Suffix m 1 4 Selects the reference waveform Usage Event REFCurve lt m gt HORizontal SCALe lt Scale gt Changes the horizontal scale timebase of the reference waveform independent of the channel waveform settings Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters lt Scale gt RST 100e 6 Default unit s div REFCurve lt m gt HORizontal POSition Position Changes the horizontal position of the reference waveform independent of the channel waveform settings Suffix m 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Parameters Position RST 0 Default unit s T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 310 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control Command Reference REFCurve lt m gt VE
347. iguring LAN parameters manually no DHCP on page 234 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 233 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Basics By default the instrument is configured to use dynamic TCP IP configuration and obtain all address information automatically This means that it is safe to establish a physical connection to the LAN without any previous instrument configuration Risk of network errors Connection errors can affect the entire network If your network does not support DHCP or if you choose to disable dynamic TCP IP configuration you must assign valid address information before connecting the instrument to the LAN Contact your network admin istrator to obtain a valid IP address Configuring LAN parameters manually no DHCP 1 2 3 4 Disconnect the R amp S RTM from the LAN Restart the instrument Press the SETUP key and then the Interface softkey Wait about two minutes until the LAN menu is available Press the LAN softkey Note By default the instrument is set to use DHCP If the instrument cannot find a DHCP server it takes some time until the LAN settings can be accessed Press the Parameter softkey The LAN settings dialog box is displayed User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 234 R8S RTM Remote Control Basics TB 100us T 0s Auto CHT 0V 4 DC 10 MSais Real Time ATEO EA AA Y Ethernet Settings 00 50 ce2 465 11 7c HTTP Port B Transfer Auto 100 Mbps Full Duplex
348. in which is Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 The width of the domain is defined using the Span function Center Span Note If the FFT frequency range is selected Span Center is highlighted the width of the span can be adjusted using the horizontal POSITION rotary knob Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT CFRequency on page 337 CALCulate MATH m FFT STARt on page 338 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT STOP on page 338 Y Scale FFT Setup Changes the vertical scaling of the FFT display in V dBm per division Note If the FFT frequency range is selected Span Center is highlighted the Y Scale can be defined using the vertical SCALE rotary knob See also SCALE Y Scale on page 29 Remote command CALCulate MATH m SCALe on page 330 YT Window FFT Setup Defines the width of the time base extract from the Y t window for which the FFT is calculated The extract is indicated by white lines in the Y t window The value is indi cated by W in the information bar above the FFT window Note If the FFT time base extract is selected W P is highlighted the width can be adjusted using the horizontal SCALE rotary knob ERA A e LALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLUL ULL User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 115 R amp S9RTM FFT Reference for FFT key See also figure 8 1 Remote command CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT TIME RANGe on page 338 Position FFT Setup De
349. in event a are met B Setup B Source O B Source Selects one of the input channels as B trigger source Press the softkey repeatedly until the required source is selected Remote command TRIGger B SOURce on page 299 Slope Sets the edge for the B trigger event Positive Selects the rising edge that is a positive voltage change Negative Selects the falling edge that is a negative voltage change AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 48 R amp S RTM Triggers SS NN ERN Reference for Triggers Both Selets the rising as well as the falling edge Remote command TRIGger B EDGE SLOPe on page 299 Level Sets the trigger level for the B trigger event Remote command TRIGger B LEVel on page 299 Trigger On Sets an additional delay condition for the B event time delay or event delay According to this selection set also Time or Events to define the condition completely Remote command TRIGger B MODE on page 300 Time Sets the time the instrument waits after an A event until it recognizes B events Remote command TRIGger B DELay on page 300 Events Sets a number of B trigger events that fulfill all B trigger conditions but do not cause the trigger The oscilloscope triggers on the n th event the last of the specified number of events Remote command TRIGger B EVENt COUNt on page 300 Hysteresis A B Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level If t
350. ine is used Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive high active NEGative low active RST POSitive BUS SPI MISO POLarity lt MisoPolarity gt Selects whether transmitted data is high active high 1 or low active low 1 on the MISO line Parameters lt MisoPolarity gt ACTLow ACTHigh RST ACTH BUS SPI BORDer lt BitOrder gt Defines if the data of the messages starts with MSB most significant bit or LSB least significant bit Parameters lt BitOrder gt MSBFirst LSBFirst RST MSBFirst BUS SPI SSIZe lt SymbolSize gt Sets the word length the number of bits in a message Parameters lt SymbolSize gt Range 4 to 32 Increment 1 RST 8 Default unit Bit T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 363 R8S RTM Remote Control m Q HQ Command Reference CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event SPI Trigger TRIGGERA SOURCE SPL I 364 TRIGISHASPIEMODE cuina 364 TRICIA E Tel D Em 365 TRIGA SP PLENO viii ii 365 TRIGgerA SPEPOFESBL EE EE 365 TRIGger A SOURce SPI lt SpiSource gt Sets the line that is use
351. ined in standard IEEE 488 2 They are employed identically on all instruments if implemented They refer to functions such as management of the standardized status registers reset and self test Instrument control commands refer to functions depending on the features of the instrument such as frequency settings Many of these commands have also been standardized by the SCPI committee These commands are marked as SCPI compliant in the command reference chapters Commands without this SCPI label are device specific however their syntax follows SCPI rules as per mitted by the standard Instrument responses Instrument responses response messages and service requests are messages the instrument sends to the controller after a query They can contain measurement results instrument settings and information on the instrument status LAN Interface Messages In the LAN connection the interface messages are called low level control messages These messages can be used to emulate interface messages of the GPIB bus Command Long term Effect on the instrument amp ABO Abort Aborts processing of the commands just received amp DCL Device Clear Aborts processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument setting amp GTL Go to Local Transition to the local state manual control amp GTR Go to Remote Transition to the remote st
352. int Key PrOD e latido Probe Adjust op Remove directory ooooccccccnnocccccncoconcnnnanancncnnanaaccnnnno Remove Ile scada Reticle Av Rollin icit re steer Seege Sample Mode eerste rente tege tenet eatis Save det o Save MASKS EE Sereen amp Setup 2 reote iei reine eua Screenshot s Sereerishots asista Secure Erase 2i osito certet rear dee Self Alignment I Set to Wave nsn dcr tia Setup amp Label EE Slope Slope Clock SSPI Sound Source Source SPI SSPI SQUICO X EE Source Y1 Se SQUICO EE SOUE Z ario Statistic Test masks Threshold WEE Time Reference usisni dieiis iina Track Scaling Trigger Beep EM User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 R amp S9RTM Index Trigger Event riter 56 Trigger Hyst viii 56 Trigger Level Trigger Offset TQ GOR OM MeL 49 Unit X m Unit Probar di 32 Und usina tds 226 Update language T Upgrade irre ita Ulp 225 Value 104 MILI 98 Wavef Arithmetic s eene 25 Waveform Waveform Intensity esses 54 Waveform masks sssesssee 126 Waveform Rate WAVEGOIMNS E Width X masks sico 126 Width Y masks Stier X CH1 Y CH2 X CH2 Y CH1 XYZ Setup Y Position MASKS inaaianei 125 YEGAN 225 Y Scale L M Z Intetisily nar 61 E EE 61 Sounds SOI ete 228 Source meas reiment
353. ints from the operand For all negative val ues the result is zero The positive values remain unmodified gt 101 R amp S9RTM Neg Wave Reciprocal Inverse Common Log Natural Log Mathematics Reference for Mathematics Min Op1 0 Extracts the negative data points from the operand For all positive val ues the result is zero The negative values remain unmodified 1V Op1 Divides 1V by the operand values For small operand amplitudes the result increases quickly If the oper and crosses zero the result would be a range of x to In this case instead of OV the calculation function uses the value that the Least Significant Bit LSB of the operand represents For an 8 bit value for example 1 256 You can limit the zero crossings of the operand by using the Maxi mum operator This limitation results in a smaller result range and a finer resolution Inverts all voltage values of the operand i e all values are mirrored at the ground level Thus a positive voltage offset becomes negative If the amplitude of the operand is clipped the result is the inverted limi tation A log Op1 Calculates the logarithm to the basis 10 of the operand Note that the logarithm of a negative number is undefined and the result is clipped nur In Op1 Calculates the logarithm to the basis e Euler number of the operand Note that the logarithm of a negative number is undefined and the re
354. ion pregnant women must be protected by appropriate measures Persons with pacemakers may also be exposed to risks from electromagnetic radiation The employer operator must evaluate workplaces where there is a special risk of exposure to radiation and if necessary take measures to avert the potential danger 6 Should a fire occur the product may release hazardous substances gases fluids etc that can cause health problems Therefore suitable measures must be taken e g protective masks and protective clothing must be worn 7T Laser products are given warning labels that are standardized according to their laser class Lasers can cause biological harm due to the properties of their radiation and due to their extremely concentrated electromagnetic power If a laser product e g a CD DVD drive is integrated into a Rohde amp Schwarz product absolutely no other settings or functions may be used as described in the product documentation The objective is to prevent personal injury e g due to laser beams 8 EMC classes in line with EN 55011 CISPR 11 and analogously with EN 55022 CISPR 22 EN 55032 CISPR 32 Class A equipment Equipment suitable for use in all environments except residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Note Class A equipment is intended for use in an industrial environment This equipment may cause radio disturbance
355. ion At 0 If Variation O this setting triggers on pulses outside a range t At Inside Out Triggers on pulses inside or outside a range specified with Time t1 side and Time t2 This method is an alternative setting to the range definition with Time t and Variation The values are interdependent Variation and Time t are adjusted If you change t1 and t2 and vice versa Remote command TRIGger A WIDTh RANGe on page 295 Polarity Sets the polarity of the pulse Pos Positive going pulse the width is defined from the rising to the falling slopes Neg Negative going pulse the width is defined from the falling to the rising slopes Remote command TRIGger A WIDTh POLarity on page 295 Time t Sets the reference time the nominal value for comparisons ti lt t ti gt t ti t tit Remote command TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh on page 296 Variation Sets a range At to the reference Time t if comparison is set to ti t or ti t The instru ment triggers on pulses inside or outside the range ti At Remote command TRIGger A WIDTh DELTa on page 296 Time t1 Time t2 Set the lower and upper time limits defining the time range if Inside or Outside is set for comparison Time t and Variation are adjusted accordingly Hysteresis A B Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level If the signal jitters inside this range and crosses the trigger level thereby no trigger event occurs Thus hysteresis
356. ion the master generates the clock and addresses the slaves Slaves receive the address and the clock Both master and slaves can trans mit and receive data e Addressing scheme each slave device is addressable by a unique address Multiple slave devices can be linked together and can be addressed by the same master e Read write bit specifies if the master will read 1 or write 0 the data e Acknowledge takes place after every byte The receiver of the address or data sends the acknowledge bit to the transmitter The R amp S RTM supports all operating speed modes high speed fast mode plus fast mode and standard mode Data transfer The format of a simple IC message frame with 7 bit addressing consists of the following parts e Start condition a falling slope on SDA while SCL is high e 7 bit address of the slave device that either will be written to or read from e R W bit specifies if the data will be written to or read from the slave e ACKnowledge bits is issued by the receiver of the previous byte if the transfer was successful ee User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 160 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 Exception At read access the master terminates the data transmission with a NACK bit after the last byte e Data a number of data bytes with an ACK bit after every byte e Stop condition a rising slope on SDA while SCL is high START ADDRESS RW ACK DATA ACK DATA ACK STOP con
357. ionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame frame type identifier data length code data checksum and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 4 Frame Table Decode Results on page 148 RETE RU RE E AA e A 2 22 A User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 187 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 TB 200 jus T 16 3ms J Auto CH1 3 42 Y DC 5MSais Real Time Complete Data 4 1846 51B1 g 4 4E15 55 ms Data DA2 Ignition In 4 7061 C3CB 0999 CRC 75 ms Err Frame 19 ms Data Fig 11 12 Decoded CAN signal with frame table and applied label list violet identifier gray DLC data length code blue data words red error occured error frame Table 11 4 Content of the CAN frame table Column Description Start time Time of frame start in relation to the trigger point Type Frame type Data Remote Error or Overload ID Identifier value hexadecimal value Label Symbolic label available if a label list was loaded and applied DLC Data length code number of data bytes Data Hexadecimal values of the data bytes CRC Hexadecimal value of the Cyclic Redundance Check checksum State Overall state of the frame User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 188 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 SCPI commands e BUS CAN FCOunt on page 392 e UJ a G G Cp G CQ e e de de de O e
358. is not intended for analysis outside the R amp S RTM CSV Format In a Comma Separated Values text file the waveform is stored in a two columned table Columns are separated by a comma and the lines are separated by line breaks r n 0x0D 0x0A Values are listed in scientific notation ER EE AAA 1 LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLAAAULLLLL X User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 216 R amp S RTM Data and File Management Saving and Loading The first column contains the time values of the samples in relation to the trigger point and the second column contains the associated amplitude values The first line indicates the units of the values in each column and the name of the waveform Pairs of values are listed as two single values with the same time value minimum and maximum The data can be loaded back to the instrument for further use Example CSV1 Waveform of channel 1 single values s CH1 V 1 1996E 02 1 000E 02 1 1992E 02 1 000E 02 1 1988E 02 1 000E 02 1 1984E 02 1 000E 02 Example CSV2 Waveform of channel 1 pairs of values s CH1 V 2 9980E 00 2 000E 05 2 9980E 00 1 400E 04 2 9960E 00 1 800E 04 2 9960E 00 1 400E 04 2 9940E 00 1 800E 04 2 9940E 00 1 400E 04 Example CSV3 FFT Hz FFT dBm 0 000000E 00 1 03746E 01 1 525879E 02 7 49460E 00 3 051758E 02 1 19854E 01 4 577637E 02 1 56854E 01 Import of CSV files If you import a CSV file as reference waveform from a USB flash drive
359. ission It is the last byte of the frame response The checksum includes not only the data but also the protected identifier PID Remote command TRIGger A LIN CHKSerror on page 404 Parity Error lt type gt Triggers on a parity error Parity bits are the bits 6 and 7 of the identifier They verify the correct transmission of the identifier Remote command TRIGger A LIN IPERror on page 404 Synchronization Error lt type gt Triggers if synchronization caused an error Remote command TRIGger A LIN SYERror on page 404 Identifier Sets the trigger to a specific identifier or an identifier range Only the 6 bit identifier without parity bits is considered not the protected identifier The first key press enables the Identifier trigger type the second opens the Identi fier menu After setting the Compare condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the Symbolic ID from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier Identifier Symbolic ID i Value i N Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 403 ID IDDT TRIGger A LIN ICONdition on page 404 TRIGger A LIN IDENtifier on page 404 Symbolic ID Identifier If a label list with node names was lo
360. it Thus the upper half of the mask is pulled upwards the lower half is pulled down and the overall height of the mask is twice the Width Y Remote command MASK YWIDth on page 341 Width X New Mask Changes the width of the mask in horizontal direction The specified factor in divisions is added to the positive x values and subtracted from the negative x values of the mask limits in relation to the mask center Thus the left half of the mask is pulled to the left the right half is pulled to the right Remote command MASK XWIDth on page 341 Save New Mask Opens a menu to save the mask in an instrument specific format The complete mask definition envelope waveform with width stretch and position settings is stored See Save Menu on page 209 Remote command MASK SAVE on page 340 Load Mask Opens a file explorer to select a previously stored mask The selected mask is loaded and can be used for a subsequent test Remote command MASK LOAD on page 340 Actions Opens a submenu to select the actions to be taken when a violation against the mask limits occurs For each action you can define when and how often the action will be executed Total 0 Os Waveform E Off ur N GEESS e o Stop Print Off y Ga Off A N N Sound Generates a beep sound Stop Stops the waveform acquisition Screenshot Saves a screenshot according to the settings in FILE gt Screen
361. it for each register Thus an event can lead to a service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy Hierarchy of status registers As shown in the following figure the status information is of hierarchical structure T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 253 Basics 0 1 Errorfevent Output 2 queue buffer 3 COVerload 4 TEMPerature 5 6 7 0 8 NOALigndata 1 9 Limit amp 2 amp 3 amp 4 MASK amp 5 6 see separate amp 7 figure for this register SRE STATus QUEStionable STATus OPERation ALIGnment SELFtest AUToset WTRigger p amp rn amp B amp amp amp amp amp logical AND ESE ESR logical OR zl OS Ob GG a CH d OU 20N 0 Fig 14 2 Overview of the status registers hierarchy e STB SRE The STatus Byte STB register and its associated mask register Service Request Enable SRE form the highest level of the status reporting system The STB provides a rough overview of the instrument status collecting the information of the lower level registers e ESR SCPI registers The STB receives its information from the following registers The Event Status Register ESR with the associated mask register standard Event Status Enable ESE The STATus OPERation and STATus QUEStionable registers which are defined by SCPI and contain detailed information on the instrument e Output buffer R amp S9RTM Remote Control Basics The output
362. ith a protective conductor contact and protective conductor 3 Intentionally breaking the protective conductor either in the feed line or in the product itself is not permitted Doing so can result in the danger of an electric shock from the product If extension cords or connector strips are implemented they must be checked on a regular basis to ensure that they are safe to use 4 If there is no power switch for disconnecting the product from the AC supply network or if the power Switch is not suitable for this purpose use the plug of the connecting cable to disconnect the product from the AC supply network In such cases always ensure that the power plug is easily reachable and accessible at all times For example if the power plug is the disconnecting device the length of the connecting cable must not exceed 3 m Functional or electronic switches are not suitable for providing disconnection from the AC supply network If products without power switches are integrated into racks or systems the disconnecting device must be provided at the system level 5 Never use the product if the power cable is damaged Check the power cables on a regular basis to ensure that they are in proper operating condition By taking appropriate safety measures and carefully laying the power cable ensure that the cable cannot be damaged and that no one can be hurt by for example tripping over the cable or suffering an electric shock 1171 0000 42 07 Page 3
363. ivalent time sampling sseeeeeeess 24 Error queues recommendations ssseeseeeeene 263 ESE event status enable register 256 ESR ESR event status register j EVEN peracid aia rn aa aura aAA EAAS EEan Events O 143 Event status enable register A A 265 Event status enable register ESE 256 Event status register Elle site dida Event status register ESR p elle WEE device settings sereset equation sets ES MASKS Sras Iac M F alltiffie oett ettet LLL t 83 FFT activating e pe lm configuring cursor measurements eese 75 111 deactivating x A Piet displaying general Setup scire te pee eek te tun aa AEI ere M PU Main Time Base Se Mr EE uk No of Averages is POSION S soe ettet eto ares eerie ELE EE starting SS waveform arithmetic eese 112 VIN OW EE Y Position EE eebe A sane dundewes vevennanvsaeacseestarse K le E 115 R amp S9RTM Index FFT off rl lj dE EEEe 117 FFT Setup Ll le 114 File formats BIN m S 217 CSV masks 25 a ipi eret ree eene aes 119 CSV waveforms ssssseseeen 216
364. ive low low 1 is defined for data lines RS 232 Remote command BUS UART DATA POLarity on page 382 BUS UART POLarity on page 382 Parity Defines the optional parity bit that is used for error detection None No parity bit is used Even The parity bit is set to 1 if the number of 1 s in a given set of bits is odd not including the parity bit Odd The parity bit is set to 1 if the number of 1 s in a given set of bits is even not including the parity bit Remote command BUS UART PARi t y on page 382 Stop Bits Sets the number of stop bits 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits are possible Remote command BUS UART on page 383 Symbol Size Sets the number of data bits in a word symbol in a range from 5 to 9 bits Remote command BUS UART SSIZe on page 382 Bit Rate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second Defined Bit Select a standard bit rate value from the list Rate User Bit Rate Enter a user defined value Remote command BUS UART BAUDrate on page 383 Idle Time Sets the minimal time between two frames between the stop bit of the last word in a frame and the start bit of the first word in the next frame Remote command BUS UART BITime on page 383 EA A e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLILAYq User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 173 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 Find Level The instrument analyzes all chann
365. ive pulses within the displayed section of the waveform A neg ative pulse consists of a falling edge followed by a rising edge The mean value of the signal is determined If the signal passes the mean value an edge is counted The pulse is counted if a falling edge and a rising edge are detected The number of negative pulses is displayed as Cnt 1I in the result table Count rising edges Count J Counts transitions of the signal from low level to high level within the displayed section of the waveform To do so the mean value of the signal is determined If the signal passes the mean value a rising edge is counted The number of rising edges is displayed as Cnt J in the result table Count falling edges Count 1 Counts transitions of the signal from high level to low level within the displayed section of the waveform To do so the mean value of the signal is determined If the signal passes the mean value a falling edge is counted The number of falling edges is displayed as Cnt L in the result table Trigger Freq Measures the frequency of the A trigger signal based on the length of its period The measurement value is displayed as f Tr in the result table Trigger Period Measures the length of the A trigger signal periods hardware counter The measure ment value is displayed as T Tr in the result table Trigger B Freq Measures the frequency of the B trigger signal based on the length of its period The measurement
366. l 1305 0595 02 08 422 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m n P Command Reference 14 2 15 General Instrument Setup DISPla WAN GUSG et 423 DISPlay LANG age ADD reed eue cte titre ener Ernte ERR E exec ER Ra e une ER e tene dap edad 423 DISPlay LANGUAGES REMOVE aiii iaa 423 SYS Teme NAME iii da dde 424 Ch CNR DATE EE 424 SY Stem O Eo rec 424 Ch SUSE e 425 RR EE er TE a ED 425 SYSTEM ET EI 425 AJA MM NA 425 DISPlay LANGuage Language Sets the language in which the softkey labels help and other screen information can be displayed Up to four languages can be installed on the instrument Make sure that the required language is installed before you set it Parameters Language ENGLish GERMan FRENch SPANish RUSSian SCHinese TCHinese JAPanese Supported languages are listed in the Specifications data sheet RST Reset does not change the language DISPlay LANGuage ADD lt Language gt lt SourcePath gt Installs the specified language on the instrument For each language softkey labels display texts and if available the online help are provided To install or update a lan guage or online help the language file RTM10xx HMG is required on a USB flash drive The language file contains all available languages and online helps Up to four languages can be installed on the instrument To change th
367. lection the functions of the SCALE and POSITION rotary knobs may change User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 63 R amp S RTM Display m Zoom TB 100ns T 44ns Auto CH1 641 7 mY A AC 5 GSais Realtime Complete zc rro CET Fig 4 2 Zoom area width and position When you deactivate the zoom display the previous display is restored 4 3 2 Zooming for Details The zoomed area and its position can be configured numerically or using the rotary knobs To display a zoom diagram gt Press the ZOOM key The key lights up and two windows are displayed the original signal vs time at the top the zoom at the bottom To deactivate the zoom display gt Press the ZOOM key again or press the Zoom Off softkey in the Zoom menu to close the zoom window The ZOOM key is no longer illuminated and the previous display is restored To configure the zoom area numerically 1 Press the Zoom Time Base softkey to define the scaling for the time base in the zoom diagram in seconds per division The scaling is indicated by Z in the infor mation bar above the zoom diagram and determines the width of the zoom area that is displayed in the zoom diagram 10 divisions scaling per division 2 Press the Zoom Time softkey to define the offset of the trigger point to the reference point Os in the zoom diagram The offset is indicated by Tz in the information bar above the zoo
368. lines two data and two control lines e Clock line to all slaves SCLK e Slave Select or Chip Select line SS or CS e Master data output slave data input MOSI or SDI e Master data input slave data output MISO or SDO When the master generates a clock and selects a slave device data may be transferred in either or both directions simultaneously As SPI is very simple and efficient for single master single slave applications the R amp S RTM provides also an SSPI simple SPI configuration that does not have a chip select line Fig 11 1 Simple configuration of SPI bus The data bits of a message are grouped by following criteria e A word contains a number of successive bits The word length is defined in the pro tocol configuration e Aframe contains a number of successive words at least one word For SPI buses the R amp S RTM provides the following trigger possibilities e On frame start or frame end e Onaspecified bit in the message e Ona serial pattern SPI SSPI Bus Configuration LE Configu GP BUSES ERIT 151 e bleech idea 152 Configuring SPI Buses You define the input channels for the lines and some bit information on the message 1 Press the PROTOCOL key on the front panel 2 Press the Bus Type softkey and select SPI or SSPI EEUU RU RA E E A i 2q0q 24022 AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 151 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option
369. list Example 9 477E 008 9 477E 008 200000 1 Usage Query only Measurements This chapter describes functions that configure or perform cursor and automatic meas urements e Cursor Measurements eene nennen nenne enses n sensn senes enses nn 312 e Quick MeasutemoelbllS uiis dilatada 320 e Automatic Measurements ene eene nnn enn sr enn en nennen 321 e Reference Level nennen ene nennen nnne sn nne e nsn er nnns ends nnns 325 e Automatic Measurements Giattetlc 326 Cursor Measurements CURSO MADRE 313 ie Weisen NE 313 e enee seed ciet napa ceto dada aaa 313 CURSO Me FUNCION E 313 CURSOR TRACKING S PAV Gl coins di data 315 CUR Sor M NIFOS ON ena a e etes tineis er da 315 GURSor m X2PosIllah 2 eio eee idad SEENEN 315 CURSORS MS XSF OSIM EE 315 CURSO MV TPOSIDEL ied ascende a ueber x tomo ace aiii 315 CURSO MA e DEE 315 CURSORS Y3mosltlh EE 315 CURSO Me COUPIING EE 316 GURSeOrem XCDUDlIFig unu cote Leere id 316 e ee 316 CURSO M S SOS erii ani taria iii 316 CURSO M SRR GOK ne eie Sea a eege 316 CURSO MSP ci al EE 317 CUbR or zmz TRACkingSGCALelgGratel rehenes trn nnns 317 CURSO ME RESU E 317 CURSO MADE MNVBTSBT o ee E 317 CURSO Eme DEL Abus toe ridad 318 CURSO mM de EE 318 GURSerem YDELta pVALus ui dans 318 GURSors mo We EI 318 CUR orzmzs SRATIOVAL uef anna a tren retentis nnn ann n nnns 319 CURSO me RATO TR WE
370. litude RUNT The runt search finds pulses lower than normal in amplitude The amplitude crosses the first threshold twice without crossing the second one In addition to the threshold amplitudes you can define a time limit for the runt in the same way as for width search runts with exact width shorter or longer than a given time or runts inside or outside the allowable time range RTIMe The rise or fall time search finds slopes with an exact rise or fall time or rise fall times shorter or longer than a given limit or rise fall times inside or outside the allowable time range DATatoclock The Data2Clock search also known as setup hold finds violation of setup and hold times It analyzes the relative timing between two signals a data signal and the synchronous clock signal Setup time is the time that the data signal is steady before clock edge Hold time is the time that the data signal is steady after clock edge PATTern The pattern search finds logical combinations of channel states inside or outside a specified time range For each channel its state and threshold level is defined The states are combined logically and the time of true pattern results is compared with a specified time range PROTocol The protocol search finds various events in decoded data of CAN or LIN signals for example a specified frame type identifier data and errors Available search settings depend on the configured bus type BUS TYPE For b
371. ll be used as reference by doing one of the following e Press Source and select one of the active waveforms then press Update e Load a previously saved reference See also To load references and reference settings on page 72 The selected data is written to the selected reference storage and displayed 4 Press Visible to hide and show the reference waveform 5 1 2 Saving and Loading References If you need more than four references or you want to keep a reference for other meas urements you can save it and load it back to the instrument when needed Import and export is also possible The instrument settings are saved together with the reference waveform only in the inter nal storage They are removed from the reference file when you save or export the file to an external storage USB flash device To save references 1 Press REF to display the Reference menu 2 Press Save 3 Press Source and select the waveform whose data you wantto save as a reference All active waveforms can be saved 4 Press Storage and define the storage settings See To select the storage directory on page 207 5 Press File Name and enter the name of the target file See To define a new file or directory name on page 207 6 Press Save To copy a stored reference use FILE Import Export References For import export procedure see chapter 12 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 207 To load reference
372. lling the event status register MSS bit master status summary bit The bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request This is the case if one of the other bits of this registers is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable register SRE STATus OPERation status register summary bit The bit is set if an EVENt bit is set in the OPERation status register and the associated ENABIe bit is set to 1 A set bit indicates that the instrument is just performing an action The type of action can be determined by querying the STATus OPERation status register Event Status Register ESR and Event Status Enable Register ESE The ESR is defined in IEEE 488 2 It can be compared with the EvENt part of a SCPI register The event status register can be read out using command ESR The ESE the assoc corresponds to the ENAB1e part of a SCPI register If a bitis set in the ESE and iated bit in the ESR changes from 0 to 1 the ESB bit in the STB is set The ESE register can be set using the command ESE and read using the command ESE Table 14 4 Meaning of the bits used in the event status register Bit No Meaning 0 Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command OPC exactly when all previous commands have been executed 1 Not used 2 Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the ins
373. lly in the channel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Remote command CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel on page 364 SPI SSPI Trigger e Trngasrmng on SPI BUSES cce da a 154 iSPUSSPI leren eonun Rn Ree ege eR etus cre ngu e eet o Euge ee eae 155 Triggering on SPI Buses Prerequisites The SPI or SSPI bus is configured After configuration the trigger type Protocol SPI or Protocol SSPI is available See chapter 11 3 2 1 Configuring SPI Buses on page 151 Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled 1 Press the SETUP key in the trigger area of the front panel User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 154 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 2 Select the Trigger Type Protocol SPI or Protocol SSPI 3 Press Setup 4 Press the softkey of the required trigger condition Frame Start begin of the message Frame End message end Bit lt x gt a specified bit inside the message Ser Pattern a bit pattern in the message 5 If Bit lt x gt is selected enter the bit number 6 If Ser Pattern is selected press the softkey again and define the pattern a Set the Bit Offset the number of bits before the pattern starts b Set the Number of Bits contained in the pattern c Enter the pattern either as binary input or as hexadecimal input e For binary input press Select Bit and enter the bit nu
374. lock Nominal bit time Sample point 70 96 The CAN bus interface uses an asynchronous transmission scheme The standard specifies a set of rules to resynchronize the local clock of a CAN node to the message Remote command BUS CAN SAMPlepoint on page 388 Bit rate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second The maximum bit rate for High Speed CAN is 1 Mbit s The bit rate is uniform and fixed for a given CAN bus To select a bit rate from the list of predefined values set Bit rate to Defined Bit Rate and then select the value with Predefined To set another value set Bit rate to User Bit Rate and then enter the value with User Remote command BUS CAN BITRate on page 388 Find Level The instrument analyzes all channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manually in the channel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Remote command CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel on page 364 11 6 2 CAN Trigger Settings Access SETUP Trigger gt Trigger type Protocol CAN gt Setup User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 181 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 0 ED 183 Mojo NERA 183 Gi MEC O cs ene 183 A sert abinde tnt as auda kde Ra
375. log signals for each channel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manually in the channel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Remote command CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel on page 364 EMN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 194 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 11 7 3 LIN Trigger Settings Access SETUP Trigger gt Trigger type Protocol LIN Setup Identifier EiTOl SEVBO EE 195 ei A 196 M A A PURIS 196 Bee tee 196 GSM caidas as 196 B 3 na aba 196 a A A EM 196 2 MD vr 197 o Nm 197 A A 197 LEE 197 ISI leie BEE 197 SS cessent tentent 197 TEEN 197 O EE 198 Start of Frame Triggers on the stop bit of the sync field Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 403 SYNC Wake Up Triggers after a wakeup frame Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 403 WKFRame Error lt type gt Identifies various errors in the frame You can select one or more error types as trigger condition The first key press enables the Error trigger type the second opens the Error menu Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 403 ERRCondition I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 195 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 Checksum lt Error type Triggers on a checksum error The checksum verifies the correct data transm
376. lt StartTime gt Sets the start time of the search area in relation to the trigger point if SEARch GATE MODE on page 346 is set to ABSolute Parameters lt StartTime gt Default unit s SEARch GATE ABSolute STOP lt StopTime gt Sets the end time of the search area in relation to the trigger point if SEARch GATE MODE on page 346 is set to ABSolute Parameters lt StopTime gt Default unit s eee User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 346 R amp S RTM Remote Control EES Command Reference 14 2 12 2 Edge Search Configuration SERE TRIGO EDGE GEOP oo daa 347 SEA TRIGSgsrEDGEIEEVel ni eret ener deeb cas ette perum xu tasa utu co ngu demie Ren iaa 347 SBARs TRIGger EDOE LEVE DEL Tac nido 347 SEARch TRIGger EDGE SLOPe Slope Sets the slope to be found Parameters lt Slope gt POSitive NEGative EITHer RST POS Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger EDGE LEVel Level Sets the voltage level for the edge search Parameters Level RST 0 6V Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch TRIGger EDGE LEVel DELTa lt DeltaLevel gt Sets a hysteresis range above and below the search level to avoid unwanted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level Parameters DeltaLevel Range Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set tings no upper limit RST 0 2V Firmware Software FW 03 400 14 2 12 3 Width Search Configuration A ee elei Ge E TEE 347
377. m The measurement value is displayed as f in the result table Period Measures the length of the left most signal period within the displayed section of the waveform The measurement value is displayed as T in the result table Amplitude Measures the amplitude of a square wave To do so the potential difference between high and low level Vbase and Vtop is calculated The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as VAmp in the result table Top Level Measures the mean value of the high level of a square wave To do so the mean value of the tilt is calculated without the overshoot The measurement and requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as Vtop in the result table Base Level Measures the mean value of the low level of a square wave To do so the mean value of the tilt is calculated without the overshoot The measurement requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as Vbase in the result table Pulse Width positive pulse JL Measures the width of a positive pulse A positive pulse consists of a rising edge followed by a falling edge The measurement and requires at least one complete period of a triggered signal The measured value is displayed as t T1 in the result table Oat User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 85 R amp SS9RTM Measurements m
378. m window and determines the position of the zoom area The zoom area is indicated by white lines in the original Y t window The zoom win dow displays the data in the defined zoom area from the main time base in greater detail User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 64 R amp S RTM Display nr e O a Zoom To configure the zoom area via the rotary knobs Pressing the horizontal SCALE rotary knob moves the focus between the Y t window Time Control the zoom area Zoom Control and the zoom window The currently selected screen area is highlighted and displayed in the information bar of the zoom window Depending on the selection the functions of the SCALE and POSITION rotary knobs may change 1 Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select Zoom Control or Zoom Win dow The functions for the rotary knobs are the same for both elements for very high zoom factors however it may be faster to scroll through with the Zoom Window focus 2 Turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob counter clockwise to enlarge the zoom area or clockwise to decrease it The zoom diagram and the Z parameter Zoom Time Base in the information bar above it are adapted 3 Turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob counter clockwise to move the zoom area to the left or clockwise to move it to the right The zoom diagram and the Tz parameter Zoom Time in the information bar above it are adapted The zoom window displays the data in the defined
379. mat for masks of the R amp S RTM It contains pairs of amplitude values in divisions their sample indexes and current instrument settings Thus the amplitude values are not related to time and voltage The data can be loaded back to the instrument for further use The format is not intended for analysis outside the R amp S RTM CSV Format In a Comma Separated Values text file the waveform is stored in a two columned table Columns are separated by a comma and the lines are separated by line breaks Nr n 0x0D 0x0A The first column contains the sample indexes and the second column contains the asso ciated amplitude values in divisions The first line indicates the units of the values in each column and the name of the waveform For each sample index two values minimum and maximum are written The range of amplitude values is 5 12 to 5 12 divisions The data can be loaded back to the instrument for further use Example CSV file Sa MSK1 DIV 0 000E 00 3 273E 00 0 000E 00 7 831E 0 1 000E 00 3 313E 00 1 000E 00 8 232E 0 2 000E 00 3 273E 00 2 000E 00 8 232E 0 3 000E 00 3 273E 00 3 000E 00 7 831E 0 4 000E 00 3 273E 00 IESSE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 119 R amp S9RTM Masks 9 2 O Working with Masks 000E 00 7 831E 0 000E 00 3 313E 00 000E 00 8 232E 0 000E 00 3 273E 00 000E 00 8 232E 0 000E 00 3 273E 00 000E 00 7 831E 0 000E 00 3 313E 00 000E 00 7 831E 0 000E 0
380. matical operation In addition to the value a decimal point the unit and an Sl prefix can be defined This softkey is only available if Constant is selected as one of the operands Constant Edit Constant Edit Equations Specifies a pre defined constant or a user defined constant for a mathematical operation Either one of the following pre defined constants can be selected or one of 10 user defined constants e Pi e 2 Pi e 1 2 Pi e e Value Edit Constant Edit Equations Specifies the value for a user defined constant This function is only available if one of the user defined constants is selected by the Constant softkey Decimal Point Edit Constant Edit Equations Moves the decimal point within the user defined constant value Prefix Edit Constant Edit Equations Defines an Sl prefix for the unit of a user defined constant value The following prefixes are available None m Milli 10 3 u Mikro 10 n Nano 10 p Piko 10 12 f Femto 10 15 __L___S E AA e gt gt gt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 104 Mathematics Reference for Mathematics a Atto 1018 z Zepto 10 y Yokto 107 K Kilo 103 M Mega 10 G Giga 10 T Tera 101 P Peta 1015 E Exa 1015 Z Zetta 10 Y Yotta 10 Unit Edit Constant Edit Equations Defines the unit of the user defined constant value The selected unit only has an effect on the displayed
381. may vary depending on which operation is performed first see also Preventing Overlapping Execution Reacting to malfunctions The service request is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should instruct the instrument to initiate a service request in case of malfunction The program should react appropriately to the service request Error queues The error queue should be queried after every service request in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Command Reference This chapter provides the description of all remote commands available for R amp S RTM The commands are sorted according to the menu structure of the instrument A list of commands in alphabetical order ist given in the List of Commands at the end of this documentation Conventions used in Remote Command Description Note the following conventions used in the remote command descriptions e Command usage If not specified otherwise commands can be used both for setting and for querying parameters If a command can be used for setting or querying only or if it initiates an event the usage is stated explicitely e Parameter usage If not specified otherwise a p
382. mber to be set The bits are counted from the message start the selected bit is highlighted in the pattern bit line Then enter the State of this bit 0 1 or X don t care Repeat these settings until all bit states are defined e For hexadecimal input press Select Nibble and select the four bits half byte to be set The selected nibble is highlighted in the lower pattern line Then press Value and turn the navigation knob to change the bits Repeat these settings until all nibbles are defined Trigger On Ser Pattern cS CH1 Clock CH2 T TA Ne NE MOSI CH3 MISO CH1 eee E m A SS Bit Bit 2 Bit 13 1st Bit after CS First Last Pattern 1011 1011 0110 xxxx XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 0xB 0xB 0x6 11 3 3 2 SPI SSPI Trigger Settings The complete SPI SSPI trigger is configured in the Source and Setup menus Trigger Trigger Type Setup Source Protocol SSPI y y User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 155 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 o Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled e SPI SSPITHgger ele 156 SPI SSPI Tigger Setip eere e ia 156 SPI SSPI Trigger Source Access TRIGGER SETUP gt Trigger Type Protocol SPI or SSPI gt Source MOSI MISO Select one of the lines as trigger source Remote command TRIGger A SOURCce SPI on page 364 SPI SSPI Trigger Setup Access TRIGGER SETUP gt Trigger T
383. me base and sample rate RST 50e 6 Default unit s Firmware Software FW 03 700 Data2Clock Search Configuration SEARch TRIGger DATatoclockCSOUree 122 4 1 dic ER SEENEN disses 353 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclocke OEEVS rn eec nacida 354 SEARcl TRIGger DATatoclockiDEEVE iiit roter e etre tB Ed enda 354 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel DEL Ta 354 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DEBE Vel DELTQ 2 gege ertet enu eate uat aha dica 354 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclockkCEDGOS eere rave rne a E ua oo na AEN 354 GEARch TRilGoerDATatoclockHTlMe nente eene nn nn nn canon 354 SEARchETRIGger DATatoclocksS FIM acci once pedet utut odio t ne aree dieta AE ee 355 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CSOurce lt ClockSource gt Selects the input channel of the clock signal Parameters lt ClockSource gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 MAS RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 RST CH1 Firmware Software FW 03 800 EA SSRIS Say User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 353 R8S RTM Remote Control AAA A AAA A A A Command Reference SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel lt ClockLevel gt Sets the voltage level for the clock signal Clock level and clock edge define the reference point for setup and hold time Parameters lt ClockLevel gt Range depends on vertical scale Firmware Software FW 03 800 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel lt DataLevel gt Sets the voltage level forthe data signal The dat
384. me ins User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 269 R8S RTM Remote Control m J P H Jn p Command Reference Example See chapter 14 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 431 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA XINCrement CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope XINCrement CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA XINCrement REFCurve lt m gt DATA XINCrement Return the time difference between two adjacent samples of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Xincrement gt Time in s Example See chapter 14 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 431 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA YORigin CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YORigin CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA YORigin REFCurve lt m gt DATA YORigin Return the voltage value for binary value 0 of the indicated waveform The commands are relevant for data conversion if binary data format is defined FORM UINT 8 16 32 Return values lt Yorigin gt Voltage in V Example See chapter 14 3 1 2 Reading Waveform Data in Unsigned Inte ger Format on page 431 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA YINCrement CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope YINCrement CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA YINCrement REFCurve lt m gt DATA YINCrement Return t
385. mmand SEARch TRIGger RUNT RANGe on page 352 Width Sets the reference runt pulse width the nominal value for comparisons Remote command SEARch TRIGger RUNT WIDTh on page 353 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 137 R8S RTM Search m Jw Reference for Search Menu Variation Sets a range At to the reference Width if comparison is set to Equal or Not equal The instrument finds pulses inside or outside the range width x At Remote command SEARch TRIGger RUNT DELTa on page 353 10 3 7 Data2Clock Search The settings for Data2Clock search are provided in two menus in the Setup menu you define the clock polarity setup and hold times and in the Source Setup menu you define the waveforms to be used and the levels and hysteresis for each source 10 3 7 1 Data2Clock Source Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Data2Clock gt Source Setup For Data2Clock search two sources have to be defined a clock and a data waveform For each waveform the level and the hysteresis can be set individually Level Hysteresis Data Level Hysteresis 600 mY 200mY 500 mY 200mY Clock Selects the input channel of the clock signal Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CSOurce on page 353 Data Selects the input channel of the data signal Remote command SEARch SOURce on page 346 Level Set the voltage levels for clock and data
386. mmand TIMebase SCALe on page 273 2 3 2 Acquisition Menu TB 100us T 2us Acquisition Sample Mode Real Time The ACQUISITION key in the Horizontal functional block opens the Acquisition softkey menu where you select the acquisition mode Acquisition modes control the data pro cessing how the waveform is built from the captured ADC samples The softkeys are placed on two menu pages The current acquisition mode is shown in the top information bar the second value from right 10 MSals Avg 16 1 7 N Decimation Mode Wim Arithmetic No of Averages Waveform Rate Interpolation Gx y b A A d User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 23 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup AAA AAA a A A A Reference for Waveform Setup Sample ModE cere etc rtr n npo ud e RR Rn hu AR ki tie haian RdA AA 24 Decimation Mode iio idad 24 Watek ng EE 25 drei mme LE 25 peso Ie T C 25 Biet EE 26 Wave OMI RAO pcc aao Rene Me HERREN CX inea Rand e uma ese RE RAM d ISTE 26 IMEI OL AGO e 26 i usos li id t 26 Sample Mode Defines how the waveform is created from the sample points which are acquired by the ADC Real Time At slow time base settings the oscilloscope can acquire enough points to create an accurate waveform so the sampled points of the input sig nal are used directly to build the waveform With fast time base
387. mmands SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments Please take the respectively valid instruction set from the documentation delivered with the device If you type a wrong command or use a wrong syntax the device creates an error message which is not send immediately complying with the standard but can be requested separately In this case you will not get a response An easy way to request the error messages is to use the two buttons Screen Data SCPI Device Control Command ban Send Last Error Message All Error Messages Rohde amp Schwarz RTM1054 1305 0008K54 101634 03 031 Response 14 1 2 3 Connecting with the Instrument VISA Address String Only the IP address of the instrument is required to set up the connection It identifies the instrument in the network and is part of the resource string used by the programs to identify and control the instrument Depending on the communication mode VXI 11 protocol or raw socket mode the resource string has different forms IP address and port number are listed in the Ethernet Settings of R amp S RTM see also chapter 14 1 2 2 Configuring LAN Parameters on page 233 If the LAN is supported by a DNS server the host name can be used instead of the IP address The DNS server Domain Name System server translates the host name to the IP address To assign a host name to the R amp S RTM select SETUP gt More gt Device Name VXI 11 protocol TCPIP IP
388. mote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern SOURce on page 355 E state of the selected source channel The states are H High the signal voltage is higher than the threshold level L Low the signal voltage is lower than the threshold level X Don t care the channel does not affect the search Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern SOURce on page 355 Combination Sets the logical combination of the channel states AND The required states of all channels must appear in the input signal at the same time Or At least one of the channels must have the required state NAND Not and operator at least one of the channels does not have the required state NOR Not or operator none of the channels has the required state Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern FUNCtion on page 355 RETE RU RA E E SSS SSS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 141 R amp S RTM Search SS SS A A ee Reference for Search Menu Comparison Sets the condition how the duration of a steady pattern is compared with the given limit s The three settings Width Variation and Comparison define the time range for keeping up the true result of the state pattern The same conditions as with width search are used see Comparison on page 134 Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh RANGe on page 356 Width Sets the limit time of a steady pattern the nominal value for comparisons Remote command SEARch TRIGger PATTern WID
389. ms used for the averaging is defined using the command This mode is useful for noise rejection RST OFF CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT AVERage COUNt Defines the number of spectrums used for averaging if CALCulate MATH lt m gt ARIThmetics is set to AVERage Suffix lt m gt Parameters lt AverageCount gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Integer value Range 2 to 512 Increment 2 n RST 2 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT MAGNitude SCALe Defines the scaling unit of the y axis To set the scale value use CALCulate MATH lt m gt SCALe Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 335 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control GENUINE e men Command Reference Parameters Magnitude Scale LINear DBM DBV LiNear linear scaling displays the RMS value of the voltage DBM logarithmic scaling related to 1 mW DBV logarithmic scaling related to 1 Veff RST DBM Example CALC MATH FFT MAGN SCAL DBM CALC MATH SCAL 20 Set the Y scale of the FFT window to 20 dBm CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution ADJusted Queries the effective resolution bandwidth Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Retu
390. mware and help update package is available in the Downloads gt Firmware section on the Rohde 8 Schwarz Scope of the Art Web page 1 2 Conventions Used in the Documentation This chapter describes the conventions used throughout this documentation 1 2 1 Typographical Conventions The following text markers are used throughout this documentation Convention Description Graphical user interface ele All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen such as dia ments log boxes menus options buttons and softkeys are enclosed by quota tion marks KEYS Key names are written in capital letters File names commands File names commands coding samples and screen output are distin program code guished by their font Input Input to be entered by the user is displayed in italics Links Links that you can click are displayed in blue font References References to other parts of the documentation are enclosed by quotation marks LEE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 10 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup Basics 2 Acquisition and Waveform Setup The chapter describes the horizontal and vertical basic settings including the acquisition and probe settings 2 1 Basics This chapter provides background information on the essential settings in the vertical and horizontal systems on acquisition setup and probing 2 1 1 Vertical System The controls and parameters of
391. n a white background RST COLor Example chapter 14 3 3 1 Saving Screenshots to File on page 433 SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter SELect lt PrinterName gt Selects a configured printer Parameters lt PrinterName gt String parameter Enter the string as it is returned with SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt or SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 415 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 14 2 Command Reference SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt Queries the name of the first printer in the list of printers The names of other installed printers can be queried with the SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT command Return values lt PrinterName gt String parameter If no printer is configured an empty string is returned Usage Query only SYSTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate NEXT Queries the name of the next printer installed The SySTem COMMunicate PRINter ENUMerate FIRSt command should be sent previously to return to the beginning of the printer list and query the name of the first printer Return values lt PrinterName gt String parameter After all available printer names have been returned an empty string enclosed by quotation marks is returned for the next query Further queries are answered by a query error Usage Query only Saving and Loading Data MMEMory Commands The Mass MEMomory subsystem
392. n el producto y o puede causar choques el ctricos fuego o lesiones Salvo indicaci n contraria los productos no est n impermeabilizados ver tambi n el cap tulo Estados operativos y posiciones de funcionamiento punto 1 Por eso es necesario tomar las medidas necesarias para evitar la entrada de l quidos En caso contrario existe peligro de choque el ctrico para el usuario o de da os en el producto que tambi n pueden redundar en peligro para las personas No utilice el producto en condiciones en las que pueda producirse o ya se hayan producido condensaciones sobre el producto o en el interior de ste como p ej al desplazarlo de un lugar fr o a otro caliente La entrada de agua aumenta el riesgo de choque el ctrico Antes de la limpieza desconecte por completo el producto de la alimentaci n de tensi n p ej red de alimentaci n o bater a Realice la limpieza de los aparatos con un pa o suave que no se deshilache No utilice bajo ning n concepto productos de limpieza qu micos como alcohol acetona o diluyentes para lacas nitrocelul sicas 1171 0000 42 07 Page 11 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Funcionamiento 1 El uso del producto requiere instrucciones especiales y una alta concentraci n durante el manejo Debe asegurarse que las personas que manejen el producto est n a la altura de los requerimientos necesarios en cuanto a aptitudes f sicas ps quicas y emocionales ya que de otra manera no se
393. n gt BYTE lt o gt ACKStart Returns the start time of the acknowledge bit of the specified byte Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame lt o gt Selects the byte number Return values lt AckStartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt ACCess Returns the acknowledge bit value of the specified data byte Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame lt o gt Selects the byte number Return values lt Acknowledge gt INComplete ACK NACK ElTHer Usage Query only I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 380 R amp S RTM Remote Control EENEG Command Reference BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt COMPlete Returns the state of the byte Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame lt o gt Selects the byte number Return values lt ByteComplete gt ON OFF ON Data byte was received completely Usage Query only 14 2 13 6 UART e UART Configuration ener enne nnne 381 e US gH DP 384 UART Decode Results cocino ace tvasaaadendcatvencden lt aasverduevensaasanadeaats 385 UART Configuration BUS IUAR T RA SOURCE E iia 381 BUS UAR CDATA SOUROS RE 381 BUSUAR FESO URGE m 382 BUS AR TE 382 BUSUART IDATA POLAY EE 382 BUSUAR E EE 382 BUS UART EE 382 BUS UART SB E 383 BUS UART BAU DAG iia adidas 383 BUS VART BITIM EE 383 CH
394. n uncompressed format files are large and saving might take some time e PNG Portable Network Graphics is a graphic format with lossless data compression Remote command HCOPy LANGuage on page 415 Color mode Defines the color mode for saved screenshots Grayscale Black and white output Color Color output Inverted Inverts the colors of the output i e a dark waveformis printed on a white background Remote command HCOPy COLor SCHeme on page 415 AAA A User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 220 12 2 6 Saving and Loading Print Prints the screenshot on a printer connected to the USB connector on the front or rear panel The printer output is configured with SETUP gt Printer The function is only available if a printer is connected Remote command HCOPy IMMediate on page 414 References Masks and Equation Sets Import Export The File menu provides the functions to copy mask files equation sets and reference waveform files from one storage device to another For details refer to the relevant chapters e Reference waveforms chapter 5 Reference Waveforms on page 71 e Masks chapter 9 Masks on page 118 e Equation sets chapter 7 Mathematics on page 94 e Export Import procedure chapter 12 2 1 2 Importing and Exporting Data on page 207 R amp S9RTM General Instrument Setup Firmware and Options 13 General Instrument Setup This chapter describes the firmware update the activ
395. n values lt HWAcqTime gt Range Depends on various settings Default unit s Usage Query only TIMebase ACQTime lt AcquisitionTime gt Defines the time of one acquisition that is the time across the 10 divisions of the diagram Timebase Scale 10 Parameters AcquisitionTime RST 1 ms Default unit s TIMebase RANGe lt AcquisitionTime gt Defines the time of one acquisition that is the time across the 10 divisions of the diagram Timebase Scale 10 Parameters lt AcquisitionTime gt Range and increment depend on time base and other settings RST 1 ms Default unit s TiMebase DIVisions Queries the number of horizontal divisions on the screen Return values lt HorizDivCount gt Range 10 to 10 Increment 0 RST 10 Default unit div ERA AA e gt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 273 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 4 3 Command Reference Usage Query only TiMebase POSition Offset Defines the trigger position trigger offset the time interval between trigger point and reference point to analize the signal some time before or after the trigger event See also TIMebase REFerence on page 274 Parameters Offset Range Depends on time base setting RST 0 Default unit s TiMebase REFerence lt ReferencePoint gt Sets the reference point of the time scale Time Reference in of the display The reference point defines which part of the waveform is shown If the trigger
396. n with persistence the mode can display rare signal anomalies MSAMples Maximum sample rate The instrument acquires the signal at max imum sample rate and uses the full memory depth The result is a waveform with maximum number of waveform samples high degree of accuracy and low risk of aliasing RST AUTO CHANnel lt m gt TYPE lt DecimationMode gt Selects the method to reduce the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform points with lower sample rate Suffix m The command affects all channels regardless of the indicated channel number The suffix can be omitted Parameters DecimationMode SAMPle PDETect HRESolution SAMPIe Input data is acquired with a sample rate which is aligned to the time base horizontal scale and the record length PDETect Peak Detect the minimum and the maximum of n samples in a sample interval are recorded as waveform points HRESolution High resolution The average of n sample points is recorded as waveform point RST SAMPle ERA SSS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 276 R8S RTM Remote Control EENEG Command Reference CHANnel lt m gt ARIThmetics lt TrArithmetic gt Selects the method to build the resulting waveform from several consecutive acquisitions of the signal Suffix lt m gt The command affects all channels regardless of the indicated channel number The suffix can be omitted Parameters lt TrArithmetic gt OFF ENVelope AVERage SM
397. nRate gt ADC sample rate Range 2 5E3 to 5E9 Increment 1E3 RST 5E9 Default unit Hz Usage Query only ACQuire SRATe Returns the sample rate that is the number of recorded waveform samples per second Return values lt SampleRate gt Range 2 to 1E11 Increment depends on time base waveform rate number of active channels RST 1E7 Default unit Sa s Usage Query only Vertical CAINS EMS VAG a dd 278 A A 279 RAINS m SCALE A D A ee 279 ea unen antea hann omnee anrea a RR RR ARR Da Rr EAR RR Ra RD TRAE Rea ades 279 CHANDER Mme POS i uuo stie tes aaa Eee ia aes d dese deu emu 280 yr direc m 280 GHANnelsm BANDNWWIGlli EE 280 TEE E De Ee 281 ee ene DEE 281 CHANN MA S EE 281 ele FEN Ee 22 in diia 282 CHANG me LABEL ui id a it ai 282 CHANG me EABeIS TATR o iaa 282 CHANnel lt m gt STATe lt State gt Switches the channel signal on or off Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 278 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control GENRE el Command Reference Parameters State ON OFF CHANnel lt m gt COUPling Coupling Selects the connection of the indicated channel signal Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Param
398. nables the FFT mode and opens the FFT menu FFT S a Ee EE F Wim Arithmetic See also e chapter 8 2 Configuring and Using FFT Calculations on page 107 e chapter 8 1 FFT Display on page 106 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 111 R8S RTM FFT Reference for FFT key 2 EEN 112 une E ti aisla 112 No Of Vera E 113 Viele ro EE 113 ber 114 aua xxu 114 Deeler 115 E AN 115 GE EE 115 CA idas 115 A nenn ar araar narar nnn 116 PO iria li ii did 116 PA O 116 A 116 E A ie P LU 116 L Main Tina Base iii iii ad 116 Fee 117 Ger ET e 117 X A E AA TAE E I ETEA 117 FFT The FFT key activates and deactivates a Fast Fourier Transformation FFT for the most recently selected channel and provides functions to configure and display FFTs If activated the FFT key lights up Two windows are displayed the signal vs time window at the top and the result window of the FFT analysis at the bottom When deactivated the previous display is restored To display the FFT for a different channel press the corresponding channel key Remote command CALC MATH EXPR FFTMAG CHx see also CALCulate MATH lt m gt EXPRession DEFine on page 331 Wfm Arithmetic Defines the arithmetic mode for FFT calculation and display None The FFT is performed without any additional weighting or postprocess ing of the acquired data The new input data is acquired and dis
399. nalysis at the bottom Auto CHL clippingtV 4 DC Refresh Complete Span 6 MHz Center 1 99 MHz 8 MSa Refresh CH1 20mv paaa Y S A En Ae eee v EE Z Mode Window Y Y pues FFT Setup Y t Setup FFT Off Hanning j Gam rm 4 4 The display can be restricted to the results for a certain time base extract and to a speci fied frequency range The time range is indicated by white lines in the Y t diagram see also figure 8 1 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 106 R amp S9RTM FFT Configuring and Using FFT Calculations Section and the FFT frequency range FFT Control by pressing the horizontal SCALE rotary knob The currently selected screen element is highlighted and displayed in the information bar Depending on the selection the functions of the SCALE and POSITION rotary knobs may change o Move the focus between the Y t window Time Control the FFT time base extract Time The usual channel parameters are displayed in the information bar above the Y t window see the general display information described in the Getting Started manual In addition FFT specific parameters are indicated in the information bar above the FFT window The following information is given there W 450 us P 118 us Span 10 MHz Center 2 5 MHz 12 5MSais Envelope CH1 20 mY 1 2 3 4 Description Setting 1 Width of the time base extract for which FFT is calculated YT Window 2 Position of time base extract Po
400. nd user data for example reference files equation sets masks from the internal storage Calibration data remains in the storage EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 229 Reference for Setup Use this function before you send the instrument to the service If the instrument is used in a secured environment the function ensures that all sensitive data is removed before the instrument leaves the secured area To start secure erase select OK Do not turn off the instrument before the process has been completed See also document Resolving Security Issues When Working in Secure Areas that is delivered on the documentation CD ROM and on the R amp S RTM internet web page Device Name Enter the name of the instrument LED Intensity Defines the luminosity of illuminated front panel keys and rotary knobs R8S RTM Remote Control Basics 14 Remote Control 14 1 Basics This chapter provides basic information on operating an instrument via remote control 14 1 1 Remote Control Interfaces For remote control the LAN USB or the GPIB interface can be used The GPIB interface Option RTM B10 replaces the LAN USB type B interface module on the rear panel Table 14 1 Remote control interfaces and protocols Interface Protocols address string Remarks Local Area VXI 11 protocol The LAN connector is located on the rear panel of Network TCPIP lt IP_address gt inst0 INSTR the instrument LAN See also
401. nds on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 386 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 13 7 Command Reference BUS UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP BUS UART TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified symbol word Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame o Selects the word number Return values lt StopTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS UART RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt VALue BUS UART TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt VALue Return the value of the specified symbol word on the Rx line and Tx line respectively Suffix lt n gt WM Selects the frame o Selects the word number Return values Value Decimal value Range O to 511 Increment 1 Usage Query only CAN EU Eet TE m 387 e CAIN TOGET TOT LLL DLL 389 e CAN Decode Results convocados SENNENG aa RS XX S iaaa ia Eg eR ee gna 392 e DANS EP 397 CAN Configuration BUS CAN DATA SOUR GO ni iius ves daa Ai Ri 388 BUSCAN isc 388 BUSCAN SAMBIODO NE P T 388 BUS CAN BIRA O ee etre tener o MI e ees 388 CHANnelmmzTHbesbold ElNDlevel 388 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 387 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control MCERGMMCIO
402. negative pulses RECount Count rising edges FECount Count falling edges Sets two vertical and one horizontal cursor line The time base is defined by the vertical cursors the horizontal cursor defines the threshold value MEAN Mean value CURSor lt m gt RESult RMS Root mean square Values are measured between two vertical cursor lines E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 314 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control PEEGEEGMENECOUMCO ol na Command Reference Value Description Queries for results RTIMe Rise time tr CURSor lt m gt RESult FTIMe Fall time tf Measures the rise or fall time of the first edge after the first vertical cursor between the upper and lower refer ence levels The reference level for rise and fall time measurement is set with REFLevel RELative MODE PEAK Vpp absolute difference between the two peak values CURSor lt m gt RESult UPEakvalue Vp upper peak value LPEakvalue Vp lower peak value Values are measured between two vertical cursor lines BWIDth Burst width the duration of a burst Two vertical cursors CURSor m RESult mark the beginning and the end of the burst The hori zontal cursor sets the threshold value and the time between the first and the last edge of the burst is return
403. ng a pause Remote command MASK TEST on page 340 New Mask Opens a submenu to define a new mask for testing Total 0 0s Copy Channel Y Position Stretch Y Width Y Width X Save Nn Ie Nh NA See also chapter 9 2 1 Creating New Masks on page 121 Copy Channel New Mask Creates a new mask from the envelope waveform of the selected channel and stores it in the instrument Remote command MASK CHCopy on page 340 Y Position New Mask Moves the mask vertically within the display Turn the Navigation rotary knob to change the y position The current position is indicated as an offset from the center in divisions a positive value indicates the waveform was moved upwards a negative value indicates the waveform was moved down Remote command MASK YPOSition on page 341 Stretch Y New Mask Changes the vertical scaling to stretch the mask in y direction Turn the Navigation rotary knob clockwise to increase the factor or counterclockwise to decrease the factor A value over 100 stretches the amplitudes a value less than 100 compresses the amplitudes Remote command MASK YSCale on page 341 Width Y New Mask Changes the width of the mask in vertical direction E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 125 R amp S RTM Masks Reference for MASKS key The specified number of divisions is added to the y values of the upper mask limit and subtracted from the y values of the lower mask lim
404. ng the second one In addition to the threshold amplitudes you can define a time limit for the runt in the same way as for width search runts with exact width shorter or longer than a given time or runts inside or outside the allow able time range For settings see chapter 10 3 6 Runt Setup on page 137 The Data2Clock search also known as setup hold finds violation of setup and hold times It analyzes the relative timing between two sig nals a data signal and the synchronous clock signal Many systems require that the data signal must be steady for some time before and after the clock edge Setup time is the time that the data signal is steady before clock edge Hold time is the time that the data signal is steady after clock edge For settings see chapter 10 3 7 Data2Clock Search on page 138 The pattern search finds logical combinations of channel states inside or outside a specified time range For each channel its state and threshold level is defined The states are combined logically and the time of true pattern results is compared with a specified time range For settings see chapter 10 3 8 Pattern Search on page 140 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 132 R8S RTM Search m Reference for Search Menu Protocol The protocol search finds various events in decoded data of CAN and LIN signals for example a specified frame t
405. ngth gt e HardCOPy DEVice COLor Boolean e HardCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt e HardCOPy IMMediate e HardCOPy ITEM ALL e HardCOPy ITEM LABel lt string gt e HardCOPy PAG El DIMensions QUADrant lt N gt e HardCOPy PAG e HardCOPy PAG Gl ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait SCALe lt numeric value gt El e MMEMory COPY file source file destination gt ENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value S e SENSe FREQuency STOP numeric value S E NSe LIST FREQuency lt numeric_value gt lt numeric value gt Long and short form The mnemonics feature a long form and a short form The short form is marked by upper case letters the long form corresponds to the complete word Either the short form or the long form can be entered other abbreviations are not permitted Example HardCOPy DEVice COLor ON is equivalent to HCOP DEV COL ON Case insensitivity Upper case and lower case notation only serves to distinguish the two forms in the man ual the instrument itself is case insensitive Numeric suffixes If a command can be applied to multiple instances of an object e g specific channels or sources the required instances can be specified by a suffix added to the command Numeric suffixes are indicated by angular brackets lt 1 4 gt n lt i gt and are replaced by a single
406. nnel If no level can be found the existing value remains unchanged and you can set the thresholds manually in the channel menu CH N gt More page 2 gt Threshold See Threshold on page 31 Remote command CHANnel m THReshold FINDlevel on page 364 FC Trigger Triggering ob Poss oer roe RARE SERRA ERR ARUM Nee E RHENO cupa 163 FC Trigger Settings eed etre ger ren tne erben ree rta e Reha SEN 164 Triggering on PC Prerequisites The PC interface is configured After configuration the trigger type Pro tocol I2C is available See chapter 11 4 2 1 Configuring C on page 162 Triggers are only available if Decode is enabled bk oa WM Press the SETUP key in the trigger area of the front panel Select the Trigger Type Protocol I2C Press Setup Press the softkey of the required trigger condition Start begin of the message Stop end of the message Restart repeated start condition Acknowledge transfer of a data byte is not acknowledged Read Write complex trigger condition containing read or write access of the master slave address or and a bit pattern in the message If Read Write is selected press the softkey again and define the condition a b Press Master and select read or write access of the master Configure the Address of the slave e Select the Address Length 7 bit or 10 bit e Press Slave Address and turn the navigation knob to set the
407. nnel instruments The default instrument settings can be restored with PRESET or FILE gt Device Settings gt Default sett Saving and Loading Device Settings e To save device settings on page 214 e To load device settings on page 215 To save device settings 1 Press FILE gt Device Settings gt Save 2 Configure the storage location as described in To select the storage directory on page 207 3 Enter the file name as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 207 gt A Optionally press Comment and enter a description of the settings 5 Press Save ERA A e LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLXSL XX User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 214 R amp S RTM Data and File Management Saving and Loading Note To save the device settings several times by pressing simply the PRINT key assign the Device Settings to the PRINT key as described in chapter 12 2 2 1 Configuring the PRINT Key Behavior on page 213 To load device settings 1 Press FILE gt Device Settings gt Load A file explorer is displayed 2 If necessary select the storage device and directory described in To select the stor age directory on page 207 3 Select the file that contains the device settings Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the files 4 Press Load The saved settings are loaded to the R amp S RTM 12 2 3 2 Device Settings Menu With FILE gt Device Setting
408. nob and move the position to be marked to the reference point usually in the middle of the display 2 Press the SET key to insert a new marker at the reference position To select a marker When you select a marker it is automatically moved to the reference point of the display 1 Press the NEXT key to move the next right marker to the reference point of the display or zoom area 2 Press the PREV key to move the previous left marker to the reference point of the display or zoom area To remove a marker 1 Select the marker to be deleted using the NEXT or PREV key 2 Press the CLEAR key to remove the marker at the reference position To zoom into a marker position 1 Seta marker in the display as described above User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 68 R amp S RTM Display m O j c Markers 2 If not yet active activate the zoom function by pressing the ZOOM key The marker lines are displayed both in the original window and in the zoom window 3 Select the marker that indicates the area you want to zoom into using the NEXT or PREV key The center of the zoom area is moved to the marker see figure 4 3 4 If necessary fine tune the position of the zoom area around the marker as described in To configure the zoom area via the rotary knobs on page 65 4 4 2 Reference for Markers The marker keys are used for both marker types timestamp markers and se
409. ns the menu to set the identifier pattern After setting the ID type and the Com pare condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte Identifier Setup ID type Remote command TRIGger A CAN IDENtifier on page 390 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 184 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis AA E n _ 5 CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 ID type Identifier Setup Identifier Selects the length of the identifier 11 bit for CAN base frames or 29 bits for CAN exten ded frames Remote command TRIGger A CAN ITYPe on page 390 Compare lt Identifier Setup Identifier Sets the comparison condition If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only O and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value Remote command TRIGger A CAN ICONdition on page 390 Bit Identifier Setup Identifier Selects the number of the bit in the pattern for bit by bit input For each selected bit enter the State State Identifier Setup Identifier Toggles the logic state of the selected bit O low 1 high or X don t care Byte Identifier Setup Identifier Selects the byte for input of the pattern For each
410. nt data device settings mask definitions equation sets waveform data and screenshots Data can be stored in the instrument or on external device it can be copied and converted depending on the available formats Ee EH uoo iia 206 Quick Access with PEINT Key cian p ari ien 212 Device SEIS dir 214 9 VASTOS iet edidere pesante ad indias 216 AS Le e reri re erue ee Ve rer E ede it a ru dev Fk ana res 219 e References Masks and Equation Sets Import Export sss 221 12 2 1 Storage Locations The R amp S RTM provides three basic storage locations to store any data In the following these locations are refered to as storage devices e The Internal storage device is a flash memory in the instrument with about 8 MB memory size e The Front USB storage device indicates a USB flash drive that is connected to the USB connector on the front panel of the instrument e The Rear USB storage device indicates a USB flash drive that is connected to the USB connector on the rear panel of the instrument On each storage device data can be organized in folders as usual Therefore the R amp S RTM allows you to create folders or remove them wherever you need Device settings reference waveforms masks and equations sets can be directly saved to and loaded from any storage device Waveforms and screenshots can be saved to USB storage devices only To copy data from one storage device to another the Impo
411. o WAVE nin c cria Softkey source Track Scalitigi iiir ias D Data2Clock Decimal Point SOMM OY sect RR Decimation Mode iss D pz PUTENT Default values le 266 Delay measurement seeeseeeieeseirereeserrrrirneserrrnnne 83 93 prc 31 Destination SOMMCY P 212 Device settings IMPOTUEXDOTE p rencia 207 AAA O 214 Menu saving Ss Saving and loading sees SOMM CY ack Device specific commands ous DHCP E interface settihg ME Differential probe Digitization threshold seeeeenene Directory name El ME 207 Display wo nier eR RT EN 50 menu e Double daggert erret terere rn broderie na 247 DOWN p i 245 ys m 75 83 E Edge Sealed ee cotum amr t 133 Edit Constant EE 104 Edit Equations E 99 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 ENADB le 252 Enable registers Ic 266 lov CREE 25 Eq Set Label Clo ij ida 105 Equation Let A 95 label SOfIKGy 1 iced ie e tuc decedere 98 99 Equation Label SOMKOY casi ld tail 105 Equation set CANO cuartas darian 96 Equation Set label 105 Equation sets lee e 207 Import Export 5 nnne intor 221 lOAGING ge 96 saving Equ
412. o a printer connected to the USB connector on the front or rear panel e SCRSave Saves a screenshot according to printer output settings e WFMSave Saves the waveform data according to the screenshot output settings For output settings see chapter 14 2 14 1 Screenshots on page 413 ___ __S AAA AA e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLU U LLUMSSMMXS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 342 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 12 Command Reference Parameters lt EventMode gt OFF EACH SINGle CYCLic OFF No action is executed EACH The selected action is executed on each violation of the mask SINGIe The selected action is executed once after the n th violation CYCLic The selected action is executed repeatedly after each n th viola tion The number of violations n is set with the relevant RST OFF Firmware Software FW 03 800 MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt MASK ACTion STOP EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt MASK ACTion PRINt EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENt COUNt lt EventCount gt Sets the number of mask violations after which the action is executed The command is CYCLIC Parameters lt EventCount gt Integer value number of mask violations Firmware Software FW 03 800 Search e General Search CONIGUIQUON ss coord eaaet in 344 e Edge Search Configuration 25 ccccccecceeccceeecsceee
413. o the risk of explosions fire and or serious personal injury and in some cases death Batteries and rechargeable batteries with alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells must be handled in accordance with the EN 62133 standard 1 2 Cells must not be taken apart or crushed Cells or batteries must not be exposed to heat or fire Storage in direct sunlight must be avoided Keep cells and batteries clean and dry Clean soiled connectors using a dry clean cloth Cells or batteries must not be short circuited Cells or batteries must not be stored in a box or in a drawer where they can short circuit each other or where they can be short circuited by other conductive materials Cells and batteries must not be removed from their original packaging until they are ready to be used Cells and batteries must not be exposed to any mechanical shocks that are stronger than permitted If a cell develops a leak the fluid must not be allowed to come into contact with the skin or eyes If contact occurs wash the affected area with plenty of water and seek medical aid Improperly replacing or charging cells or batteries that contain alkaline electrolytes e g lithium cells can cause explosions Replace cells or batteries only with the matching Rohde amp Schwarz type see parts list in order to ensure the safety of the product Cells and batteries must be recycled and kept separate from residual waste Rechargeable batteries and normal batteries
414. odo de protecci n IP 2X uso solamente en estancias interiores utilizaci n hasta 2000 m sobre el nivel del mar transporte hasta 4500 m sobre el nivel del mar Se aplicar una tolerancia de 10 sobre el voltaje nominal y de 5 sobre la frecuencia nominal Categor a de sobrecarga el ctrica 2 ndice de suciedad 2 No sit e el producto encima de superficies veh culos estantes o mesas que por sus caracter sticas de peso o de estabilidad no sean aptos para l Siga siempre las instrucciones de instalaci n del fabricante cuando instale y asegure el producto en objetos o estructuras p ej paredes y estantes Si se realiza la instalaci n de modo distinto al indicado en la documentaci n del producto se pueden causar lesiones o en determinadas circunstancias incluso la muerte No ponga el producto sobre aparatos que generen calor p ej radiadores o calefactores La temperatura ambiente no debe superar la temperatura m xima especificada en la documentaci n del producto o en la hoja de datos En caso de sobrecalentamiento del producto pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte Seguridad el ctrica Si no se siguen o se siguen de modo insuficiente las indicaciones del fabricante en cuanto a seguridad el ctrica pueden producirse choques el ctricos incendios y o lesiones graves con posible consecuencia de muerte 1 Antes de la puesta en marcha del producto se d
415. of Protocol Analysis 2 Press the More softkey 3 Press Threshold and enter the voltage value 4 Repeat step 1 to 3 for all channels that are used for protocol analysis To configure decoding and data display 1 Press the PROTOCOL key on the front panel 2 Press the Display softkey and select the decoding format Binary Hexadecimal Decimal or ASCII 3 Press Decode to display the content of the messages in an easily readable and comprehensible form gt A To adjust the position and size of decoded information on the screen use the vertical POSITION and SCALE rotary knobs 5 To display the individual bit lines above the decoded data press Bits Reference for Protocol Decoding The common settings in the Protocol menu define how the decoded signal is displayed Bus Type Defines the bus or protocol type for analysis For most types a special option to the instrument is required Remote command BUS TYPE on page 359 Decode Decodes the signal according to the protocol configuration and displays the decoded signal the content of every message The decoding format is set with Display Remote command BUS STATe on page 359 Bits Displays the individual bit lines above the decoded bus line Remote command BUS DSIGnals on page 360 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 145 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 1 3 11 1 3 1 Basics of Protocol Analysis Display Sets the decoding forma
416. oftkey Active sounds are highlighted Control Beep Sound Generates a sound for general control events e g reaching the rotary encoder end or changing the measuring mode in the Automeasure menu Error Beep Sound Generates a a sound if an error occurs in the instrument e g when the input exceeds 50 Q or a false value is entered in a dialog Trigger Beep Sound Generates a sound when the trigger condition is fulfilled Self Alignment Opens a submenu to perform selftest and self alignment of the instrument and to check the results Self Test amp Self Alignment Self Alignment Checks if a self alignment has been executed successfully If not the self alignment is executed To start the process press the Start softkey E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 228 R amp S RTM General Instrument Setup BEE Reference for Setup Self Alignment Self Alignment Allows you to execute an internal self alignment of the instrument Alignment is only exe cuted when you press the Start softkey When data from several input channels is displayed atthe same time it may be necessary to align the data in order to synchronize the time bases amplitudes and positions This is the case for example when strong temperature changes occur Start Self Alignment Starts the internal self calibration of the instrument Status information is displayed on the screen Abort Self Alignment Aborts the internal self calibr
417. om several acquisitions of a repetive signal at a different time in relation to the trigger point RST RTIME ACQuire INTerpolate lt Interpolation gt Defines the interpolation mode See also Interpolation on page 26 Parameters lt Interpolation gt SINX LiNear Linear interpolation between two adjacent sample points SINX Interpolation by means of a sin x x curve SMHD Sample amp Hold causes a histogram like interpolation RST SINX ACQuire AVERage COUNt lt AverageCount gt Defines the number of waveforms used to calculate the average waveform The higher the number the better the noise is reduced Parameters lt AverageCount gt Only numbers from the 2 progression are permitted 2 4 8 Range 2 to 1024 RST 2 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 275 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m O J e Command Reference ACQuire WRATe WaveformRate Defines the mode to set the sample rate samples per second saved in the memory and the waveform acquisition rate waveforms per second Parameters lt WaveformRate gt AUTO MWAVeform MSAMples AUTO To display the best waveform the instrument selects the optimum combination of waveform acquisition rate and sample rate using the full memory depth MWAVeform Maximum waveform rate The instrument combines sample rate and memory depth to acquire at maximum waveform acquisition rate In connectio
418. on IEEE 488 2 defines a distinction between overlapped and sequential commands e Asequential command is one which finishes executing before the next command starts executing Commands that are processed quickly are usually implemented as sequential commands e Anoverlapping command is one which does not automatically finish executing before the next command starts executing Usually overlapping commands take longer to process and allow the program to do other tasks while being executed If overlapping commands do have to be executed in a defined order e g in order to avoid wrong measurement results they must be serviced sequentially This is called synchroni zation between the controller and the instrument Setting commands within one command line even though they may be implemented as sequential commands are not necessarily serviced in the order in which they have been received In order to make sure that commands are actually carried out in a certain order each command must be sent in a separate command line Example Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable The following commands always return the specified result FREQ STAR 1GHZ SPAN 100 FREQ STAR Result 1000000000 1 GHz Whereas the result for the following commands is not specified by SCPI FREQ STAR 1GHz STAR SPAN 1000000 The result could b
419. on EVENt Return values lt Event gt Range 1 to 65535 Increment 1 Usage Query only 14 2 16 2 STATus QUEStionable Registers The commands of the STATus QUEStionable subsystem control the status reporting structures of the STATus QUEStionable registers 0 0 TEMP WARN 1 1 TEMP ERRor 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 STATus QUEStionable P STAT QUES TEMP oO OA uno Fig 14 4 Structure of the STATus QUEStionable register R amp S RTM Remote Control m Command Reference See also e chapter 14 1 6 1 Structure of a SCPI Status Register on page 252 e STATus QUEStionable Register on page 257 The following commands are available STATUS PRESE ecran dete cese o dei aia E 428 STATUS QUEST omable ee le KE 428 STATusOUEGuonable COVerload CONDiton 428 STATU s QUESHonable LIMIECONDIBORS nias esie ena contrer nete nde capra dida 428 STATus QUEStionable MASK CONDIU OED d no teda cem Da told aaa dde Roh Ne 428 STATus QUEStionable ENABle Se ne anta ntn n idad ida endecd sete SEENEN 429 STATusOUEGuonable COverload ENADie 429 SET UU E Hemes dE leide edel 429 STATUS QUES Tonable MASKJIENABIe eessen 429 STATus QUESInableEBEVENI EE 429 STATusOUEGtonable COVeroadl EVEN 429 STATus QUEStonable HIMItEEVENT 1 eere rore iter Erin ionic 429 STATus QUESl tonable MASKEEVENYI J ied cnp cia s opa dae ida ainda
420. on and SEARch PROTocOl CAN IDENtifier IDData Search for identifier and data Set the identifier see IDENtifier and the data with SEARch PROTocol CAN DLENgth SEARch PROTocol CAN DCONdition and SEARch PROTocol CAN DATA IDERror Search for errors that occur with a specified identifier Set the identifier see IDENtifier and the errors to be found see ERRor RST FRAM SEARch PROTocol CAN FRAMe lt Frame gt Selects the frame type to be searched for The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to FRAMe User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 398 R8S RTM Remote Control m i w1l Command Reference Parameters Frame SOF EOF OVERload ERRor DTA11 DTA29 REM11 REM29 SOF start of frame EOF end of frame OVERload overload frame ERRor error frame DTA11 data frame with 11bit identifier DTA29 data frame with 29bit identifier REM11 remote frame with 11bit identifier REM29 remote frame with 29bit identifier RST SOF SEARch PROTocol CAN ACKerror lt AcknowledgeError gt Searches for acknowledgement errors An acknowledgement error occurs when the transmitter does not receive an acknowledgment a dominant bit during the Ack Slot The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to ERRor or IDERror Parameters lt AcknowledgeError gt ON OFF
421. on in an XY diagram The source can be selected from any of the analog channels The function is available in R amp S RTM1054 Remote command DISPlay XY Y1Source on page 302 Source Y2 Defines an optional second source to be displayed in y direction in an XY diagram The source can be selected from any of the analog channels User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 60 R amp S RTM Display XY Diagram The function is available in R amp S RTM1054 Remote command DISPlay XY Y2Source on page 302 X CH1 Y CH2 Defines channel 1 to be displayed in x direction in an XY diagram replacing the usual time base and sets channel 2 to the y axis The function is available in R amp S RTM1052 X CH2 Y CH1 Defines channel 2 to be displayed in x direction in an XY diagram replacing the usual time base and sets channel 1 to the y axis The function is available in R amp S RTM1052 Z Setup The intensity of the waveform displayed in an XY diagram can be set to a defined level or be modulated dynamically using a further source signal Z In the latter case the ampli tudes of the source signal determine the intensity of the displayed waveform i EE EET rer Source Z Z Intensity Threshold Z Z Setup Activates or deactivates the intensity control of the waveform via an additional signal source If deactivated the intensity is defined by the general Intensity setting for the trace Remote command DISPlay XY ZMODe on page 302
422. ond Max Wfm The instrument combines sample rate and memory depth to acquire at Rate maximum waveform acquisition rate In connection with persistence the mode can display rare signal anomalies Note Due to less memory depth aliasing effects may occur Max Sa The instrument acquires the signal at maximum sample rate and uses Rate the full memory depth The result is a waveform with maximum number of waveform samples high degree of accuracy and low risk of aliasing However the waveform acquisition rate is low Automatic Default mode To display the best waveform the instrument selects the optimum combination of waveform acquisition rate and sample rate using the full memory depth Remote command ACQuire WRATe on page 276 Interpolation Selects the interpolation method if the real time sample mode needs interpolation Sin x x Two adjacent ADC sample points are connected by a sin x x curve and also the adjoining sample points are considered by this curve The interpolated points are located on the resulting curve This interpolation method is the default method It is very precise and shows the best signal curve Linear Two adjacent ADC sample points are connected by a straight line the interpolated points are located on the line You see a polygonal wave form similar to the real signal and also the ADC sample points as ver texes Sample amp The ADC sample points are displayed like a histogram For each
423. only Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt RESult NPEak lt NegativePeak gt Returns the minimum measurement value of the current measurement series Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt NegativePeak gt Minimum measurement value Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt RESult PPEak lt PositivePeak gt Returns the maximum measurement value of the current measurement series T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 328 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm R O n u Mvp Command Reference Suffix m 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt PositivePeak gt Maximum measurement value Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt RESult WFMCount lt WaveformCount gt Returns the current number of measured waveforms Suffix m 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt WaveformCount gt Number of measured waveforms Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics VALue ALL Returns all values from the statistics buffer Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Return values lt ValueList gt Comma separated list of statistical values Usage Query only MEASurement lt m gt STATistics VALue lt n gt Returns one statistical value from the indicated
424. or 29 bits for CAN exten ded frames Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt IdentifierType gt ANY B11 B29 ANY No length specified for example for triggering on data only Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt IDValue Returns the decimal address value of the specified frame Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n Return values dentifierValue Decimal value Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt BSEPosition Returns the position of the bit stuffing error in the specified frame if available Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ErrorPosition gt RST 0 Default unit s I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 396 R8S RTM Remote Control EENEG Command Reference Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt BCOunt Returns the number of data bytes in the specified frame Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt ByteCount gt Number of words bytes Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt STATe Returns the state of the specified data byte Suffix lt n gt E Selects the frame 1 n o Selects the byte number 1 n Return values lt ByteStatus gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt BYTE lt o gt VALue Returns the decimal value of the specified byte Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n o id Selects the byte numbe
425. ore frequent values are red and very frequent values are displayed in yellow or white with various colors inbetween IFColor Inverses the FColor setting rare values are yellow or white while frequent values are blue RST NORMal a OPBLOQ QDBNU CL LLZJU UDS U NSX MA A ee e SEAK amp eYTIELLLLLLLU eL D OALZJ User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 301 R8S RTM Remote Control PHEMGBSGEMNCGO AA AAA A A n t Command Reference XYZ Setup ai KOEUNE E 302 DISPlay XY Y ET 302 DIS Play XY Y2S 0U did 302 BDISPIGNEXY ZMODG MC cirio 302 DISPlay e NET M Ce 303 DISPlay XY ZOUE E an 303 DISPlay XY XSOurce lt Source gt Defines the source to be displayed in x direction in an XY diagram replacing the usual time base Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH1 DISPlay XY Y1Source Source Defines the first source to be displayed in y direction in an XY diagram Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available with 4 channel R amp S RTM oscil loscopes RST CH2 DISPlay XY Y2Source lt Source gt Defines an optional second source to be displayed in y direction in an XY diagram The command is only relevant for 4 channel
426. ors Quotation mark viii rata GISPIAYING eios eet coste pte nes 51 SCPI compliant saiisine rier adeis GT ue iroh TITRE 56 sequential 8 le 25 Structure ese emere nennen syntax elements B white SPACE coria centena eere re yd usate Command sequence Bandwidth coccion lid 30 recommendation s sss 263 instrument 12 EEN 267 probe 12 Comment Base level 83 BB cet 209 BIN dt Du r4 Common commands Boolean parameters Md oreet red ei de peram 241 Brightness CONGR eutanasia 252 Burst width Constant Bus SOf KEY NNNM 104 Display voii ii er ner een 145 Controls SE Level Darin 39 Node labels En 148 Position Offset vertical e 28 Position horizontal csssseeseeeeene 23 C Scale horizontal oe a FT Scale vertical il dst cedere Calibration Copy Channel m aru EE SOFKEY ttt 125 po oo s eu GI uu cu 75 83 i D Coupling e ioco riot den pd dera 11 29 Search SE LUNE potros er resto cad 81 Trigger settings tnit ara rere xi cae Case sensitivity SGP as 242 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 447 R amp S9RTM Index Create directory EMOTE m ree 417 Ll C 211 Crosshairs GISPIAYING ME 51 oc 119 216 Cursor COMMQGUNNG ERE 78 FFT measuremienls cuina 75 measurements on FFT sssssssseee 111 measurement type D POSIIONINO ME liso mE Remote control ES Set TO SCAN EE Set t
427. ory submenu see Storage Directory Menu on page 210 Remove File Deletes the selected file Remote command MMEMory DELete on page 421 Load Loads the selected file to the instrument During an import export operation this command confirms the selection of a file and loads it temporarily In order to actually copy the file to the selected destination press Import Export Remote command Device settings MMEMory LOAD STATe on page 422 Storage Directory Menu The storage directory menu is opened with the Storage softkey that is available in all Save and Load menus Here you define the storage device and the directory where the file will be saved or loaded from If appropriate you can also create new directories or delete existing ones Storage Storage 9 Change Create Directory directory User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 210 R amp S RTM Data and File Management Saving and Loading Waveforms and screenshots can only be stored on a USB stick connected to the front or rear panel not to an internal directory If you want to store a waveform or scrrenshot and no USB stick is currently connected the Storage softkey is not available See also chapter 12 2 1 Storage Locations on page 206 Storage intemal Fron EE 211 eurem EE 211 Create DMS CRON EUM 211 Remove DIGON iio la 211 Storage Internal Front Rear Defines the storage device Waveforms and screenshots can only be stor
428. other than 1 you must include the optional WINDow param eter with the suffix for the required window DISP WIND2 MAX ONrefers to window 2 Parameters Parameters must be separated from the header by a white space If several parameters are specified in a command they are separated by a comma For a description of the parameter types refer to SCPI Parameters on page 244 Example Definition HardCOPy DEVice CMAP COLor RGB lt red gt lt green gt lt blue gt Command HCOP DEV CMAP COL RGB 3 32 44 EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 243 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Basics Special characters Parameters A vertical stroke in parameter definitions indicates alternative possibilities in the sense of or The effect of the command differs depending on which parameter is used Example Definition HardCOPy PAGE ORIentation LANDscape PORTrait Command HCOP PAGE ORI LAND specifies landscape orientation Command HCOP PAGE ORI PORT specifies portrait orientation Mnemonics A selection of mnemonics with an identical effect exists for several commands These mnemonics are indicated in the same line they are separated by a vertical stroke Only one of these mnemonics needs to be included in the header of the command The effect of the command is independent of which of the mnemonics is used Example DefinitionSENSE BANDwidth BWIDth RESolution numeric value The two following commands with identi
429. p ATTenuatonMAhNual nennen nennen nnne nre 287 PROBe lt m gt Ne TE ET 287 PROBe m SETup DAPacilange ici eta 288 PROBE lt m SETUP Ee el criaron ona ne X eoe ERR tada DNA RM A 288 PROBe lt m gt SETup IMPedance occccccccccccconcnnonannnnnnnanannnnnononnn nono narran enses nsns ennt rere innen nnns 288 PROBe sm SE TUS MODE cionado 289 PROB GSS OE TURAN arado E aaa e EINER ORAS 289 PROBe lt m gt SE er E D 289 PROBES SE TUR TYPE o ati EES ESA 289 PROBe lt m gt SETUP UOFF SOl v 22 hid piba 290 PROBIS Te TT KEE 290 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 286 R8S RTM Remote Control Command Reference D ObBe mzJD PAhTnumber 290 PROBesm9 IB PRDale cai EE EM Ed iM 291 PROBesSmIDISERNUmber iii 291 PROBe m ID SWVWVelsion E 291 PROBe m SETup ATTenuation AUTO Returns the attenuation of an automatically detected probe Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt ProbeAttenuation gt Range 0 001 to 1000 Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup ATTenuation UNIT lt Unit gt Selects the unit that the probe can measure Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters lt Unit gt VIA Firmware Software FW 03 700 PROBe lt m gt SETup ATTenuation MANual lt ManualAttenuation gt Sets the attenuation or gain ofthe probe ifthe probe was not detected by the instrument Suffix lt m
430. p files Printer 4 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 223 R amp S RTM General Instrument Setup Reference for Setup E er MCCC 226 L Parameter 226 L DAOP EE 226 E 226 A U 226 D EE 226 B 0 MIN 226 L Save od 226 Reen e EE 226 A EEN 226 L TEE 227 e TT EE 227 GN s NNNM 227 L Execute trennen tnter inet ranana nnar anana atn ene rnn 227 E NI T ETE 227 E Us A 227 2o EE 227 D NONU ERES 228 s MERO 228 A RN REN LN RM A 228 L Read keys from license fie 228 L Input key manually cese 228 xt LT S ERROR etalon digs sate ah dn TETTE cp EC 228 Te B E ET 228 L Control Be TN MTM 228 ei C 228 et LE 228 Se AMM aria dietetica 228 L Self Test amp Self Aligonment 228 o A T ERR 229 A m A EAE 229 Ehe 229 Mt la A A E 229 PODS TUE 229 aia 229 A A O 229 LA e td 229 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 224 R amp S RTM General Instrument Setup mI H H E Reference for Setup ST o A PP 229 Device Name sims de AER 230 DED Intenso aio 230 Time Reference Defines the time reference point in the diagram i e the point at which the trigger is Os The reference point is defined as an offset of divisions from the center in the diagram By default the reference point Os is displayed in the center of the window which corresponds to 0 divisions The scaling of the waveform depend
431. pe and and its setup e Horizontal position of the trigger trigger position and reference point e Trigger mode The R amp S RTM provides various trigger types for troubleshooting and signal analysis for example edge trigger width trigger pattern trigger and specific triggers like video and bus triggers More complex trigger conditions are also available you can setup a trigger sequence to join two edge triggers with an optional delay time or event count Similar setups are also known as multi step trigger or A B trigger Furthermore hysteresis avoids unwanted trigger events caused by noise Trigger event In particular for the A B trigger sequence it is important to distinguish between the trigger and the event An event is the fulfillment of the event conditions but an event may not be the trigger The trigger occurs only if the conditions of all events the A event and the B event in a trigger sequence and all further trigger conditions are all fulfilled Trigger information Information on the most important trigger settings are shown in the information bar The label shows e Trigger source and level e Trigger coupling and filters E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 35 R amp S9RTM Triggers 3 2 3 2 1 Setting Up the Trigger e Trigger slope or other conditions specific for the selected trigger type TB 100 us T 261us Norm CH1 ti lt tL TL 1 71mV Fig 3 1 Trigger information Normal trigger mode
432. played and thus overwrites the previously saved and displayed data A EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 112 R amp S RTM FFT een ee Reference for FFT key Envelope In addition to the normal spectrum the maximal oscillations are saved separately and updated for each new spectrum The maximum values are displayed together with the newly acquired values and form an envelope This envelope indicates the range of all FFT trace values that occurred If any signal parameters are changed the envelope is reset AL Average The average of several spectrums is calculated The number of spec trums used for the averaging is defined using the knob or the No of Averages softkey This mode is useful for noise rejection d Remote command CALCulate MATH m ARIThmetics on page 334 No of Averages Defines the number of spectrums used for averaging This function is only available if Average mode is selected Remote command CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT AVERage COUNt on page 335 Window Window functions are multiplied with the input values and thus can improve the FFT display If discontinuities occur at the borders of the measurement interval the algorithm interprets such discontinuities as a sudden edge which can distort the result For bell shaped func tions the border values are multiplied with smaller values and thus have less influence on the result Hanning The Hanning window is bell shaped Unlike
433. pliant commande sees 239 Screen amp Setup softkey ooooooooccccccccccncccccccocccnnanancnonnnos 214 Screenshots 219 PO e M 214 221 E e 213 214 Saving 219 SOfIKGy socio dara reader 213 214 220 IG css aada 240 Search CAN RE 189 Data2Clock EE 138 Self alignmant 5 eae ee ren pee ere 228 Selftest sc M 267 Sequential commands 249 Service request SRQ sssssssss 255 260 Service request enable Ic 266 Service request enable register SRE 255 SET iei nn rs hard erras fee Ep Ie EM RC ERE ae 69 Setting commands sese 239 Settings ASUMEN E R 215 Instrument default sssessssssssssss 216 Set To Screen tjic 81 Setup menu instrument setup eeseeseees 223 SETUP MOJO acosa Setup amp Label 2 SIGNAL OFF curiccita picadas SLOPE id aan Smoothed waveform sees 25 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 452 R amp S9RTM Softkeys jig P 1MHz Actions Active SSPI caros Attenuation factor Ss tel E EE AUX ee Backlight e Ee le WEE EICH Bus Type ia BUS Width si iios e street t eed Change directory Channel Cursors Clear EE 55 Clock SCL Color mode D Command Set printer
434. plicaciones de campo y de ninguna manera deber ser utilizado de modo que alguna persona cosa pueda sufrir da o El uso del producto fuera de sus fines definidos o sin tener en cuenta las instrucciones del fabricante queda en la responsabilidad del usuario El fabricante no se hace en ninguna forma responsable de consecuencias a causa del mal uso del producto 1171 0000 42 07 Page 7 Instrucciones de seguridad elementales Se parte del uso correcto del producto para los fines definidos si el producto es utilizado conforme a las indicaciones de la correspondiente documentaci n del producto y dentro del margen de rendimiento definido ver hoja de datos documentaci n informaciones de seguridad que siguen El uso del producto hace necesarios conocimientos t cnicos y ciertos conocimientos del idioma ingl s Por eso se debe tener en cuenta que el producto solo pueda ser operado por personal especializado o personas instruidas en profundidad con las capacidades correspondientes Si fuera necesaria indumentaria de seguridad para el uso de productos de Rohde amp Schwarz encontrar a la informaci n debida en la documentaci n del producto en el cap tulo correspondiente Guarde bien las informaciones de seguridad elementales as como la documentaci n del producto y entr guelas a usuarios posteriores Tener en cuenta las informaciones de seguridad sirve para evitar en lo posible lesiones o da os por peligros de toda clase Por eso es imprescind
435. position is zero the trigger point matches the reference point See also TIMebase POSition on page 274 Parameters lt ReferencePoint gt Range 10 to 90 Increment 10 RST 50 Default unit 96 Acquisition AUE eli td eee eee epee eer one 274 ACQuire cm 275 ACOuirelNTerpolate eninin anei aaa aaaea Taa anaE a aaan 275 ACQUISAVERaGE COUN EE 275 ACUTE WRAT Se a ta 276 OHANRBeleii d eien an raa aea ad 276 eise EEN Neen EE 277 TiMebase e EE 277 ACUS PIL Ger T e 277 elen E 278 AC QUINE SRA ET 278 AUToscale Performs an autoset process analyzes the enabled channel signals and obtains appro priate horizontal vertical and trigger settings to display stable waveforms Usage Event Asynchronous command RETE RA E A e gt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 274 R8S RTM Remote Control m er Command Reference ACQuire MODE lt AcquisitionMode gt Selects the method of adding waveform points to the samples of the ADC in order to fill the record length Parameters AcquisitionMode RTIMe ETIMe RTIMe Real Time Mode At slow time base settings the sampled points of the input signal are used to build the waveform no waveform points are added With fast time base settings the sample rate is higher than the ADC sample rate Waveform samples are added to the ADC samples with sin x x interpolation ETIMe Equivalent time The waveform points are taken fr
436. procal or Division operation to limit the minimal amplitudes of an operand Example Operand1 is a homopolar sine signal with V 3V Operand2 is a constant value of 1V The result is always larger than 1V or smaller than 1V User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 100 R amp S9RTM Mathematics Minimum Square Square Root Abs Value Pos Wave User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 Reference for Mathematics Minimum Op1 Op2 Compares the amplitudes of both operands and displays the minimum amplitude The sign of the result is taken from Operand1 Use this operation in combination with the Reciprocal or Division operation to limit the maximal amplitudes of an operand Example Operand1 is a MATH waveform within the range of 10V Operand2 is a constant value of 1V The result is always smaller than 1V or larger than 1V Op1 Op1 Squares the operand If the operand contains negative values that have been clipped then the result contains positive clipping Square Root Op1 Calculates the square root of the operand Note that the square root of a negative number is undefined and the result is clipped RU e Calculates the absolute value of the operand All negative values are inverted to positive values The positive values remain unmodified If the operand has negative values that have been clipped the result contains positive clipping Max Op1 0 Extracts the positive data po
437. property damage In the product documentation the word ATTENTION is used synonymously These signal words are in accordance with the standard definition for civil applications in the European Economic Area Definitions that deviate from the standard definition may also exist in other economic areas or military applications It is therefore essential to make sure that the signal words described here are always used only in connection with the related product documentation and the related product The use of signal words in connection with unrelated products or documentation can result in misinterpretation and in personal injury or material damage 1171 0000 42 07 Page 2 Basic Safety Instructions Operating states and operating positions The product may be operated only under the operating conditions and in the positions specified by the manufacturer without the product s ventilation being obstructed If the manufacturer s specifications are not observed this can result in electric shock fire and or serious personal injury or death Applicable local or national safety regulations and rules for the prevention of accidents must be observed in all work performed 1 Unless otherwise specified the following requirements apply to Rohde amp Schwarz products predefined operating position is always with the housing floor facing down IP protection 2X use only indoors max operating altitude 2000 m above sea level max transport altitude
438. r 1 n Return values lt ByteValue gt Decimal value Usage Query only CAN Search SEARCH PROTOCGICAN CONDON iia did a ala 398 SR EE Eeer MT EE 398 SEARGIEPROTOGOEGCAN AGOGEFTOL EE 399 SEARCIEPROTOGO CAN BITS TE 399 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 397 R amp S RTM Remote Control REESEN Command Reference SEARG PROTOCOL ANE KK eege see EENEG Eege ee 399 SEARch PRO Tocal CANSFORMGENOM added dell 400 epicurei bi Em 400 SEARch PROT OGOlGCAN ITYB6G uestis anda aa En Rae er aene env adn e ea bang eoe iaa 400 SEARch Eeler Reie e Te E 400 SE Ee tele ERUN ii dad 400 SEARCH PRO Toco CAN DLENG irii E 401 SEARch PROTocol CAN DCONdION asinine nananana anaana na anana aaa aa 401 SEAR PROTOGOI CAN DATA EE 401 SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition lt SearchCondition gt Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for Depending on the selected event further settings are required Parameters lt SearchCondition gt FRAMe ERRor IDENtifier IDData IDERror FRAMe Search for a frame type Set the frame type with SEARch PROTocol CAN FRAMe ERRor Search for errors of one or more error types Set the error types with SEARch PROTocol CAN ACKerror SEARch PROTocol CAN BITSterror SEARCh PROTOCOl CAN CRCerror and SEARch PROTocol1 CAN FORMerror IDENtifier Search for identifier Specifiy the identifier with SEARch PROTocol CAN FTYPe SEARch PROTocol CAN ITYPe SEARch PROTocol CAN ICONditi
439. r A CAN BITSterror lt BitStuffingError gt Triggers on bit stuffing errors See also Stuff bit on page 183 The command is relevant if TRIGGer A CAN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt BitStuffingError gt ON OFF RST ON TRIGger A CAN CRCerror lt CRCerror gt Triggers on errors in the Cyclic Redundancy Check The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ERRCondition User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 391 R amp S RTM Remote Control EES Command Reference Parameters lt CRCerror gt ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger A CAN FORMerror lt FormError gt Triggers on form errors A form error occurs when a fixed form bit field contains one or more illegal bits The command is relevant if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to ERRCondition Parameters lt FormError gt ON OFF RST OFF CAN Decode Results rige duele rA 392 BUS CANFRAMes N gt TRES EE 392 BUS CAN ERAMe EN KN NEE 393 BUS CANIFRAMESA STAR aiii dades ened 393 BUS CAN FRAMS M gt STOP Z a dida 393 BUS CANIFRAMeSD gt DATA EE 394 BUS CAN FRAMe nz ACki tate 394 Ee NEE e TI 394 SUR HE E KE 395 BUS CAN FRAMe n CSValue iieseee ec ense en qaad eme a anon a na nasa e aA dnx ansa aad dcm a kaum ad ddnde 395 BUS CAN FRAMesri DLOState accedere eese cus een east iaaa odere V dades datus dn 395 BUS CAN FRAMesms DEG Value tide tate aa lata 395 BUS CAN FRAMe n IDSTate e
440. r IDERror Parameters lt IdType gt B11 B29 RST B11 SEARch PROTocol CAN ICONdition lt IdCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for the identifier If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDENtifier IDData or IDERror Parameters lt ldCondition gt EQUaI NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQU SEARch PROTocol CAN IDENtifier Identifier Defines the identifier pattern The pattern length is defined with SEARch PROTOcO1 CAN ITYPe q 2 ______ a _ RD _ _ a o AOULLLLU Z C Oa3AAEAaz User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 400 R8S RTM Remote Control EES Command Reference The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDit ion is set to IDENtifier IDData or IDERror Parameters Identifier String containing binary pattern with max 29 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed SEARch PROTocol CAN DLENgth lt DataLength gt Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDitionis set to IDData Parameters lt DataLength gt Range 0 to 8 Increment 1 RST 1 Default unit Byte SEARch PROTocol CAN DCONdition lt Da
441. r of measured waveforms used for calculation of average and standard deviation Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Parameters lt AverageCount gt Range 2 to 1000 Increment 1 RST 1000 Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics RESet Deletes the statistical results for the selected measurement and starts a new statistical evaluation if the acquisition is running The waveform count is set to 0 and all measure ment values are set to NAN Suffix m 1 4 Selects the measurement place Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 327 R amp S RTM Remote Control DESSERT Command Reference MEASurement lt m gt RESult AVG lt AverageValue gt Returns the average value of the current mesurement series The number of waveforms used for calculation is defined with MEASurement lt m gt STATistics WEIGht Suffix m 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt AverageValue gt Statistic value Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt RESult STDDev lt StandardDeviation gt Returns the statistical standard deviation of the current mesurement series The number of waveforms used for calculation is defined with MEASurement lt m gt STATistics WEIGht Suffix m 1 4 Selects the measurement place Query parameters lt StandardDeviation gt Statistic value Usage Query
442. r source AC Alternating Current coupling A 5 Hz high pass filter is connected into the trigger path and removes the DC offset voltage from the trigger sig nal DC Direct Current coupling The trigger signal remains unchanged Remote command TRIGger A EDGE COUPling on page 294 LF Reject Sets the trigger coupling to high frequency A 15 kHz high pass filter is connected into the trigger path and removes lower frequencies from the trigger signal Use this mode only with very high frequency signals Remote command TRIGger A EDGE COUPling on page 294 HF Reject Turns an additional 5 kHz low pass filter in the trigger path on or off This filter removes higher frequencies and is available with AC and DC coupling Remote command TRIGger A EDGE FILTer LPASs on page 295 ERA AA e A ALLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULLIL MXAX User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 42 R amp S9RTM Triggers 3 3 2 3 Reference for Triggers Low pass Turns an additional 100 MHz low pass filter in the trigger path on or off This filter removes higher frequencies and is available with AC and DC coupling Remote command TRIGger A EDGE FILTer NREJect on page 295 Hysteresis A B Sets a hysteresis range around the trigger level If the signal jitters inside this range and crosses the trigger level thereby no trigger event occurs Thus hysteresis avoids unwan ted trigger events caused
443. r the 6 bit identifier without parity bits not the pro tected identifier TRIGger A LIN DATA Data Defines the data pattern The number of bytes in the data pattern is defined with TRIGger A LIN DLENgth The command is relevant if TRIGger A LIN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters Data String containing binary pattern with max 64 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Make sure to enter complete bytes TRIGger A LIN DCONdition lt DataCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for data If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if TRIGgGer A LIN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters lt DataCondition gt EQUaI NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQ TRIGger A LIN DLENgth lt DataLength gt Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern The command is relevant if TRIGGer A LIN TYPE is set to IDDT Parameters lt DataLength gt Range 1 to 8 Increment 1 RST 1 Default unit Byte LIN Decode Results BUS LING ie e Tru rH 406 BUS EINIERAMS SIS OS STAR ener en A oL tec isi emer etia 406 BUSLUIN ERAMe cnz C Valuei inian ainera aaa aKa a a a aeaa Eaa EaR aa 406 BUS LIN FRAME SNA DATA ET 406 BUS LIN FRAMo lt n gt IDP VAMC o a ic
444. rall result is shown in the results table Total 2785 Masks Test 2s A PH mmm Masks Test A 4 6 Press Pause to stop testing temporarily without closing the Masks menu Press Pause again to continue the test T Press Masks Test Off to turn off the mask test and exit the Mask menu 9 3 Reference for MASKS key The MASKS key opens the Masks menu Masks are used for error detection and com pliance tests of digital signals You can e run mask tests e configure actions triggered by mask violation e configure new masks based on channel signals Total 0 Masks Test Os 7 e n New Mask TEE 125 Ar EE O A 125 EE 125 A O O 125 AA A A 125 A A A 126 A a 126 Lad MaSK aiii iii 126 AURA ads 126 L Sound Stop Screenshot Print VWavefom 127 Masks Test SUD tidad sida 127 Test Performs a mask test for the selected signal i e the signal s amplitudes are compared with the specified mask If the amplitude exceeds the limits of the mask a violation is detected ERA SSS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 124 R amp SS9RTM Masks Reference for MASKS key Which action is to be taken when a violation is detected is defined using the Actions softkey See also chapter 9 2 3 Performing a Mask Test on page 123 Remote command MASK TEST on page 340 Pause Temporarily stops the mask test without closing the Masks menu Counts are not deleted and the actions cannot be changed duri
445. rame is not completely contained in the acquisition The acquired part of the frame is valid Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt STARt Returns the start time of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt E Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt STOP Returns the end time of the specified frame User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 393 R8S RTM Remote Control EES Command Reference Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt StopTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt DATA Returns the data words of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt FrameData gt Comma separated list of decimal values of the data bytes Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt ACKState Returns the state of the acknowledge field Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt AcknowledgeState gt OK UNDF UNDF Undefined Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt ACKValue Returns the value of the acknowledge field Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt AcknowledgeValue gt Decimal value Usage Query only
446. rand1 or Operand2 to select the constant for the corresponding operand b Press Edit Constant to define its value c Press Constant and select either a pre defined constant or one of 10 available user defined constants RETREAT RU RA E E AA e e 0 02551 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 95 R8S RTM Mathematics AAA RA AA A A A A A A Configuring and Using Math Waveforms d If you selected a user defined constant define its value Press Value and enter the numeric value Press Decimal Point to move the decimal point within the numeric value Press Prefix to define an Sl prefix to the unit See also Prefix on page 104 e Press Unit to define the unit of the value See also Unit on page 105 e Press Save to store the user defined constant 7 Press Unit to define the unit of the equation results See also Unit on page 98 8 Optionally press Equation Label to define a name for the equation This label is displayed on the Equation softkey and in the Equation Set Editor To edit an equation set 1 Press MATH gt Edit Equations to display the Equation Set Editor 2 Press Equation to select the first equation to be configured This equation is assigned to the first math waveform MA1 3 Configure the equation See To configure an equation on page 95 gt Repeat steps 3 and 4 to configure all 5 equations in the equation set 5 Press Back to exit the editor and return to th
447. re naenin a inna etna Age aae Na mna ae AR aa Ean 396 SE E SMP IDT d TEE 396 BUS CAN FERAMespscIDValiye iode dette tte iaa cidad 396 BUS CANIFRAMesSmnedBSEPOSITONT ocio 396 BUS CAN FRAMeshs ere D EE 397 BUS CAN FERAMe nz BvTEsosSTATei 397 BUS CAN FRAMesp gt BY TE lt S0 gt VALUES cocinada idad on e rone ete x no ndis inan ph Receta un 397 BUS CAN FCOunt Returns the number of received frames Return values lt FrameCount gt Total number of decoded frames Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt TYPE Returns the type of the specified frame User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 392 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm JJ T Gn Command Reference Suffix n Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt FrameType gt DATA REMote ERR OVLD Data remote error or overload frame Usage Query only BUS CAN FRAMe lt n gt STATus Returns the overall state of the specified frame Suffix lt n gt Selects the frame 1 n Return values lt FrameStatus gt OK BTST CRCD ACKD CRC EOFD NOACK INSufficient OK frame is valid BTST bit stuffing error occured CRCD wrong CRC delimiter occured ACKD Wrong ACK delimiter occured CRC cyclic redundancy check failed EOFD wrong end of frame NOACKk acknowlegde is missing INSufficient f
448. rence point Use the NEXT and PREV keys to move the markers to the reference point In the display of search results the marker is removed from the search result that is selected in the Event Table Remote command TSTamp CLEar on page 308 for timestamp markers only R amp SS9RTM Reference Waveforms Using References 5 Reference Waveforms Reference waveforms are waveform data stored in in the internal reference storages Four internal reference storages are available RE1 RE4 These four reference wave forms can be displayed Reference waveforms can be saved to and loaded from any storage device internal memory or external USB flash device The file format is TRF and the file size is about 12 4 Byte The file content depends on the storage device e Internal storage of the R amp S RTM TRF files contain also the instrument settings so you can restore also the settings when you load a reference waveform e External USB flash drive TRF files contain only the waveform data the instrument settings are not saved and cannot be restored See chapter 12 2 4 1 Waveform File Formats on page 216 for details on file formats You can copy the stored references to another storage device with usual export import functions With export import you can also change the target file format and convert the data If you export a TRF file to a USB flash drive the instrument settings get lost and cannot be loaded with the waveform
449. rity error error in identifier LIN Configuration Settings Access PROTOCOL gt Bus type LIN Configuration I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 193 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 Configuration Data Pola ii rias 194 O e 194 EIU Ea eiecit dares ete dee ed edet icits 194 AS EM 194 Data Sets the source of the data line All channel waveforms can be used Remote command BUS LIN DATA SOURce on page 402 Polarity Defines the idle state of the bus The idle state is the rezessive state and corresponds to a logic 1 Remote command BUS LIN POLarity on page 402 Version Selects the version of the LIN standard that is used in the DUT The setting mainly defines the checksum version used during decoding The most common version is LIN 2 x For mixed networks or if the standard is unknown set the LIN standard to Auto Remote command BUS LIN STANdard on page 402 Bit rate Sets the number of transmitted bits per second The maximum bit rate is 20 kbit s To select a bit rate from the list of predefined values set Bit rate to Defined Bit Rate and then select the value with Predefined To set another value set Bit rate to User Bit Rate and then enter the value with User Remote command BUS LIN BITRate on page 402 Find Level The instrument analyzes all channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of ana
450. rm Use this command only for envelope waveforms for all other channel waveforms use CHANnel lt m gt DATA HEADer User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 284 R8S RTM Remote Control PEMGREGMNCIC a HQ rm Command Reference Table 14 13 Header data Position Meaning Example 1 XStart in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 2 XStop in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 3 Number of samples 200000 4 Number of values per sample interval For envelope 2 waveforms the value is 2 Suffix m Return values lt DataHeader gt Comma separated value list Example 9 477E 008 9 477E 008 200000 2 Usage Query only CHANnel lt m gt DATA POINts lt Points gt As a setting the command selects a range of samples that will be returned with CHANnel lt m gt DATA and CHANnel lt m gt DATA ENVelope As a query it returns the number of returned samples for the selected range If ACQuire WRATe is set to MSAMples maximum sample rate the memory usually contains more data samples than the screen can display In this case you can decide which data will be saved samples stored in the memory or only the displayed samples Note The sample range can be change only in STOP mode If the acquisition is running DEF is always used automatically If the acquisition has been stopped data can be read
451. rn values lt AdjResBW gt Range Depends on various other settings Default unit Hz Usage Query only CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution AUTO lt SpanRBWCoupling gt Couples the frequency span to the RBW Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt SpanRBWCoupling gt ON OFF CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution RATio lt SpanRBWRatio gt Defines the ratio of span Hz resolution bandwidth Hz The span RBW ratio is half the number of points used for FFT which is defined with manual operation in the menu Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt SpanRBWRatio gt Range The value is changed in 2 n steps from 2210 to 2415 1024 2048 4096 8192 16384 32768 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 336 R8S RTM Remote Control SSES Command Reference Example CALC MATH FFT BAND RAT 32768 Sets the number of points to 65536 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT BANDwidth RESolution VALue lt ResolutionBW gt Defines the resolution bandwidth the minimum frequency step at which the individual components of a spectrum can be distinguished Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt ResolutionBW gt Range Depends on various other settings Default unit Hz CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT CFRequency lt CenterFreq gt Defines the position of the displayed frequency domain which is Center Span 2
452. rns the state of the address Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values lt AddressComplete gt ON OFF ON Address was received completely Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt ADDRess Returns the decimal address value of the indicated frame including the R W bit Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame EET RU e AA e gt gt gt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 377 R8S RTM Remote Control el Command Reference Return values lt AddressValue gt Decimal value Range 0 to 2047 Increment 1 Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt ADEVice Returns the decimal address value of the indicated frame without R W bit Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values lt SlaveAddress gt Decimal value Range 0 to 1023 Increment 1 Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt ASTart Returns the start time of the address for the indicated frame Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values lt StartTime gt Range depends on sample rate record length and time base Increment depends on the time base Default unit s Usage Query only BUS I2C FRAMe lt n gt AACCess Returns the address acknowledge bit value for the indicated frame Suffix lt n gt 1 n Selects the frame Return values lt Acknowledge gt INComplete ACK NACK ElTHer Usage Query only T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 378 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Command R
453. ror state in the instrument leads to an entry in the error queue The entries of the error queue are detailed plain text error messages that can be looked up in the Error Log or queried via remote control using SYSTem ERRor NEXT or SYSTem ERRor ALL Each call of SYSTem ERRor NEXT provides one entry from the error queue If no error messages are stored there any more the instrument responds with 0 No error EEE A e 55 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 261 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 1 6 5 14 1 7 Basics The error queue should be queried after every SRQ in the controller program as the entries describe the cause of an error more precisely than the status registers Especially in the test phase of a controller program the error queue should be queried regularly since faulty commands from the controller to the instrument are recorded there as well Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The following table contains the different commands and events causing the status reporting system to be reset None of the commands except RST and SYSTem PRESet influence the functional instrument settings In particular DCL does not change the instrument settings Table 14 11 Resest of the status reporting system Event Switching on supply DCL SDC RST or STA CLS voltage Device SYS Tus PRE Power On Status Clear Tem PRE Set Clear S
454. rotary knob to adjust the vertical position of the waveform Vertical position is defined by the position of the waveform s zero line and the offset between the zero line and the waveform axis Pressing the knob toggles between these parameters By default offset is disabled Press the Offset softkey in the Channel menu to enable the offset Use the NAVIGATION knob or the POSITION OFFSET knob to adjust Turn clockwise to move the waveform down 10 Proceed with chapter 2 2 3 Setting the Acquisition on page 21 2 2 3 Setting the Acquisition Prerequisites e Probes are connected e Vertical and horizontal settings are adjusted For details on acquisition settings see chapter 2 3 2 Acquisition Menu on page 23 1 Press the ACQUISITION key in the HORIZONTAL area of the front panel 2 Select the Sample Mode Real time or Equivalent time This defines the behavior of the oscilloscope if the sample rate is higher than the ADC sample rate Use Equivalent time to capture fast repetitive signals whose frequency components may be much higher than the sample rate of the ADC 3 Select the Decimation Mode for example Peak detect This defines the behavior of the instrument if the oscilloscope captures more samples than the waveform memory can save 4 Select the Wavef Arithmetic for example Average or Envelope This defines how the resulting waveform is built from several consecutive acquisitions of the signal 5
455. rs are displayed _L____SS E e User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 56 R amp S RTM Display XY Diagram Grid Defines how the grid is displayed Reticle Off Co Lines Displays the grid as horizontal and vertical lines Reticle Displays crosshairs instead of a grid Off Removes the grid from the display Remote command DISPlay GRID STYLe on page 306 4 2 XY Diagram XY diagrams combine the voltage levels of two waveforms in one diagram They use the amplitude of a second waveform as the x axis rather then a time base This allows you to perform phase shift measurements for example With harmonically related signals the resulting XY diagrams are Lissajous patterns XY diagrams can also be used to display the IQ representation of a signal It is also possible to define two source signals in y direction for comparison The intensity of the XY waveform can be set to a defined level or be modulated dynam ically using a further source signal In the latter case the amplitudes of additional source signal determine the intensity of the displayed waveform For details see chapter 4 2 1 2 Configuring the Intensity of an XY Waveform on page 59 Together with the XY diagram the time diagrams of the source signals are displayed in separate windows EM User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 57 R amp S RTM _ Display XY Diagram TB 20ns T 0s 2 5 GSals Real Time Fig 4 1 XYZ display 4 2 1 Configurin
456. rt Export functions are used The name of the target file can be changed so you can copy and rename in one operation For references and masks you can also change the target file format and convert the data during export import This chapter describes the general procedures and settings to save load and export import data AAA lt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 206 R amp S9RTM Data and File Management 12 2 1 1 12 2 1 2 Saving and Loading Configuring Storage Locations You must configure the storage settings for the various data types initially select the storage location and the storage directory and define the file name For some data types further storage settings are available Then you can save data simply by pressing the Save softkey in the FILE menu or if configured accordingly by pressing the PRINT key on the front panel To select the storage directory Whenever you want to save copy or load data you have to set the directory where the data will be stored or loaded from 1 Press Storage to open the storage directory menu and display the file explorer for the currently selected storage location See also Storage Directory Menu on page 210 2 Press Storage Internal Front Rear until the required storage device is highlighted For waveforms and screenshots only a USB flash drive can be selected as a storage location If no USB flash drive is connected to the instrument this function is not
457. rument status by means of commands e Query of the error queue Service Request Under certain circumstances the instrument can send a service request SRQ to the controller Usually this service request initiates an interrupt at the controller to which the control program can react appropriately As evident from figure 14 2 an SRQ is always initiated if one or several of bits 2 3 4 5 or 7 of the status byte are set and enabled in the SRE Each of these bits combines the information of a further register the error queue or the output buffer The ENAB1e parts of the status registers can be set such that arbitrary bits in an arbitrary status register initiate an SRQ In order to make use of the possibilities of the service request effectively all bits should be set to 1 in enable registers SRE and ESE The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own Each controller program should cause the instrument to initiate a service request if errors occur The program should react appropriately to the service request ES User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 260 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm m o Basics Serial Poll In a serial poll just as with command STB the status byte of an instrument is queried However the query is realized via interface messages and is thus clearly faster The serial poll method is defined in IEEE 488 1 and used to be the only standard po
458. s CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 CRC lt Error type CAN uses the Cyclic Redundancy Check which is a complex checksum calculation method The transmitter calculates the CRC and sends the result in the CRC sequence The receiver calculates the CRC in the same way A CRC error occurs when the calcu lated result differs from the received value in the CRC sequence Remote command TRIGger A CAN CRCerror on page 391 Identifier Sets the trigger to a specific message identifier or an identifier range The first key press enables the Identifier trigger type the second one opens the Iden tifier menu If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the Symbolic ID from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier Frame type Symbolic ID Identifier User defined Setup 4 Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 389 ID IDDT Frame type lt Identifier Data frames and remote frames contain an identifier Select the frame type to be triggered on or select Data and remote if the frame type is not relevant Remote command TRIGger A CAN FTYPe on page 389 Symbolic ID Identifier If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Identifier Setup Identifier Ope
459. s on page 148 EA AA lt lt lt MU User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 178 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis UART RS 232 Interface Option R amp S RTM K2 TB 1ms T 0s Auto CH1 115 mV DC 1MSais Real Time Complete NE M 1 389 ms 2 847 ms 0x00 Frames 6 10 23 Protocol Bus Type Display Fig 11 10 Decoded UART signal C1 Data source blue results completely decoded words grey brackets start and end of complete frames green results correct parity bits red results Errors or incomplete word that is not completely contained in the acquisition Change the hor izontal scale or move the Time Reference to get a longer acquisition Example The figure above shows five frames of a UART signal with one source line Table 11 3 Content of the UART frame table Column Description Start time Time of the frame start in relation to the trigger point Data Hexadecimal values of the data words State Overall state of the frame SCPI commands R unt on page 385 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 179 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 RT TX FCOunt on page 385 RT RX FRAMe lt n gt WCOunt on page 386 RT TX FRAMe lt n gt WCOunt on page 386 RT RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STATe on page 386 RT TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STATe on page 386 RT RX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt STARt on page 386 RT TX FRAMe lt n gt WORD lt o gt
460. s you open a menu to manage instrument configuration files e Device Settings o A E INR HA J Save Load Import Export Default sett Ki N Memory E a r a Back m 4 Sa 4 Usage Lan N qe Nor rs Impor Export Device SSIS EE 216 Memory Usage cocinada ad Eia te ERR ptr 216 pcc 216 Save Opens the Save menu see Save Menu on page 209 In addition to the common save functions specific functions are available Setup amp Label Save Saves the the device settings together with the label list to the selected storage directory in one file The used file name is displayed when storage is completed This function is available if option R amp S RTM K1 or K3 is installed protocols I C LIN CAN and a label list was loaded and applied to the protocol data When you load a setting file with label list to an instrument the label list is loaded together with the instrument settings A previously loaded label list will be overwritten Load Opens the Load menu see Load Menu on page 210 AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 215 R amp S RTM Data and File Management Saving and Loading Import Export Device Settings Opens the Import Export menu see Import Export Menu on page 211 Memory Usage Displays information on the instrument and information on used and available memory space on all available storage devices Default sett Restores the default device settings These settings among others are al
461. s and reference settings 1 Press REF 2 Press Load 3 Press Reference and select the reference number you want to load the reference to EE SSSI SSS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 72 R amp S9RTM Reference Waveforms 5 2 References Reference RE3 Reference for REF key 4 Press Load A file explorer is displayed 5 Select the storage device and the file that contains the reference Use the Naviga tion knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change Directory 6 Press Load The saved reference is loaded to the R amp S RTM 7 Ifyou also want to load the settings that were used to create the reference waveform a Inthe Reference or Load menu press Reference and select the reference number you want to load the settings to b Press Load Settings Load Settings is only available if the waveform was loaded to the reference storage before you cannot laod the setting first Reference for REF key The REF key provides functions for working with reference waveforms on the instrument For details on working with these functions see chapter 5 1 Using References on page 71 Source Update Pa IU N 73 SOUTO E 74 seri EE 74 Vue TE 74 A dee ees 74 A A OR ERR 74 LP EE 74 n MENTRE 74 Load 110 E UE 74 Reference Selects one of the four possible internal reference
462. s are ignored The first bit after CS is Bit O For example with bit offset 2 Bit O and Bit 1 after CS are ignored and the pattern starts with Bit 2 Remote command TRIGger A SPI POFFset on page 365 Number of Bits Ser Pattern Defines the length of the serial pattern in bit Remote command TRIGger A SPI PLENgth on page 365 Select Bit Ser Pattern Selects the bit number for binary pattern setting For the selected bit State is to be set The bits are counted from the message start the selected bit is highlighted in the pattern bit line State Ser Pattern Toggles the logic state of the selected bit O low 1 high or X don t care Select Nibble Ser Pattern Selects four bits half byte for hexadecimal entry with Value The selected nibble is highlighted in the lower pattern line AAA A User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 157 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 Value Ser Pattern Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected nibble 11 3 4 SPI SSPI Decode Results You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapte 1 2 Reference for Protocol Decoding on page 145 TB 50us T 0s Auto SPI Frame Start 208 33MSais Real Time Complete LEE EN e en eg lI 121 B8 we ep ve w
463. s clear flag Parameters lt Action gt 011 0 The contents of the status registers are preserved 1 Resets the status registers RST ReSeT Sets the instrument to a defined default status The default settings are indicated in the description of commands Usage Setting only SRE Contents Service Request Enable Sets the service request enable register to the indicated value This command determines under which conditions a service request is triggered Parameters Contents Contents of the service request enable register in decimal form Bit 6 MSS mask bit is always 0 Range O to 255 STB STatus Byte query Reads the contents of the status byte in decimal form Usage Query only User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 266 R amp S RTM Remote Control 14 2 3 Command Reference TRG TRiGger Triggers all actions waiting for a trigger event In particular TRG generates a manual trigger signal Manual Trigger This common command complements the commands of the TRIGger subsystem Usage Event TST self TeST query Triggers selftests of the instrument and returns an error code in decimal form see Service Manual supplied with the instrument 0 indicates no errors occured Usage Query only WAI WAIt to continue Prevents servicing of the subsequent commands until all preceding commands have been executed and all signals have settled see also command synchronization and OPC Usage Ev
464. s identifier to the slaves e Synchronization mechanism for clock recovery by slave nodes without crystal or ceramics resonator The R amp S RTM supports several versions of the LIN standard v1 3 v2 0 v2 1 and the american SAE J2602 Data transfer Basic communication concept of LIN e Communication in an active LIN network is always initiated by the master e Master sends a message header including the synchronization break the synchro nization byte and the message identifier e The identified node sends the message response one to eight data bytes and one checksum byte e Header and response form the message frame The data is transmitted in bytes using the UART byte word interface without the parity bit Each byte consists of a start bit 8 bits and a stop bit Start BitO Bit 1 Bit7 Stop bit LSB MSB bit l Byte field Fig 11 14 Structure of a byte field Data bytes are transmitted LSB first The identifier byte consists of 6 bits for the frame identifier and two parity bits This com bination is known as protected identifier Trigger The R amp S RTM can trigger on various parts of LIN frames The data line must be con nected to an input channel triggering on math and reference waveforms is not possible You can trigger on e Frame start synchronization field e Specific slave identifier or identifier range e Data pattern in the message e Wake up signal e Checksum error error in data pa
465. s in residential environments due to possible conducted as well as radiated disturbances In this case the operator may be required to take appropriate measures to eliminate these disturbances Class B equipment Equipment suitable for use in residential environments and environments that are directly connected to a low voltage supply network that supplies residential buildings Repair and service 1 The product may be opened only by authorized specially trained personnel Before any work is performed on the product or before the product is opened it must be disconnected from the AC supply network Otherwise personnel will be exposed to the risk of an electric shock 1171 0000 42 07 Page 5 Basic Safety Instructions Adjustments replacement of parts maintenance and repair may be performed only by electrical experts authorized by Rohde 8 Schwarz Only original parts may be used for replacing parts relevant to safety e g power switches power transformers fuses A safety test must always be performed after parts relevant to safety have been replaced visual inspection protective conductor test insulation resistance measurement leakage current measurement functional test This helps ensure the continued safety of the product Batteries and rechargeable batteries cells If the information regarding batteries and rechargeable batteries cells is not observed either at all or to the extent necessary product users may be exposed t
466. s on this reference point Remote command TIMebase REFerence on page 274 Menu Off Defines how long a selection menu for a softkey is displayed before it automatically closes again Language Provides different languages in which the softkey labels help and other screen informa tion can be displayed Currently only an English interface is available for the instrument Remote command DISPlay LANGuage on page 423 Date amp Time Provides softkeys to set the current date and time in the instrument Year Month Day Hour Minute Date amp Time Change the date and time settings individually Changes are only adopted by the instru ment after you press Save and Back Remote command SYSTem DATE on page 424 SYSTem TIME on page 424 Interface Activates or deactivates additional instrument interfaces Using these interfaces you can communicate with the instrument for example to read out data or automate the meas uring station Various interfaces are available as options for the instrument and are installed in a specific slot at the rear Depending on the installed interface additional parameters may be definable via the Parameter softkey after the interface has been activated gt USB lt Interface Activates the Type B USB interface for remote control The USB interface provides a simple way to connect the instrument to a PC The USB 2 0 standard is supported Use a connection cable that is suitable for a
467. s the displayed persistent waveform from the screen Usage Event Waveform Auxilary Cursors and Grid Settings DAS PIES TO A eda a rad aos eee 305 eligi ET e d mms 306 DISPlay STYLe lt Style gt Defines how the waveform data is displayed T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 305 R8S RTM Remote Control Command Reference Parameters lt Style gt VECTors DOTS VECTors Individual data points are connected by a line DOTS Only the data points are displayed RST VECT DISPlay GRID STYLe Style Defines how the grid is displayed Parameters Style LINes RETicle NONE LINes Displays the grid as horizontal and vertical lines RETicle Displays crosshairs instead of a grid NONE No grid is displayed RST LIN 14 2 6 2 Zoom TiMebase ZOOM STAT EE 306 KRIER e 306 TIMebase ZOOM KEE 307 RR Ee TR TEEN 307 TIMebase ZOOM STATe lt ZoomState gt Switches the zoom window on or off Parameters lt ZoomState gt ON OFF RST OFF TIMebase ZOOM SCALe lt ZoomScale gt Defines the time base in the zoom diagram in seconds per division Parameters lt ZoomScale gt Range Depends on various other settings Default unit s div User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 306 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 6 3 Command Reference TIMebase ZOOM TIME Time Defines the offset of the trigger point to the reference point of the zoom diagram Parameters Time RST 0 Default unit s TiMe
468. s tj cM aY 115 SOPO PEE 250 Center frequency le mE PE EE 337 Change directory airs 417 SOEN eeneg geckege geed 211 A Channel KO Susana sido an aaa daa aaa dees Acquisition Label m limited number eerte eintreten e 38 MENU enana e eren Modes eanne e aeaaeae eene 14 name label E 34 set n mbet OF Acida abaco o eoo das ed da areas 25 Channel cursors start and stop displaying EEN 51 CHIME CLEAR ite eiii eda iia d vats dadas culta deal 70 ee Ee er 14 Clear status Acquisition Ume iii ela 15 remote essse ee cesecerstsccecceseceesetsseececece 264 Actions Col initial 247 softkey EH UR 126 Color mode Active probe PNUD EE 205 differential aiii tients 18 SOMO ed lnea cast 220 Micro BUON 1 1 tet ert seam lara 32 Colors temperature 2 55 overview Colima neben ag hav ded pneri desig 247 ProbeMeler cuicos in 32 Commands Settings seni erp ere eee ipee capi Colon DARREN 247 ADC sample rate COMMA Maui ia indus adi 247 ADC samples ENEE command line structure seee 247 Alignment common VIE 228 double dagger EE A A Saeed 247 Amplitude ENEE 83 GBIP addressed oooocoocicocnccccoconcncoconnnconononononinnonons 240 Asynchronuous commands s sss 249 GBIP universal a Attenuation probe D instrument Control 239 Automatic measurements sss 83 E WEEN Remote control 5 5 5 rediere deed 321 question mark Auxiliary curs
469. sam Hold ple interval the voltage is taken from the sample point and considered as constant and the intervals are connected with vertical lines Thus you see the discrete values of the ADC Remote command ACQuire INTerpolate on page 275 Roll Enables the roll mode User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 26 R amp S9RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup 2 3 3 2 3 3 1 Reference for Waveform Setup The roll mode moves the captured input data on the display from the right to the left The instrument shows the waveform immediately without waiting for the complete acquisition of the waveform record The roll mode displays the untriggered signal Use the roll mode for slow non repetitive signals with 200 kHz or slower Remote command TIMebase ROLL ENABle on page 277 Vertical Settings To adjust the vertical settings you use the keys and rotary knobs in the VERTICAL func tional block of the front panel and the channel specific softkey menu VERTICAL Controls VERTICAL POSITION IK OFFSET REF functions are described in chapter 5 Reference Waveforms on page 71 MATH functions are described in chapter 7 Mathematics on page 94 ei TC BEE 27 DINEL e oi 28 POSITION PRATER EKEEEEMEEM 28 A E 28 Belo MANENTE 28 SCALE VS cal iii 29 CHN Each channel key turns on an analog channel selects it and opens the Channel menu with the vertical settings of the selected channel The key is illuminated in the chann
470. saspe ede ia n ace tu sane RATEN DRIN des gg 361 BUS STATe State Switches the protocol display on or off Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF BUS TYPE Type Defines the bus or interface type for analysis For most types a special option to the instrument is required User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 359 R8S RTM Remote Control EES Command Reference Parameters lt Type gt PARallel 12C SPI SSPI UART CAN LIN RST PARallel BUS FORMat Format Sets the decoding format for the display on the screen Parameters Format ASCii HEXadecimal BlNary DECimal RST HEXadecimal BUS DSIZe lt DisplaySize gt Sets the height of the decoded bus signal on the sreen Parameters lt DisplaySize gt SMALI MEDium LARGe RST MEDium BUS DSIGnals lt BitsSignals gt Displays the individual bit lines above the decoded bus line Parameters lt BitsSignals gt ON OFF RST ON BUS POSition Position Sets the vertical position of the decoded bus signal in divisions on the sreen Parameters Position Range 4 to 4 Increment 0 02 RST 3 5 Default unit div BUS LIST Returns the contents of the frame table in block data format Return values lt DataTable gt Block data Usage Query only eee User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 360 R amp S RTM Remote Control 14 2 13 2 14 2 13 3 Command Reference BUS LIST SAVE lt FilePath gt Saves the decoded
471. select the field type to be triggered on using Frame Remote command TRIGger A TV FIELd on page 297 Line Sets an exact line number if Trigger on is Line If the other trigger conditions are also met the oscilloscope triggers exactly on the beginning of the selected line in any field Remote command TRIGger A TV LINE on page 297 All Lines The oscilloscope triggers on the beginning of all video signal lines if Trigger on is Line Remote command TRIGger A TV FIELd on page 297 Frame The oscilloscope triggers on the beginning of the video signal fields if the other trigger conditions are fulfilled The setting is available for video signals using interlaced scanning All Triggers on all fields Odd Triggers only on odd fields Even Triggers only on even fields Remote command TRIGger A TV FIELd on page 297 ERA A lt lt lt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 46 R amp S RTM Triggers ee Reference for Triggers 3 3 2 5 Pattern The Pattern trigger is is a logic trigger It provides any logical combination of the input channels and supports you in verifying the operation of digital logic The Setup and the Source menus for the pattern trigger are identical Pattern Setup Source Threshold Combination Trigger On CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 Pattern channel E 47 COMBINADO RET 47 i se E 48 Channel N Select the state for each digital channel The states are H High
472. selected You can search for data and or remote frames Remote command SEARch PROTocol CAN FTYPe on page 400 Identifier Setup Opens the menu to set the identifier pattern if Event Identifier or ID amp Data or ID amp Error is selected After setting the ID type and the Comparison condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 190 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 The settings are the same as for the setup of the identifier trigger see Identifier Setup on page 184 Remote command SEARch PROTocol1 CAN I TYPe on page 400 SEARch PROTocol CAN ICONdition on page 400 SEARch PROTocol CAN IDENtifier on page 400 Data Setup Opens the menu to set the data pattern to be searched if Event ID amp Data is selected After setting the Data length and the Comparison condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte The settings are the same as for the setup of the data trigger see Data Setup on page 185 Remote command SEARch PROTocol CAN DLENgth on page 401 SEARch PROToco1 CAN DCONdition on page 401 SEARch PROTocol CAN DATA on page 401 11 6 5 2 CAN S
473. selected byte enter the hexadecimal value or set the State for each selected Bit Value Identifier Setup Identifier Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected byte by turning the navigation knob Identifier and data Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition The instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern Frame type Symbolic ID Identifier KR setup a a The identifier conditions are the same as for the Identifier trigger type see Identifier on page 184 The first key press enables the trigger type the second one opens the Identifier and data menu Remote command TRIGger A CAN TYPE on page 389 IDDT Data Setup Identifier and data Opens a menu to set the data pattern to be triggered on After setting the Data length and the Compare condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 185 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 Data Setup Data Length Most settings are the same as for identifier input See e Compare on page 185 Bit on page 185 State on page 185 Byte on page 185 Value on page 185 Remote command TRIGger A CAN DCONdition on page 391 TRIGger A CAN DATA on page 391 Data Length Data Setup lt Identifier and
474. ser Manual 1305 0595 02 08 382 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm y0b tT Mm er Command Reference Parameters lt Parity gt ODD EVEN NONE See Parity on page 173 RST NONE BUS UART SBIT lt StopBitNumber gt Sets the stop bits Parameters lt StopBitNumber gt B1 B1 5 B2 1 1 5 or 2 stop bits are possible RST B1 BUS UART BAUDrate lt Baudrate gt Sets the number of transmitted bits per second Parameters lt Baudrate gt Range 100 to 78 1E6 Increment 100 RST 115200 Default unit Bit BUS UART BITime BurstldleTime Sets the minimal time between two data frames packets that is between the last stop bit and the start bit of the next frame Parameters lt BurstldleTime gt Range Range depends on the bus configuration mainly on bit rate and symbole size Default unit s CHANnel lt m gt THReshold FINDlevel Executes the analysis of all channels that are configured for the selected bus and sets the threshold for digitization of analog signals for each channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 383 R8S RTM Remote Control m st Command Reference UART Trigger TRIGUERA SS OUR Ge VART eMe 384 TRIGJe rA UART
475. settings the sample rate is higher than the ADC sample rate Waveform samples are added to the ADC samples according to the selected interpolation method See also Interpolation on page 26 Real time sampling is used to capture fast single shot transient sig nals Equivalent Random equivalent time sampling This mode requires repetitive sta Time ble signals It is used to capture fast signals whose frequency compo nents may be much higher than the sample rate of the ADC The wave form points are taken from several acquisitions at a different time in relation to the trigger point The time difference between the sample and the trigger is random Then all the sampled points are put together into one composite waveform Remote command ACQuire MODE on page 275 Decimation Mode Decimation reduces the data stream of the ADC to a stream of waveform points with lower sample rate and a less precise resolution if the oscilloscope captures more samples than the waveform memory can save Sample The oscilloscope acquires the input data with a sample rate which is aligned to the time base horizontal scale and the memory depth Usu ally most signals are displayed optimally with this acquisition mode if all trigger conditions are met Peak Detect The minimum and the maximum of n samples are recorded as wave form points the other samples are discarded Thus the instrument can detect fast signal peaks at slow time scale settings
476. shots Print Prints a screenshot to a printer connected to the USB connector on the front or rear panel EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 126 R amp SS9RTM Masks EMG AI M H HA RP t Reference for MASKS key Waveform Saves the waveform data according to the settings in FILE Wave form Remote command MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENt MODE on page 342 MASK ACTion STOP EVENt MODE on page 342 MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENt MODE on page 342 MASK ACTion PRINt EVENt MODE on page 342 MASK ACTion WFMSave EVENt MODE on page 342 Sound Stop Screenshot Print Waveform Actions For each action you can define when and how often the action will be executed Sound 0s Off aftern n A 14 C Off No action is executed Each The selected action is executed on each violation of the mask After n n Single The selected action is executed once after the n th violation Cyclic The selected action is executed repeatedly after each n th violation Set the execution interval with softkey n Remote command MASK ACTion SOUNd EVENt COUNt on page 343 MASK ACTion STOP EVENt COUNt on page 343 MASK ACTion SCRSave EVENt COUNt on page 343 MASK ACTion PRINt EVENt COUNt on
477. signals Clock level and clock edge define the reference point for setup and hold time The data lavel defines the point of data transition Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel on page 354 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel on page 354 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 138 R amp S9RTM Search 10 3 7 2 Reference for Search Menu Hysteresis Sets a hysteresis range to the search level of the selected signal in order to avoid unwan ted search results caused by noise oscillation around the level For a rising edge the hysteresis is below the search level Otherwise for a falling edge the hysteresis is above the level Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CLEVel DELTa on page 354 SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock DLEVel DELTa on page 354 Data2Clock Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Data2Clock gt Setup Search setup Data2Clock Clock Data Data2Clock Polarity Setup Time Hold Time NA Polarity Sets the edge of the clock signal to define the time reference point for the setup and hold time Rising Only positive clock edges are considered Falling Only negative clock edges are considered Either The clock edges next to the data edge are considered regardless of the clock slope Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock CEDGe on page 354 Setup Time Sets the minimum time before the clock edge while the data signal must
478. sing the Micro Button starts continuous acquisition like the RUN key The acquisition is running as long as you press the Micro Button again Single Starts one acquisition Autoset Starts the autoset procedure None Select this option to prevent unwanted actions due to unintended usage of the Micro Button Remote command PROBe m SETup MODE on page 289 Info Shows general information on the connected probe for example type serial number and production date as well as electrical characteristics like bandwidth attenuation input capacitance and impedance voltage and DC offset range EE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 33 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup EH Reference for Waveform Setup Active Probe on Channel 3 General Information Identification RT ZS30 Type single ended Mat No 1410 4308 02 Serial No 100708 Production Date 2009 09 23 Electrical Characteristics Bandwidth 3GHz Attenuation 10 Input Impedance 1M 2 3 3 5 Label Menu Access CH N gt More gt Label In the Label menu you can define an additional name label for the selected waveform Library Edit Label a SE AAA uge Label Shows or hides the channel name The name label is shown at the vertical center of the channel on the right edge of the display Remote command CHANnel lt m gt LABel STATe on page 282 Library Selects a predefined name text and assigns it to the selected
479. sition 3 Width of the displayed frequency range Span 4 Center of the displayed frequency range Center 5 Sample rate for FFT calculation 6 FFT result mode Waveform Arithmetic 7 Signal source and vertical scaling factor per division CH1 CH4 Y Scale Y Scaling 8 Focus of the horizontal SCALE knob Press SCALE When you deactivate the FFT display the previous display is restored 8 2 Configuring and Using FFT Calculations e Setting Up De FFT ANYS eeh bRss gue EEGENEN 107 e Configuring the Diagrams cccccccceceeeeeee eect cee cece eeeeeeaaneaaneaecaeccaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 108 e Measunng omn FF RETTEN 111 8 2 1 Setting Up the FFT Analysis To display an FFT diagram gt Press the FFT key The key lights up and two windows are displayed the signal vs time at the top the result of the FFT analysis at the bottom ERA SSS Sez User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 107 R amp S9RTM FFT Configuring and Using FFT Calculations To deactivate the FFT display gt Press the FFT key again or press the FFT off softkey in the FFT menu to deac tivate the FFT display The FFT key is no longer illuminated and the previous display is restored To configure the general FFT display 1 2 Press the FFT key to activate the FFT display and open the FFT menu If necessary press one of the CH1 CH4 keys to change the signal source of the FFT calculation Press Waveform Arithmetic to
480. so restored with the PRESET key 12 2 4 Waveforms A waveform can be saved in two ways e As a reference waveform for later use with R amp S RTM REF key See chapter 5 Reference Waveforms on page 71 e As data in various formats directly to a USB flash drive for analysis by other means FILE gt Waveforms This way is described in the current chapter If you want to save many waveforms you can assign the function to the PRINT key Infrequent save operations can be started from the File menu See also chap ter 12 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key on page 212 12 2 4 1 Waveform File Formats Data of all waveforms channel reference and math waveforms is saved as a suc cession of values or pairs of values Pairs of values are written as two consecutive single values Depending on the file format only amplitude values are stored or the amplitude values are stored together with their time value or frequency value in FFT mode With export import you can change the target file format and convert the data In order to reload waveform data as a reference waveform it must be stored in TRF or CSV format TRF Format TRF is the specific binary format for reference waveforms of the R amp S RTM It contains amplitude values or pairs of values time information time of the first sample and the sample interval and current instrument settings The data can be loaded as reference waveform for further use on the instrument It
481. sor measurement type CURSor m FUNCtion to HRATio Set the unit of the result with CURSor m YRATio UNIT Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 319 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 8 2 Command Reference Return values Ratio Numeric value corresponding to the specified unit Usage Query only Quick Measurements MEASuremenbsm ALES VAT iacu etant tat adonde te RR texeu ce xh EM Ett IS ARRA ba cdUlsd ear 320 n WEE 320 MEASurementsm gt AOF PF 3 Lecta cidad EN Sege ESA 320 MEAGurementomz ARESGu 320 MEASurement lt m gt ALL STATe Starts or stops the quick measurement and sets the status bit Parameters lt State gt ON OFF RST OFF Firmware Software FW 03 800 MEASurement lt m gt AON Starts the quick measurement Suffix m 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Usage Event MEASurement lt m gt AOFF Stops the quick measurement Suffix m 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Usage Event MEASurement lt m gt ARESult Returns the results of the quick measurement Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 320 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Command Reference Return values lt QuickMeasData gt List of values Quick measurement results are listed in the following order PEAK UPE LPE CYCR CYCM PER FREQ RTIM FTIM Usage Query only 14 2 8 3 Automat
482. ssi bility for different instruments to poll the status byte The method also works for instru ments which do not adhere to SCPI or IEEE 488 2 The serial poll is mainly used to obtain a fast overview of the state of several instruments connected to the controller Query of an instrument status Each part of any status register can be read using queries There are two types of com mands e The common commands ESR IDN IST STB query the higher level reg isters e The commands of the STATus system query the SCPI registers STATus QUEStionable The returned value is always a decimal number that represents the bit pattern of the queried register This number is evaluated by the controller program Queries are usually used after an SRQ in order to obtain more detailed information on the cause of the SRQ Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits the SCPI registers 16 bits The contents of a status register are specified and transferred as a single decimal number To make this possible each bit is assigned a weighted value The decimal number is calculated as the sum of the weighted values of all bits in the register that are set to 1 Weigh 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 Example The decimal value 40 32 8 indicates that bits no 3 and 5 in the status register e g the QUEStionable status summary bit and the ESB bit in the STatus Byte are set Error Queue Each er
483. ssing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial state Does not change the instrument settings IFC Interface Clear Resets the interfaces to the default setting LLO Local Lockout The LOC IEC ADDR key is disabled SPE Serial Poll Enable Ready for serial poll SPD Serial Poll Disable End of serial poll PPU Parallel Poll Unconfig End of the parallel poll state ure IFC is not a real universal command it is sent via a separate line however it also affects all instruments connected to the bus and does not require addressing Addressed Commands Addressed commands are encoded in the range 00 through OF hex They only affect instruments addressed as listeners Command Effect on the instrument GET Group Execute Trigger Triggers a previously active instrument function e g a sweep The effect of the command is the same as with that of a pulse at the external trigger signal input GTL Go to Local Transition to the local state manual control GTR Go to Remote Transition to the remote state remote control User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 240 Remote Control Basics Command Effect on the instrument PPC Parallel Poll Configure Configures the instrument for parallel poll SDC Selected Device Clear Aborts the processing of the commands just received and sets the command processing software to a defined initial
484. stay steady above or below the data level The setup time can be negative In this case the setup interval starts after the clock edge and the hold time must be positive and longer than the absolute value of the setup time Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock STIMe on page 355 I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 139 R amp S9RTM Search 10 3 8 10 3 8 1 Reference for Search Menu Hold Time Sets the minimum time after the clock edge while the data signal must stay steady above or below the data level The hold time can be negative In this case the hold time ends before the clock edge and the setup time must be positive and longer than the absolute value of the hold time Remote command SEARch TRIGger DATatoclock HTIMe on page 354 Pattern Search The settings for pattern search are provided in two menus in the Setup menu you define the channel states their logical combination and the time range for keeping up the true result of the state pattern condition and in the Source Setup menu you define the threshold levels and hysteresis for each channel Pattern Source Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Pattern gt Source Setup For pattern search up to four channels can be used as source For each channel the threshold level and the hysteresis can be set individually Pattern Source Hysteresis 200 mY Source Selects the channel for which the pattern search is defined Lev
485. stment is an option for higher measurement frequencies in the MHz range e With high impedance probes the impedance varies significantly over frequency e With low impedance probes the impedance variation over frequency is low but the load on the source is high EEUU RU Le E E AA e AA AL LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULULULULLLMXXS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 17 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup Ie 5 Basics If you use passive probes remember some recommendations e Use a probe recommended for your oscilloscope model e Use a ground lead as short as possible to minimize the effect of ground lead induc tance The resonance frequency can be much lower than the system bandwidth and thus can affect the measurement results in particular if you measure steep edge rise times e Select a probe that has a bandwidth of 5 to 10 times the highest frequency being measured This will preserve the harmonics and thus the waveform integrity Active voltage probes general Active probes require operating power from the instrument and have a proprietary inter face to the instrument Their main qualities are e Low loading on signal source e The probe is automatically recognized by the instrument no adjustment is required e Adjustable DC offset at probe tip allows for high resolution on small AC signals which are superimposed on DC levels e Connections should be as short as possible to keep the usable bandwidth
486. storage location that contains the file by pressing Stor age 3 Select the file that contains the equation set Use the Navigation knob to scroll through the directories To change the directory scroll to the name of the directory and press the knob or press Change dir 4 Press Load The equation set is loaded to the R amp S RTM T 2 Reference for Mathematics The MATH key provides functions to configure and display calculated data For details on working with these functions see chapter 7 1 Configuring and Using Math Waveforms on page 94 7 Ss ya N Equation Visible Unit Edit Eq Set Label Save Load E x li EE 98 A EN 98 UU be ene AA E A Saeco eee 98 Edit e el EE 99 GE 99 Ge EE 99 OO DEE 103 eo co PNE 104 L Ger 104 es s EE 104 A EE 104 L Decimal Pot is 104 Pi a cera ud Cute Dae p ud 104 A P 105 Ecco V 105 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 97 R amp SS9RTM Mathematics m 4 n PP Reference for Mathematics A MERERETUR 105 A NTE 105 Gaye cc UEM UII LIE 105 fo BEE 105 Equation Selects one of five possible mathematical channels Visible Defines whether the selected mathematical waveform is displayed on the display or not Note MA5 cannot be displayed it is always invisible Remote command CALCulate MATH m STATe on page 330
487. suffix is irrelevant Parameters Coupling ON OFF RST OFF CURSor lt m gt SWAVe Autoset for cursor lines sets the cursor lines to typical points of the waveform depending on the selected measurement type For example for voltage measurement the cursor lines are set to the upper and lower peaks of the waveform For time measurement the cursor lines are set to the edges of two consecutive positive or two consecutive negative pulses Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 CURSor lt m gt SSCReen Resets the cursors to their initial positions This is helpful if the cursors have disappeared from the display or need to be moved for a larger distance Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 CURSor lt m gt SPPeak For FFT analysis only sets the selected cursor to the previous left level peak Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 316 R8S RTM Remote Control MCRRGMMCIC NN AA AA A A Command Reference CURSor lt m gt SNPeak For FFT analysis only sets the selected cursor to the next right level peak Usage Event Firmware Software FW 03 700 CURSor lt m gt TRACking SCALe STATe State Enables the adjustment of cursor lines if the vertical or horizontal scales are changed Suffix m 1 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters State ON OFF ON
488. sult is clipped DuTTt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 102 R8S RTM Mathematics m Um Reference for Mathematics Derivative f Op1 The derivative corresponds to the rise of the tangent through a function point and indicates the dimension of the change in quantity of the oper and in time The larger the quantity change of the operand per time becomes the larger the result of the derivative is The calculation is approximated using the secant based on the current calculated value and a value with a distance of 0 1 DIV Due to this the time axis has a finitely small resolution Therefore scale the input signal to display the required area appropriately Z5o Integral Calculates the definite integral of the operand The calculation is displayed in the illustration The integration starts at point a and adds the area beneath the waveform Point b indicates the currently calculated value At the end of the positive alternation the integral function reaches its maximum Due to the homopolar operand used in this example the waveform of the area reaches zero after the negative alternation Use a V Marker to measure the area for an extract of the waveform See also Meas Type on page 80 Wi IV IIR low pass IIRL Op1 fg Op2 Calculates a low pass filtered waveform of Operand 1 The cut off frequency is set with constant Operand 2 Sign
489. t Binary Hexadecimal Decimal or ASCII Remote command BUS FORMat on page 360 Label List Opens the Label list menu to load sort and display a name for each bus node instead of the address or ID on the decoded results display So it is easy to identify the messages of the different bus nodes See chapter 11 1 3 Label List on page 146 Frame Table Opens the Frame table menu to configure and display the frame table with detailed decoded data for each frame of the acquisition See chapter 11 1 4 Frame Table Decode Results on page 148 Label List For all protocols using ID or address identification it is possible to create label lists con taining addresses or IDs a symbolic name for each node symbolic label and some protocol specific information You can load label lists and activate its usage for decoding As a result an additional Label column appears in the Frame Table containing the symbolic label The frame captions of the decoded signal show the symbolic label instead of the ID or address values so it is easy to identify the messages of the different bus nodes Content and Format of the PTT File Label lists are stored as PTT protocol translation table files The PTT file format is an extension of the CSV format comma separated values You can edit it with standard editors for example with MS Excel or a text editor The PTT file has three types of lines e Comment lines begin with a hash chara
490. t LevelDelta gt Range Lower limit depends on vertical scale and other set tings no upper limit SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh RANGe lt Range gt Sets the condition how the duration of a steady pattern is compared with the given ref erence time To set the reference value width use SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh WIDTh on page 357 I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 356 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m H sme Command Reference To set a range Af use SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh DELTa on page 357 Parameters Range WITHin OUTSide LONGer SHORter WITHin Finds patterns steady for a time range width x At OUTSide Finds patterns outside a time range width x At LONGer Finds patterns steady for at least the given width SHORter Finds patterns shorter than the given width RST LONG SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh WIDTh Width Sets the reference time of a steady pattern the nominal value for comparisons Parameters Width Default unit s SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh DELTa lt DeltaTime gt Sets a range At to the reference pattern duration set with SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh WIDTh if SEARch TRIGger PATTern WIDTh RANGe is set to WITHin or OUTSide Parameters lt DeltaTime gt Default unit s 14 2 12 9 Search Results SEARch RESDiagram SHOW o
491. t matter don t care TRIGger A PATTern FUNCtion Function Sets the logical combination of the trigger states of the channels Parameters Function AND OR AND The required states of all channels must appear in the input signal at the same time OR At least one of the channels must have the required state RST AND TRIGger A PATTern CONDition lt ConditionString gt Sets the trigger point depending on the result of the logical combination of the channel states Parameters lt ConditionString gt TRUE FALSE RST TRUE User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 298 R8S RTM Remote Control SS SSS ooo A Command Reference 14 2 5 6 B Trigger a MC t 299 TRIGGER BISQUIRES NE 299 TRIGGER B EDGE SLOP iia iba 299 TRIGO BLE VB c 299 TRIGE B FINDIGVEl RE 299 WRG Ger Bi ODE ii dia 300 TRIGG B DELAY P M M 300 rie duc hse qc EET 300 TRIGger E TY S Feresis cee nee a das 300 TRIGger B ENABle State Activates or deactivates the second trigger The instrument triggers if both trigger event conditions A and B are fulfilled Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF TRIGger B SOURce Source Selects one of the input channels as B trigger source Available channels depend on the instrument type Parameters Source CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 RST CH1 TRIGger B EDGE SLOPe Slope Sets the edge for the B tri
492. t recognizes the probe and turns the channel on 2 Press the AUTOSET button on the left of the display 2 2 2 Adjusting the Signal Input Manually The settings mentioned here are described in detail in e chapter 2 3 1 HORIZONTAL Controls on page 22 e chapter 2 3 3 2 Channel Menu on page 29 e chapter 2 3 3 1 VERTICAL Controls on page 27 1 Connect the probe to the input connector CH N The instrument recognizes the probe and turns the channel on 2 Use the SCALE rotary knob in the HORIZONTAL area of the front panel to set up the time base 3 Use the POSITION rotary knob to set up the trigger position Press the knob to reset the trigger offset to 0 s 4 Press the channel key corresponding to the input channel It is lighted with the color of the channel waveform 5 In the softkey menu press the Coupling softkey repeatedly to select the correct coupling 6 Select the Bandwidth limit 7 If you use a passive probe adjust the probe settings a Select the Termination input impedance b Select More to switch the menu page ERA e e e AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 20 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup Setting up the Waveform c Press the Probe softkey and select the attenuation 8 Use the SCALE rotary knob in the VERTICAL area of the front panel to adjust the vertical scale of the waveform Press the knob to toggle between fine and rough adjustment 9 Use the POSITION
493. t the waveform intensity directly Remote command DISPlay INTensity WAVeform on page 304 Backlight Intensities Defines the intensity of the background lighting of the display in percent Enter a per centage between 10 and 100 The default value is 50 Remote command DISPlay INTensity BACKlight on page 304 Grid Intensities Defines the intensity of the grid on the screen in percent Enter a percentage between O and 100 The default value is 34 Remote command DISPlay INTensity GRID on page 304 EA A lt lt lt gt gt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 54 R amp S RTM Display General Display Settings Persistence lt Intensities Defines the persistence of the waveform on the screen Off Deactivates persistence Automatic The optimal persistence time is determined automatically by the instru ment Manual User defined persistence according to Persist Time setting Remote command DISPlay PERSistence STATe on page 304 DISPlay PERSistence TIME AUTO on page 305 Persist Time Intensities User defined persistence time if Manual persistence is selected Each new data point remains on the screen for the duration defined here Possible values are from 50 ms to 9 6 s or Infinite If Infinite is selected each new data point remains on the screen infinitely until this setting is changed or the persistence is cleared Remote command DISPlay PERSistence TIME on page 305 DISPlay PERSistenc
494. taCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for data If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDData Parameters lt DataCondition gt EQUaI NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQU SEARch PROTocol CAN DATA lt Data gt Defines the data pattern The pattern length is defined with SEARch PROTocol CAN DLENgth The command is relevant if SEA Rch PROTocol CAN CONDition is set to IDData Parameters Data String containing binary pattern with max 64 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed Make sure to enter complete bytes 14 2 13 8 LIN LIN eet UE WE 402 ANS MOS iodo Dai ad 403 e LIN Decode R gente iii EE qucd 405 ETC Ee BEE 410 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 401 R8S RTM Remote Control es g n Command Reference LIN Configuration BUS EIN DATA SOUR OO E 402 BUS UN POL oia dci 402 BUSINESS TANGO IG a edad 402 SR CR MN 402 GHANnel ms THReshold FINDlevel 1 enr diia 403 BUS LIN DATA SOURce Source Sets the source of the data line All channel waveforms
495. tages of the high signal level The setting is valid for all measurement places Parameters lt MiddleLevel gt RST 50 Default unit 96 Firmware Software 03 400 14 2 8 5 Automatic Measurements Statistic MEAS urement m STATIsticsENABle 21 cional dida EERSTEN 327 MEAGurement mz STATtstce WEIGht nennen nana n ano nnns nna 327 MEASurement m STATistics RESet A 327 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 326 R8S RTM Remote Control en Command Reference MEASurement lt m gt RESult AVG cocoonccccnoncccoccnnnoncncnoncnconnnnonnnnnnnnnocnnnnonnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnaninanncnnn 328 MEASurement m RESulESTDDew2 11 00c cdeccaenaacdseecatnaadddevdandesddcdeaaaasadenccesausddenttons 328 MEASurement lt m gt RESUIENPEAK cocos dai e PRAE 328 MEASur ment m RESultPPEG amp K 1 2 ratae nasd ui cddaaassineaddssadeedcdddenhieavdcaddcnays 328 MEASurement msRESulbWFEMGOUDI 1 2 leitete dera ani naaa aaa ca lacada 329 MEAGurement mz STATisticeVAlueAll 329 MEAGurement mz SGTATlsticeVAluecns anna daanan naana iaaa inaia 329 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics ENABle lt StatisticEnable gt Activates or deactivates the statistical evaluation for the selected measurement Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the measurement place Parameters lt StatisticEnable gt ON OFF RST OFF Firmware Software FW 03 700 MEASurement lt m gt STATistics WEIGht lt AverageCount gt Sets the numbe
496. tandard You can trigger on various SDTV signals like PAL PAL M SECAM NTSC and SDTV 576i PAL and SECAM HDTV standards are indicated by the number of active lines and the scanning system p for progressive scanning i for interlaced scanning Remote command TRIGger A TV STANdard on page 296 Signal Selects the polarity of the signal Note that the sync pulse has the opposite polarity If the video modulation is positve the sync pulses are negative If the modulation is negative sync pulses are positive The edges of the sync pulses are used for triggering therefore incorrect polarity setting causes a sporadic triggering by the video information EE A e A LLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLLULXSS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 45 R amp S RTM Triggers a Mm Reference for Triggers T T v v Fig 3 3 Positive video signal with negative bi level sync pulse SDTV left and negative signal with positive tri level sync pulse HDTV right Remote command TRIGger A TV POLarity on page 297 Trigger On Toggles between triggering on line starts or frame starts Line aloows to trigger on All Lines or on one specified Line Frame has different effect depending on the selected signal standard e For standards using progressive scanning HDTV 720 1080i the instrument triggers on the frame start e Al other available standards use interlaced scanning and the instrument triggers on the field start You can
497. te Control m C nl Command Reference Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Usage Event CAN Trigger TRIGger A CAN TYPE lt TriggerType gt Specifies the trigger mode for CAN Parameters lt TriggerType gt STOFrame EOFrame ID IDDT FTYPe ERRCondition STOFrame Start of frame EOFrame End of frame ID Sets the trigger to a specific message identifier or an identifier range Specify the identifier with TRTGger A CAN ITYPe TRIGger A CAN ICONdition and TRIGger A CAN IDENtifier IDDT Sets the trigger to a combination of identifier and data condition The instrument triggers at the end of the last byte of the specified data pattern Specify the identifier see ID and the data with TRIGger A CAN DLC TRIGger A CAN DCONdition and TRIGger A CAN DATA FTYPe Triggers on a specified frame type Specify the frame type with TRIGgerlA CAN PBTYPe ERRCondition Identifies various errors in the frame Specify the errors with TRIGOQeFi A CAN ACKerror TRICger A CAN BITSterrotr TRIGger A CAN CRCerror and TRIGger A CAN FORMerror RST STOF TRIGger A CAN FTYPe lt FrameType gt Specifies the frame type to be triggered on if TRIGger A CAN TYPE is set to FTYPe Parameters lt FrameType gt DATA REMote ERRor OVERload ANY RST ERR User Manual 1305 059
498. tern gt Example Example String with max 24 characters 3 byte 8 bit Characters 0 1 and X are allowed X can be assigned to a specified bit If you define a pattern shorter than the pattern length the missing LSB are filled with X If you define a pattern longer than the pattern length the pattern string is not valid TRIG A I2C PLEN 2 TRIG A I2C PATT 10X10000XXXX1111 TRIG A I2C PATT Return value 2 bytes 10X10000XXXxX1111 TRIG A I2C PLEN 1 TRIG A I2C PATT 110 TRIG A I2C PATT Return value 1 byte 110XXXXX TRIGger A I2C PLENgth lt PatternLength gt Defines how many bytes are considered in the trigger condition To set the pattern for these bytes use TRIGger A I2C PATTern Parameters lt PatternLength gt Number of bytes Range 1to3 Increment 1 RST 1 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 374 R amp S RTM Remote Control EENEG Command Reference TRIGger A I2C POFFset lt PatternByteOffset gt Sets the number of bytes before the first byte of interest relating to the end of the address bytes Parameters lt PatternByteOffset gt Number of ignored bytes Range 0 to 4095 Increment 1 RST 0 PC Decode Results BUS T2C FOOT iann ida 375 BUS e ER KEE E 375 E Ki E EN RN KEE 376 BUST2C ERAMBEIRISTARIE iere eur dd IE rtr aaa 376 BUS T ZCG FRAMo SN STOP cet 376 BUS I2C FRAME cn ee 377 BUSGI2CERAMe nz AMODe 377 SE e eet EE 377 BUSIZOIFRAME lt m ADDRESS a
499. that would be missed with other acquisition modes RETE RA E A A e 1 1 L1111LLUALLLLULOXL User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 24 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup REENEN Reference for Waveform Setup High Resolu The average of n captured sample points is recorded as one waveform tion sample Averaging reduces the noise the result is a more precise waveform with higher vertical resolution Remote command CHANnel lt m gt TYPE on page 276 Wavef Arithmetic Waveform arithmetic builds the resulting waveform from several consecutive acquisitions of the signal envelope and average or by other operations on the captured data The arithmetic works with all sample modes and decimated waveforms Off No arithmetic is applied Envelope The minimum and maximum values are saved in addition to the normal waveform samples The resulting diagram shows two envelope wave forms below and above the normal waveform the minimums floor and maximums roof representing the borders in which the signal occurs The envelope is refreshed with each acquisition and it is reset each time the waveform parameters are changed Average The average is calculated from the data of the current acquisition and a number of acquisitions before The method reduces random noise and other heterodyne signals It requires a stable triggered and repet itive signal The number of acquisitions for average calculation is defined with No of Av
500. the CONDition bit of a superordinate register Logical AND of EVENt and ENABle bits 15 14 13 12 ENABle part 32 110 Fig 14 1 The status register model Description of the five status register parts The five parts of a SCPI register have different properties and functions CONDition The coNDition partis written into directly by the hardware or the sum bit of the next lower register Its contents reflect the current instrument status This register part can only be read but not written into or cleared Its contents are not affected by reading PTRansition NTRansition The two transition register parts define which state transition of the CONDition part none 0 to 1 1 to 0 or both is stored in the EVENt part The Positive TRansition part acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDi tion part is changed from 0 to 1 the associated PTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 PTR bit 21 the EVENt bit is set PTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set This part can be written into and read as required Its contents are not affected by reading The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter When a bit of the CONDi tion part is changed from 1 to 0 the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1 NTR bit 71 the EVENt bit is set NTR bit 0 the EVENt bit is not set
501. the Hamming window its value is zero at the borders of the measuring interval Thus the noise level within the spectrum is reduced and the width of the spectral lines enlarges Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 113 R amp S9RTM FFT Reference for FFT key Hamming The Hamming window is bell shaped Its value is not zero at the borders of the measuring interval Thus the noise level inside the spectrum is higher than Hanning or Blackman but smaller than the rectangular window The width of the spectral lines is thinner than the other bell shaped functions Use this window to measure amplitudes of a period ical signal precisely Blackman The Blackman window is bell shaped and has the steepest fall in its wave shape of all other available functions Its value is zero at both borders of the measuring interval In the Blackman window the ampli tudes can be measured very precisely However determining the fre quency is more difficult Use this window to measure amplitudes of a periodical signal precisely Rectangle The rectangular window multiplies all points by one The result is a high frequency accuracy with thin spectral lines but also with increased noise Use this function preferably with pulse response tests where start and end values are zero Remote command CALCulate MATH m FFT WINDow TYPE on page 333 Y Scaling Defines the sc
502. the instrument or the image only you can assign the function to the PRINT key Infrequent save operations can be started from the File menu See also chapter 12 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key on page 212 Saving a Screenshot Before you can save the screenshot you have to configure the storage location and file format 1 Press FILE Screenshots EN User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 219 R amp S9RTM Data and File Management 12 2 5 2 Saving and Loading 2 Configure the storage location as described in To select the storage directory on page 207 3 Enter the file name as described in To define a new file or directory name on page 207 4 Select the Format and the Color mode For details see chapter 12 2 5 2 Screenshot Storage Settings on page 220 5 Press Save See also chapter 12 2 2 Quick Access with PRINT key on page 212 Screenshot Storage Settings With FILE gt Screenshots you open a menu to save or print screenshots of the current display FileName Name Kess Format o a oo Color Mode Mode ER MEA For a description ofthe common save functions Storage File Name and Save see chapter 12 2 1 3 General Storage Settings on page 209 Specific settings for saving screenshots are described below AE AAA o ee 220 Color mode ua ti ad 220 RA 221 Format Defines the format of the screenshot file The following formats are available e BMP BitMaP is a
503. the second one opens the Identifier and data menu Identifier Setup Identifier and data Opens the Identifier menu The identifier conditions are the same as for the Identifier trigger type see Identifier on page 196 Data Setup Identifier and data Opens a menu to set the data pattern After setting the No of Bytes and the Com pare condition you can enter the value bit by bit by setting the state high low or don t care for each single bit Alternatively you can enter a hexadecimal value for each byte No of Bytes The method is the same as for identifier input See e Compare on page 196 Bit on page 197 State on page 197 Byte on page 197 Value on page 197 Remote command TRIGger A LIN TYPE on page 403 IDDT TRIGger A LIN DCONdition on page 405 TRIGger A LIN DATA on page 405 EM User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 197 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 No of Bytes Data Setup Identifier and data Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern Remote command TRIGger A LIN DLENgth on page 405 11 7 4 LIN Label List Label lists are protocol specific A LIN PTT file contains two values for each identifier e ID Addr hexadecimal identifier value e Symbolic label symbolic name for the identifier Example LIN PTT file QFILE VERSION 1 0 PROTOCOL NAME lin Labels for LIN protocol Col
504. the signal ERREUR RU e EE AA e 02 0 q 024 551 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 50 R amp S9RTM Display General Display Settings Persistence defines how long a data point is displayed in the diagram Each new data point remains on the screen for the defined persistence time or infinitely until the persistence time is changed or the persistence is cleared Signal colors or brightness depend on on the cumulative frequency of the values By default values that occur frequently are displayed brighter than rare values Alter natively the brightness level can be converted to a color range i e the color changes gradually with increasing cumulative occurance It is also possible to invert the brightness display so that rare values are brighter than frequent values This setting is useful in combination with persistence to detect rare values within the waveform 4 1 4 Configuring the Display 4 1 1 1 4 1 1 2 Configuring the Diagram Elements To display the grid or crosshairs 1 2 3 Press DISPLAY Grid Lines to display a grid Press DISPLAY Grid Reticle to display crosshairs Press DISPLAY gt Grid gt Off to remove both the grid and the crosshairs To display the trigger event or the channel cursors The marker of trigger event and the channel cursors are auxiliary cursors By default both auxiliary cursors are displayed They help to evaluate specific results more easily 1 Press DISPLAY
505. the softkeys you can use the rotary knobs to change the settings graphically see To configure the Y t window graph ically on page 110 1 2 3 Press Y t Setup in the FFT menu Press Y Scale to define the scaling of the signal amplitudes in the Y t window Press Y Position to define the vertical position of the time axis in the Y t window in divisions Press Main Time Base to define the scaling for the time base in the Y t window in seconds per division Note that when you change the scaling for the main time base the width of the FFT time base extract is also changed Press Trigger Offset to define the offset of the trigger point to the reference point for Os Note that when you change the trigger offset the position of the FFT time base extract is also changed The scaling factor for the time base TB and the trigger offset T are indicated in the information bar above the Y t window R CH1 0V f DC umm 7 NEM Span 2 GHz Center 1GH2 Envelope CHt 10d8v Fig 8 2 Time base per division and trigger offset in Y t window To configure the Y t window graphically 1 Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select the Y t window TB T settings are highlighted Turn the vertical SCALE rotary knob to define the scaling of the signal amplitudes in the Y t window Turn the knob counter clockwise to decrease the amplitudes or clockwise to enlarge them AAA User Manual 1305 059
506. the vertical system are used to scale and position the waveform vertically 2 1 1 1 Input coupling The input coupling influences the signal path between input connector and the following internal signal stage The coupling can be set to DC AC or ground e DC coupling shows all of an input signal DC coupling is available with 1 MO input impedance to connect standard passive probes DC coupling is the default for 50 O input impedance e AC coupling is useful if the DC component of a signal is of no interest AC coupling blocks the DC component of the signal so that the waveform is centered around zero volts 2 1 1 2 Vertical scale and position Vertical scale and vertical position directly affect the resolution of the waveform ampli tude The vertical scale corresponds to the ADC input range To get the full resolution of the ADC waveforms should cover most of the height of the diagram EE a SSS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 11 R amp S9RTM 2 1 1 3 2 1 2 Acquisition and Waveform Setup Basics Signal amplitude 0 4 V Scale 50 mV div Scale 100 mV div Best signal resolution Reduced signal resolution 8 bit 2 mV steps 8 bit gt 4 mV steps Fig 2 1 Input range and resolution of the ADC Bandwidth For analog applications the highest signal frequency determines the required oscillo scope bandwidth As a rule of thumb the oscilloscope bandwidth should be 3 times higher than the maximum frequency included in
507. ting is not available for cursor measurments on FFT analysis Remote command CURSor lt m gt SOURce on page 313 Track Scaling If enabled Track Scaling adjusts the cursor lines if the vertical or horizontal scales are changed The cursor lines keep their relative position to the waveform If disabled the cursor lines remain on their position on the display if the scaling is changed Remote command CURSor lt m gt TRACking SCALe STATe on page 317 Coupling If enabled the cursors of a can be coupled and moved together Press the NAVIGATION key to select both corsors or one cursor to be moved If disabled the NAVIGATION key toggles the single cursor lines Remote command CURSor lt m gt XCOupling on page 316 CURSor lt m gt YCOupling on page 316 Set to Wave Autoset for cursor lines sets the cursor lines to typical points of the waveform depending on the selected measurement type For example for voltage measurement the cursor lines are set to the upper and lower peaks of the waveform For time measurement the cursor lines are set to the edges of two consecutive positive or two consecutive negative pulses Remote command CURSor lt m gt SWAVe on page 316 Set To Screen Resets the cursors to their initial positions This is helpful ifthe cursors have disappeared from the display or need to be moved for a larger distance Remote command CURSor lt m gt SSCReen on page 316 Prev peak For FFT analysis only
508. ting parameters lt FileName gt String parameter Path and file name Usage Setting only MASK SAVE lt FileName gt Saves the current mask in the specified file Setting parameters lt FileName gt String parameter Path and file name Usage Setting only MASK SOURce lt Source gt Defines the channel to be compared with the mask Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 CH3 and CH4 are only available on 4 channel R amp S RTM models RST CH1 MASK CHCopy Creates a mask from the envelope waveform of the test source set with MASK SOURce a RRR C Q k L LOo AESILLEe LL LnLL NL User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 340 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm R K n apPmr Command Reference Usage Event MASK YPOSition lt Yposition gt Moves the mask vertically within the display Parameters lt Y position gt Mask offset from the vertical center Range 200 to 200 Increment 0 02 RST 0 Default unit div MASK YSCale lt Yscale gt Changes the vertical scaling to stretch or compress the mask in y direction Parameters lt Yscale gt A value over 100 stretches the amplitudes a value less than 100 compresses the amplitudes Range 10 to 1000 Increment 1 RST 100 Default unit 96 MASK YWIDth lt Yaddition gt Changes the width of the mask in vertical direction Parameters lt Y addition gt The value is added
509. tion via the front panel is always possible Messages and Command Structure Messages Instrument messages are employed in the same way for all interfaces if not indicated otherwise in the description See also e Structure and syntax of the instrument messages chapter 14 1 4 2 SCPI Command Structure on page 241 e Detailed description of all messages chapter 14 2 Command Reference on page 263 There are different types of instrument messages depending on the direction they are sent e Commands e Instrument responses T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 238 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control m wn MM Basics Commands Commands program messages are messages the controller sends to the instrument They operate the instrument functions and request information The commands are sub divided according to two criteria e According to the effect they have on the instrument Setting commands cause instrument settings such as a reset of the instrument or setting the frequency Queries cause data to be provided for remote control e g for identification of the instrument or polling a parameter value Queries are formed by directly appending a question mark to the command header e According to their definition in standards Common commands their function and syntax are precisely def
510. to Center Span 2 The width of the domain is defined using the CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT SPAN command Suffix m 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt CenterFreq gt Range Limited by the first data point minimum and last data point maximum of the FFT curve Increment Depends on the span and the number of data points span RBW ratio Default unit Hz CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT FULLspan Performs FFT calculation for the full frequency span Suffix lt m gt 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Usage Event CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT SPAN lt FreqSpan gt The span is specified in Hertz and defines the width of the displayed frequency range which is Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 The position of the span is defined using the CALCulate MATH m FFT CFRequency command T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 337 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm R a nn n Command Reference Suffix m 1 4 The numeric suffix is irrelevant Parameters lt FregSpan gt Range Depends on various other settings mainly on time base and span RBW ratio Increment Only 1 2 5 in first digit Default unit Hz CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT STARt lt StartFreq gt Defines the start frequency of the displayed frequency domain at the left display edge Center Span 2 You can set start and
511. to set up and start working with the instrument Basic operations and typical measurement examples are described The manual includes also general information e g Safety Instructions User Manual The User Manual is available in PDF format in printable form on the Documentation CD ROM In this manual all instrument functions are described in detail Furthermore it provides an introduction to remote control and a complete description of the remote con trol commands with programming examples Information on maintenance instrument interfaces and error messages is also given Service Manual The Service Manual is available in PDF format in printable form on the Documentation CD ROM It informs on how to check compliance with rated specifications on instrument function repair troubleshooting and fault elimination It contains all information required for repairing the instrument by the replacement of modules Documentation updates You can download the newest version of the Getting Started and User Manual from the Downloads Manuals section on the Rohde amp Schwarz Scope of the Art Web page http www scope of the art com product rtm html RETE RA E SSRIS User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 9 R8S RTM Preface EENEG Conventions Used in the Documentation The online help is included in the firmware update package The help has to be updated separately to get the information suitable for the firmware version The fir
512. tract W P settings are highlighted b Turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to define the width of the time base extract Turn the knob counter clockwise to enlarge the extract or clockwise to decrease it c Turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob to define the position of the time base extract Turn the knob counter clockwise to move the extract to the left or clock wise to move it to the right Define the frequency range to be displayed in the FFT diagram The range is defined as Center Span 2 to Center Span 2 For details see Span on page 115 and Center on page 115 a Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select the FFT frequency range Span Center settings are highlighted b Turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to define the span of the frequency range Turn the knob counter clockwise to enlarge the span or clockwise to decrease it c Turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob to define the center of the frequency range Turn the knob counter clockwise to move the center to the left or clock wise to move it to the right I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 109 R amp S9RTM FFT Configuring and Using FFT Calculations d Turn the vertical SCALE rotary knob to define the scaling of the FFT amplitudes Turn the knob counter clockwise to decrease the amplitudes or clockwise to enlarge them To configure the Y t window numerically Alternatively to configuring the Y t window numerically via
513. trigger event The trigger conditions of this second event are considered when the conditions of the main event A trigger are met For a description of the menu see chapter 3 3 2 7 B Setup on page 48 Trigger Level Assigns the SLOPE key and the LEVEL rotary knob on the front panel to the A or B event The function is only relevant if the B trigger is enabled The SOURCE key sets always the A trigger source Edge The edge trigger is the simpliest and most common trigger type It is well known from analog oscilloscopes and you can use it for analog and digital signals The trigger event EEUU RA E E AA LL 1 L 1 LA gt gt User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 41 R amp S RTM Triggers Reference for Triggers occurs when the signal from the trigger source passes the specified treshold voltage the trigger level in the specified direction slope The edge trigger is also selected with the AUTOSET function A 42 Hac Ee 42 ale 42 Eo usc PEEL 43 FAY SURO SUS vd et m 43 Slope Sets the edge for the trigger Rising Selects the rising edge that is a positive voltage change Falling Selects the falling edge that is a negative voltage change Both Selets the rising as well as the falling edge Remote command TRIGger A EDGE SLOPe on page 294 Coupling Sets the coupling for the trigge
514. trigger source is channel 1 width trigger to find negative pulses shorter than a given pulse width trigger level 1 71 mV TB 100 us T 261us Norm A CH11 71mV 4 DCHFR B CH20V 4 2Ev Fig 3 2 Trigger information Normal trigger mode trigger sequence A event has source channel 1 edge trigger on rising edge with DC coupling and HF reject trigger level 1 71 mV B event has source channel 2 edge trigger on rising edge and trigger level 0 V instrument trig gers on the second B event Setting Up the Trigger This chapter provides step by step procedures for the important stages of trigger setup The settings mentioned here are described in detail in chapter 3 3 Reference for Trig gers on page 37 Configuring the Trigger Event Prerequisites e Horizontal and vertical settings are set appropriately to the signals e The acquisition is running the RUN CONT key lights green 1 Press the SETUP key in the TRIGGER functional block The Trigger menu opens Press the Source softkey and select the trigger source Press Setup to return to the Trigger menu Press the Type softkey repeatedly until the required trigger type is selected Select Setup oa F o bh Configure the settings for the selected trigger type For details see chapter 3 3 2 2 Edge on page 41 chapter 3 3 2 3 Width on page 43 chapter 3 3 2 4 Video on page 45 chapter 3 3 2 5 Pattern on page 47 chapter 3 3 2 6 Protocol
515. trument without having sent a query or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instrument instead The cause is often a query which is faulty and hence cannot be executed 3 Device dependent Error This bit is set if a device dependent error occurs An error message with a number between 300 and 399 or a positive error number which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 4 Execution Error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct but cannot be performed for other reasons An error message with a number between 200 and 300 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue 5 Command Error This bit is set if a command is received which is undefined or syntactically incorrect An error message with a number between 100 and 200 which denotes the error in greater detail is entered into the error queue User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 256 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Basics Bit No Meaning 6 User Request This bit is set when the instrument is switched over to manual control 7 Power On supply voltage on This bit is set on switching on the instrument STATus OPERation Register In the CONDi tion part this register contains information on which actions the instrument is being executing In the EVENt part it contains information on which actions the instru ment has executed since the last
516. ts HORizontal Sets two horizontal cursor lines and measures the vol CURSor lt m gt Y1Position tages at the two cursor positions and the delta of the two uu CURSor m Y2Position values CURSor lt m gt YDELta VALue CURSor lt m gt YDELta SLOPe VERTical Sets two vertical cursor lines and measures the time CURSor lt m gt X1Position from the trigger point to each cursor the time between ee EE the two cursors and the frequency calculated from that EE a time CURSor lt m gt XDELta VALue CURSor lt m gt XDELta INVerse PAIRed V Marker same as CURSor lt m gt TRACking STATe CURSor m YlPosition CURSor m Y2Position CURSor m XDELta VALue ie URSor m YDELta VALue HRATio Sets three horizontal cursor lines Queries return the CURSor m YRATio UNIT ratio ofthe y values e g overshooting between the first e i lt m gt E and second cursors and the first and third cursors SURO Sits CRN Te ESAMI CURSOrT m Y1Position CURSor lt m gt Y2Position CURSor lt m gt Y3Position VRATio Sets three vertical cursor lines Queries return the ratio CURsor lt m gt XRATio UNIT of the x values e g a duty cycle between the first and second cursors and the first and third cursors G ei RSor lt m gt XDELta VALue E ei RSor m XlPosition CURSor m X2Position CURSor m X3Position PPCount Count positive pulses CURSor lt m gt RESult NPCount Count
517. ts not the pro tected identifier SEARch PROTocol LIN DLENgth lt DataLength gt Defines the length of the data pattern the number of bytes in the pattern E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 412 R8S RTM Remote Control m Command Reference The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDitionis set to IDData Parameters lt DataLength gt Range 1 to 8 Increment 1 RST 1 Default unit Byte SEARch PROTocol LIN DCONdition lt DataCondition gt Sets the comparison condition for data If the pattern contains at least one X don t care you can trigger on values equal or not equal to the specified value If the pattern contains only 0 and 1 you can also trigger on a range greater than or lower than the specified value The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition is set to IDData Parameters lt DataCondition gt EQUaI NEQual GTHan LTHan RST EQU SEARch PROTocol LIN DATA lt Data gt Defines the data pattern The pattern length is defined with SEARch PROTocol LIN DLENgth The command is relevant if SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDitionis set to IDData Parameters Data String containing binary pattern with max 64 bit Characters O 1 and X are allowed Make sure to enter complete bytes 14 2 14 Data and File Management This chapter describes commands on how to print and save screenshots and how to m
518. tup 4 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 189 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis CAN Option R amp S RTM K3 Event Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for Depending on the selected event the appropriate settings in the softkey menu are activated Remote command SEARch PROTocol CAN CONDition on page 398 Frame Setup Selects the frame type to be searched for If you search for remote or data frames the search consideres also the ID type the length of the identifier The setting is only available if Event Frame is selected Remote command SEARch PROTocol CAN FRAMe on page 398 Error Setup Selects the error type to be searched for You can select one or more error types as search condition The error types are the same as in the CAN trigger setup see Error lt type gt on page 183 The setting is only available if Event Error or ID amp Error is selected Remote command SEARch PROTocol CAN ACKerror on page 399 SEARch PROTocol CAN BITSterror on page 399 SEARch PROTocol CAN CRCerror on page 399 SEARch PROTocol CAN FORMerror on page 400 Symbolic ID If a label list with node names was loaded and applied in the bus configuration you can select simply the node name from the list instead of entering the numeric identifier The instrument trriggers on the identifier of the selected node Frame type Selects the frame type to be searched for if Event Identifier is
519. ty you can find various events in the decoded data the same events which you also can trigger on Before you can start the search you have to con figure the bus correctly and acquire decoded data To search on decoded data use the search type Protocol The source is automatically set to the configured protocol See also chapter 10 Search on page 128 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 200 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 11 7 6 1 LIN Search Setup Protocol cT Event Error Setup Setup ET ID E 148 Error L jee defined defined Ley b e M Event Sets the event or combination of events to be searched for Depending on the selected event the appropriate settings in the softkey menu are activated Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN CONDition on page 410 Frame Setup Selects the frame type to be searched for Start of frame or wakeup frame The setting is only available if Event Frame is selected Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN FRAMe on page 411 Error Setup Selects the error type to be searched for You can select one or more error types as search condition The error types are the same as in the LIN trigger setup see Error lt type gt on page 195 The setting is only available if Event 7 Error or ID amp Error is selected Remote command SEARch PROTocol LIN CHKSerror on page 412 SEARc
520. uages are listed in the data sheet Add Language Update Adds the language selected with the Language softkey to the instrument To change the displayed language use the Language softkey in the Setup menu Remote command DISPlay LANGuage ADD on page 423 ERA A e LLLLLL L L LIALLULLILILL ud User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 227 R amp S RTM General Instrument Setup AAA a A Hu Reference for Setup Remove Language Update Removes the language selected with the Language softkey from the instrument Remote command DISPlay LANGuage REMove on page 423 Update Language Update Updates the language selected with the Language softkey on the instrument Upgrade Update Provides functions to activate options Read keys from license file Upgrade Update Select the storage and directory where your license file is stored and press Load to activate the options Input key manually Upgrade Update Opens the on screen keyboard to enter the license key of the option Printer Opens a menu to configure the output on the printer paper format orientation color and printer language The printer has to be connected to a Type A USB port For details see chapter 12 1 2 Printer Settings on page 205 Sound Defines the event types for which a sound is to be generated by the instrument Switch the sound for a particular event type on or off by selecting the corresponding s
521. uced by an E or e Entry of the exponent alone is not allowed In the case of physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are G giga MA mega MOHM and MHZ are also allowed K kilo M milli U micro and N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Units For physical quantities the unit can be entered Allowed unit prefixes are e G giga e MA mega MOHM MHZ e K kilo e M milli e U micro e N nano If the unit is missing the basic unit is used Example SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5GHz SENSe FREQ STOP 1 5E9 Some settings allow relative values to be stated in percent According to SCPI this unit is represented by the PCT string Example HCOP PAGE SCAL 90PCT Special numeric values The texts listed below are interpreted as special numeric values In the case of a query the numeric value is provided e MIN MAX MINimum and MAXimum denote the minimum and maximum value Example Setting command SENSe LIST FREQ MAXimum Query SENS LIST FREQ Response 3 5E9 E User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 245 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control Basics Queries for special numeric values The numeric values associated to MAX imum MINimum can be queried by adding the corresponding mnemonics to the command They must be entered following the quota
522. uery only Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch RESult lt n gt Returns the result values of the specified search result See also SEARch RESult ALL Suffix lt n gt E Number of the search result Return values lt Result gt Comma separated value list Meaning of the values Result number time value y position not relevant search type slope or polarity optional value voltage for peak search pulse width for width search Example SEARCh RESult3 Returns the result values of the third search result 3 4 1660e 04 0 PEAK NEGATIVE 1 530e 02 Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 400 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 358 R amp S RTM Remote Control EENEG Command Reference SEARch RCOunt Returns the number of search results Return values lt ResultCount gt RST 0 Example chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 Usage Query only Firmware Software FW 03 400 14 2 13 Protocol Analysis Ber EE 359 A In OP 361 TE RA 361 SA EE 369 SG 371 Sr MAR EE 381 EE e WEE 387 nU AO 401 14 2 13 1 General BUS STATO reaa ad ideada 359 c et eem 359 BUS FORMA esu Metqeoxvhst a cat riva det ausa dadesbadabecaauataaaadabdadaeaaeue decd tena 360 BUS DSZO m OE 360 BUS Ter EE 360 BUS zeli 360 BUS Mic MCCC A dadas 360 BUSLISTESAVE ccce aan pasa coge ca a cu er
523. uery only PROBe lt m gt SETup IMPedance Queries the termination of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt Termination gt 500Hm 1MOHm UNKNown Usage Query only eee User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 288 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm CR X O OR p Command Reference PROBe lt m gt SETup MODE Mode Select the action that is started with the probe button Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters Mode RCONtinuous RSINgle AUToset NOACtion RCONtinuous Run continuous The acquisition is running as long as the probe button is pressed RSINgle Run single starts one acquisition AUTOSET Starts the autoset procedure NOACtion Nothing is started on pressing the micro button RST RCONtinuous PROBe lt m gt SETup NAME Queries the name of the probe Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Return values lt Name gt string Usage Query only PROBe lt m gt SETup OFFSwitch lt DCOffsetOnOff gt Switches the integrated voltmeter of an R amp S active probe on or off The command is only available if an R amp S active probe with R amp S ProbeMeter is used Suffix lt m
524. umn order Identifier Label Labels for standard addresses 0x06 Dashboard 0x13 Gateway 0x1C Temperature 0x21 Mirror 0x37 Indoor lights Labels for reserved addresses 0x3C Master Request Frame 0x3D Slave Response Frame Label list LIN Imported on 2012 04 05 12 36 Dashboard Fig 11 15 Label list for CAN For general information see chapter 11 1 3 Label List on page 146 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 198 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 7 5 TB 1ms T 50 39 ms Protocol LIN Option R amp S RTM K3 LIN Decode Results You can enable the decoding in the Protocol main menu Decode shows the decoded values below the waveforms in the format selected with Display Additionally you can display the binary signal with Bits See also chapter 11 1 2 Reference for Protocol on page 145 Additionally you can display and save a Frame Table containing decoded data frame number start time of the frame identifier data length data checksum and state of the frame See also chapter 11 1 4 Frame Table Decode Results on page 148 Auto CH1 4 44 V DC 1MSais Real Time Complete Bus Frame Table LIN CH1 L 10417 Bit s rt time ID 515 ms 1C 814 ms 21 Mirror 46 701 ms 2E Door contro 57 597 ms 37 Indoor ligh Frames 5 9 15 Label Door controller Display Hexadecimal Fig 11 16 Decoded LIN signal with frame table and applied label list gray
525. unit not on the size of the values For a list of available units see Unit on page 98 Save Edit Constant Edit Equations Saves the defined constant to the equation of the math waveform Equation Label Edit Equations Defines a label for the current equation Eq Set Label Defines a label for the equation set Save Opens the Save menu with basic functions to save the equation set See Save Menu on page 209 Load Displays the Load menu and a file explorer to select an equation set file See Load Menu on page 210 I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 105 R amp S RTM FFT FFT Display 8 FFT In addition to signal vs time and signal vs signal displays the frequencies of a signal as determined by FFT analysis can be displayed FFT analysis is configured and activated using the FFT key Analysis is always performed on the signal channel that was most recently activated however you can change the channel source Various parameters concerning the time base scaling and the waveform arithmetic can be configured for the FFT display You can configure FFT either numerically using the softkeys or graphically using the rotary knobs On the FFT display you can perform frequency and level measurements by means of a cursor measurement Automatic measurements are not available 8 1 FFT Display When you activate FFT display two windows are displayed the signal vs time at the top the result of the FFT a
526. unning in normal mode and no valid trigger occurs forcing the trigger provokes an immediate single acquisition Thus you can confirm that a signal is available and use the waveform display to determine how to trigger on it MODE Toggles the trigger mode between Auto and Normal The trigger mode determines the behaviour of the instrument if no trigger occurs The current setting is shown in the infor mation bar Auto The instrument triggers repeatedly after a time interval if the trigger conditions are not fulfilled If a real trigger occurs it takes precedence This mode helps to see the waveform even before the trigger is set The waveform on the screen is not synchronized and successive wave forms are not triggered at the same point of the waveform User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 38 R amp S RTM Triggers ESS aa Reference for Triggers Normal The instrument acquires a waveform only if a trigger occurs that is if all trigger conditions are fulfilled If no trigger occurs no waveform is acquired and the last acquired waveform is displayed If no waveform was captured before nothing is displayed Remote command TRIGger A MODE on page 292 LEVEL The rotary knob changes the trigger treshold voltage for all trigger types that require a trigger level Turn clockwise to move the trigger level up At zero crossing the knob shortly snaps in and the setting is kept constant to simplify the zero setting Press the knob to set
527. us types PARallel DC SPI SSPI and UART you can set the PROTocol search condition but no search is available RST EDGE chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 Firmware Software FW 03 400 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 345 R8S RTM Remote Control m XOOX X C 5 Command Reference SEARch SOURce lt SearchSource gt Selects the waveform to be analyzed One of the active channel math and reference waveforms can be searched Parameters lt SearchSource gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 RST CH1 Example chapter 14 3 2 1 Searching for a Pulse of Specified Width on page 432 Firmware Software FW 03 400 SEARch GATE MODE Defines the search area If the search is performed on a running acquisition series the instrument analyzes the displayed data The search on a stopped acquisition analyzes the contents of the memory Parameters lt GateMode gt OFF DISPlay ABSolute OFF Running acquisition all waveform samples that are displayed on the screen Stopped acquisition all data samples that are stored in the mem ory DISPlay Search is restricted to the time range of the display ABSolute Search is restricted to the time range defined by SEARch GATE ABSolute START and SEARch GATE ABSolute STOP SEARch GATE ABSolute START
528. ust the offset value for the selected channel Termination and attenuation are read out from the probe and do not need any adjustment Access CH N gt More gt Probe Offset Off User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 32 R amp S RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup REENEN Reference for Waveform Setup Offset See OFFSET on page 28 ProbeMeter Activates the integrated R amp S ProbeMeter of active R amp S probes and selects the probe type This voltmeter measures DC voltages between the probe tip and ground connection with very high precision and enables ground referenced measurements of voltages The DC measurement is performed continuously and in parallel to the measurements of the oscilloscope If activated the DC offset measured on the probe tip is shown in a colored label below the channel label TB 200us T 0s Auto CH3 738 mV 4 DC DEE EEN Inactive ProbeMeter is disabled Single Ended ProbeMeter of a single ended active probe is enabled Remote command PROBe m SETup OFFSwitch on page 289 PROBe m SETup DCOFfset on page 288 Micro Button Active R amp S probes have a configurable Micro Button on the probe head Pressing this button you can perform an action on the instrument directly from the probe During inter nal automatic processes the button is disabled for example during self alignment auto set and find level Select the action that you want to start from the probe Continuous Pres
529. ut channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters Position Position value given in divisions Range 5 to 5 RST 0 Default unit div CHANnel lt m gt OFFSet Offset The offset voltage is subtracted to correct an offset affected signal Suffix m Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument Parameters Offset Offset value Range Values depend on vertical scale and probe attenua tion Increment Value depends on vertical scale and probe attenua tion Default unit V CHANnel lt m gt BANDwidth lt BandwidthLimit gt Selects the bandwidth limit for the indicated channel Suffix lt m gt Selects the input channel The number of channels depends on the instrument User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 280 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control mm e wm Qs Command Reference Parameters lt BandwidthLimit gt FULL B400 B200 B20 FULL Use full bandwidth B400 B200 B20 Limit to 400MHz 200 MHz or 20 MHz respectively RST FULL CHANnel lt m gt POLarity lt Polarity gt Turns the inversion of the signal amplitude on or off To invert means to reflect the voltage values of all signal components against the ground level Inversion affects only the display of the signal but not the
530. uto Measure Menu MEAS kay rediere eee e 91 6 3 1 Measurement Types and Results e Measurement Types iii 84 e Measurement Results cin cad 88 LEE o re 89 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 83 R amp S RTM Measurements 6 3 1 1 Automatic Measurements Measurement Types The R amp S RTM provides a varity of automatic measurements Mean Vale ERE 84 UU RT m 84 Mean Cycle p dte A Hai eee pre dies 84 RMS GYE EE 85 Peak A EO A O 85 acr E E E E E E A T E 85 x pe CC DE ME 85 o A A 85 le TE 85 O RN 85 MO EE 85 Base Level S 85 Pulse Width positive pulse eene oia 85 POS OVOS ROOP MM 86 Neg Dv iii siphons 86 Pulse Width Negative pulse anoo geese eee Lu ades SEES LAR D dide NE Redi 86 nude ec EEUU 86 Duy TEE 86 SII c 86 INI c M 87 g Std Devas WAVE isa one eee ei E ea dere ciate re e EEA 87 asu Dev Cy Cle iia ee erede eta edere edere delta ea at Md totae More ane Dd uua E 87 BI oUO M 87 uL E 87 sU EP oU E 87 Count postive pulSe iia 87 Count MEGANE pulses eto rte Pe edere e area pe eddie us 88 COUMEMSING COTOS ii A ii 88 Count falling e vetere rt Rec aee eg v enne og eek ede due 88 Hiro 88 Hiro EI vena 88 a DEE 88 Tagger e 88 Mean V
531. value is displayed as f TrB in the result table Trigger B Period Measures the length of the B trigger signal periods The measurement value is displayed as T TrB in the result table Measurement Results The results of an automatic measurement are displayed in the result table below the diagram The color of the results in the left part of the result table corresponds with the source waveform color If the result for the selected measurement type cannot be deter mined e g because a complete period of a signal is required but not available a is displayed ERA A A 45 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 88 R amp SS9RTM Measurements Automatic Measurements TB 50ns T 0s Auto CH1 639 16 mY f AC 5 GSais Realtime Complete rl hl ata Wach d HA i H W IK Eege blanca kainin W Ma f ama eine Auto Measure SCPI command on page 324 For each active measurement you can enable a statistic evaluation of the measurement results It returns the current minimum and maximum measurement values the average and standard deviation and the number of measured waveforms For configuration settings see Statistic on page 92 Minimum num g ve count f 1 00 kHz Statistic T 996 30 ps Meas Place Statistic Average No pa SCPI command l r L ACTual on page 324 l r l G on page 328 L r U on page 328 l r U on page 328 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 89
532. ve high impe 10 1 500 MHz 1MO General purpose dance Passive low impe 10 1 up to 10 GHz 500 High frequency dance Active single ended 10 1 up to 10 GHz 500 High speed Active differential 10 1 500 Floating For a list of recommended probes refer to the R amp S RTM product brochure Besides the possible input voltage range two factors are very important when selecting a voltage probe Bandwidth and impedance over frequency e Bandwidth The combination of probe and oscilloscope builds up a system The resulting system bandwidth is approximately determined with 2 2 3 1 NE B W system B W probe B MW soos To measure the signal with low measurement error the system bandwidth should be higher than the highest frequency component of the signal The probe bandwidth must be even higher than the system bandwidth e Impedance A minimum impedance is required to keep the circuit loading low Over frequency the impedance decreases in particular with passive probes The probe impedance should be approximately 10 times the impedance ofthe circuit test point at the highest signal frequency Passive voltage probes Passive probes have the following qualities e No active components inside e BNC connector for universal use e Compensation needs to be executed when the probe is connected to a scope input LF compensation matches the probe mainly cable capacitance to the oscilloscope input capacitance High frequency adju
533. veform the internal reference storage Parameters lt Source gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 Any active channel math or reference waveform Available chan nels depend on the instrument type RST CH1 REFCurve lt m gt SOURce CATalog Returns the source waveform channel math or reference waveform Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Return values lt Catalog gt CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 MA1 MA2 MA3 MA4 RE1 RE2 RE3 RE4 Usage Query only REFCurve lt m gt UPDate Updates the selected reference by the waveform defined with REFCurve lt m gt SOURce Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Usage Event REFCurve lt m gt SAVE lt FileName gt Stores the reference waveform the specified file Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the reference waveform the internal reference storage Setting parameters lt FileName gt String with path and file name Usage Setting only I User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 309 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control EEG GM S n Command Reference REFCurve lt m gt LOAD lt FileName gt Loads the waveform data from the ind
534. which the converter is working is the ADC sample rate a constant value usually specified in GHz fapc 1 T Waveform A y y L 1 1 1 1 ee jJ a Sample Interval T The digital ADC samples are processed according to the acquisition settings The result is a waveform record that contains waveform samples and is stored in the waveform memory The waveform samples are displayed on the screen and build up the waveform The number of waveform samples in one waveform record is called record length and the rate of recording waveform samples the number of waveform samples per second is the sample rate The higher the sample rate the better is the resolution and the more details of the waveform are visible A sufficient resolution is essential for correct reconstruction of the waveform If the signal is undersampled aliasing occurs a false waveform is displayed To avoid aliasing and accurately reconstruct a signal Nyquist theorem postulates that the sample rate must be at least twice as fast as the highest frequency component of the signal However the theorem assumes ideal conditions so the Nyquist sample rate is usually not sufficient User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 13 R amp S9RTM Acquisition and Waveform Setup 2 1 2 2 Basics Input signal sine wave 10 kHz Sample rate 200 kHz 50 kHz 25 kHz 12 5 kHz Fig 2 2 Waveforms acquired with different sample rates This means that the sample rate must
535. will be deleted You cannot delete the current directory or a superior directory In this case the instrument returns an execution error Setting parameters lt DirectoryName gt Example Usage String parameter absolute path or relative to the current directory MMEM RDIR INT TEST Deletes the directory TEST in the internal storage device and all files and subdirectories in the directory Setting only MMEMory DCATalog lt PathName gt Returns the subdirectories of the specified directory The result corresponds to the num ber of strings returned by the MMEMory DCATalog LENgth command Query parameters lt PathName gt Return values lt FileEntry gt String parameter Specifies the directory String parameter List of subdirectory strings separated by commas If the specified directory does not have any subdirectory the current and the parent directories are returned 0 0 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 418 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Example Example Example Usage Command Reference Query for directories with absolute path MMEM DCAT USB FRONT received 0 0 DATA 0 DATA NEW 0 SCREENSHOTS 0 MMEM DCAT LENG USB FRONT received 5 Query for directories in the current directory MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA MMEM DCAT received 0 0 JANUARY 0 FEBRUARY 0 MMEM DCAT LENG
536. with AC and DC coupling Parameters State ON OFF RST OFF 14 2 5 3 Width Trigger TRIGA WIDThPOLariby EE 295 TRIGGerAWVID TRAN c 295 TRIGGSRAWIDTRDEL KEE 296 TRIGGER ID TNT E 296 TRIGger A WIDTh POLarity lt Polarity gt Sets the polarity of the pulse Parameters lt Polarity gt POSitive NEGative POSitive Positive going pulse the width is defined from the rising to the falling slopes NEGative Negative going pulse the width is defined from the falling to the rising slopes RST POSitive TRIGger A WIDTh RANGe lt RangeMode gt Defines how the measured pulse width is compared with the given limit s User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 295 R amp S9RTM Remote Control 14 2 5 4 Command Reference Parameters lt RangeMode gt WITHin OUTSide SHORter LONGer WITHin OUTSide Triggers on pulses inside or outside a range defined by time delta The time is specified with TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh the range around is defined with TRIGger A WIDTh DELTa SHORter LONGer Triggers on pulses shorter or longer than a time set with TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh RST LONGer TRIGger A WIDTh DELTa Delta Defines a range around the width value specified using TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh Parameters Delta Range At Variation softkey Range Depends on the defined pulse width TRIG A WIDTH WITDH TRIGger A WIDTh WIDTh lt Time1 gt For the ranges WITHin and OUTSide defined using TRIGger A WIDTh
537. words State Overall state of the frame Example In the figure above the first two frames have four words each the following two frames contain 6 words each The fifth frame is incomplete SCPI commands e JS S C on page 366 e JS S on page 366 e JS S t on page 366 e JS S on page 366 18 8 50 on page 367 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 159 R amp S9RTM Protocol Analysis 11 4 11 4 1 PC Option R amp S RTM K1 PI FRAME n DATA MOSI on page 367 PI FRAME lt n gt WCOunt on page 367 PT FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt STARt on page 368 PT FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt STOP on page 368 PT FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt MOSI on page 368 wW Y PB 6 uU t O 0 G 6 GW GO UE Ur O G O PI FRAME lt n gt WORD lt o gt MISO on page 369 FC Option R amp S RTM K1 The Inter Integrated Circuit is a simple lowbandwidth low speed protocol used for com munication between on board devices for example in LCD and LED drivers RAM EEPROM and others The PC Protocol This chapter provides an overview of protocol characteristics data format address types and trigger possibilities For detailed information read the I2C bus specification and user manual available on the NXP manuals web page at http www nxp com PC characteristics Main characteristics of PC are e Two wire design serial clock SCL and serial data SDA lines e Master slave communicat
538. xample Usage Command Reference MMEM COPY INT SETTINGS SETOO1 SET USB_FRONT SETTINGS TESTSET1 SET chapter 14 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 433 Setting only MMEMory MOVE lt FileSource gt lt FileDestination gt Moves an existing file to a new location Setting parameters lt FileSource gt lt FileDestination gt Example Usage String parameter Path and name of the file to be moved String parameter Path and name of the new file MMEM MOVE INT SETTINGS SETOO1L SET USB FRONT SETTINGS SETOO1 SET Setting only MMEMory DELete lt FileSource gt Removes a file from the specified directory Setting parameters lt FileSource gt Example Usage String parameter File name and path of the file to be removed Ifthe path is omitted the specified file will be deleted in the current directory Filters are not allowed chapter 14 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 433 Setting only MMEMory DATA lt FileName gt lt Data gt Writes data to the specified file in the current directory MMEMo r y CDTRector y or reads the data Parameters lt Data gt 488 2 block data The block begins with character The next digit is the length of the length information followed by this given number of digits pro viding the number of bytes in the binary data attached
539. xchanged messages is adhered to and interrupted links are identified With this protocol messages cannot be lost USB Interface For remote control via the USB connection the PC and the instrument must be connected via the USB type B interface The USB connection requires the VISA library and the USB driver to be installed VISA detects the R amp S instrument at the assigned serial port when the USB connection is established You do not have to enter an address string Contact your Rohde amp Schwarz service center to get the USB driver GPIB Interface IEC IEEE Bus Interface The GBIP interface is optional option RTM B 10 It replaces the LAN USB type B inter face module on the rear panel Thus remote control is possible either with LAN or USB connection or with GBIP To be able to control the instrument via the GPIB bus the instrument and the controller must be linked by a GPIB bus cable A GPIB bus card the card drivers and the program libraries for the programming language must be provided in the controller The controller must address the instrument with the GPIB instrument address User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 232 R amp SS9RTM Remote Control Basics Characteristics The GPIB interface is described by the following characteristics e Upto 15 instruments can be connected e The total cable length is restricted to a maximum of 15 m the cable lenth between two instruments should not exceed 2m e Awired OR conn
540. y address with OxXX 7Bit address or OxXXX 10Bit address X cannot be assigned to a specified bit Remote command TRIGger A I2C ADDRess on page 373 Data Setup Read Write Opens a submenu to set the trigger on specified data bytes of the message and or to a serial pattern Remote command TRIGger A I2C PATTern on page 374 Byte Offset Data Setup Read Write Sets the number of bytes before the first byte of interest relating to the end of the address bytes These offset bytes are ignored Remote command TRIGger A I2C POFFset on page 375 Number of Bytes Data Setup Read Write Sets the number of bytes you want to trigger on Maximum 3 bytes are possible Remote command TRIGger A I2C PLENgth on page 374 T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 166 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis PC Option R amp S RTM K1 Bit Data Setup Read Write Selects the bit number inside the selected bytes for binary pattern input For the selected bit State is to be set the selected bit is highlighted in the Data bit line State Data Setup Read Write Toggles the logic state of the selected bit 0 low 1 high or X don t care Byte Data Setup Read Write Selects a byte for hex input with Value The selected byte is highlighted in the Data hex line Value Data Setup Read Write Sets the hexadecimal value for the selected byte If the data is not relevant for your trigger con
541. y only CALCulate MATH lt m gt DATA HEADer Returns information on the math waveform Table 14 15 Header data Position Meaning Example 1 XStart in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 2 XStop in s 9 477E 008 94 77 ns 3 Record length of the waveform in Samples 200000 4 Number of values per sample interval usually 1 1 User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 332 14 2 10 Command Reference Suffix lt m gt 1 4 Selects the math waveform Return values lt Header gt Comma separated value list Example 9 477E 008 9 477E 008 200000 1 Usage Query only FFT To define an FFT for a channel waveform use CALC MATH EXPR FFTMAG CHx e EN E KE GR ene TEE 333 Ee TE ER e Ee 334 CALCulate MATH lt m gt FFT AVERage COUN tb iocccccccccccccccconcnnnnonannnncanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nn 335 CALCulate MATH m FFT MAGNitude SCALe eese eene nennen nnn nnns 335 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution ADJusted sees 336 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution AUTO sees 336 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution RATioO sese 336 CALCulate MATH m FFT BANDwidth RESolution VALue eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 337 CALCulate MATH m FFT CFRequengy ecciesia eorr enean n a e n Eta NONE Enc ad 337 CAL CulateMATHcms PET EU Lepan cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaaaaaaeeeeeseesaeaaaeeneees 337 CALCU
542. y only MMEMory MSIS lt MassStoragelS gt Changes the storage device drive Parameters lt MassStoragelS gt One of the available drives INT USB FRONT or USB REAR Example MMEM MSIS USB FRONT Sets the USB flash drive connected to the front panel as storage device to be used MMEMory CDIRectory lt DirectoryName gt Specifies the current directory for file access Setting parameters lt DirectoryName gt String parameter to specify the directory including the storage device Example MMEM CDIR USB_FRONT DATA Example chapter 14 3 3 2 Saving Copying and Loading Setup Data on page 433 MMEMory MDIRectory lt DirectoryName gt Creates a new directory with the specified name EA AA lt lt lt 2 4 Kq2 222 AAA User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 417 R amp S9RTM Remote Control Setting parameters lt DirectoryName gt Example Example Usage Command Reference String parameter Absolute path including the storage device or relative to the cur rent directory Create directory DATA on the front USB flash device with abso lute path MMEM MDIR USB FRONT DATA Create directory JANUARY in the DATA directory with relative path MMEM CDIR USB FRONT DATA MMEM MDIR JANUARY Setting only MMEMory RDIRectory lt DirectoryName gt Deletes the specified directory Note All subdirectories and all files in the specified directory and in the subdirectories
543. ype Protocol SPI or SSPI gt Setup teuer e era A vx a e eege 156 IG CAVIS dL E 157 Bil II A 157 Ser Patle cede De esu decd Ve sat auet o uw eta do deve e aude de vega rape a e De vga S 157 ca 157 L Number dd ts 157 EE ETE E MENU Nm 157 LM comica edu xta ELE LL MEI 157 e TT EE 157 A 158 Frame Start Sets the trigger to the start of the message For SPI the frame starts when the chip select signal CS changes to the active state For SSPI the frame starts when the idle time has expired Remote command TRIGger A SPI MODE on page 364 BSTart T User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 156 R amp S RTM Protocol Analysis El SPI SSPI Bus Option R amp S RTM K1 Frame End Sets the trigger to the end of the message For SPI the frame ends when the chip select signal CS changes to the inactive state For SSPI the frame ends when the idle time has expired after the last clock and no new clock appeared during that time Remote command TRIGger A SPI MODE on page 364 BEND Bit lt x gt Sets the trigger to the specified bit number Remote command TRIGger A SPI MODE on page 364 NTHBit Ser Pattern Sets the trigger to a specified bit pattern that is configured in the submenu Ser Pattern Bit Offset Remote command TRIGger A SPI MODE on page 364 PATTern TRIGger A SPI PATTern on page 365 Bit Offset Ser Pattern Sets the number of bits before the first bit of the pattern These bit
544. ype identifier data and errors The protocol search requires option R amp S RTM K3 For information on protocol search see e chapter 11 6 5 Search on Decoded CAN Data on page 189 chapter 11 7 6 Search on Decoded LIN Data on page 200 Remote command SEARch CONDition on page 344 Setup Opens a menu to define the specific search parameters Source Selects the waveform to be analyzed with edge width peak rise fall time or runt search All active channel math and reference waveforms are available for selection Remote command SEARch SOURce on page 346 Source Setup Opens a menu to define the source parameters for Data2Clock and Pattern search waveform level and hysteresis Gate Opens a menu to restrict the time base range of the source waveform for search See chapter 10 3 9 Gate Menu on page 142 Events Opens a menu with functions for result display and marker usage See chapter 10 3 10 Events Menu on page 143 Remote command SEARch RESDiagram SHOW on page 357 10 3 2 Edge Setup Access SEARCH MENU gt Search type Edge gt Setup Edge Level Hysteresis Ce Kc Edge Sets the slope to be found Rising Rising edge a positive voltage change Falling Falling edge a negative voltage change User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 133 R8S RTM Search Reference for Search Menu Both Rising edge and falling edge Remote command SEARch TRIGger EDGE SLOPe on p
545. zoom area from the main time base in greater detail To configure the original Y t diagram 1 Press the horizontal SCALE rotary knob to select Time Control the original Y t window 2 Press Main Time Base to define the scaling for the time base in the original Y t window in seconds per division Alternatively turn the horizontal SCALE rotary knob 3 Press Trigger Offset to define the offset of the trigger point to the reference point for Os in the original Y t window Alternatively turn the horizontal POSITION rotary knob Note that changing the offset in the original window also changes the offset for the zoom window Zoom Time 4 3 3 Zoom Menu The ZOOM key provides functions for configuring the zoom display Main Time Base Zoom Time Base Trigger Offset Zoom Time Zoom Off User Manual 1305 0595 02 08 65 R amp S RTM Display Zoom Main Time EE 66 Zoom NME Base oes i eo teer Me qe Devan iiem 66 TAJGA ONIO T n 66 ZOOM TIME e andan ANE a cdd a 66 Zoon id ELEM 67 Main Time Base Defines the scaling for the time base in the original Y t window in seconds per division The scaling is indicated by TB in the information bar above the window Note If Time Control is selected the main time base can be adjusted using the hori zontal SCALE rotary knob See also SCALE on page 23 To configure the original Y t diagram on page 65 and figure 8 2 Remote command TI

R&S RTM User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz Thailand

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&amp;S RTM User Manual - Rohde &amp; Schwarz Thailand

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

R&S RTM User Manual - Rohde & Schwarz Thailand